JP2019217318A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest of a player in a game.SOLUTION: One game state is set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to a player than the first game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. Variable means is configured so as to be variable to a first position in which a ball can enter ball entry means and to a second position in which entry of a game ball is more difficult than in the first position. A variable operation of the variable means is controlled by first control by which entry of a game ball to the ball entry means becomes difficult in the first game state, is controlled by second control by which entry of a game ball to the ball entry means becomes difficult in the second game state, and is controlled by third control by which entry of a game ball to the ball entry means becomes easy in the third game state. This produces an effect that a player's interest in the game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 130

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered.

JP 2006-000392 A

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the moment of the end of the winning state, the motivation of the player for the game is reduced, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. There was a problem that it was difficult to let them.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state; A variable means that can be changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which a game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position; In the first game state, the operation is controlled by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and in the second game state, the game ball enters the ball entry means. In the third game state, the first control and the second control Comprising a variable control means for the game balls to prior Fill sphere means controls the third control easily ball entrance, a.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, in the second control, the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the second aspect, further comprising: passing means through which the game ball can pass; Wherein the variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, The first game state is a result of the specific determination at a first probability in the determination by the determination means, and the second game state and the third game state are determined by the determination means. The specific determination result is obtained at a second probability higher than the first probability.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, further comprising launching means capable of launching a game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and wherein the second gaming state is determined by the determining means. A period from when a specific determination result is obtained to when the variable means is changed to the first position is set as a first period, and after the variable means is changed to the first position, the second position is set. The period from the time when the game ball passes through the passing means to the time when the passed game ball reaches the entering ball means is set as the second period. It is easier to be shorter than the first period, and after one game ball has passed through the passing means, the game ball fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval next to the passed game ball is the variable The period before reaching the means is the first Those prone longer than the sum of the said second time period between.

  A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, wherein the third gaming state is determined by the determination unit to be the specific determination result, and then the variable unit is moved to the first position. A period until the change is set to a third period longer than the first period, and a period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set as a third period. The second period is set, and the period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period. It is longer than the sum of the third period and the second period.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first gaming state, the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a third game state which is more advantageous to the player, ball-in means capable of entering game balls, and ball-in means. A variable position that can be changed to a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball, and a second position at which the game ball becomes difficult to enter the ball than the first position, and the variable operation of the variable device, In the first game state, control is performed by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and in the second game state, the second control is for that the game ball becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. And in the third game state, the entering ball is more than the first control and the second control. Comprising a variable control means for game balls to stage is controlled by a third control easily ball entrance, a.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, in the second control, the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control. In the second control, a novel operation can be realized in which the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control, but it is difficult to enter the ball-entering means as in the first control. This has the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the discrimination is executed based on the passing means through which the game ball can pass and the passing of the game ball by the passing means. Determining means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. The first game state is a result of the specific determination at a first probability in the determination by the determination means, and the second game state and the third game state are The specific determination result is obtained at a second probability higher than the first probability as determined by the determination means.

  Thus, a novel operation can be realized in which the second game state and the third game state have different probabilities of entering the ball entry means even though the probability of a specific determination result is common. This has the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the third aspect, the game machine further comprises a launching means capable of launching a game ball at a launch interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. A period from when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means to when the variable means is changed to the first position is set as a first period, and the variable means is changed to the first position. The period from when the game ball is changed to the second position is set as a second period, and after the game ball passes through the passing means, the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means. The period until is likely to be shorter than the first period, and after one game ball has passed through the passing means, it is fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval next to the passed game ball. Until the game ball reaches the variable means During are those likely be longer than the sum of said first period and the second period.

  Thereby, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the passage means in the second game state, the game ball reaches the ball entry means while the variable means is changed to the first position. Can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a special state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the third game state is determined by the determination means to be the specific determination result, and then the variable means is changed. A period until the position is changed to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position. Is set in the second period, and a period from when a game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the entering ball means, It is longer than the third period and shorter than the sum of the third period and the second period.

  With this, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination performed based on the passage through the passage unit, the game ball that has passed through the passage unit is directly entered into the ball entry unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be efficiently advanced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line La-La in FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line Lb-Lb in FIG. (C) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. (A) is a rear view of a back cover body showing a state in which a switching member is operated so that a game ball is distributed to a special discharge channel, and (b) is a non-operating channel solenoid, and It is a rear view of the back cover body showing the state where the guidance piece of the switching member closed the opening face of the entrance of the discharge channel. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a display mode of a 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment which is displayed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a big hit displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a ball entering a second ball entrance during the big hit. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when a is detected. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a door-break mode effect performed at the start of the ending period after all rounds of jackpots are completed in the first embodiment, and (b). FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when a first door is broken through in a door-break mode effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of failing to break through the fourth door in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when all doors are successfully broken through in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening when shifting to the probability change mode, and (b) is the second holding ball of the second special symbol. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a display mode and a state of a specific winning opening when a normal winning mode is set and the normal mode is entered. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically. FIG. 3A is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a first hit type selection table set in a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating the main control according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the 2nd random number table set in ROM of the apparatus. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 1 departure (normal), and (d) is a figure showing a specification of a table for a special figure 1 departure (probable change). It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 2 big hit (4 fluctuations or less), and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 2 big hit (5 fluctuations or more). (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 2 departure (four or less change), and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 departure (five or more change). FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a table. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating a state transition method according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. is there. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process performed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormal process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the small hit end performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed several command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an error command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a main control device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table set in a ROM of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the specified content of the 2nd random number table set in ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start-up processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows start-up process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process at the time of insertion performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a modification of the second embodiment in which the storage valve is in a protruding state (a state in which three balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve). FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a buried state in a modification of the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot opening displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in one round of the jackpot displayed by. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of one big hit round displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the interval after one round of big hits displayed on a display device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the third embodiment. (B) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regulation. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a release scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the main controller in the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a promotion effect lottery table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 7C is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows opening scenario selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 3 performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting processing 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows opening command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning command processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows closure command processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion effect lottery process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot opening and a leaching out of reach displayed on the third symbol display device in a modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st round of a big hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of form. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a change with time of the presentation mode in the case of a big hit in a modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a superimposition in a modification of the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation mode at the time of li-zhi. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a table of a special hit / after hit table in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the special hit-and-miss table | surface in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(d) is a figure which showed the operation | movement content of the distribution member in 5th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the correspondence between the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door of the V winning device and the switching of the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the V winning device is guided is schematically shown. FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode with the highest expectation of the pull-back mode, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the expectation degree of the pull-back mode is medium, which is displayed on the three-symbol display device. It is a figure showing the example of the display mode with the lowest expectation of the pullback mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the fifth embodiment. (B) is a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the main control according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hitting type selection table set to ROM of the apparatus, (c) shows the specification of the time reduction number selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to a fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the specified content of the table for special figure 2 per drawing, and (c) is for special figure 2 departure (normal and pullback) set in ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content of the table typically, (d) has shown typically the regulation content of the special figure 2 departure (rensou) table set in ROM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the main control according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the device. It is the figure which showed typically the mode transition method in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is an expectation degree selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regulation. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage detection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of winning a small hit in the normal mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the sixth embodiment. (B) is a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content, and (c) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hit type selection table set in ROM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the main control device in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving number selection table set in a ROM of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the specified content of the small hit specified frequency selection table set in ROM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the mode transition method in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a rank-up lottery table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regulation. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time savings number update process 6 performed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the back surface setting process after completion | finish performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree update process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to incline downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in response to the change, so that the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is described above. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 or another control device may detect a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a. May be configured to detect that the player has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the sorting member 660, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (starting port or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70, and a shot ball is formed. Area that flows down). The game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball is normally inserted. When passing through 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until seven balls are won). ) It is released and the release is repeated the number of times (round number) according to the type of jackpot. As a result, a large number of balls win in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are six types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" to "Big Jackpot F". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to the result of the jackpot game (Game value) is given to the player. Note that the three types of “big hits A to C” are big hit types that can be determined when a lottery executed in response to the ball entering the first entrance 64 becomes a big hit. The three types of "big hits D to F" are big hit types that can be determined in the event of a big hit in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball will be referred to as the second symbol lottery. A special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the ball opening 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result is obtained. Is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed. Then, the variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball in the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit. Normally, when the symbol hits, the first ball entry port 64 is changed to the open position by the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 being changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). Be released. In addition, since the electric accessory 64a is normally disposed at the closed position, the right side and the left side of the first entrance 64 in a front view are closed. Therefore, the ball that has rolled from the right and left sides of the front view toward the first entrance 64 cannot enter the first entrance 64 by being blocked by the electric accessory 64 a (difficult). ). Therefore, in normal times, basically only the ball that has flowed downward from above vertically in the first ball entry port 64 into the first ball entry port 64 can enter the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, in the case of a normal symbol hit, the ball rolled from the right and left sides in front view toward the first entrance 64 is opened by opening the electric accessory 64a. It is easy to enter the ball, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is performed. Be started.

  As described above, six types of special symbols such as "big hit A" to "big hit F" are provided.

When the "big hit A" and the "big hit D" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 round big hits), and when it becomes "big hit C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 2 rounds, and when it becomes "big hit E", When the number of rounds reaches the special gaming state of seven rounds (seven rounds big hit), and when it becomes "big hit F", the number of rounds becomes the special gaming state of six rounds (six rounds big hit). Furthermore, when the specific condition is satisfied during each of the above jackpot games (when the ball that has entered the variable prize device 65 passes through the later-described variable switch 65e3), the special symbol high probability state (special The pattern is changing). Also, if the special symbol high probability state is given,
The winning probability of the normal symbol is also increased (the normal symbol time saving state is given). The high probability state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continue from the end of the big hit until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the big hit game), the special symbol becomes the low probability state until the next big hit, and the normal symbol hits The probability also becomes the normal probability (it becomes the normal state of the ordinary symbol).

  Here, the “special symbol high probability state” refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, a so-called “special symbol high probability state” (special symbol change state), in other words, the special game state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-saving state” (normal symbol high-probability state) refers to a gaming state in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not the “normal pattern time reduction state”, it is called “normal pattern normal state” (normal pattern low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is in the normal state, that is, during normal time reduction. Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probable change period. In addition, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol time reduction period.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot differs according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the “special change state of the special symbol” and the “time reduction state of the ordinary symbol” given after the big hit are configured to continue until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the “special change state of the special symbol” and the “time saving state of the ordinary symbol” are limited until the number of special symbol lotteries is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lotteries to be in the “special symbol change state” and the number of lotteries to be in the “normal symbol time reduction state” may be different. Further, the number of lotteries may be varied according to the type of the jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “normal state of the ordinary symbol”. Then, when the ball becomes a jackpot and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it shifts from the “low probability state of the special symbol” to the “special variation state of the special symbol” and from the “normal state of the ordinary symbol” It shifts to "normal symbol time saving state". In this case, the set “special change state of the special symbol” and the “time saving state of the ordinary symbol” continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the ball has never passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at one jackpot, the state shifts to the "low probability state of special symbol" and the "normal state of normal symbol". Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when "big hits A to D" are reached, the ball easily passes through the positive change switch 65e3 during the big hit, and when "big hits E and F" are reached, the ball becomes the big hit. It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes one of "big hits A to C". Therefore, there is a high possibility that after the end of the jackpot, the "special symbol change state" and the "normal symbol time reduction state" will occur. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it becomes one of "big hit D to F". Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the rate of "big hit D" in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 5%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot becomes “big jackpot E, F” with a high probability (95% ratio), and the “low probability state of the special symbol” which is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot is finished. And "normal state of the ordinary pattern". Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), is being executed, by changing a lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. The number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) is the number of retained balls, which is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is entered. The number of times is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) can be realized with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (a special symbol corresponding to the jackpot A to F) when the jackpot is a jackpot. (1st symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change the display of the special symbol (first symbol). Be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. In addition, you may make it comprise the 3rd symbol display device 81 using a reel etc. instead of a display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 7B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured to imitate a number from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and about 4/5 of the upper portion is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower one-fifth is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls, a notice character, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol stops on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (0.5 seconds or more), it is determined whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is Oversight of whether or not it is a jackpot) can be suppressed. In addition, if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  Further, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered. Furthermore, when both a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol exist, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially performed. Be executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed is continued thereafter. This state is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), there is rarely a situation where there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all because the player quit the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is a ball whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of (reserved balls), is displayed by the number of reserved symbols indicating each reserved ball.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right and left sides of the front view, respectively. The reserved symbol displayed on the right side in front view is a reserved symbol (first reserved symbol) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol, and the reserved symbol displayed on the right side in front view corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a holding symbol (second holding symbol). FIG. 7B exemplifies a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank). I have.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball which enters into the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640 each may be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is four. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 displays a variation by displaying whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed as a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, by a lighting state, or performs a variation display. As a stopped symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through one of the left and right normal entrances 67, a symbol "O" as a symbol (second symbol) and a symbol "X" A fluctuating display in which symbols and symbols are turned on alternately is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 turns on the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened), and as a result, a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and also the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of balls passing through the normal entrance 67 is not more than three, or The number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters. The first entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electrically-powered objects 64a that can be opened and closed on each of the left and right sides, and when the electrically-operated accessory 64a is in an open state, vertically above the first entrance 64. In addition to the ball that has flowed down from the ball, a ball that has flowed down from the left and right directions can enter. It should be noted that the first ball entry port 64 is a ball (ball hit left) flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is in the open state. The nails and the like are arranged such that the ball is easier to enter than the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (ball hit right).

  A second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed on the upper right side of the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically, the ball that flows down the flow path provided to the right of the variable display unit 80. However, it becomes easier to enter a ball than a ball flowing down a flow path provided to the left of the variable display device unit 80.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the second entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until seven balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1, which normally closes the specific winning opening 65a, is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The specific winning opening 65a and the second entrance 640 are at positions where a ball (a right-hit ball) flowing down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 can enter (easily enter the ball). Are located in In other words, the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is located at a position where the ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of the prize ball during the jackpot (obtain a profit), the player only has to hit the ball right.

  Inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which the ball can pass are provided (see FIGS. 6A and 6B). The ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a positive change switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (a positive change state) of a special symbol after a big hit by passing a ball. This special discharge channel 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the jackpot. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds). (Big hits A to D) and a big hit (big hits E and F) where it is difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds at the maximum) are provided. .

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65 b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and on the back side of the opening forming member 65 b to form the variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has an LED board 65d disposed, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. Opening / closing unit 65f, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, a back cover body 65e and a flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, and a rear surface disposed on the rear side of the flow channel cover body 65g. A cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the rear side of the rear cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the rear side with a screw to the rear cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the variable winning device 65 has a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward and leftward so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side, and a non-entry state. The state is changed to a possible (closed to ball) closed state. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With such a configuration, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in an open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the specific winning ports. 65a can be awarded. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted, and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the passage cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the flow path cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. You. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by the positive change switch 65e3, which is configured by a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 and that can detect the passage of the game ball, to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is discharged.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit game is changed to the special symbol stable state ( Game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state or a probable-variable gaming state.

  As described above, since the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the jackpot, and the switching member 65h operates at a position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is opened at the same time as the start of the first round of the jackpot. At the same time as the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates to the position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 0.2 seconds. I have. As described above, in the jackpots E and F, since the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds at the maximum, unless the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened. Before the ball flows into the special discharge channel 65e2, the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2. For this reason, when the big hits E and F occur, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 during one big hit.

  Next, a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h, and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1, there is provided a ball discharge port switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the positive change switch 65e3. Therefore, when a problem such as clogging of the ball occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be found early.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (in this embodiment, 11 balls per one ball winning). Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the probability change switch 65e3, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a special winning port for giving a certain-variable gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A substantially semicircular distribution member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65 in a front view. The distributing member 660 has receiving portions on its left and right sides that can receive a ball flowing down from above. The distributing member 660 has two arrangements: the arrangement in which the right receiving part is located immediately below the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 and the arrangement in which the left receiving part is located immediately below the flow path. There can be a street arrangement. FIG. 2 exemplifies an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is located immediately below the flow path.

  In a state where the right receiving portion is disposed immediately below the flow path and the ball flowing down the flow channel is received by the right receiving portion, the distribution member 660 is moved by the weight of the ball. As a result of the clockwise rotation, the left receiving portion is disposed immediately below the flow path. In addition, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down to the lower right direction of the distribution member 660. The ball that has flowed downward and to the right of the distribution member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the ball that has flowed down the flow channel is received by the left receiving portion in a state where the left receiving portion is disposed immediately below the flow channel, the distribution member 660 is moved by the weight of the ball. As a result of the rotation in the counterclockwise direction, the receiving portion on the right side is arranged immediately below the flow path. In addition, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows downward in the lower left direction of the distribution member 660. The ball that has flowed down and to the lower left of the distribution member 660 flows down the second ball entrance 640 along the flow path, and about 80% of the ball flows into the second ball entrance 640.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the sphere (the right-hit sphere) launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is directed to the variable prize device 65 by the distribution member 660. And the direction of the second entrance 640. For this reason, in the special game state (big hit), when the ball is hit right in order to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a and obtain a prize ball, the ball is moved to the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Enter a lot of balls. As a result, in most cases, at the end of the big hit, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated to a value (four).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) in which the ball hardly passes through the probability change switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. Each of the jackpots E and F has an extremely short opening time (0.2 seconds) of the specific winning opening 65a in each round, and it is difficult to make a ball enter the jackpot. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, with a high probability (95%), almost no prize balls can be acquired, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol as much as possible because the lottery of the second special symbol is an undesirable lottery.

  However, as described above, if the player hits the ball to the specific winning opening 65a at the jackpot and makes a right hit to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second entrance 640, so that at least the jackpot After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol held during the jackpot is executed. Therefore, after the jackpot, a novel game can be realized in which a game is performed in the hope that the lottery of the special symbol will not become a jackpot until the reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol disappears. If all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are out of order as expected by the player, the player can perform only the lottery of the first special symbol by performing left-handing. The game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held until a type of jackpot (jackpots A to C) which is relatively advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, one prize ball is awarded when one ball enters the second entrance 640. When right-handed, one ball is distributed to two balls by the distribution member 660 in the direction of the second entrance 640, so that all the balls distributed in the direction of the second entrance 640 are the second balls. Even if the ball enters the entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by right-handed is paid out by the prize ball. Therefore, when the player makes a right-handed hit, the number of balls held tends to decrease, and the merit of making a right-handed shot can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in a normal state (a state other than during a big hit).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed after the big hit is completed, it becomes disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are removed. Is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the predetermined number of times (four times) of the lottery results after the end of the jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win any of the winning ports is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic effect of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, which is performed in the main display area Dm, with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player hits the right at the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, the ball enters the second entrance 640, and the second special symbol is obtained until the jackpot ends. Is configured to reach the upper limit number. If the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, during the execution of the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the player plays a game in the hope that the lottery will be lost. In the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not a lottery result of a second special symbol jackpot has been included in the retained balls until all the variable displays based on the retained balls of the second special symbol are completed. Is performed.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B, an effect performed during a big hit will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode during a big hit. As shown in FIG. 8A, during the jackpot, an effect in which the adventurer 811 searches for a cave is displayed. On the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally long display area HR1 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed. The current round number is displayed in the display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 8A, the character "1 round" is displayed, indicating that the current round is the first round.

  On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally long display area HR2 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed. In the display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8A, the characters “GET 0022” are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, two balls have been specified since the start of the jackpot). The ball has entered the winning opening 65a).

  On the right side of the third symbol display device 81, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed. Although details will be described later, the four display areas HR3a to HR3d indicate the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol which has been increased by the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit. The image is displayed. In addition, as described above, it is more likely that a result of a lottery in the second special symbol lottery will be a preferable result for the player than a big hit, so that the display areas HR3a to HR3d include An image showing the degree of expectation is displayed.

  Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a state in which there is no pending ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is provided with a symbol “?”. The image is displayed.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during a big hit. As shown in FIG. 8B, when a ball entry to the second entrance 640 is detected during a big hit, an effect is performed in which the adventurer 811 finds the treasure chest 812. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the mode of the key 813 indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol held based on the incoming ball will be lost. The more luxurious the key 813 is, the higher the expected degree of deviation is, and the poorer the mode is, the lower the expected degree of deviation is (the risk of winning in the second special symbol lottery increases).

  FIG. 8B illustrates a case where a key 813 in a normal mode is displayed. When the effect that the adventurer 811 finds the key 813 is performed, a key having the same aspect as the discovered aspect is displayed on the upper side of the display area in which “?” Is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. They are displayed in order from the area. The example of FIG. 8B illustrates a case where an image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a among the display areas where the symbol “?” Is displayed. As described above, by displaying the mode of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, the variable display based on each reserved ball executed after the current big hit is completed. Can be checked at any time by the player. Therefore, the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the main display area Dm is provided with the exclusive display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol. However, the exclusive display is not always required. There is no need to provide an area. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved symbol of the second special symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds is displayed in the form of a key discovered by the adventurer 811.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode at the time of starting an ending effect after all rounds of the jackpot have been completed. In the first embodiment, the jackpots E and E are stored in the reserved balls of the second special symbol from the ending period of the jackpot to the change time of all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol. An effect is executed to notify the player whether or not F exists. That is, even after all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol have been completed, it is suggested whether or not the gaming state is still “the probable change state of the special symbol” and “the time saving state of the ordinary symbol”. The effect for is performed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “special symbol change state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” that are game states that are advantageous to the player are referred to as “probable change mode” and are disadvantageous to the player. The “special symbol low-probability state” and the “normal symbol normal state”, which are the most important game states, are referred to as “normal mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot ending period starts, an effect is performed in which the adventurer 811 finds the door 814. Above the image of the door 814, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR4 is formed. In this display area HR4, the characters "Starting through the doors! Start through the four doors!" Are displayed. With these display contents, if four doors can be opened using four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the jackpot, it is advantageous for the player (the holding ball of the second special symbol). That the probable change mode continues even after the game is digested). In the upper left display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, an image of a left-pointing arrow and a character “left” are displayed. With these displays, the ball can be launched by the player in the left direction (the ball can be launched into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  The reason why the left-handing is notified at the start of the ending period is to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed after the end of the big hit. That is, during the ending period, the ball fired by right-handed by the player is changed to the second entrance 640 after the end of the jackpot (and after the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started). To prevent the number of lotteries of the second special symbol from increasing after the jackpot (the lottery of the second special symbol is executed beyond the four times held during the big hit) (Suppression). As described above, even if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, a prize ball can hardly be obtained during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a disadvantageous normal mode for the player. Therefore, as the number of lotteries of the second special symbol increases, it becomes disadvantageous for the player. For this reason, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit the right after the jackpot and to prevent the ball from newly entering the second entrance 640, the game is executed during the ending period. It is configured to notify left-handed to the person. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit can be limited to the one by the reserved ball of the second special symbol held during the big hit, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  When the big hit (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, as shown in FIG. 9B, an effect of breaking through the door 814 using the keys collected during the big hit is executed. FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through the door 814 using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image in which the door 814 is opened is displayed, and the character “Breakthrough !!” is displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the player breaks through the remaining three doors, the player will be in an advantageous state (it will be in the probable change mode).

  The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect of the adventurer 811 opening (breaking through) the first door using the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) is based on the first reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the variable display based on the second reserved ball. Similarly, the effect in which the adventurer 811 opens the second door using the second key is the third display after the variable display based on the second holding ball of the second special symbol is started. This is executed in a period until the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball is started. The effect that the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is that the variation display based on the third holding ball of the second special symbol is started and then the fourth holding ball is displayed. This is executed in a period until the fluctuation display based on the start is performed. The effect of using the fourth key to open the fourth door is executed during the variable display time based on the fourth holding ball of the second special symbol. In addition, these are the operations in the case where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the departure, and if a large hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, the door breaks through during the period of the big hit. The effect is performed one or more times.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to detect whether or not the second special symbol jackpot has been obtained from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. Thus, when the second special symbol comes off, the coming-off (so-called small hit) accompanied by the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined. Then, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 (0.2 seconds) in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 of each round in the case of the big hits E and F in the lottery of the second special symbol. Are matched. Furthermore, when the big hits E and F occur, the interval period between the rounds is set to be equal to the fluctuation time (1 second) when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost. With such a configuration, even when the jackpot E or the jackpot F is obtained during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol, the present is already the jackpot from the opening period and the opening interval of the opening / closing door 65f1. It can be difficult to determine whether or not. Thereby, a series of effects (door breakthrough mode effects) executed at the start of the ending period can be focused on to the end.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in a case where it has failed to break through the fourth door in the door breaking mode effect. That is, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where one of the jackpots E and F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the characters “failure...” Are displayed in the display area HR4, and the adventurer 811 possesses The effect of breaking the key is performed. With these display modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the probable change mode has ended (the one of the jackpots E and F has been won).

  FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the fourth door has been successfully breached in the door breach mode effect. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and characters "great success !!" and characters "entering probable change mode!" Are displayed in display region HR4. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the player can play the game in the advantageous variable mode.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the above-described door breakthrough is performed from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol increased during the jackpot. It is configured to execute a mode effect. By this door breakthrough mode effect, all the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is lost, and it is possible to play the game in the probable change mode. It can be suggested to the player whether or not the player will fall into the normal mode without performing the lottery of the first special symbol. With a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and the plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the game after all the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is finished depending on whether or not the number of doors according to the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be broken through. Although it has been configured to notify whether or not the state is the probability change mode, the effect form is not limited to this. In the end, any one of the two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation, or departure, etc.) may be provided, and for example, the adventurer 811 may be set to the enemy and the enemy. A configuration may be adopted in which the probable change mode is notified if a battle is won and an enemy is won.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between a temporal change of the effect mode during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and a temporal change of the state of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing state of the opening / closing door 65f1). FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the probability change mode is notified (that is, a lottery result in which all the reserved balls of the second special symbol correspond to the loss). On the other hand, FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship when the normal mode is notified (that is, when any of the jackpots E and F is included in the hold).

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when it is notified that the mode has shifted to the probable change mode (when all the lotteries of the second special symbol are out of order), the start screen of the door-break mode effect is displayed together with the start of the ending period. FIG. 9A is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed during the ending period of one second, and ends when the ending period ends and the jackpot ends. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (reserved 1) of the second special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (FIG. 9 (b) ) Is started. This effect is continued until the start timing of the change based on the second hold ball (hold 2). In addition, as described above, when a lottery is lost in the second special symbol lottery, it is almost a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the fluctuation display for one second based on the hold 1 ends, the small hit is started, and the door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is displayed that the door has been successfully breached.

  Thereafter, similarly, the fluctuation display for one second and the opening of the open / close door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small hit are repeated. In accordance with this, an effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the doors could be broken through during each opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1. . As described above, the result of whether or not the door can be breached is notified during the opening period of the small hit after the fluctuation time has elapsed, so that the door can be breached for the fluctuation period of one second. Expectations can be further increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect during the opening period of the small hit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the hit has already been made from the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 65f1. it can.

  In the effect of breaking through the fourth door, after the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and is notified of the shift to the probability change mode (after the fourth small hit is completed), a dedicated display mode of the probability change mode (Not shown) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the mode has shifted to the probable change mode.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is the big hit F. In this case, in the door-breaking-mode effect, when the transition to the normal mode is notified (when either the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol), the ending period is also set. With the start of, the door break mode production is started. When the big hit ends and the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the change of the special symbol based on the first holding ball, an effect of trying to break through the first door is performed, and the opening period of the small hit is performed. , The adventurer 811 breaks through the first door.

  When the variation display of the special symbol based on the second holding ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the fluctuation display for one second is executed based on the second holding ball, and the big hit F is started after the elapse of one second. When the big hit F occurs and the first round is started, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is notified that the adventurer 811 has succeeded in breaking through the door. At the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, an effect of trying to break through the third door is executed, and the opening period of the second round after the elapse of the one second interval period (0.2 (Seconds), it is reported that the third door has been successfully breached.

  Further, when the interval period after the end of the second round is started, an effect of trying to break through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round (0. During 2 seconds), it is notified that the fourth door could not be broken through (see FIG. 10A).

  After being notified that the door has failed to break through, a result display (not shown) indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the current probability change mode is executed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot is completed, the display mode is set to the exclusive display mode in the normal mode.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit, the time of the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the variable display and the small hit are repeated is shown. The change (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the time-dependent change in the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the jackpot E or F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol (see FIG. 11 (b)) are at least. It is configured to match until the end of the door break mode effect. That is, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of the big hits E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the small hitting open period. Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F is completed is set to 1 second which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, even if any of the first to fourth retained balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door break mode effect is finished. The operation of the door 65f1 can be the same as the case where the probable change mode is notified (see FIG. 11A). Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not the big hit E or F has occurred from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1, so that attention can be paid to the door breaking mode effect to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, FIG. 11B illustrates an example in which, even when the second holding ball becomes a jackpot F (falls to the normal mode), the third door is broken through and the fourth door fails. However, it may be configured such that an effect of failing to break through the door is executed simply when any of the jackpots E and F is changed while the holding ball of the second special symbol is being digested.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time an update is performed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first input area. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball opening 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter is set. If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability (a special symbol). And the number of large random numbers included in each of them are set differently (see FIG. 13B). In this way, by making the number of random numbers which are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is updated. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol big hit, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit indicates the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are four random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 3” are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 13B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 4, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/100”. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. On the other hand, random numbers other than the above-mentioned jackpot random numbers correspond to outliers. As described above, the deviation of the special symbol includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 13B, at the time of the low probability of the special symbol, the number of random numbers that are lost in the lottery of the first special symbol is 396 "4 to 399". On the other hand, the random numbers that are lost in the second special symbol lottery are 37 “3 to 40”, and the random numbers that are small hits in the second special symbol lottery are “41 to 399”. There are 359.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 40 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 39” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. FIG. 13A). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 40 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 40, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “1/10”. Also, when the special symbol has a high probability, 360 random numbers “40 to 399” are lost in the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, only "40" is specified as the random number value which is lost in the second special symbol lottery, and the random number value which is a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 359 of "41-399". Individuals are specified.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9” is “big hit A” ( 16 rounds with a big hit). When the value is “10-89”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot B” (five rounds probability variable jackpot), and when the value is “90-99”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot C”. (2 round probability change jackpot).

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, the big hit type is “big hit D” (16 round positive change big hit). When the value is “5-49”, the jackpot type is “big hit E” (7 rounds normal jackpot), and when the value is “50-99”, the jackpot type is “big hit F”. (6 rounds regular jackpot).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that six types of hits (big hits A to F) are determined by the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Have been. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the special change state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In other words, even if the jackpot type is determined, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the probability change state. The “probable jackpot” described above means a jackpot of a type in which a ball easily passes through the probable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and a “normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot of a type in which the ball is difficult to pass through the probable switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Means

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball has entered the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a large-hit table is provided for a high-probability state in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 89, so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely deviated” is easily selected. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” and “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a narrow low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and rear out of range” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 32) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15A) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 15A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol 202d1 per special figure 1 (see FIG. 15B). In addition, at least a table 202d2 for deviating from the special figure 1 (normal) (see FIG. 15C) and a table 202d3 for deviating from the special figure 1 (probable change) (see FIG. 15D) are defined at least. Further, as tables for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 for each special figure 2 (four or less fluctuation) (see FIG. 16A) and a table for each special figure 2 (five or more fluctuation) ) Table 202d5 (see FIG. 16 (b)), special figure 2 departure (four or less change) table 202d6 (see FIG. 16 (c)), and special figure 2 departure (five or more change) table 202d7 (see FIG. 16 (c)). 16 (d)) at least.

  First, with reference to FIG. 15B, the table for special figure 1 per table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 table 202d1. The special figure 1 per table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. Each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special figure per hit table 202d1.

  Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with a fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “180 to 198”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which a special symbol lottery result is a big hit. It is selected from the special table 1 per table 202d1.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short and a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the outreach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 149” and various super reachs are out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) are set in “198”.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol variation state. In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by a stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach (reach in front and rear, reach other than out-of-front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for each special figure 2 (four or less fluctuation). This special figure 2 per (four or less fluctuation) table 202d4 is selected when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is four or less after the big hit is completed, and when the special special lottery is a lottery. 4 is a data table in which the types (variation times) of the variation patterns to be performed are specified. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbol changes is four or less, the fluctuation pattern is a short-period fluctuation per one second regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Selected.

  FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the table 202d5 for each special figure 2 (five or more fluctuations). This special figure 2 winning (more than 5 fluctuations) table 202d5 is selected when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the big hit is completed, and when the big winning is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol. 4 is a data table in which the types (variation times) of the variation patterns to be performed are specified. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), after the big hit, if the number of times of the change of the special symbol is 5 or more, regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, the change pattern has a long change of 300 seconds per change time. Selected.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure (four or less change) table 202d6. This special figure 2 departure (four or less change) table 202d6 indicates that after the big hit is completed, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is four or less, and the special pattern is deviated by lottery (including small hits). 9 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the data pattern becomes invalid. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), if the number of times the special symbol changes after the big hit is four or less, a short-time change with a change time of 1 second as a change pattern is performed regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Selected.

  FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure (five or more change) table 202d7. The table 202d7 for special figure 2 (five or more fluctuations) is out of the special symbol lottery (including small hits) when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is five or more after the big hit is completed. It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in the case is specified. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), if the number of times the special symbol changes after the big hit is 5 or more, a long change with a change time of 300 seconds as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Selected.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of times of performing the special symbol variable display is four or less after the big hit, the lottery result is deviated (small hit). ) Or a jackpot, the variation time is always set to one second. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not one of the big hits E or F is obtained from the change time during the execution of the change display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether or not the game state after the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is all in the probability change mode. Therefore, a player who wants to know whether or not to enter the probability change mode can be caused to play a game by paying more attention to the result of the door-break mode effect, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol is 5 or more, as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. The configuration is such that 300 seconds is always set. Thus, if the player makes a right hit in a state other than during the big hit, it is possible to attain a state in which the special symbol lottery is executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) at the minimum (very low game efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from right-handing in a state other than during the big hit. If the player hits right during a state other than during the jackpot, particularly during the probability change mode, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Very likely to be. That is, it is highly possible that a prize ball can hardly be obtained, and that a jackpot falls into the normal mode after the jackpot. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied with the game because the normal mode is set to be disadvantageous while the game in the advantageous probability change mode cannot be sufficiently enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the game efficiency in the case where the right hit is performed in a state other than during the big hit is deteriorated, so that it is possible to suppress the player from right-handing in the state other than the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to more enjoy the game in the probability change mode.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number which is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in a normal state of a normal symbol) and for a high probability of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability (a symbol of a normal symbol). And the number of jackpot random numbers included therein are set differently (see FIG. 14B). In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are hits of the ordinary symbol, and the values are "5 to 28". As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240 out of the total number of the random numbers, and the total number of the random number of the jackpot is 24. Therefore, the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. As a symbol, a symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 64a is opened “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random numbers, and thus the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  If the ball passes the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened “1 second × 3 times”. Is done. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, such as “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, as compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. Since it is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is opened only for “1 second × 3 times” when the normal symbol hits. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. 10, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, and I / Os. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 36), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 35). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to NMI, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, at least a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored as part of the fixed value data. ing.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 3” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 13B), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out of range. "4-399" is defined as a range of the judgment value to be determined (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B). In addition, “3 to 40” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 13B). In the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol, “0 to 39” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a4 in FIG. 13B). “40 to 399” is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B). In addition, “40” is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol has been removed (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B), and “41 to 399” is determined as the determination value for determining the small hit of the second special symbol. (See 202a6 in FIG. 13B). When the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the winning start matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big hit defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B). Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, “big hit A” is defined in association with the first special symbol in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 9”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 14A). The “big hit A” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit A", so if a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit A" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit A" is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, in each round, the upper limit number (seven) of balls can be almost certainly won to the specific winning opening 65a before the elapse of 30 seconds just by continuing to make a right hit. When the jackpot A is reached, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. Also, in one round in which the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, if the player keeps right-handing, the ball almost certainly passes through the positive change switch 65e3. Therefore, after the "big hit A" ends, the probable change mode is almost certainly achieved. As described above, the “big hit A” is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the big hit is set to the certainty change mode.

  For the first special symbol, “big hit B” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 89” (see 202b2 in FIG. 14A). . The “big hit B” is a big hit with five rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B" is 80, so "big hit B" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 80% (80/100). Like the “big hit A”, the “big hit B” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. In the first round of the jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly set after the end of the "big hit B". As described above, since the “big hit B” has a smaller number of rounds than the “big hit A” (and “big hit D” described later), the prize balls that can be obtained are smaller than the “big hit A” (and “big hit D”). However, many prize balls can be paid out. In addition, since the gaming state after the big hit is in the probability change mode, the game state shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the big hit as in “big hit A”.

  For the first special symbol, “big hit C” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit C” is a big hit with two rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit C" is 10, and therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). Like the “big hit A” and the “big hit B”, the “big hit C” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” or “big hit B”. Also, in the first round of the jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly achieved after the "big hit C" ends. As described above, since the “big hit C” has the smallest number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is small, but the prize balls can be paid out, so that the number of balls held by the player can be increased. In addition, since the gaming state after the jackpot is the probable change mode, the game state shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot, as in the case of the "big hit A" and the "big hit B".

  In this way, when the first special symbol lottery wins, a prize ball can be paid out for 2 to 16 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big win is almost certainly in the probability change mode. Regardless of the type of jackpot, it is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), for the second special symbol, the "big hit D" is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 14A). This "big hit D" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit D". Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. Is 5% (5/100). Since the “big hit D” has the same operation as the “big hit A”, it is the most advantageous big hit type for the player like the “big hit A”.

  For the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5-49" (see 202b5 in FIG. 14A). . This "big hit E" is a big hit with seven rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit E" is 45, so "big hit E" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 45% (45/100). The "big hit E" is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 0.2 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, it is difficult even for one ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a in each round, and almost no winning ball can be obtained. In addition, since it becomes difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the positive change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the game state after the “big hit E” ends is a “normal mode” which is almost disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, the "big hit E" is a type of the big hit that is disadvantageous for the player because it is very unlikely that a prize ball can be obtained and the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the big hit is extremely high.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in a range of “50 to 99”, and “big hit F” is associated with the value (see 202b6 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit F” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit F" is 50, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. Is 50% (50/100). Like the “big hit E”, the “big hit F” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes for 0.2 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the "big hit E", since a prize ball can hardly be obtained and the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the big hit is extremely high, the big hit type is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, with a high probability (95% ratio), almost no prize balls can be obtained, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is almost certainly in the normal mode. , F, there is a high possibility that it will be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to expect that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which have been increased by the balls entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, will come off. It can provide novel playability.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14B). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 14B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to. , It is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, the detailed description is omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a second Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probable change flag 203g, probable change setting flag 203h, probable change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probable variable enable flag 203n , A positive change valid timer 203o, a discharge number counter 203p, a fluctuation time counter 203q, a big hit flag 203r, a small hit flag 203s, a round end flag 203t, and at least a memory area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type. Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Out of the vacant areas from 1 area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area ( (See FIG. 17), and based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the winning winning in the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed in the main controller 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is the same as the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved area into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, a maximum value of 4 is set. Are incremented by one (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30). S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of reserved balls can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 increases the actual variable display held by the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if the number of balls is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value of the variable ball is increased every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of suspended display balls increases. Are incremented by one (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 28). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 33). ).

  The probable change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable change state (probable change mode). ), And if the probability change flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal mode) of the special symbol. In addition, as described above, in the probable change mode, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, if the probable change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probable change state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to an initial value of OFF, and is set to ON when the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (see S1302 in FIG. 39). The probability change flag 203g is reset to off when the big hit game is started (see S219 in FIG. 28).

  The probability change flag 203g is referred to in the special symbol change start processing to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process (S213 in FIG. 29), the probability change flag 203g is referred to. If the flag is ON, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, while the probability change is performed. If the flag 203g is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The probability change flag 203g is also referred to in the normal symbol change process to determine whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 32). More specifically, the probability change flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability change flag 203g is ON, a random symbol lottery is performed based on the second probability random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 32), if the probability change flag 203g is off, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second probability random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 32). Further, in the ordinary symbol variation processing, the probable variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the ordinary symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 32). S620).

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probable change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 39). Note that the probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when returning (when turning on the power). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, the probability change switch 65e3 determines whether or not the power has passed before the power is turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the certainty variable switch 65e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a certainty variable passage counter 203i to be described later has a value larger than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the game store side by judging whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h while the power is turned off. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 in one round of the jackpot game (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been exhausted, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203p described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one each time the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed (S1415 in FIG. 40). In addition, after performing the process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1511 in FIG. 41). Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the value is incremented by one and updated (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable prize device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of dischargeds (the total value of the discharged number counter 203p and the positive variable passing counter 203i) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether the values match, it is reset to the initial value “0” (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball flying period after one round is completed and the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203m described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time since the opening and closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether or not the time required for the ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203m is a time required for discharging the game balls that have won the variable prize device 65 when the open / close door 65f1 of the variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is previously set to the remaining ball timer. It is set as the upper limit of 203 m. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203m (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65. Further, it is possible to illegally leave the ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of flowing the ball to the special discharge channel 65e2 at the timing of the first round of the jackpot E or the jackpot F.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the certain change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  The probable change enable flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the ball passes the probable change switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change valid flag 203n is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. 65e3 or less. In other words, this indicates that the passage of the ball through the probability changing switch 65e3 is a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203n was set to ON. After the probable change valid timer 203o turns off the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probable change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probable change switch 65e3 is 0.3 second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to pass.

  Thus, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge channel 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge channel 65e2 to allow the game ball to pass through the positive change switch 65e3 or the piano from below the positive change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up a game ball with a line or the like, or erroneously detecting that a magnetic sensor is passed by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the ball discharge switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls winning the variable prize device 65 matches the number of discharges (S1511 in FIG. 41).

  The fluctuation time counter 203q is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. The counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (see S311 in FIG. 29). Further, the fluctuation time counter 203q is decremented by one in the special symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 28) (see S214 in FIG. 28), and it is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q. Is determined.

  The big hit flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is in progress. If the big hit flag 203r is on, it means that a big hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203r becomes a big hit due to the lottery of the special symbol, and the big hit (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1103 in FIG. 37). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28), it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made by referring to the big hit flag 203r (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The small hitting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not a small hitting is being made. If the small hit flag 203s is on, it means that a small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that no small hit is in progress. The small hitting flag 203r becomes a small hit by a special symbol lottery, and the small hit is started and set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 42). Also, it is turned off at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the small hit flag 203s is referred to determine whether or not a small hit is occurring (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not a ball throwing period has ended after the jackpot round has ended. If the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that the ball throwing period has ended after the round, and if it is off, it indicates that the ball throwing period has ended.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize the novel gaming ability described above, in which a game is played in the hope that the ball will be missed with the second special symbol holding ball.

  Next, a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables specified in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is roughly provided with three states (modes). That is, a normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, a door breaking mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, and a probable change mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 19 are provided.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and the probability of a jackpot is low, and the ball is unlikely to enter the first entrance 64. This is the most unfavorable game state for the player. Further, as described above, the probability change mode indicates the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and has a high jackpot probability, and the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. This is the most advantageous game state for the player.

  In addition, the door breaking mode indicates a state in which there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol acquired during the execution of the probable jackpot (big hits A to D), and all the lotteries based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are lost. If so, this is a state indicating that the game can be played in the advantageous probability change mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same as the probability change mode except that a reserved ball of the second special symbol exists. That is, there is a high probability of a big hit in the special symbol lottery (1/10), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ratio of all the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the jackpot to be missed is about 65.6% (9/10 to the fourth power), so the door breaking mode is 65.6%. Thus, it can be said that the probability change mode can be expected.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol hits a jackpot (jackpots A to C), and if the ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 in the first round, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode after the jackpot ends. . As described above, in the big hits A to C, the ball almost passes through the probable change switch 65e3 simply by right-handing in one round. If the ball does not pass through the probable change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V does not win) because the player did not launch the ball, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode again. Is done.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, the mode shifts from the door breach mode to another mode not only when a big hit occurs but also when all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the change display based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols is completed in the door breach mode, the mode shifts to the positive change mode.

  Also, in the case of a jackpot D determined at a rate of 5% of the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the ball almost passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Move to If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V does not win) because the player did not launch the ball, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot E or a jackpot F determined at a rate of 95% of the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the ball is moved to the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, almost no ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the jackpots E and F are completed, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 19, the mode is changed from the probability change mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot (jackpots A to C), and in the first round, if the ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3, the door breakthrough mode is set after the jackpot ends. Transition. Each of the jackpots A to C is a jackpot type in which the ball can easily pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the mode almost shifts to the door breaking mode. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V does not win) because the player did not launch the ball, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. .

  As described above, in the first embodiment, by switching back and forth between the three types of modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot is completely removed. Thus, it is possible to realize a characteristic playability that a game can be played in an advantageous probability change mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player to make a jackpot again within the hold after the jackpot is over (so-called extended casino in the hold). It is possible to cause the player to perform an advantage in the hope that no extended play will occur. Therefore, a novel game characteristic different from a general pachinko machine can be provided, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to open and close the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to execute a rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a dependent variation time counter. 223f, a breakthrough effect counter 223g, a game state storage area 223h, and at least another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area including one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. I have. Winning information is stored in each area. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is selected, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and divides the prize information into prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110, and the second special symbol. The symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of holding balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be obtained. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the retained ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and outputs the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 adds the number of reserved balls of the variable display due to the entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or a special symbol in the main control device 110. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after subtraction is displayed. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved special ball count command from the reserved special ball count command 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 46). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, the display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the retained ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special ball number The drawing of the image is controlled such that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the symbol retained ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value is changed in synchronization with 203e. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The variable time counter 223f is a counter that counts the variable time of the variable display of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in subordinate fluctuation time counter 223f.

  The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors to be broken through before shifting to the probability change mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has ended.

  The gaming state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223h is updated every time a state command is output from the main control device 110 each time a change is made to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4210 in FIG. 46). The game state storage area 223h is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the least significant bit is in the time saving state of a normal symbol, and whether the second least significant bit is in a probable change state of a special symbol. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the lower two bits are “00B”, while in the “door breaking mode” and the “probable change mode”, the lower two bits are “11B”. The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio ramp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game status storage area 223h.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, an elapse timer for measuring an effect time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is formed by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound ramp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 53) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a process of drawing the next one frame of image and a process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used when drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the above, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (the storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed in the main controller 110 is displayed by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a beforehand, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the operation shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22 (c), on the display screen of the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main controller 110. The result is judged, and when it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. The image to be displayed is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  When the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main time image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. FIG. 23B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and FIG. 23B shows a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 23, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding back image. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “sand beach stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making the entirety resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 23A to FIG. 23B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 23A and 23B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position “b” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b 'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 7) numbered "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display 64 or the second symbol 640 has been hit, the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect, but the third symbol display device. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. It is. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "adventures" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are displayed in the character design area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading image data resident in advance in the image data. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, image data necessary for drawing an image thereafter, from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, This is an area in which transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is out of place, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged scale than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size from the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. One or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the elapse of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, in the variable display data table, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified. This back type is to display either the back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”), or to be different from the back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A and B as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage where the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variable symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 24) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image list to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the operation of the user, and thus the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 25 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes a start address (storage source start address) and a final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and a start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 64B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 55B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 55 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction with respect to is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 26) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 55 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 61) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, (See FIG. 26), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is stored before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes the transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 55 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and transmits the sprite of the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device is performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the large hit flag 203r and the small hit flag 203s is on. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S201, when it is determined that neither the special symbol is a big hit nor a small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired. (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the executed second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area → the third area in the hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of times the variable display is suspended based on the lottery N1) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209).

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol retaining ball number is determined. The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command in the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 performed after the process of S207 or S212, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and the process ends. The details of the special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the value of the change time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the updated change time counter is updated. Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 has become 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of the jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S219), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. I do. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the process of S219, when the big hit control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. Is performed (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S218, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the processes of S219 and S220 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. , And the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S301).

  Next, the probability change flag 203g is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol variation state (S302). In the process of S302, if the probable change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the probable change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probable change state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol for a high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol change state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 is determined. , And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13B) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol big random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 39”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) to determine what the big hit type is. I do. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot A (16 rounds, the variable jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of “10-89”, it is a jackpot B (five rounds variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of “90-99”, it is a jackpot C (two rounds jackpot). The determination is made (see FIG. 14A). On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery wins, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that the hit is the big hit D (16 rounds, the probability change big hit), If it is in the range of "5-49", it is determined to be a jackpot E (7 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (6 rounds normal jackpot) ( FIG. 14 (a)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A to F). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpots A to F) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern (corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1) is determined. Fluctuating time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol is out of the way (including the small hit) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The stop type to be displayed at 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the low probability stop type selection table. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36). When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for executing a holding process of the values indicated by the various counters when a winning start is made.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is obtained (S401). S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether the ball has won a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) the second entrance 640 (S407). In this process, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times of change display holding N2 in the special symbol) is obtained (step S407). S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing are updated. It is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  In the process of S413, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is executed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S413), and this process ends. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry to the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 30). (S501), if a new ball has not been detected (S501: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S501 that a new incoming ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected incoming ball is the upper limit value (ie, 4) It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), the timing of starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is whether or not the special symbol is in a certain change state. Is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probable change state according to the current game state and the result of the look-ahead of the reserved ball held before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball, the current game state matches the timing of starting the fluctuation display based on the ball detected this time, so that the current game state is in a probable change state. Is determined. Also, when a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the probability jackpot is suspended, the state shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is suspended, the state transitions to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is in the positive change state.

  In the process of S503, when it is determined that the start of the variation based on the currently detected ball entry is a state of probable change of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the ball entry and the high probability The lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired based on the first hit random number table (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the change is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), based on the type of the entrance where the ball is detected and the first random number table for low probability. Then, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the processing of S506 executed after the processing of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that has detected the current entrance and the lottery result obtained in the processing of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance port notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the normal symbol (second symbol) change display and the first entrance opening performed by the second symbol display device 83 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the electric accessory 64a attached to the motor 64.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is performed during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period during which the special symbol is in the probable change state and the period during which the normal symbol is in the time saving state coincide with each other. Therefore, in the processing of S608, if the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and if it is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  In the processing of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S607 and the normal random number table for high symbol time On the basis of the result, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is off (see FIG. 14B).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the random number table per probability symbol for probability time, a lottery result as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239 ”, It is determined that the symbol has been removed (see FIG. 14B).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611). The display mode of the hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (whether the probability change flag 203g is ON) (S614). If the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S614: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability change flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), and terminates this processing.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S617). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing in S615 or S616 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S617, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol or not. Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is a hit of a normal symbol (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (that is, whether the probability change flag 203g is on) (S620), and the time reduction state is determined. If it is not in the middle (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S621), and the processing is performed. The process moves to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the time of the normal symbol is being reduced (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to “1 second × "2 times" (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the processing of S623, the opening time and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening determined in the processing of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 end. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspend it.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the main control device 110 is turned on. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S914 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S914 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S915, S916).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S915, S916) is performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the processing of S916 ends, the process moves to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the processing of S910 ends, the probable variable flag 203g is read (S911), and a status command is set based on the read state of the probable variable flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the current game state. After the processing of S912 is completed, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the processing shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) and the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1004 is completed, next, if the small winning state is established, a small winning control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small hit control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small hit, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed during the open period of the small hit or whether a specified number of balls have been won. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the small hit control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1005 is completed, next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors product 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started when the opening / closing control start of the electric auditors accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32). Note that the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32).

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed at 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 is set. Starts a variable display. Thus, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately turned on as the ordinary symbol (second symbol). Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, and thus the remaining time until the next execution timing of the main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 34 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S901 in FIG. 35). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the specific winning port 65a are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S220 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot starts (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1102, the big hit flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1001 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol big hit (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the process of S1004, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1104: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is a new round start timing (S1105), and if it is a new round start timing (S1105: Yes). ), A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when the special game state (all rounds of the jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1107: Yes), the ending command is set (S1108), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1107 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), then a jackpot end process for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1110), and this process ends. I do. The details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (special gaming state) (S1109: No), a winning process for performing a process according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111). . The details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the prize-winning process (S1111) is completed, an abnormal process is performed to determine whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally ejected (S1112), and the process ends. Details of the abnormal processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1106). The jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the current round is not the first round, the process of S1203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1204. In the processing of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204), and this processing ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), it is possible to open the special winning opening 65a in each round of the jackpot, and to set the first round to be able to pass through the special discharge channel 65e2. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A to D, the ball almost surely passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round only by the player right-handed, so that the probability change mode (special change state of the special symbol and , A normal symbol time saving state). Also, in the case of the jackpots E and F, although the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds) as described above, Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during one round, the possibility that the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, if any of the jackpots E and F is reached, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot is completed. Thereby, the lottery of the first special symbol, in which one of the types of the big hits A to C is determined in the case of the big hit, is determined to be an advantageous lottery for the player, and the high probability (95% of The lottery of the second special symbol in which one of the jackpots E and F is determined by the (ratio) can be set as a lottery disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1110). The big hit end process (S1110) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for setting the game state after the big hit end as described above.

  In the big hit end processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1301). If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the probability change setting flag 203h is ON (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to the probable change mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the probability change flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 28), the process of S1302 is skipped, and the probability change flag 203g is turned off after the jackpot. That is, the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit.

  In the processing of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g (S1303). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the gaming status storage area 223h in accordance with the gaming status notified by the status command. Thus, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the big hit flag 203r and the probability change setting flag 203h are set to off (S1304), and this processing ends.

  By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 39), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ending according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1111). The winning process (S1111) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for controlling according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a as described above.

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current time is a round valid period (S1401). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of S1401, if it is not the round validity period (S1401: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the current time is the round validity period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S1402). If a winning has been detected (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j and updated (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning in the specific winning opening 65a has been detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, if the winning in the specific winning opening 65a is not detected in the processing of S1402 (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 and S1404 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the processing of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406). (S1406: Yes), and it transfers to the process of S1407. In the process of S1406, if the current jackpot is the jackpots A to D, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, and if the jackpots are E and F, the start of the round is determined. It is determined that the round time has elapsed when 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the start.

  In the processing of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). If it is determined that the closing is based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid is closed. The (positive change solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process shifts to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is due to the completion of a round other than one round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is turned on. Is not set, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the probability change valid flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. If the value of the winning counter is determined to be 6 or less in the processing of S1405 (S1405: No), and if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S1406 (S1406: No), S1407 is performed. Steps S1411 to S1411 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1412 that the round end flag 203t is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the probable change valid flag 203n is on (S1416). In the processing of S1416, if the probable change valid flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probable change valid flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probable change valid timer 203o (S1417), and it is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1417). S1418). If the value of the probable change enable timer 203o is not the upper limit (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, where the probable change switch 65e3 is monitored and the process of updating the probable change setting flag 203h is executed. Accordingly, if the probability change valid timer 203o is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a probability change state from being improperly caused by passing a ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probable variable valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probable variable valid flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to off (S1419), and the value of the probable variable valid timer 203o is reset (S1420). ), End this processing.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 (S1413). If the ball has not passed through the probability changing switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the probable variable switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable passage counter 203i (S1414), the probable variable setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormal processing (S1112). This abnormal process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37). As described above, it is determined whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally ejected. It is processing for.

  In the abnormal processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the round validity period (S1501). If the current time is not the round validity period (S1501: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 in the process of S1502 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), since the ball is in the throwing period, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203m and updated (S1505). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then, the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probable variable passage counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203p) is awarded. It is determined whether the number matches the value (the value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of illegally entering a ball into the special discharge channel 65e2 and passing through the positive change switch 54e3 while the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S1507: Yes), the processing of S1508 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to off (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203p, and the positive change passage counter 203i are reset (S1511), and the process ends.

  Executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 41) causes a problem that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It can be detected and notified early.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As described above, the small hit control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 when the small hit state is set.

  In the small hit control process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit start timing (S1601). An opening command indicating the winning opening is set (S1602), the small hitting flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the timing is not the start of the small hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is being made (S1604), and if it is determined that the small hit is not made (S1604). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that the player is in the small hit (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small hit ( If it is the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the opening / closing door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the opening operation start timing (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the ending period start timing (S1607), and if it is the ending period start timing (S1607: No). Yes), an ending command indicating that the small hit ending period has started is set (S1608), and this processing ends.

  Also, in the processing of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609). (S1609: Yes), the small hit flag 203s is set to off (S1610), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1609 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the small hit middle prize processing for determining the end of the small hit opening period is executed (S1611). The details of the small hit prize winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the small win prize-winning process (S1611) ends, an abnormal process of determining whether the number of spheres winning the specific prize port 65a matches the number of ejected spheres is executed (S1612), and this process ends. I do. This abnormality processing (S1612) is the same processing as the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37), and thus the details thereof are omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the small hit prize winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small hit open period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hit prize winning process (S1611). In the small hit prize winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit round is valid (S1701). The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the current period is the round valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1702), and the winning of the ball is detected. If it is determined that it has been performed (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1702 that the winning for the specific winning opening 65a has not been detected (S1702: No), the processing of S1703 is skipped and the processing shifts to S1704.

  In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704). If the value is less than 7 (S1704: No), the round time (0.2 seconds) elapses. It is determined whether it has been performed (S1705). In the processing of S1705, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), the processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the small hit opening period. On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and when it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the processing of S1705 (S1705: Yes). This means that the condition for terminating the small hit opening period has been satisfied, so that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1706), and this processing ends.

  Note that it is almost impossible to make seven or more balls enter the specific winning opening 65a during the small hit round time of 0.2 seconds. After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing in S4116 is performed (see FIG. 45) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), sound lamp control device 113 executes a power-off process in S4116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4116 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cutoff). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1616 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the processing of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4116, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set ( (S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4116 (see S4115 in FIG. 45). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  After the processing in S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 31) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the gaming state storage area 223h. Is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time of power-on. After the processing in S4012, the interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed through steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to the process in S4006 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S4102 to S4110 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the fluctuation effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S4107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illuminations 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing in S4110 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4111). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S4112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4112, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S4113, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4115), and the power-off is performed. The processing is executed (S4116). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S4117), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a store clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4201). In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4203), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). The processing ends. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4204 that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). . Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, (The number of times N1 of the variable display is held based on the lottery of the first special symbol) or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display is held based on the second special symbol) is extracted. Is stored in the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). In the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is set. . After the processing of S4208 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 when a ball has won (started winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol are processed by the processing of S08. The value of the symbol holding ball counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S4208 is performed, the display reserved ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Several commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data of the gaming state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, based on the information according to the game state (whether the state is the probable change state) notified by the state command, when the probable change mode is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to “11B”. On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to “00B”. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4209 that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4211). If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing for performing control according to the new start winning prefetch result notified by the winning information command is executed. Then (S4212), the processing ends. Details of the winning information command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the jackpot (one of the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command) has been received. It is determined (S4213). If it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), a jackpot-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). The processing ends. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4213: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4215), and this process ends. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, the details of the above-described winning information command processing (S4212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning information command processing (S4212).

  In the prize information command processing (see FIG. 47), first, the information notified by the received prize command (information indicating the type of the entrance where a new start prize is detected and the lottery result) is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the process of S4301 is completed, it is determined whether or not the notification of the current winning information command is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302). In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the information notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current winning information is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpots A to D are being executed (S4303). If it is determined that any of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the ending period is in progress (S4304). Selects the mode of the key 813 in the effect of finding the key 813 (see FIG. 8B) (S4305). In the process of S4305, if the current prize information is the prize information corresponding to the lottery result of the departure (small hit), the ratio of selecting the gorgeous mode key 813 increases, and the current prize information becomes the big hits E and F. In the case of the winning information corresponding to, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in the poor (tattered) form becomes high. When the process of S4305 ends, an effect of finding the key 813 in the mode selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the jackpots A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and when it is determined that the ending period of the jackpots A to D is in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes). As a result of the player performing right-handing during the period in which the player should make left-handing, it means that a start winning prize for the second entrance 640 has been detected. A warning effect for notifying the user is executed (S4307), and this processing ends. This warning effect (not shown) is more strongly left-handed to the player than the image of the character “left-handed” and the left-pointing arrow displayed on the display area HR1 during the execution of the door-break mode effect. Is performed. Specifically, for example, an effect is displayed in which the character “left-handed” is displayed in a large size on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the sound “please return to left-handed” flows repeatedly at the maximum volume. Is done. By executing the warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from right-handing in a situation other than during the execution of the jackpots A to D. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation where the player keeps right-handing during the normal mode or the probable change mode, and the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

  By executing the winning information command processing, it is possible to appropriately set the mode of the key 813 found during the big hit based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the door-break mode effect, the player can be made to predict the degree of expectation of the probability change mode based on the mode of the key 813. Can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 can be changed simply in accordance with whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol newly notified by the winning information command is out (small hit). However, the configuration of the key 813 is selected based on not only the winning information based on the new winning information command but also the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Is also good. Specifically, for example, prior to receiving the current prize information command, among the prize information already stored in the prize information storage area 223a, the prize information corresponding to one of the jackpots E and F is included. In the case where the key 813 is included, the selection ratio of the key 813 in a poor (tattered) mode may be increased irrespective of the lottery result of the winning information this time. With this configuration, the possibility that the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol increases as the keys 813 in the poor (tattered) form continue, so that the player It is possible to more accurately estimate whether the jackpots E and F are included in the retaining ball. Further, for example, when all of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a before receiving the current winning information command and the current winning information command is out of place (small hit), the selection ratio is reduced. A configuration in which the height is increased (or selected only in this case) (for example, the configuration of the key 813 made of diamond) may be provided. With this configuration, when the mode is displayed, an expectation of shifting to the probable change mode can be further increased.

  In the first embodiment, when the winning information command corresponding to the second entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. Even when a new ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit value, a warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D. It may be configured. In particular, during the ending of the jackpots A to D or during the execution of the first variation display, the possibility that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit value is extremely high. In such a case, if the player makes a right-handed hit, a new start winning prize is generated for the second entrance 640, so that the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed five or more times after the jackpot. There is a possibility that the player may lose. On the other hand, when a ball entry to the second entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, a warning effect is set so that the player loses. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, the jackpot-related processing (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S4214).

  In the jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401), and if an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81. When the process of S4402 ends, the big hit-related process (see FIG. 48) ends. If the current opening command is a command corresponding to the opening of the big hit E, F or the small hit, and the door break mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door break mode is executed. The production continues as it is. In this case, the opening command itself may not be output to the display control device 114, or the display control device 114 may determine whether or not the door break mode effect is being executed and select the effect mode. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4401 that an opening command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4403). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4404), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing in S4405, this processing ends. Note that, similarly to the case where the opening command is received, when it is time to start a new round of the jackpots E and F during the execution of the door break mode effect, the door break mode effect is continued as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4403 that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not a closing command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4406). If it is determined that the close command has been received (S4406: Yes), a close command process for performing control according to the situation where the close command has been received is executed (S4406), and this process ends. Details of the close command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that the closing command has not been received (S4405: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), an ending command process for performing control according to the type and situation of the ending command is executed (S4408), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), the process ends as it is. By executing the jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the above-described close command processing (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the close command processing (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot being executed is any of the jackpots A to D (S4501). S4501: Yes), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than the jackpots A to D (either the jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), then the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is larger than 0. (That is, whether the door break mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed), and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door break mode effect is not being executed). ) (S4502: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door break mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4503). Then, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process ends as it is in order to continue the door break mode effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the remaining period until the end of the jackpot is reached. The result display is set (S4505), and the process ends. Note that the result display indicates a display content in which the total number of prize balls paid out by repeating the current jackpot and the probability change mode, the number of jackpots, and the like are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By setting the result display, the number of jackpots won by the player, the number of acquired prize balls, and the like can be easily grasped, so that the player can have a sense of accomplishment.

  Next, the details of the above-mentioned ending command processing (S4408) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The ending command process (S4408) is a process for performing control according to a jackpot type, a game situation, and the like when an ending command is received, as described above.

  In this ending command processing, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command indicating a small hit ending (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a small hit ending (S4601: Yes), the small hit is determined. Is performed (S4602), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the ending is not a small hit (S4601: No), the ending command of this time is output to notify that the big ending institution has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot under execution is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603).

  In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is not any of the jackpots A to D (S4603: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the running big hit is one of the big hits A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning information of the second special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read winning is read. It is determined whether or not the jackpot D is included in the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is an advantageous jackpot type that is the only one of the jackpots of the second special symbol in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained and the probability change mode is set almost after the jackpot.

  In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), the door break mode in a special mode in which it is notified that the big hit has occurred during the execution of the door break mode effect. An effect is set (S4606), and this processing ends. As described above, after the jackpots A to D are finished, it is basically advantageous for the player if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. This is because if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, either the jackpot E or F which is disadvantageous with a high probability (a ratio of 95%) is obtained. However, in the case where the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot D which is advantageous to the player with a low probability (a rate of 5%) may be obtained. In this case, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the big hit, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the big hits E and F are reached. Therefore, in this case, by setting the door break mode effect in a special notification mode, the player can easily understand that the big hit D has occurred.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4605 that the jackpot D is not included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4605: No), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is set to 4 (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the big hit is included, it means either the big hit E or F during the execution of the door-break mode effect, and the mode shifts to the normal mode after the big hit end. Finally, a door break-through mode effect of setting a mode of notifying the fall to the normal mode (a mode of failing to break through the door) is set (S4609), and the process ends. Note that the same production time of 5.8 seconds is set as the production time of the door break mode production regardless of whether or not a jackpot is included. During the period of 5.8 seconds, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hits), the period from the start of the ending institution until the small hit based on the fourth reserved balls ends. Period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not there is a big hit in the holding ball from the effect time, the effect time of the door break mode effect is set to the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

  In the process of S4608, when it is determined that the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball (S4608: No), the door break mode effect in a mode of finally notifying the shift to the probable change mode is set (S4610). ), End this processing. By executing the ending command process (see FIG. 50), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the content of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the small hit end processing (S4602) will be described. The small hit end processing (S4602) is a processing executed when it is determined in the ending command processing (see FIG. 50) that the received ending command is a small hit ending command.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hit end processing (see FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed). It is determined (S4701), and if the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and the process is terminated as it is. In addition, the case where a small hit occurs outside the execution period of the door break mode effect is a case where the player intentionally or negligently makes a right-hand outside the execution period of the big hits A to D (a period in which a left-hand should be performed). is there. In this case, at the time when the start winning prize for the second entrance 640 is detected, the warning effect has been set by the processing of S4307 of the prize information command processing (see FIG. 47). It is thought that there is. Therefore, at the end of the small hit, control such as performing a warning effect again is not performed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from having a discomfort due to the repeated repetition of the warning effect despite returning to the left.

  In the process of S4701, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after the subtraction is set to 0. It is determined whether or not (S4703). If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result of being out of place (small hit) (that is, all of the door breakthrough mode effect is being performed). This means that the fluctuation has come off), so an effect mode indicating entry into the probable change mode is set (S4704), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, The processing ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4801). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). In the process of (1), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process shifts to S4806. In the process of S4805, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4807), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) In, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808 (S4809), and this process ends. By receiving the display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to perform the stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effector.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start program of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 64A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is performed (see S7502 in FIG. 64A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the change pattern command for display from the main control unit 110 via the sound lamp control unit 113, that is, when the change pattern command for power supply is received, the change image at power-on is displayed immediately during the change effect period, and the simple change You can make a production. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 55B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process has been executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 26, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A to F, small hit, reach out of front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear miss, reach out of front / rear miss, complete out of position indicated by the display stop type command) ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of the big hits A to F, the small hits, the out of reach, or the completely out of the way) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Note that the start of the change is always determined at least several seconds in the main control device 110, so that no more than two display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing an opening command process. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7002. .

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or the back B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7002 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6414, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is next determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If (S6416: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the warning image to be displayed.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6418 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. After extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 57 (b)) corresponding to the respective commands, A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S6502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S7208: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The content is cleared (S7210) by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and a simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 55 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and store them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-described drawing processing (S6306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). In other words, in the process of S7801, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 55B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the position at which the ball is likely to enter the ball when left-handed (a game method in which the ball is fired toward the flow path on the left side in front view of the game board 13) is performed. When the ball is hit right (a game method in which the ball is fired toward the right channel in the game board 13 when viewed from the front in the game board 13), the ball easily enters (left hit). And a second ball entry port 640 disposed at a position where the ball becomes difficult to enter the ball). When a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is disadvantageous for the player (because almost no prize ball is obtained during the jackpot) While it is highly probable that the game will shift to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot), if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the game It is configured to increase the possibility that the player will be advantageous (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained at the jackpot, and a transition to the advantageous variable mode after the jackpot is made advantageous). Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel that he wants to execute a more advantageous first special symbol lottery than the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery.

  In addition, the channel on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front is provided with a specific winning opening 65a which is opened during a big hit and in which a large amount (11) of prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters. Like the second entrance 640, the specific winning opening 65a allows the ball to enter when hitting right (easy entry) and impossibility to enter when hit left (difficult to enter). It is provided at a position where For this reason, in order to obtain a prize ball by winning the ball to the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit, it is necessary to right-hit the ball. As described above, when the player hits right, the ball also enters the second entrance 640, so that after the big hit, the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be accumulated to the upper limit. For this reason, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to form a state where the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous at the time of the jackpot, is continuously executed. The game can be played in the hope that all the reserved balls of the symbol will come off (small hit). That is, in a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player that the jackpot is again set in the hold after the jackpot is completed (so-called extended holding), but in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, It is possible to cause the player to perform an advantage in expectation that the reserved in-house will not occur. Therefore, a novel game characteristic different from a general pachinko machine can be provided, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, each time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the execution of the jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased reserved ball is pre-read, and the effect of the mode according to the pre-read result is provided. Is executed. In other words, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is out of order (small hit) is executed. More specifically, an effect is executed in which the adventurer 811 acquires a key 813 in a mode according to the prefetch result of the increased lottery result of the reserved ball. With this effect, it is possible to make the player guess from the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the probability change mode during the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit from being merely an operation for obtaining a prize ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the big hit game.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the sphere of the second special symbol from the ending period of the jackpots A to D until the variation time of all the variable display based on the sphere of the second special symbol elapses. An effect is executed to notify the player whether or not the jackpots E and F exist therein. That is, even after all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are finished, an effect is performed to suggest whether the game state remains in the probable mode or falls to the normal mode. . With a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and the plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a small hit is made with a high probability. Then, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each of the rounds of the big hits E and F are the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the end of the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F is set to 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . With this configuration, even if any of the first to fourth retained balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door break mode effect is completed. A series of opening / closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as the case where the probable change mode is notified (when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are small hits). That is, regardless of whether the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the end of the jackpot until the end of the door breakthrough mode effect is performed. The operation can be unified to the operation of repeating the closing for one second and the opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 after the end of the big hit, it becomes difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is due to the continuous small hit or the opening / closing operation due to the big hit E or F. It is possible to draw attention to the door break mode production to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed prior to the lottery of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specification in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel may be adopted. With this configuration, it is possible to make a big hit by the variable display of the first special symbol before the draw of the disadvantageous second special symbol is executed. , It is possible to make the left-hander more positive. In this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, a variation pattern of a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%). . With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol one or more times during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that there is a chance to win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. Can be formed.

  In the first embodiment, a left-handed notification is issued from the start of the ending period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the player can be notified so as not to continue right-handing after the end of the jackpot. "May be displayed so that the player can switch to left-handing immediately after the end condition of the final round is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 after the end of the big hit.

  In the first embodiment, when the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is uniformly 3 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a when the ordinary symbol is hit is 1 second × Although the configuration is set to twice, it is not limited to this. For example, after the jackpot is completed, only the fluctuation time of the first ordinary symbol may be set to a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than a period until at least all the fluctuations based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. Good. With this configuration, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the normal symbol does not hit, so from the opening time of the ordinary symbol, the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in a lottery and the ordinary symbol has a low probability state. It can be difficult to determine whether the driver has fallen or the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the result of the door break mode effect.

  In the first embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a small win is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the second special symbol comes off, instead of the configuration in which all are just mere coming off, the fluctuation time in the case of a big hit is varied according to the number of changes after the big hit, and the door breaking mode The period from the start of the effect to the start of the second special symbol jackpot, and the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode effect to the end of all four variable displays corresponding to the second special symbol being disengaged. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the period (the period until shifting to the probable change mode) is matched. More specifically, if a big hit is made in the first lottery of the second special symbol after the big hit, a change time of 4 seconds is set, and a big hit is made in the second lottery of the second special symbol. Is set to 3 seconds as the fluctuating time, and in the case of a big hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol, 2 seconds is set as the fluctuating time and a big hit in the fourth lottery of the second special symbol. In such a case, one second may be set as the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, when the holding balls of the four second special symbols are all missed, the total of the fluctuation time is 4 seconds (1 second x 4), and when a big hit occurs on the way, The period until the jackpot is started (4 seconds) can be matched. Therefore, for 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door break mode effect, the specific winning opening 65a is not opened even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the certainty change mode before the operation of the specific winning opening 65a ends the door breakthrough mode effect. During the period from the start of the door break mode effect to the start of the second special symbol jackpot, the variable display corresponding to four times of the second special symbol coming off from the start of the door break mode effect is displayed. If it is longer than the period up to the end, the jackpot will not be started at least during execution of the door-break mode effect. Therefore, when the second special symbol is simply hit, the variation time may be set to be equal to or more than the sum of the variation times of the variable display corresponding to the four times of the second special symbol.

  In the first embodiment, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the first to fourth rounds in the big hits E and F is the same as the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the small hit (0.2 seconds). However, the difference may be arbitrarily determined as long as it is not possible for the player to discern whether the difference is the open period of the big hit or the open period of the small hit by the bodily sensation. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery of the first special symbol is advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. Then, if the second special symbol lottery wins, the door break mode directs a success in which the door breaks through, and if all the second special symbol lotteries are missed, the door breaks off. May be configured to be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize a more intuitive game property, that is, a big hit if the door is successfully breached. Further, in this case, the first entrance 64 may be deleted and only the second entrance 640 may be provided. That is, it may be configured that only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

  In the first embodiment, it is difficult to know whether the lottery of the second special symbol has been a big hit or a small hit while the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is being executed. Although the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set as described above, it is not limited to the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol that makes it difficult to determine whether the winning is a big hit or a small hit. For example, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is determined, the big hit type in which the small hit and the same action as the small hit (the same action or an action in which the player cannot distinguish it from the small hit) is determined. Good.

  In the first embodiment, a jackpot ending period is started to determine whether or not all the reserved balls of the second special symbol held during the jackpot are to be released (small hits) (to shift to the probability change mode). , The process is executed over a period until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least part of the transition to the probable change mode, a configuration may be provided to notify the transition to the probable change mode during the ending period. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol is pre-read, and if it is determined that all the pre-read results are out of place (small hit), the probability is changed during the big hit ending period with a predetermined probability. A configuration for notifying the transition to the mode may be adopted. With such a configuration, the player can be notified of the transition to the probable change mode more quickly, so that the player can be pleased. Note that when notifying the transition to the probable change mode during the ending period, an effect that breaks through four doors may be executed at a stretch, or an effect that is different from the normal door break mode effect may be executed. Is also good. Here, as an effect that is different from the normal door break mode effect, for example, an effect in which the theme song of the adventurer 811 flows may be executed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is blacked out. After that, an effect may be executed in which the character “determination of the probability change mode” appears on the display screen. Furthermore, when an effect that determines to shift to the probability change mode is executed during the ending period, the effect is not changed until the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol ends (that is, until the probability change mode is started). ) It may be configured to keep executing. With this configuration, it is possible for a player who has learned to shift to the probability change mode early (during the ending period) to shift to the probability change mode in the remaining period before shifting to the probability change mode. It can be immersed in the lingering sound. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

  Further, a configuration may be provided in which the transition to the probable change mode is notified before the ending period. More specifically, when the starting winning corresponding to the fourth holding ball of the second special symbol is detected, and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command. It is determined whether all the winning information of the second special symbol is out of place (small hit). Then, when all pieces of winning information are out of place (small hits), an effect indicating a shift to the probable change mode may be executed at that time. In addition, as an effect indicating the transition to the probability change mode, for example, an effect that the adventurer 811 finds a key 813 in a special (premium) mode may be executed. The configuration may be such that the music flowing inside is changed to a special (premium) music.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 is set during a big hit. When the ball passes, the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change mode. In addition, as long as the signal passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode and the jackpot are repeated indefinitely.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which the gaming state after the jackpot is determined in advance for each jackpot type. In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive special change states of the special symbol, and if the upper limit is reached, even after the winning of the probability change big hit, after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, I have.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, in order to prevent the player from making a right-handed hit at a normal time (a state other than during a big hit), when a start winning prize to the second ball entrance 640 is detected at a normal time, It was configured to execute a warning effect.

  On the other hand, in the present second embodiment, the motorized accessory 640b is provided to the second ball entry port 640, and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 at normal times because it is obstructed by the motorized accessory 640b. It is configured to be difficult. Also, during the jackpot state, by controlling the electric accessory 640b provided along with the second entrance 640 so as to be easily opened, the second special during the jackpot as in the first embodiment. It is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit number. In addition, since the electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. .

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. It is partly changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a normal entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, a variable winning device 650 and a second ball entrance 640 are provided downstream of the normal ball entrance 67. The variable prize device 650 is provided in place of the variable prize device 65 in the first embodiment, and is used as a prize port in which 13 prize balls are paid out every time a ball wins in the specific prize port 650a of the variable prize apparatus 650. It is configured. The specific winning opening 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can enter (easy) and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter (difficult), and is opened in each round of the jackpot. Set to state.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a closed position where the ball is prevented from entering the second entrance 640 and an open position where the ball can enter. FIG. The case where it is variable is illustrated. Although the details will be described later, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled such that the ball easily enters the ball in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol than in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (time saving state). Is More specifically, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is slightly higher than in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (199/240 → 200/240), but the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is long. At the same time (3 seconds → 30 seconds), the opening period of the motorized accessory 640b when a normal symbol is hit is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol as a whole. Therefore, in the probable mode in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is disadvantageous in the second special. Execution of a symbol lottery can be suppressed. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  In addition, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640 eliminates the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment. Then, below the first ball entrance 64, a special figure 1 small hit prize winning device 655 is provided. The special figure 1 small hit prize winning device 655 sets the ball into the inside by setting the special figure 1 small hit prize winning port 655a to the open state when a small win is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol. You will be able to enter the ball. In the second embodiment, when the probability change mode is set, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is greatly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000). In such a case, the number of balls to be consumed is equal to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the special figure 1 small hit prize hole 655a, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is equal to the number of balls to be consumed. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the case where the left-handed operation is performed during the probable change mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the sorting member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the downstream side of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is provided. Are branched in substantially three directions. That is, the flow path toward the second ball entrance 640, the flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and the out port 66 without going to any of these (the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning port 650a). And a flow channel that flows down toward. With such a configuration, similarly to the first embodiment, a part of the ball that is shot toward the specific winning opening 650a by right-handing during the big hit can be made to enter the second opening 640. it can. Therefore, the configuration can be such that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit number during the big hit. Thereby, also in the second embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel playability that hopes that all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol executed after the big hit will be missed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a flow path toward the second entrance 640 by a plurality of nails, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out opening 66. And form. Therefore, by adjusting the nails by the clerk of the hall, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second entrance 640 and the ratio of the balls distributed to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted according to the management policy of the hall, and the pachinko machine 10 with higher convenience can be realized.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the second embodiment, the range of possible values of the first hit type counter C1 is expanded to 0 to 999.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0-9” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 68 (a)). As in the first embodiment, the jackpot determination value is common to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, “10-998” is defined as the range of the determination value for determining that the first special symbol has deviated (see 202a2 in FIG. 68A). "999" is defined as the range. Also, "10, 11" is defined as the range of the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is out of range (see 202a2 in FIG. 68A), and the determination value for determining the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “12 to 999” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 68A).

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value to be a big hit, the judgment value to be out of range, and the range of the judgment value to be a small hit are all the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is common to the two special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), “0 to 10” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a4 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the determination is made to be out. “11” is defined as the value (see 202a5 in FIG. 68A), and “12 to 999” is defined as the determination value for determining the small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 68A).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is made different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol In this configuration, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls to be consumed when the player hits the left during the probable variation mode and the lottery of the first special symbol become a small hit, and the ball enters the special figure 1 small hit winning opening 655a. It is configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out is equal. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the case where the left-handed operation is performed during the probable change mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  The small hits of the second special symbol and the small hits of the first special symbol are configured so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is different, and the small hits of the first special symbol have more prizes. The ball can be obtained. On the other hand, in the small hit of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for only 0.2 seconds, so that it becomes difficult for the player to acquire the prize ball. Therefore, if the player hits the ball at the right time during normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and it is easy to determine a disadvantageous jackpot type even if the jackpot becomes large, and the prize ball is given even if the small jackpot is reached. Since it can hardly be acquired, it is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of performing left-handed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in normal times.

  Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the second embodiment, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and the jackpot D2 is set as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the first special symbol, "big hit A2" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9". (See 202b1 in FIG. 68 (b)). This “big hit A2” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 16 and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit A2", so if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit A2" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The “big hit A2” is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. Accordingly, in each round, the upper limit number (six) of balls can be made to win the specific winning opening 650a almost certainly before the elapse of 30 seconds just by continuing to make a right hit. When the jackpot A2 is reached, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  For the first special symbol, "big hit B2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 69" (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (b)). . The "big hit B2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds and the special symbol probable change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B2" is 60, so "big hit B2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). Like the “big hit A2”, the “big hit B2” is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as in "big hit A2".

  For the first special symbol, "big hit C2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 68 (b)). . The "big hit C2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of “big hit C2” is 30. Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, “big hit C2” is determined. Is 30% (30/100). Like the “big hit A2” and the “big hit B2”, the “big hit C2” is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. . Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” or “big hit B”.

  As described above, when the first special symbol is a lottery, a prize ball of two rounds, seven rounds, or sixteen rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the end of the big hit is almost certainly changed in the probability change mode. Therefore, regardless of the type of the jackpot, it is advantageous for the player. In addition, since the ratio of determining the 7 rounds and the 16 rounds, which are relatively large, is high (ratio of 70%), it is possible to expect to obtain a large amount of prize balls when the first special symbol hits a jackpot. Therefore, the player can be pleased when a large hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, the "big hit D2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 68 (b)). This “big hit D2” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit D2", so "big hit D2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit D2" is opened until the specific winning port 650a passes for 30 seconds or until six balls are won in each round of the big hit. Therefore, a relatively large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, the "big hit E2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5-99". (See 202b5 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit E2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 95 counter values that are "big hit E2". Therefore, if a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E2" is determined. Is 95% (95/100). This "big hit E2" is different from other big hit types, and in each round of the big hit, the specific winning opening 650a is opened until 0.2 seconds elapse or until six balls are won. Since it is difficult to make a ball enter the specific winning opening 650a for 0.2 seconds, the "big hit E2" is a disadvantageous big hit type in which a prize ball cannot be acquired. Also, as described above, the upper limit (four times) is provided for the number of consecutive special symbol change states, and if a jackpot is reached when the upper limit number of times has been reached, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type is changed. It is configured to be in the disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if the "big hit E" is reached, the prize ball cannot be obtained, and the number of times required to shift to the normal mode is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a winning ball cannot be obtained with a high probability (a ratio of 95%) and the remaining jackpot until the normal mode is set. The big hit type (big hit E2) in which the number of times is reduced is determined. That is, similarly to the first embodiment, the configuration is such that when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the possibility of an undesirable result for the player increases. Accordingly, a novel game can be realized, in which a game can be performed in the hope that the lottery result will be lost during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, details of the second random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 203” is defined as the determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). Also, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 69). In other words, the configuration is such that the number of the determination values determined to be the hit of the ordinary symbol differs by only one in the ordinary state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. As a result, even in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the winning probability can be made substantially equal to that in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is longer than that in the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric power when the ordinary symbol is hit is obtained. The opening period of the accessory 640b is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol as a whole. Therefore, in the probable mode in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is disadvantageous in the second special. Execution of a symbol lottery can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a state other than the state in which the door break mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 202. As shown in FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 202 according to the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 202 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that a probable variable limit counter 203aa and a counter 203ab during breakthrough mode are added. Are different. In addition, the difference is that the probability change setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the probability variation valid flag 203n, the probability variation valid timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are deleted.

  The probability change limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of consecutive times of the probability change state until the normal mode is set. When the normal mode is set as the state after the end of the jackpot, the certainty variable limit counter 203aa is set to 4, which is the maximum number of consecutive times of the certainty change state (see S1314 in FIG. 78). , Is subtracted by one (see S1311 in FIG. 78). If the value of the probability limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the big hit, the normal mode is set after the big hit is finished.

  The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter that indicates the remaining number of changes in the door breakthrough mode effect. At the end of the big hits A2 to D2, the number of balls retained in the second special symbol is set as a counter value (see S1316 in FIG. 78). ), The value is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of the fluctuation (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode (the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the door breakthrough mode effect) is transmitted in the form of a fluctuation pattern command. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 reads out the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab from the fluctuation pattern command, and grasps the remaining number of fluctuations until the door break-through mode effect ends. In particular, since the storage contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 are not backed up, if the power is shut off during execution of the door break mode effect, the progress of the door break mode effect after the power is restored is controlled by the sound lamp control. The information cannot be grasped on the device 113 side.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since information corresponding to the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is included in the variation pattern command and output to the sound ramp control device 113, the door breakthrough mode effect is produced. Even if the power is shut off during execution and the contents stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, after the power is restored, the first variation pattern command received is analyzed to execute the door-break mode effect. It can be grasped whether or not it is in progress and the progress thereof. Thereby, even if the power is shut off during the execution of the door break mode effect, the effect can be restarted from the continuation of the door break mode effect after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect contents from being changed before and after the power is turned off, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect contents.

  Next, a state transition method according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, three types of states are switched between a normal mode, a door breaking mode, and a probability change mode. In the second embodiment, the contents of the door breaking mode are changed from those of the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the above-described first embodiment is a state in which the special symbol is surely changed, and is a time saving state of a normal symbol, and only shows a state in which a reserved ball of the second special symbol exists. In addition, in the second embodiment, the state in which the special symbol is in the low probability state and the ordinary symbol is in the normal state, and the state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol is present is also in the door breaking mode. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of description, the door breaking mode in which the special symbol probable change state and the normal symbol time saving state are set is referred to as door breaking mode 1, and the special symbol low probability state, and The door breaking mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as a door breaking mode 2. Note that the door breaking mode 1 is illustrated on the middle left side of FIG. 71, and the door breaking mode 2 is illustrated on the middle left side of FIG. 71.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility that the state is shifted to another state only when a big hit occurs. More specifically, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode always shifts to the door breaking mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (at most 30 seconds) in each round of the jackpot. When the ball is launched, a large amount of the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, at the end of the big hit, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit value, and the state after the big hit is the door breaking mode (door breaking mode 1).

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, in the door breaking mode (door breaking modes 1 and 2), the second special symbol lottery is basically a big hit, or the second special symbol lottery is completely removed. If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 becomes 0, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state. The state of the transition destination in the case of a jackpot is common to the door breaking modes 1 and 2, but the state of the transition destination when the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 is the door breaking mode 1 This is different from Door Breakthrough Mode 2. Specifically, in the door breaking mode 1, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the probability change mode (see the middle left side of FIG. 71). In the probable change mode, by performing left-handing, the player can execute only the lottery of the first special symbol which is advantageous, and the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol increases (for small hitting). The winning opening 655a is easily opened), so that the game can be continued until the first special symbol hits the jackpot without substantially reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the door breaking mode 2, when the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 71). In the normal mode, since the small hitting probability is low, if the player hits the left to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, the number of possessed balls will continue to decrease until the jackpot is reached, which is disadvantageous for the player compared to the probability change mode. Become.

  As shown in the middle section of FIG. 71, in the case of the door-break mode, when the jackpot E2 is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, after the end of the jackpot, on the condition that the number of consecutive probable changes has not reached the upper limit. The mode shifts to the probable change mode (common to door break modes 1 and 2). At the jackpot E2, as described above, the opening time of the specific winning opening 650a is short (0.2 seconds), and a prize ball cannot be obtained even if the player hits right. Also, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, the large hit E2 and the small hit of the second special symbol are notified to the left. Therefore, unless the player intentionally makes a right-handing against the notification, the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not accumulate during the execution of the jackpot E2, and after the jackpot E2 is over, shifts to the direct change mode directly. I do. Note that, in this case, the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa that counts the number of times the remaining probability change state continues until shifting to the normal mode is decremented by one. Therefore, when the big hit E2 occurs, the winning ball cannot be obtained, and the number of times of the probability change state is subtracted, which is an undesirable result for the player. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds a plurality of times in the door breaking mode, the player wants all the opening operations to be due to the small hit of the second special symbol. It is possible to realize a novel game property of making a wish.

  When the second special symbol jackpot E2 is reached in the door breaking mode and the probability variable limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (the number of consecutive probability variation states reaches the upper limit value), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the large hit. Therefore, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breach mode effect, an effect in which the breach of the door fails is executed, and the transition to the normal mode is notified.

  As shown in the middle section of FIG. 71, when the jackpot D2 is won during the door break mode, the door break mode (either the door break mode 1 or the door break mode 2) is performed again after the end of the jackpot D2. Move to. More specifically, if the number of consecutive probable changes has not reached the upper limit, door breakthrough mode 1 (probable state of special symbols and time saving of ordinary symbols) is set, and the number of consecutive probable changes is the upper limit. If it has reached, the door break mode 2 (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of ordinary symbol) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, the game can be shifted to the certainty change mode if the holding ball of the second special symbol does not cause a big hit, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the door breaking mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), the ball falls into the normal mode, so that the big hit becomes more advantageous. .

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability change mode, when a special symbol hits, a transition is made to another game state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and the number of consecutive probability change states has not reached the upper limit value (the probability change limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breaking mode is started after the end of the jackpot. . On the other hand, when the number of consecutive probable change states has reached the upper limit value (probable change limit counter 203aa has become 0), the state after the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit during the big hit. That is, an effect of notifying that the state after the end of the jackpot is the normal mode is executed, for example, in the ending period of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode, a prize ball can be acquired with a high probability (95%, which is a rate at which the jackpot E2 is determined). This results in an unfavorable result for the player, in that the remaining number of consecutive times in the probability variation state (the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) is decremented. Therefore, in the door breach mode, it is possible to play a game in the hope that the second special symbol will not be a big hit.

  In the door break mode effect of the second embodiment, if the jackpot E2 is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, an effect of failing to break through the door is temporarily performed (see FIG. 10A). You. If the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit value (the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa is not 0), as a result of the adventurer 811 challenging the door again through a so-called resurrection effect, the door breaks through. A successful production is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot E2 is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit value, the resuming effect is not performed, and the process directly shifts to the normal mode. With such a configuration, even when the mode is shifted to the probable change mode, it is possible to recognize that the remaining number of continuous times has been reduced when a resurrection effect is accompanied.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability change mode, the state shifts to another state only when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, if the first special symbol hits the jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode 1 after the end of the jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit number of times. In this case, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode 2 after the end of the big hit.

  Note that when the door break mode 2 is entered, the door break mode is directed to the normal mode when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are released (small hits). An effect to notify the transition is executed. In other words, an effect is executed that has the opposite result to the door breaking mode 1 (and the door breaking mode effect in the first embodiment). Further, when the jackpot E2 is reached in the door-break mode 2, the probability change mode is notified through the resurrection effect, similarly to the case where the remaining continuous number of times in the probability change state remains in the door break mode 1.

  Thus, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, a state where the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit (limit), in which the door breakthrough mode 1 shifts when any of the jackpots A2 to D2 is reached in a state where the number of times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit. And a door break-through mode 2 that shifts to any one of the jackpots A2 to D2. As in the first embodiment, the door breaking mode 1 shifts to the probable change mode which is advantageous to the player when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit). It is more advantageous not to win the jackpot in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is a state in which the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol are internally set, and the upper limit of the continuous number of the probability change state is reset. Therefore, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off, the mode shifts to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, the second special symbol wins during the door break mode 2, so that the mode can be shifted to the door break mode 1 or the probable change mode. Is more advantageous for the player. In the door breaking mode 2, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hits), and if the mode shifts to the normal mode, a large amount of possessed balls may be consumed before the big hits. It is.

  Depending on the type of the door breaking mode, it may be more advantageous if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are advantageous, or it may be advantageous if the reserved ball of the second special symbol includes a jackpot. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the door breaking mode, it is possible to predict which mode is the current door breaking mode. Then, depending on the predicted mode type, it is possible to expect a departure or a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20B) in that a post-input flag 223i is added. are doing. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The post-input flag 223i is a flag indicating that the power has been turned on again after the door opening mode has been set to the middle stage due to the power cutoff of the pachinko machine 10 during the execution of the door opening mode, and the door opening mode has been restarted. It is. The post-input flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the door-breaking-mode effect is being executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and that the change is other than the last change in the door-breaking-mode effect. (See S5102 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the details of the special symbol change start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This special symbol change start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes of S301 to S309 and S311, S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing of S311 is executed.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after determining the variation pattern in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value is read. And a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 (S322).

  In the special symbol change start process 2 (see FIG. 73) according to the second embodiment, after the process of S311 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S323). In the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is larger than 0 (that is, the door break mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is decremented by one. Then (S324), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S323 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door break mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped. This processing ends as it is.

  By the special symbol change start process 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress status of the door break mode effect (the value of the counter 203ab during the break mode) is included in the change pattern command and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a deviation between the actual remaining number of times of the door break mode effect and the effect mode executed by the sound lamp control device 113. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the contents stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the variation pattern command is configured to include the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab, it is possible to easily analyze the variation pattern command that is output first after the power is restored, and to easily perform the analysis before the power is turned off. Can be grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the effect state before the power is cut off.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the situation where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is basically only during the big hit and during the execution of the door break mode effect. Therefore, in a situation where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more and the jackpot is not being hit, it seems that it is sufficient to determine that the door break mode effect is being executed. However, also in the case where the player makes a right-handed intentionally or erroneously at the normal time, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may become one or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, it is notified that the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more by the reserved ball number command, so that the sound lamp control device 113 side opens the door. There is a problem that the user mistakenly recognizes that the breakthrough mode effect is being executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the progress status of the door break mode effect is included in the variation pattern command and output, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more at the time of power restoration, It can be understood whether the door breaking mode is being executed or whether the player has just intentionally or mistakenly made a right-handed operation at normal times. Therefore, the effect mode after the power is restored can be accurately returned to the state before the power was cut off.

  In the second embodiment, the number of times of change until the door break mode effect is completed is grasped by the break mode counter 203ab, and is output in the change pattern command. A configuration may be adopted in which only information on whether or not the program is being executed is included in the variation pattern command and output. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to grasp the number of times of change until the door break mode effect is completed, based on the information and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the main control device 110 can omit the process of updating the counter 203ab during the door breach mode, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623, the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S614 that the current time is in the ordinary symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), the variation of the ordinary symbol is performed. The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S614, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the ordinary symbol (S614: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this processing is ended.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second ball entry is performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b attached to the mouth 640 are set to “1 second × 2 times” (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the current symbol is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640 are set to “ 0.2 times × 1 time ”(S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the normal symbol in the normal state is shorter in fluctuation time of the normal symbol than in the normal symbol time reduction state, and the opening time when the normal symbol is hit is reduced. It is configured to be long. Further, as described above, the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment indicates whether the normal symbol is in the normal state (low-probability state) and the normal symbol is in the high-probability state. The configuration is such that the number of determination values to be determined differs by only one. As a result, even in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability is almost the same as the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, so that in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol as a whole, the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the probable mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so the disadvantageous second special symbol is used. Execution of the lottery can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a state other than the state in which the door break mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  Next, a start-up process 2 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

  Of the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, in the processes of S901 to S910 and S913, S901 to S910 and S913 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed. In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, a status command setting process for setting a status command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. Details of the state command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the status command setting process (S921). In this status command setting process (S921), first, the probable variable flag 203g is read (S1801), and a status command is set based on the read status of the probable variable flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol is changing (S1803). If the special symbol is changing (S1803: Yes), the data of the execution area and the value of the change time counter 203q are read (S1804). . Next, the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is read (S1805), and a variation pattern command is set based on the read values (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1803 that the special symbol is not fluctuating (S1803: No), each processing of S1804 to S1807 is skipped, and the present processing ends as it is.

  By executing the state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is turned off, the progress of the door breach mode effect, and the like are recorded in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75). The notification can be made to the lamp control device 113.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

  Among the jackpot control processes 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. Also, the same processes as those in S1107 to S1109 are executed.

  Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. The state is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and the process ends. In the second embodiment, a variable winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharging channel 65e1 and the special discharging channel 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, in the big hit control process 2 (see FIG. 77), it is not necessary to execute the process of switching the flow path, and thus these processes (S1202 and S1203 in FIG. 38) are deleted.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) according to the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the jackpot ending timing (S1109: Yes), the jackpot ending process (S1109: Yes) in the first embodiment. Instead of the big hit end processing 2 (see S1110 in FIG. 37), the big hit end processing 2 is executed (S1123), and this processing ends. Details of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), the prize processing 2 is executed instead of the prize processing in the first embodiment (see S1111 in FIG. 37) (S1124). ), End this processing. Details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment does not include a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. This is because, in the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability change state after the jackpot is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65. This is because in the second embodiment, there is a difference that the game state after the big hit is determined according to the big hit type. For this reason, in the second embodiment, when the ball is left inside the variable winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not the probability change state occurs, but an illegal act that leaves the ball inside. It does not hold itself. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not an abnormality in which a ball remains inside the variable winning device 650 has occurred is deleted (see FIG. 41).

  In the second embodiment, naturally, a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment may be executed. Accordingly, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 650, an error can be notified early.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1123) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S1123). In the big hit end processing 2 (S1123), first, the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1311), and it is determined whether the counter value after the subtraction has become 0 or not.

  In the process of S1311, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive probable change states has not reached the upper limit (limit), and therefore the probable change flag is set. 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, when it is determined that the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa after the subtraction has become 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit value. Then, without executing the process of S1313 for turning on the probable variable flag 203g (leaving the probable variable flag 203g off), the value of the probable variable limit counter 203aa is set to 4 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315. .

  In the processing of S1315 executed after the end of the processing of S1313 or S1314, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode. (S1316). Then, a status command is set based on the status of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the probable change limit counter 203aa in the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps not only the game state after the jackpot but also the remaining number of times until the number of continuous probable states reaches the upper limit (limit). be able to. When the processing in S1317 ends, the big hit flag 203r is set to OFF (S1318), and the processing ends.

  Next, the details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described with reference to FIG. This winning process 2 (S1124) is a process executed in place of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the winning processing 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408, respectively, S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing from S1408 to S1408 is executed.

  In the prize processing 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the processing in S1404 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431). If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1431, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1409 to S1420 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, and determining whether or not a ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at normal timing. This is because the processing is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in which the discharge passage 65e2, the positive change switch 65e3, and the like are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 80, start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment.

  In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, the processes in S4001 to S4013 are the same as the respective processes in S4001 to S4013 in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process in S4012 ends, the power-on state is then determined based on the state command and the variation pattern command output from main controller 110. Is executed (S4021), and the process shifts to S4013. Details of the insertion state determination processing (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the state determination process at the time of insertion (S4021). In the closing state determination processing (S4021), first, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4901), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No). Then, a back image according to the game state at the time of power-on is set (S4902), and this processing ends. Here, the game state at the time of power-on is determined based on the data in the game state storage area 223h updated in the processing of S4012 of the start-up processing 2 (see FIG. 80), and if the current state is a probable change state. The back image for the probable change state is set, and the back image for the normal state is set in the normal state. Note that the door break mode effect is an effect that is performed during the change of the second special symbol, and thus there is no possibility of the door break mode when the power is turned on when the change is stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S4903). ), It is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed. If the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

  In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is not 0 (the door break mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door break mode effect is performed. A mode selection process is performed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. Details of this breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the change pattern command is 0 (that is, the door break mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the remaining change The effect mode according to the time and the lottery result is determined (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the process of S4907, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906 (S4907), and the process ends.

  Next, details of the breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905).

  In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 1 (S5001). If there is any (S5001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern (S5002). In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation pattern (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h is data indicating a probable change state (S5003). If it is in the probable change state (S5003: Yes), the power is cut off during the execution of the fluctuation display based on the last second special symbol reserved ball in the door breach mode 1 (see the middle left side of FIG. 71), and the execution is performed. It means that the last ball in the middle was missed (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed with the remaining fluctuation time, an effect mode for notifying the transition to the probable change mode is determined (S5004), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5003, if it is determined that the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h is the data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breaking mode 2 (the middle part of FIG. 71) (Refer to the right side) means that the power supply was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last retained ball of the second special symbol, and that the last retained ball being executed was released (small hit). Therefore, in this case, the effect mode for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined as the effect mode to be executed with the remaining fluctuation time (S5004), and the present process ends. By the processing of S5003 and S5004, even if the state at the time when the power is turned on again is the execution of the last variable display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is determined based on the lottery result and the game state. The result of the breakthrough mode effect can be accurately reported.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is not 1 (it is 2 or more) (S5001: No), and if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 If it is determined that the variation pattern being executed at the time of power restoration is the jackpot variation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is the jackpot E2 (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot E2 (S5006: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of consecutive probable changes has reached an upper limit (limit) (S5007). It should be noted that the remaining number up to the upper limit value of the continuous number of times of the probability change state is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a state command together with the game state at the time of power-on.

  In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probable change state has been reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the big hit becomes the normal mode, so that the transition to the normal mode is notified. Then, the processing shifts to the processing of S5005 described above. On the other hand, in the processing of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probable changes has not been reached, the state after the jackpot is the probable change mode, and the door breakthrough succeeds through the resurrection effect. The effect mode is determined (S5008), and the process ends. As described above, this resurrection effect is based on the fact that the jackpot E2 has reduced the number of remaining times up to the upper limit (limit) of the continuous number of probable changes even though the prize ball was not obtained. It is the production shown. The resurrection effect allows the player to recognize that the big hit E2 has been won during the door break mode effect.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5006 that the hit pattern is not the big hit E2 (S5006: No), then, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is the big hit D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the jackpot D2 (S5009: Yes), a special effect mode indicating that a big hit has occurred in the door breakthrough mode effect is determined (S5010). Then, the present process ends.

  In the process of S5009, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a deviation (small hit) and the current fluctuation pattern Means that this is not the last change in the door break mode, so that the state of the breakthrough effect corresponding to the value of the extracted break mode counter 203ab is determined (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 according to the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is determined. Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the post-insertion flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and the process ends. By setting the post-insertion flag 223i to ON, it is possible to determine that the effect has been restarted in the middle of the door breach mode at the time of power-on, even when the next and subsequent fluctuation patterns are received.

  The door break mode effect in the second embodiment is basically 5.8 seconds from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the fourth special winning opening 650a opening period, similarly to the first embodiment. A series of effects of the effect time are set. That is, at the start of the door break mode effect, the result of the door break mode effect is determined in advance based on the result of the look-ahead of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, during the execution of the door break mode effect, when a new variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received, it is only necessary to simply execute the predetermined effect mode as it is. However, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door-break mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, and the progress of the door-break mode effect and the result of the effect are produced. Etc. cannot be grasped. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the power is shut off during the execution of the door-break mode effect, and when the power is turned on again, it is possible to recognize the fact by the post-input flag 223i. While the post-insertion flag 223i is on, every time the variation pattern command is received, the door break mode is set based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect, and to set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door-break mode effect while keeping the information output from the main control device 110 to a minimum.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. In the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) of the second embodiment, in S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment, S4801 to S4803, respectively. Also, the same processing as the respective processing of S4805 to S4809 is executed.

  In the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 is completed, then, the rough variation display mode (notified by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110) Based on the (variation time), a variation pattern determination process for determining a detailed effect form of the variation pattern is performed (S4811). Details of this variation pattern determination processing (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4811 is completed, a display variation pattern command is set based on the detailed effect of the variation pattern determined in the process of S4811 (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, the details of the above-described variation pattern determination processing (S4811) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the post-input flag 223i is on (S5101). If the post-input flag 223i is off (S5101: No), the main control device 110 Based on the rough mode of the variation pattern extracted from the output variation pattern command, the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern is determined (S5102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the post-input flag 223i is on (S5101: Yes), the power is turned off and then turned on again during the execution of the door breach mode effect. Therefore, a process for determining an effect mode during the door break mode effect is executed according to the information of the break mode counter 203ab included in the fluctuation pattern command and the lottery result.

  Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the change pattern command (S5103), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the last change in the door breakthrough mode effect). Is determined (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then, it is determined whether the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a deviation variation pattern. If it is determined (S5105) and it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation pattern (S5105: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current state is the special symbol variation state based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h. (S5106).

  In the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current state is the special symbol change state (S5106: Yes), an effect mode (see FIG. 10B) for notifying the shift to the certainty change mode is determined, and the process is performed. The process moves to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol (S5106: No), an effect mode (see FIG. 10A) for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

  In contrast, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and when the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), and when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation pattern has been notified (S5105: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot is E2 (S5109).

  In the process of S5109, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probable variations has been reached. Then, if the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times has been reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the end of the jackpot E2 cannot be set to the certainty change mode, so that the transition to the normal mode is notified. The flow shifts to the process of S5108 for determining an effect mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5110, when it is determined that the number of consecutive probable changes has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect form of the resurrection effect is determined (S5111), and the process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5109, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the big hit E2 (S5109: No), it is next determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit D2. If it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the jackpot D2 (S5112: Yes), the special door break mode effect for notifying the jackpot is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. And migrate.

  In addition, in the process of S5112, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5112: No), the variation pattern of this time is a variation pattern of small (small hit), and the remaining number of times of the variation in the door-through mode effect ( Since the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol) is 2 or more, the effect mode of the door break mode effect is determined according to the value of the break mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 (S5114). Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and the process ends.

  In the processing of S5116 executed after any of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 ends, the post-insertion flag 223i is reset to off, and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), this process ends.

  By executing this variation pattern determination process, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door-break mode production, after the power is turned on again, the production is performed from the middle of the door break mode production. The mode can be restored. More specifically, if the power is shut off during the execution of the door-break mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, so that the progress status of the door-break mode effect, the result of the effect, and the like can be grasped. You will not be able to. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the power is shut off during the execution of the door-break mode effect, and when the power is turned on again, it is possible to recognize the fact by the post-input flag 223i. While the post-insertion flag 223i is on, every time the variation pattern command is received, the door break mode is set based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect, and to set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door-break mode effect while keeping the information output from the main control device 110 to a minimum.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which the gaming state after the big hit is predetermined for each big hit type. Also, an upper limit (limit) is set for the number of consecutive special symbol change states, and if the upper limit is reached, the special symbol will be set to the low probability state after the big hit even if the winning is won. Make up. With such a configuration, it is possible to form two types, a door breaking mode (a door breaking mode 1) in which a special symbol is in a probable state and a door breaking mode in which a special symbol is in a low probability state. it can. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility that the mode shifts to the normal mode even if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed. Therefore, according to the number of times the probability change state continues, it is possible to provide a novel gaming property in which it becomes more advantageous or disadvantageous to have a big hit during the door breach mode.

  In the second embodiment, the motorized accessory 640b is provided for the second entrance 640, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary design, the electric accessory 640b is less likely to be opened. In the normal state (low probability state) of the symbol, the electric accessory 640b is configured to be easily opened. With this configuration, in the probable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. In addition, it is possible to suppress the execution of the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a state other than the state in which the door break mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 includes information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the door break mode effect (the value of the break mode counter 203ab). Is included. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door-break mode effect, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 after the power is turned on again is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By simply analyzing on the side, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door break mode effect is being executed and the progress status in the case where the door break mode effect is being executed. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door breach mode effect while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern command is output including the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab, so that whether or not the door break-through mode effect is being executed when the power is restored is controlled by the voice lamp control. Although the apparatus 113 is configured to be able to determine, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only information on whether or not the second special symbol is being reserved and exhausted after the end of the jackpot is included in the variation pattern command. That is, it is not necessary to include the information of the remaining variable display count until the end of the door break mode effect in the variation pattern. Then, when the power is restored during execution of the door break mode effect, based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the type of the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command (hit or not). Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is the last change of the door break mode effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern command is always output including the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, after the power is turned on, only the first variation pattern command is output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Thereby, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is output by being included in the variation pattern command. However, it is not always necessary to include the value in the variation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode may be separately prepared. That is, the main controller 110 may notify the sound lamp controller 113 by a command only when the value of the counter 203ab is changed during the breakthrough mode. With this configuration, the data amount of the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, when the power is turned on, the game state is notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by a state command, and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the pre-read result of each reserved ball may be notified again by the winning information command. With this configuration, when the power is turned on while the door break mode effect is being executed, not only the fact that the door break mode effect is being executed but also the result of the door break mode effect is provided. When the power is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the condition. Therefore, the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the effect of the effect.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, the motorized accessory 640b is provided in association with the second entrance 640. Then, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b is longer when the ordinary symbol is hit. With this configuration, the ball is prevented (suppressed) from entering the second entrance 640 in the probable change mode in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a storage valve 63a capable of storing (stopping) a ball in the upper part of the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a ball stored in the storage valve 63a. When the stored state is released, there is provided a general winning opening 63 into which the stored ball can enter. Although details will be described later, the second entrance 640 in the present modification is provided at a position where entry of a ball is basically impossible (difficult) even if the ball is hit right. As an exception, a ball can enter the second entrance 640 only when the ball is right-handed in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when right-handed is performed in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, the ball that has flowed down by right-handed hits the third stored ball. The trajectory of the sphere may be changed to a trajectory capable of entering the second entrance 640. In the present modified example, the storage state is canceled at the normal time, and the storage state is set only during the big hit, so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 only during the big hit. .

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to attach the electric accessory 640b to the second entrance 640. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a can be attached to the first entrance 64. As a result, similarly to the first embodiment, in the probable change mode, the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so that the player can play a game without reducing the number of balls. In addition, with the configuration in which the motorized accessory 64 a is attached to the first entrance 64, the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “time saving state of the ordinary symbol” are set in the above embodiments. A missing game state can be provided. More specifically, the game state when the number of consecutive probable change states reaches the upper limit (limit) is set to the “low probability state of special symbol” and the “time saving state of ordinary symbol”, whereby the probable change mode is set. Is completed (after the limit is reached), a state in which a special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the holding ball for a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times) (so-called so-called lottery). Pullback state) can be set. This can prevent the player from immediately stopping the game after the probable change mode ends, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “low probability state of special symbol” and the “time saving state of ordinary symbol” will be referred to as “pull-back mode”.

  First, a game board 13 according to a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present modification, similarly to the first embodiment, an electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64. As a result, in the “probable change mode” and the “pull-back mode” that are set to the normal symbol time saving state, the electric accessory 64 a is easily released, and the ball is easily inserted into the first entrance opening 64. Therefore, in the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, it is configured such that the lottery of the first special symbol does not cause a small win.

  In addition, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80, a general winning opening 63 is provided in addition to the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 650. The general winning opening 63 is configured as a winning opening where one prize ball is paid out when the ball enters. A storage valve 63a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. The storage valve 63a can be changed between a protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) protruding toward the near side in front view and a buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) buried inside the game board 13. It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63a, the ball reaching the storage valve 63a can be prevented from flowing down to the general winning opening 63 by storing (stopping) the ball on the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, when the storage valve 63a is buried, a ball can pass through the storage valve 63a in front of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general winning opening 63. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86, in this modified example, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) at normal times other than during the big hit, and the storage valve 63a is set at the start of the big hit. Is changed from the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)). Then, at the end of the big hit, the storage valve 63a is again changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)).

  The protruding state and the buried state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the storage valve 63a projects in accordance with the start of the big hit, the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63 is closed by the storage valve 63a. Thereby, the sphere that has reached the flow path is stored (stopped) above the storage valve 63a, up to three spheres. Note that during the big hit, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless a ball is made to enter the specific winning opening 650a, so that the player almost right-hands during the big hit. In the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63, nails, windmills, and the like are arranged so that one out of two spheres fired by right-handed travels. Thus, during one round of the big hit, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), if three balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve 63a, and the ball is further right-handed, the right-handed ball is moved. In some cases, it may collide with the third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The ball that collides with the stored third ball is reflected in the direction opposite to the flowing direction so far, and in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the ball enters the general winning opening 63. The trajectory is such that the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modification of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a enters the storage state based on the jackpot, and the storage state is maintained until the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the player hits the ball into the specific winning opening 650a during the big hit and makes a right hit, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. If the player makes a right-handed hit to obtain a prize ball in a state where three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a, the newly fired ball collides with the stored ball. As a result, the ball enters the second entrance 640. In this way, the player continues to make a right-handed attempt to obtain a prize ball during the jackpot, so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit number (four) at the end of the jackpot. Can be. Although illustration is omitted, in a state in which three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, some of the balls fired by right-handing do not collide (interfere) with the stored balls. It flows down in the direction of the specific winning opening 650a. This allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 650a during the big hit.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As described above, when the big hit is completed, the state is changed from the protruding state to the buried state, and the buried state is maintained (held) until the next big hit. When the storage valve 63a is in a buried state, the sphere can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general winning opening 63. Therefore, the ball fired to the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the near side of the buried storage valve 63a and enters the general winning opening 63, or It flows down a flow path provided to the specific winning opening 650a, which is provided between the winning opening 63 and the second ball opening 640. In the present modification, since the storage valve 63a is buried until the next big hit after the big hit is finished, it is assumed that the right-handed ball normally enters the second entrance 640 in the normal state. Can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous lottery of the second special symbol from being executed at the normal time, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being too disadvantageous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a state transition method in this modification. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, probability change mode, door breaking mode 1 and door breaking mode 2) provided in the above-described second embodiment, a pullback mode is also provided. Is provided.

  The pullback mode is a state in which a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time saving state are set. In the present modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the continuous number of the probability change state is reached, the state after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. For this reason, in this modification, when the door breaking mode 2 is in the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in the door breaking mode 2, the pullback mode is set. .

  As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pull-back mode shifts to another mode when a lottery of a special symbol for a set number of time savings (25 times) is completed without a big hit or without a big hit. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbols for the number of working hours is lost, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In the pullback mode, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the continuous number of the probable change state is reset. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode 1. .

  In this modification, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened in the normal symbol time saving state. Accordingly, since the opening control of the electric accessory 64a is the same in both the probability change mode and the pullback mode, it is difficult to determine from the appearance whether the mode is the probability change mode or the pullback mode. In this modified example, when the number of time savings ends and the player falls from the pullback mode to the normal mode, the player can recognize that the mode is the pullback mode. In other words, when a lottery of the first special symbol is won in the pullback mode, it is difficult to know whether the jackpot has been won in the probability change mode or in the pullback mode. Therefore, a big hit in the pullback mode can make the player feel as if the probable change state is continuing beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive probable change states. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, with the configuration in which the probable change mode and the pullback mode cannot be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 64a or the like, in this modification, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol have come off in the door breaking mode 2. Also in this case, an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed. Thereby, when the effect that the adventurer 811 succeeds in opening all the doors in the door break mode production is performed, whether the mode has shifted from the door break mode 1 to the certainty change mode, or from the door break mode 2 to the pullback mode. It can be difficult to understand whether the transition has been made. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is not known how long the jackpot and the mode in which the normal symbol time-saving state is set (probable change mode or pullback mode) continue.

  As described above, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the ball is configured to be able to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a, and the right-handed ball is set depending on whether or not the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a. It is configured to be able to switch the direction in which the flows down. When no ball is stored in the storage valve 63a, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, while the storage valve 63a stores the upper limit number (three) of balls. If so, the flow direction of a part of the newly fired ball is switched by the stored ball, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory capable of entering the second entrance 640. did. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that the ball does not easily enter the second ball entry port 640 even when right-handed when the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state. In addition, during a big hit in which the storage valve 63a is set in the protruding state, the ball can enter the second entrance 640 when the player hits right. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player at the normal time.

  Further, in the modification of the second embodiment, when the number of consecutive probable changes is the upper limit, a time-saving state of an ordinary symbol which is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. Configuration. With this configuration, when the number of consecutive times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit, until the predetermined number (25 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the number of balls held. Can be executed (pull-back mode). Therefore, even if the number of consecutive probable changes reaches the upper limit and the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the pull-back mode and the probability change mode, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set for both, so that it is difficult to distinguish each other from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, even if a big hit occurs in the pullback mode, it is possible to make the player feel as if a big hit has been made in the certainty change mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which it is possible to make the user feel as if the probability change state continues beyond the upper limit of the probability change state.

  In a modification of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and depending on the state of the storage valve 63a, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Although the configuration in which the state in which the ball can enter the ball is switched, the invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general winning opening 63, a storage valve 63a may be provided above the second ball entrance 640. The storage valve 63a is set in the buried state during the big hit so that the right-hit ball can enter the second entrance 640. The valve 63a may be configured to be in a protruding state so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. As a result, the general winning opening 63 can be omitted, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the modified example of the second embodiment, the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive probable changes, but instead, an upper limit may be set to the number of special symbols drawn in one probable state. In other words, when the probability change jackpot is reached, the special symbol change state may be continued after the jackpot, for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probable changes has been reached, so that the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Also, in this case, when the first special symbol jackpot is reached, the special symbol positive change state and the normal symbol time saving state are set, while if the second special symbol lottery wins, With a high probability (for example, a rate of 95%), almost no prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type that shifts to a certain state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol after a jackpot may be determined. . With this configuration, similar to the above-described embodiments, a novel playability in which a game is performed in the hope that a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated during the jackpot does not become a jackpot is realized. be able to.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above has a configuration in which the second entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 65a are provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 in a front view. There is a possibility that only the right-handed ball may flow into the right-hand flow path in front view (the ball does not flow into the right-hand flow path in front view even if left-handed). In both the mouth 640 and the specific winning opening 65a, when the player hits right, the ball can enter the ball (easy entry), and when the player hits the ball left, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter the ball). For this reason, when a large hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the ball is hit right to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second entrance 640. It is possible to set the state in which the reserved balls of the symbols are accumulated up to the upper limit. Thereby, after the big hit of the first special symbol, a state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the big hit occurs, is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the player hits the ball left, the ball can enter (easy entry), and when the player hits the ball right, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). Two types of specific winnings: 656a and a right specific winning opening 657a in which the ball can enter (easy entering) when the ball is hit right and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) when hitting the left. A mouth was provided. Then, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, only the left specific winning port 656a is opened in all rounds (the right specific winning port 657a is hard to be opened), and the left specific winning port 656a in the first round. Is opened, and a big hit type in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened) is provided. That is, there are few opportunities to make a right-handed hit during the jackpot (there is a difficulty in storing reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot), and there are many opportunities to make a right-handed action (holding balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot). The jackpot type (which is easy to accumulate) is provided. If the jackpot type is such that there is little opportunity to make a right-handed hit (the reserved ball of the second special symbol is difficult to accumulate during the jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot is included in the reserved ball existing at the end of the jackpot is reduced, The possibility of shifting to the probable change mode can be increased. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is such that there are many opportunities to make a right hit (the reserved ball of the second special symbol easily accumulates during the jackpot), there is a high possibility that the jackpot is included in the reserved balls existing at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode is relatively low. This makes it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the type of jackpot, so that when a jackpot occurs, attention can be paid to the type. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation until the jackpot type is determined can be further increased.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable display, as the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol is increased. The type of jackpot type is suggested by the type of. More specifically, the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (reserved balls of the second special symbol easily accumulate). In the case of an unfavorable jackpot type, it is notified that a jackpot has been reached by arranging three main symbols imitating the same number on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (reserved balls of the second special symbol easily accumulate). In this case, a notification is provided in which three main symbols imitating any of the eight types of numbers other than “7” among the numbers “1 to 9” are arranged on the display screen. Furthermore, when the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot type in which all rounds are left-handed), one of the third symbols imitating the numbers “1 to 9” May be aligned. That is, when three main symbols with odd numbers other than “7” are aligned, it indicates that the jackpot is at least 16 rounds, and when the main symbols with “7” are aligned, Means that in addition to the 16 rounds, the type of jackpot is such that a prize ball can be acquired by performing a left-handing in all rounds of the jackpot. This allows the player to play the game paying attention to the types of the main symbols aligned on the display screen at the end of the variable display, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot type in which all rounds are digested by left-handing) is the most advantageous jackpot type, and numbers other than “7” are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, after that, a promotion effect that is changed to "7" (promoted) is executed by the promotion effect performed during the jackpot. In other words, at the most advantageous jackpot, during the variable display effect or during the jackpot after the variable display effect, the “7” completes indicating the most advantageous jackpot are reported. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (the reserved ball of the second special symbol is easily accumulated). In the case where the numbers are aligned, a promotion effect that is changed (promoted) to an odd number of numbers other than “7” is performed by the promotion effect performed during the jackpot. That is, in the 16th round jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened other than in the first round, an odd number of numbers other than “7” is notified during the variable display effect or the big hit after the variable display effect. In addition to the first round, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened, and in the case of a small number of rounds (5 rounds or 2 rounds), even numbers are aligned by a variable display effect, and the promotion effect has been developed. Even in this case, even numbers are kept aligned without being changed (promoted) to odd numbers. In this way, by providing the promotion effect, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot types having a once lower degree of advantage in the variable display effect (even numbers of the same number corresponding to five rounds or two rounds of jackpots) are reproduced. Even if the combination of the third symbol that has been stopped is displayed, the combination corresponding to the jackpot type having a high degree of advantage by the promotion effect (the most advantageous large jackpot, which corresponds to “7”) (E.g., combination) can be expected from the player. This can improve the interest.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. , The configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 88, in the gaming board 13 according to the third embodiment, instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment being deleted, a left variable winning device 656 is provided in the left channel of the gaming board 13. In addition, a right variable winning device 657 is provided in the right channel. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment. That is, the ball that has entered the left specific winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharging channel 65e2 inside the left variable winning device 656. As described above, the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the big hit, and when the ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3, the special change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit ends. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 657 has only a function of paying out eleven prize balls when detecting a ball entering the right specific winning opening 657a. In other words, the winning device has a simple configuration in which a switch (probable change switch 65e3) for determining whether or not to apply the probable change state is not provided inside.

  The left specific winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is the first round (in the case of the jackpot A3 to C3 described later) or all rounds (in the case of the jackpot D3 described later) when the first special symbol jackpot is won. ). On the other hand, the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds when the jackpots A3 to C3 are reached. When the jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, a prize ball can be obtained only by continuing left-handing during the jackpot. In other words, there is no need to make a right-handed hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the jackpot is completed, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous (that is, a probable change state is given). Difficult) There is no possibility of a big hit (low). In other words, there is no possibility of a big hit again (low) in the lottery executed after the big hit based on the reserved ball existing at the end of the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to give the player greater satisfaction. Hereinafter, a jackpot type that can digest a jackpot by performing left-handing in all rounds is referred to as “left-handed jackpot”. On the other hand, a jackpot type that digests the jackpot by right-handing after the second round is referred to as “right-handed jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type in which the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless the player hits right in the second and subsequent rounds. (It becomes difficult), and a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, at the end of the big hit, it is possible to bring the state in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol have accumulated to the upper limit. If there are many reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit, the possibility of a big hit after the big hit in the lottery based on the reserved balls becomes higher than that of the left-handed big hit. For this reason, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to form a state where the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous in the case of the jackpot, is continuously executed. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to play a game in the hope that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the big hit will come off (small hit).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, a promotion effect which is a type of display effect in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as described above, the main symbol with the number “7” may be aligned only during the variable display that informs the left-hand hit. In addition, the main symbols to which odd numbers other than “7” are attached may be aligned during the variable display for reporting the 16-round jackpot. In other words, even in the variable display for notifying the left hit and the 16-round variable display, the main symbols with even numbers may be aligned. In the third embodiment, in the variable display for notifying the 16-round jackpot or the left-handed jackpot, if the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, after the opening period of the jackpot to one round is completed. Over the interval period, the main symbol once aligned in the fluctuation display is changed (promoted) to a main symbol imitating a number “7” or a main symbol imitating an odd number other than “7”. Be executed. Accordingly, even when the main symbols imitating the even numbers are prepared in the variable display, it is possible to expect that the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot and the symbol is imitated to the odd numbers. Therefore, even when even-numbered symbols are aligned in the variable display, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being reduced. In addition, the promotion effect is configured such that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is higher than that when the promotion fails. Thereby, at the time when the promotion effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation for promotion can be improved.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a jackpot opening period in which a promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), during the jackpot opening period in which the promotion effect is set, the third symbol (the main symbol imitating “2” in the example of FIG. 89 (a)) in the variable display is displayed. Continues to be displayed. In addition, a display area HR5 in which characters of “CHANGE UP !!!! Further, to the left of the display region HR5, a display region HR1 in which a character “left” and an image of an arrow pointing left are displayed. On the lower right side of the display screen, a cannon 815 is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the effect using the cannon 815 is performed by performing the left hit.

  Note that the left-handed notification is made during the opening period because the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left-handing during the opening period, a ball can be efficiently won at the left specific winning opening 656a at the start of the first round.

  FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), during one round, when the winning of the ball (entering the ball) with respect to the left specific winning opening 656a is detected, the third symbol (the main symbol imitating "2") is changed by the cannon 815. The effect of bombardment is performed. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the third symbol, the position where the shell is bombarded is blocked by the smoke K1. Thereafter, every time a ball is detected in the left specific winning opening 656a, an effect of bombarding the third symbol (bombardment effect) is executed, and smoke increases.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in a jackpot in which a promotion effect has been set. As shown in FIG. 90A, at the end of one round, smokes K1 to K7 are displayed so as to cover all of the third symbol. By obscuring all the third symbols, it is possible to make the player predict whether the third symbols appearing after the clearing of the smoke has remained an even number or have been promoted to an odd number. Can be improved with respect to the promotion of.

  FIG. 90 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an interval period after one round is completed in a case where the promotion to the left-handed jackpot is successful (that is, the current jackpot type is the left-handed jackpot). . As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the promotion to the left-handed hit is successful, after the smokes K1 to K7 have cleared, an effect in which three main symbols imitating the number “7” appear is executed. Is done. In addition, in the display area HR5, a character "Promote to a super big bonus !!" is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the left hit has been made. Therefore, a great sense of satisfaction can be given to the player.

  When the symbol is promoted to a symbol representing a 16-round right-hitting jackpot (a main symbol imitating an odd number other than "7"), the character "promote to big bonus !!" is displayed in the display area HR5. Is displayed. If the promotion fails (that is, if the current jackpot type is a right-handed jackpot other than 16 rounds), the main symbol is changed to an even-numbered symbol even after the smokes K1 to K7 have cleared. The effect that is not performed is performed, and the character “Promotion failure...” Is displayed in the display area HR5. These display contents allow the player to easily understand whether or not the promotion has been successful, and if the promotion has been successful, the jackpot type. Therefore, an easy-to-understand effect can be provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the positive variable switch 65e3 is provided inside the left variable winning device 656, and the left variable winning device 656 is used for both left-handed hits and right-handed hits. The specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the opening operation can be the same in both the case of the left hit and the case of the right hit until the interval period of one round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a, it is difficult to distinguish between a left-handed hit and a right-handed hit. Therefore, when the promotion effect is executed, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the contents of the effect, so that the effect of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is executed in the first round in which the left variable winning device 656 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is provided is operated. With this, when the promotion effect is executed, even if the ball wins (enters) into the left specific winning opening 656a and it is determined that the ball will be changed to a certain state after the big hit, attention is paid to whether or not the ball is promoted. Thus, the remaining games in the first round can be played.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, a game during a jackpot is performed with the most attention being paid to whether or not a probable change state occurs. That is, it is general to play a game during a big hit by paying the most attention to whether or not a ball wins a winning opening having a built-in probability change switch. However, once the ball has passed the probable change switch and is determined to be in the probable state, the player is satisfied at that point and the remaining game at the jackpot is just like working to get a prize ball. There was a case that would be.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing through the probable change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and is determined to be in the probability change state, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so that the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from simply becoming an operation for obtaining a prize ball, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91A, the ROM 202 according to the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that an open scenario selection table 202e is added. Are different. Also, the difference is that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the third embodiment, four types of big hits A3 to D3 are provided as big hits of the first special symbol. In addition, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbol. The jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment, respectively, and have the number of rounds of 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds, and 16 rounds, respectively. In other words, it is a jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in a round other than the first round of the jackpot. In the right-hitting jackpot, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened from the second round. Therefore, if the right-hand winning is not performed after the second round, the ball cannot be won in the right specific winning opening 657a to obtain a prize ball. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, by continuing to make a right hit during the jackpot, a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 and the jackpot ends. At times, a disadvantageous second special symbol reserved ball may be accumulated to the upper limit. Therefore, after the end of the jackpots A3 to C3 and E3, it is possible to shift to the door breaking mode, similarly to the end of the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment. Thereby, after the end of the jackpots A3 to D3 and E3, it is possible to provide a novel gaming property in which a game is performed in the hope of not winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. it can.

  On the other hand, the jackpots D3 and H3 are left-handed jackpots with 16 rounds, and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. When the left hit is a big hit, a prize ball can be obtained only by keeping the left hit during the big hit. In other words, there is no need to make a right-handed hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the jackpot is completed, it is disadvantageous in the second special symbol lottery (that is, a probable change state is given). Difficult) There is no possibility of a jackpot (transition directly to the probable change mode without going through the door breach mode). Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type (jackpot D3, H3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to give the player greater satisfaction.

  The jackpots F3 and G3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots E and F in the first embodiment, and are jackpot types in which it is difficult for a ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, in each round of the jackpot, the right specific winning opening 657a is a jackpot type that is opened only for 0.2 seconds. Since the right variable winning device 657 is not provided with the probable change switch 65e3, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from passing through the probable change switch 65e3 when the jackpots F3 and G3 occur. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be made more disadvantageous. Note that, with the configuration in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round when the big hits F3 and G3 occur, in the third embodiment, even when the small hitting occurs, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened. It is configured to be open. Thereby, when the right specific winning opening 657a is opened, it is difficult to determine whether the opening is due to the big hits F3 and G3 or the small hit. it can. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not the second special symbol has been hit from the operation of the right specific winning opening 657a. As in the case of the first embodiment, attention is paid to the result of the door breaking mode effect. A game can be played.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), for the first special symbol, the "big hit A3" of 16 rounds is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". (See 202b1 in FIG. 91 (b)), and in the range of “5 to 84”, “big hit B3” having five rounds is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 91 (b)). ), The range of “85 to 94” is defined in association with “big hit C3” having two rounds (see 202b3 in FIG. 91B), and the range of “95 to 99” is round. A "big hit D3" of 16 rounds is defined in association (see 202b4 in FIG. 91 (b)). The value that the first hit type counter C2 can take is 100 "0 to 99", so that when the first special symbol hits, the "big hit A3" is determined at a rate of 5% (5 / 100). Similarly, the rate at which "big hit B3" is determined is 80% (80/100), the rate at which "big hit C3" is determined is 10% (10/100), and "big hit D3" is determined. Is 5% (5/100). That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of the right-handed jackpot (big hit A3 to C3) is 95%, and the ratio of the left-handed jackpot (big hit D3) is 5%. Since the ratio of the left-hand hitting jackpot is extremely lower than the ratio of the right-hand hitting jackpot, the player can be made more satisfied when an advantageous left-hand hitting jackpot is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), for the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 3”, “big hit E3” of 16 rounds is included. It is defined in association (see 202b5 in FIG. 91 (b)), and in the range of “4 to 48”, “big hit F3” having seven rounds is associated and defined (see FIG. 91 (b)). 202b6), the range of "49 to 98" is associated with the "big hit G3" of six rounds (see 202b7 in FIG. 91B), and the number of rounds is "99". The "big hit H3" of 16 rounds is defined in association (see 202b8 in FIG. 91B). Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the rate at which "big hit E3" is determined is 4% (4/100), and the rate at which "big hit F3" is determined is 45% (45/100). The rate at which the "big hit G3" is determined is 50% (50/100), and the rate at which the "big hit H3" is determined is 1% (1/100). That is, in the case where a jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, the rate at which the jackpot (any one of the jackpots F3 and G3) to which the probable change state is hardly given is determined is 95%. Therefore, when the second special symbol has a big hit during the door breaking mode, the mode is shifted to the normal mode at an extremely high ratio (95%). The percentage of the jackpot where the left specific winning opening 656a is opened (the probability change state is given after the jackpot) is 5%, of which 4% is a right-hit jackpot (jackpot E3) and 1% is a left-hit jackpot ( Jackpot H3). Therefore, in the case of a left-handed hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to make the player feel very lucky, and to make the player feel more joy. .

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect may be executed even when the jackpots E3 and H3 are reached. Each of the jackpots E3 and H3 is a jackpot of 16 rounds. Therefore, the jackpots E3 and H3 become jackpots E3 and H3. When a promotion effect is executed, an effect is displayed in which the main symbols imitating odd numbers other than “7” are displayed in the variable display. After that, in the promotion effect, an effect of whether or not to be promoted to the main symbol imitating “7” is executed. The jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that can only be selected at a rate of 1% in the jackpot of the second special symbol, but excludes the possibility of the jackpots F3 and G3 occupying 95% of the jackpot when the jackpot is announced. Is done. That is, when the jackpot is notified in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined that the distribution is the jackpot E3 of 4% or the distribution is the jackpot H3 of 1%. Therefore, the jackpot H3 is obtained at a rate of 1/5, so that the player can be made aware that this is the most advantageous jackpot chance. Furthermore, as described above, the promotion effect is set so that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is set to be higher. Therefore, the jackpot is announced by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the promotion effect is developed. In this case, the player's expectation of the jackpot H3 can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the release scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The open scenario selection table 202e indicates, for each jackpot type, a specific winning opening type (either the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) to be opened in each round of the jackpot as an opening scenario, and an opening period ( It is a data table that defines a long release for a maximum of 30 seconds or a short release for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. When the jackpot is won, the open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won this time is read from the open scenario selection table 202e, and stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba described later. During the big hit, the opening operation of each round is set according to the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot types “jackpot A3” to “jackpot C3” and “jackpot E3” (ie, right-handed jackpot), a left specific prize for the first round The long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the mouth 656a is associated and defined, and the long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the right specific winning opening 657a is associated and defined for each round after the second round (FIG. 92 (a), 202e1). As a result, in the case of a right-hitting jackpot, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each of the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless a game during a jackpot is performed by aiming at the right specific winning opening 657a by right-handing, so the second entrance provided on the right side of the game board 13 A large number of balls enter the 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, the reserve ball of the second special symbol can be set to the upper limit value at the end of the right-hitting big hit, and the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is continuously executed after the big hit is completed. Mode "can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is performed with the expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be continuously deviated after the end of the jackpot.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “jackpot D3” and “jackpot H3” (that is, left-hit jackpot), the length of the left specific winning opening 656a for all rounds is set. Opening (up to 30 seconds) is defined in association (see 202e2 in FIG. 92A). As a result, in the left-hitting big hit, in all rounds, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained only by performing the left-hand aiming at the left specific winning opening 656a. That is, there is no need to make a right hit during the big hit, and there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-hitting jackpot, in many cases, the number of unfavorable second special symbols at the end of the jackpot is 0, and the most advantageous directly after the jackpot without going through the “door breaking mode”. The mode can be shifted to the “probable change mode”. Thereby, in the case of a left-hand hit, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “jackpot F3” and “jackpot G3”, the right specific winning opening 657a is shortly opened for all rounds (up to 0.2 seconds). ) Are defined in association with each other (see 202e3 in FIG. 92A). As a result, in the case of "big hit F3" and "big hit G3", it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball, and the ball is made to enter the left specific winning opening 656a, and passes through the probability changing switch 65e3. There is no possibility to do it. In other words, it is possible to form a disadvantageous jackpot without obtaining a prize ball and without giving a certain change state after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, by setting the opening operation according to the opening scenario specified in the opening scenario selection table 202e, the same opening operation can be accurately set every time in all jackpot types. Can be.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92B, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The open scenario storage area 203ba has a storage area for storing (storing) the open scenario when the open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is read out from the open scenario selection table 202e after winning the jackpot. It is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, according to the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba and the number of new rounds, the type of specific winning opening to be opened (left specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening). The mouth 657a) and the opening period (either long opening for a maximum of 30 seconds or short opening for a maximum of 0.2 seconds) are determined.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 93A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93A, the ROM 222 of the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20A) in that a promotion effect lottery table 222b is added. Are different. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. The promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery). Values) are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit A3” as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j (FIG. 93). (See 222b1 in (b)). Although the details will be described later, the effect lottery counter 223j is configured as a random number counter that generates a value in a range of “0 to 99”, and can take 100 values of “0 to 99”. Therefore, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined when the “big hit A3” is reached is 50% (50/100). When it was "Big hit A3" (16 round right-handed big hit) and the promotion effect was decided, an effect in which three main symbols (third symbol) imitating the same even number in the variable display were executed. Thereafter, in the promotion effect at the jackpot, an effect of promoting to the main symbol imitating the same odd number other than “7” is executed, and it is reported that a 16-round right-handed jackpot has been achieved. On the other hand, when the promotion effect has not been determined, an effect in which the main symbols imitating an odd number other than “7” are prepared in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, but the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), “0-19” is associated with “big hit B3”, “big hit C3”, and “big hit E3” as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (See 222b2 in FIG. 93 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 20 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so "big hit B3" and "big hit C3". , And "big hit E3", the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 20% (20/100). In the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes “Big hit B3” (5 round right-handed jackpot) or “Big hit C3” (2 round right-handed jackpot). After an effect in which three main symbols imitating the same number are arranged is performed, an effect in which promotion is failed in the promotion effect at the jackpot is executed. If the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect in which the main symbols imitating the even numbers are aligned in the variable display effect, a normal jackpot effect without developing into the promotion effect (see FIG. 8) Is executed.

  In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes "big hit E3" (right-handed hit of 16 rounds), and when the promotion effect is determined, the same odd number other than "7" is imitated in the variable display. After an effect in which three symbols are aligned is performed, an effect in which the promotion fails in the promotion effect executed during the jackpot is executed. In the case where the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect in which the main symbols imitating the same odd number other than “7” are arranged in the variable display is executed, the normal jackpot without developing into the promotion effect is performed. An effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), for "big hit D3" and "big hit H3" (left-handed big hit of 16 rounds), "0-79" is set as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (See 222b3 in FIG. 93 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 80 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so that "big hit D3" or "big hit H3" Is "80% (80/100)". When the promotion effect is determined by the "big hit D3" in the lottery of the first special symbol, the effect in which three main symbols imitating the same even number are aligned in the variable display is performed, and then the promotion in the jackpot is performed. In the effect, the effect is promoted to the main symbol imitating the number "7", and the 16th round left hit is notified. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is determined to be "big hit H3" and the promotion effect is determined, an effect is executed in which three main symbols imitating the same odd number other than "7" are displayed in the variable display. After that, in the promotion effect at the jackpot, an effect of being promoted to the main symbol imitating the number of “7” is executed, and it is notified that it is a 16-round left-handed jackpot. If the promotion effect is not determined, an effect is executed in which the main symbols imitating the number “7” are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, but the normal jackpot effect is executed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 93 (c), the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 20 (b)) in that the effect lottery counter 223j and the promotion It is different in that a rendering flag 223k is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The production lottery counter 223j is a counter used for the lottery of the production mode such as the determination of the execution of the promotion production (lottery). This production lottery counter 223j is. The value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When the promotion effect is drawn by lottery, it is determined whether any one of the random number values (counter value) specified in the promotion effect lottery table 222b matches the value of the effect production lottery counter 223j, and if the values match, the promotion effect is performed. Is determined.

  The promotion effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether a promotion effect is set. If the in-promotion effect flag 223k is on, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. The promotion effect flag 223k is set to ON when a special design lottery is selected, and one of the jackpots A to E or G is won, when the promotion effect execution lottery executed at the start of the change of the third symbol is won. (See S5405 in FIG. 103). In addition, it is set to off after setting the end of the promotion effect (see S4515 in FIG. 101).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, the processes in S201 to S221 are the same as those in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, when the process of S219 is completed, then, the opening scenario for selecting the opening scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type from the opening scenario selection table 202e. A scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of the release scenario selection processing (S241) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the above-described open scenario selection processing (S241). In the release scenario selection processing (S241), first, the release scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 92A) is read (S1901), and the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified (S1902). Next, the specified open scenario is stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and the process ends.

  According to the release scenario specified in the release scenario selection process (see FIG. 95) and stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba, the release operation of each round during the big hit can be set to an appropriate operation according to the big hit type. .

  Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during the jackpot.

  Of the jackpot control processes 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processes as those in S1107 to S1112 are executed. In the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 38), a jackpot operation setting process 3 is executed (S1131), and the process ends. Details of the big hit operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131). The jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the number of jackpot rounds. In the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1202 to S1204 are the same as the processes of S1202 to S1204 of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

  When the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment is executed, first, the data of the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba is read (S1211), and the read data is read. , The type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the current round (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) and the opening time are specified (S1212). Next, the opening of the specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) of the type specified in the processing of S1212 is set (S1213), and the opening time specified in the processing of S1212 is started this time. The time is set as the round time of the round (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1202.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97), the opening operation can be accurately set for each round according to the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the jackpot-related process 3 (S4221) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot-related process 3 (S4221) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

  Of the jackpot-related processes 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, the respective processes of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are the respective jackpot-related processes (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are executed.

  In the jackpot-related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the opening command has been received in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then, whether or not the promotion effect is set , An opening command process for setting a corresponding opening effect is executed (S4411), and this process ends. Details of the opening command processing (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot-related process 3 (see FIG. 98) of the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4403 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the round number command (S4403: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a winning command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4412). In the processing of S4412, when it is determined that the winning command is included (S4412: Yes), the specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 656a or A winning command process for setting a winning effect when a winning for the right specific winning opening 657a) is detected is executed (S4413), and the process ends. Details of the winning command processing (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that the winning command is not included (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4405.

  In the jackpot-related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4405 that the close command has been received (S4405: Yes), the close command process (FIG. 98) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the close command process 3 is executed (S4414), and this process ends. Details of the close command processing 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the above-described opening command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the opening command processing (S4411).

  In the opening command process (see FIG. 99), first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201: Yes), An opening effect (see FIG. 89 (a)) corresponding to the promotion effect is determined (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5204. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, when it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5201: No), the opening effect of the mode according to the current jackpot type is determined (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. In addition, the mode according to the jackpot type, in the case of the jackpots F3 and G3, is an effect in a mode as if the door breakthrough mode effect is continuing. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type other than the jackpots F3 and G3, the effect is such that a jackpot is notified.

  In the process of S5204, a display opening command indicating the mode of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and the process ends. By executing the opening command process, an opening effect in an appropriate mode can be executed according to whether or not the promotion effect is set.

  Next, the details of the above-described winning command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When the winning command processing (S4413) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301: Yes) ), A bombardment effect of bombarding the main symbol with the cannon 815 (see FIG. 89 (b)) is executed (S5302), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5301: No), a normal winning effect is set (S5303), and the process ends. Note that the winning effect in the normal mode refers to an effect suggesting the acquisition of a prize ball, for example, an effect for acquiring gold coins is performed, or an effect in which characters “GET” are displayed is executed.

  By executing the winning command processing (see FIG. 100), in one round of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set, the main design is stepped by the shelling effect every time the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a. It can be hidden with smoke images. By executing an effect in which the main symbol is hidden and it is not known whether to be promoted or not, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation for promotion.

  In the third embodiment, the notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed in the interval period after one round is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the result. If the lottery is won, the end condition of one round (7 or more balls are won) , Or 30 seconds have elapsed), the result may be reported even if the condition is not satisfied. Further, for example, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, it may be configured to determine by lottery the number of times the winning in the left specific winning opening 656a will be notified of the result of the promotion effect. With this configuration, it is possible to expect that the promotion is notified every time the ball wins the left specific winning opening 656a. Therefore, the game in the first round of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is set. Of the elderly can be further improved. Further, in a case where the result of the promotion effect can be notified even if the end condition of the first round is not satisfied, the result may be notified before the end condition is satisfied only when the promotion is performed. . That is, in the case where the promotion fails, the promotion failure is always notified in the interval period after the first round is completed. On the other hand, in the case where the promotion is successful, the left specific winning opening is provided at a predetermined rate. The notification may be performed with the number of winnings less than the upper limit number of winnings for 656a. With such a configuration, while the promotion is expected to be notified each time a winning is made to the left specific winning opening 656a, if the promotion fails, the feeling of expectation for the promotion is longer (until the end of one round). Can be maintained.

  Next, the details of the close command processing 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This close command process 3 (S4414) is a process executed in place of the close command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the closing command processing 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, the processing in S4502 to S4505 is the same as the processing in S4502 to S4505 in the closing command processing (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

  When the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effecting flag 223k is on (S4511). If it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion effect flag 223k is ON (S4511: Yes), it means that the first round end condition of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is satisfied. That is, it means that it is the timing to notify the result of the promotion effect, and next, it is determined whether the ongoing big hit is any of the big hits B3, C3, or E3 (S4512). In the process of S4512, if it is determined that none of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: No), it is determined that the jackpot type for which the promotion effect is set this time is the jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, it means that the type of jackpot is successful promotion. In this case, an interval effect (see FIG. 90 (b)) for notifying the successful promotion is set (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4515. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4512, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is any of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that the jackpot type fails to be promoted. An interval effect of notifying of the promotion failure is set (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the promotion effect is set by turning off the promotion effect flag 223k (S4515), and the process ends.

  In the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion effecting flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the running big hit Is a big hit F3 or G3 (S4516). In the process of S4516, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is either the jackpot F3 or the G3 (S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4516 that the jackpot being executed is neither the jackpot F3 nor the G3 (S4516: No), an interval effect in a mode according to the number of rounds is set (S4517), and the process is terminated. finish.

  By executing the close command process 3 (see FIG. 101), when the end condition of the promotion effect is satisfied (it is the end timing of one round), a result in an appropriate mode is notified according to the jackpot type. be able to.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. In the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) of the third embodiment, the respective processes of S4801 to S4809 are the same as the respective processes of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment. The processing is executed.

  In the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, a promotion effect lottery process for determining whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery) is executed (S4821). ) And the process moves to S4804. Details of the promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that notifies any of the jackpots A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401). If it is determined that the variation pattern is not a variation pattern for notifying any of them (that is, it is either out of place or one of the jackpots F3 and G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility of executing the promotion effect, so this processing is performed as it is. To end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the variation pattern is to notify any of the jackpots A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401: Yes), a process for selecting whether or not to execute the promotion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read out (S5402), and among the read out tables, the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is set to the range of the counter value (random number value) corresponding to the current jackpot type. It is determined (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be performed by determining whether there is a matching value (S5403). Then, it is determined whether the execution of the promotion effect has been determined in the determination (lottery) by the processing of S5403 (S5404).

  In the process of S5404, when it is determined that the execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5404 that the execution of the promotion effect has been determined (S5404: Yes), the execution of the promotion effect is indicated by setting the promotion effect flag 223k to ON (S5405), and this time It is determined whether the jackpot type is one of the jackpots E3 and H3 (S5406).

  In the process of S5406, when it is determined that neither the big hit E3 nor the H3 is made, it means that the execution of the promotion effect is determined as the big hit of the first special symbol, and the third symbol imitating the even number is changed. The stop symbol at the time of stop is set (S5407), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, when it is determined that the hit is one of the jackpots E3 and H3 (S5406: Yes), it means that the execution of the promotion effect has been determined as the jackpot of the second special symbol. A third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” is set as a stop symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop (S5408), and the process ends.

  By this promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), it is possible to determine whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery) and to set a stop symbol when the promotion effect is won.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the player hits the ball left, the ball can enter (easily enters the ball), and when the player hits the ball right, the ball cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). The left specific winning opening 656a and the right specific winning opening 657a in which the ball can enter when the player hits the right (ball entry is easy) and the ball cannot enter the ball when the player hits left (difficult to enter the ball). Two types of special winning ports are provided. When a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a during the big hit, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656, so that a special symbol is formed after the big hit. Is given. On the other hand, when the ball enters the right specific winning opening 657a, the same number of prize balls as when the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a is paid out, but the gaming state set after the big hit Does not affect In the third embodiment, as a type of the jackpot, a left-handed jackpot in which only the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds (a victory ball is more played when a left-handed player is hit than a right-handed player in all rounds). The right-handed jackpot 656a is opened in the first round, and the right-specified winning port 657a is opened in other rounds (the right-specified winning port 657a is easily opened) in the first round. In the second and subsequent rounds, a right hit is easier than a left hit than a left hit. In the case of a left-hitting jackpot, it is not necessary to make a right-handing during the jackpot (there is little chance of making a right-handing). A prize ball cannot be obtained (is difficult) if the player does not make a right-handed shot after the round, so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol easily accumulates during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, it becomes difficult to execute the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot (the possibility that the jackpot of the second special symbol is suspended at the end of the jackpot becomes low). On the other hand, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, a disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed after the end of the jackpot (at the end of the jackpot, the second special symbol jackpot may be reserved). Is higher than the left-handed jackpot). Thereby, after the end of the left-handed hit, a game can be performed with confidence until the next hit. On the other hand, after the end of the right-hitting big hit, a game can be performed in the expectation that the big hit will not become a hit until all the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is completed. As described above, in the third embodiment, the playability after the end of the jackpot can be switched according to the jackpot type, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot, the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol after the jackpot (ease of holding the in-condominium) may be changed according to the jackpot type. Can be. This makes it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. Therefore, when the most advantageous left-handed jackpot is achieved, a greater satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing through the probable change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and is determined to be in the probability change state, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so that the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from simply becoming an operation for obtaining a prize ball, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, whether the right-hit jackpot or the left-hit jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the round in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened and the number of times may be arbitrarily determined. In the case where the right specific winning opening 656a is opened in a round other than the first round due to a right-handed hit, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in the first round to start the first round. At the time, the jackpot type is known. Therefore, the promotion effect may be executed during the opening period while the jackpot type is unknown.

  In the third embodiment, two types of variable prize apparatuses, a left variable prize apparatus 656 and a right variable prize apparatus 657, are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, respectively. The variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13. Then, the storage valve 63a may be provided upstream of the second entrance 640, similarly to the modification of the second embodiment described above. Then, instead of providing a left-handed hit and a right-handed hit, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during the big hit (that is, even if the right-handed hit is made during the big hit, the ball reaches the second entrance 640). It is also possible to provide a jackpot type that is not possible and a jackpot type in which the storage state is released (that is, a ball can reach the second entrance 640 when the player hits right during the jackpot). With this configuration, the number of variable winning devices can be reduced, and the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the effect of bombarding the third symbol with the cannon 815 is executed as the promotion effect, but the effect of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any production mode may be set as long as it is a production that can easily inform the player of two types, a mode in which promotion is successful and a mode in which promotion is unsuccessful. An effect in which the person 811 attacks the third symbol to promote the symbol may be executed. Further, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. Instead of displaying the third symbol, for example, the adventurer 811 and the enemy may perform a battle effect, and the victory over the enemy may be notified of the left hit. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the effect can be further increased.

  In the third embodiment, the timing for notifying the result of the promotion effect is set to the end timing of the first round, but is not limited to this. For example, the result of the promotion effect may be notified when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in the left specific winning opening 656a. Further, the winning number that triggers the notification of the result does not need to be fixed, and may be determined by lottery, for example. In this case, a winning number that is selected in the case of a left-handed hit and a winning number that is selected in the case of a right-handed hit may be set. With such a configuration, a player who wants to detect a jackpot type (whether a left-handed hit or a right-handed hit) at an early timing based on the timing at which the result of the promotion effect is notified is identified with a left identification. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have won (entered) the winning opening 656a. Therefore, the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the promotion effect by lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to always execute the promotion effect. Thereby, the lottery process of the promotion effect can be omitted, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, for example, when a right-handed hit is made, a promotion effect in which promotion is always failed is executed, and when a left-handed hit is made, a number “7” is displayed in a variable display effect by lottery. A configuration that determines whether the third symbol imitating the number is fixedly displayed or the main symbol imitating an even number is once displayed, and is promoted to the third symbol imitating the number “7” by the promotion effect. It may be. With this configuration, in the event of a right-handed hit, a game during a big hit can be performed in anticipation of promotion each time. Furthermore, the third design corresponding to the jackpot type may be definitely displayed in the variable display effect without executing the promotion effect in all the jackpot types. Thereby, an arbitrary effect can be executed in the opening period of the jackpot or in the first round, so that the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased.

  In the third embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol results in a left-handed hit, and in the case of executing the promotion effect, the variable design effect always displays the third symbol imitating the even number in the variable display effect. , But is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” is fixedly displayed and promoted to a main symbol imitating the numeral “7” by a promotion effect. In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is executed from the opening period of the jackpot to one round of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be such that a promotion effect is executed within the fluctuation period of the variable display effect that informs the jackpot, or a configuration where the promotion effect is executed over the fluctuation period and the opening period of the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying whether the hit is a left-handed hit or a right-handed hit. However, there is no distinction between a left-handed hit and a right-handed hit. It is good also as composition applied to machine 10 (for example, a general game machine with a probability change big hit and a normal big hit). More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability change jackpot, a third symbol imitating an even number or a third symbol imitating an odd number is determined and displayed by a variable display effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a third symbol imitating an even number is fixedly displayed by the variable display effect. Then, when the third symbol imitating the even number is confirmed and displayed at the probability change jackpot, a promotion effect of promoting the third symbol imitating the odd number may be performed thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the promotion effect in which the promotion fails may be executed at a predetermined ratio. Thereby, the versatility of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the probable change switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable winning device 656, and if a ball does not enter the left variable winning device 656 during the big hit, a special symbol certain change state is given after the big hit. Was not configured. That is, in the first round, even in the case of a right-hitting big hit, the game is performed by aiming at the left variable winning device 656 by left-handing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be such that the positive variable switch 65e3 is provided inside the right variable winning device 657, similarly to the left variable winning device 656. Then, in the case of a right-handed hit, only the right variable winning device 657 may be configured to be able to enter the ball in all rounds. With this configuration, in the case of a right-hitting jackpot, only the first round passes the ball through the probability changing switch 65e3 by left-handing to obtain a prize ball, and stops the launch of the ball in the remaining rounds. The method can be prevented from being performed. That is, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the right-hitting jackpot, the ball is launched only in the round (first round) in which the left specific winning opening 656a can enter. Irregular game methods can be suppressed. When this irregular game method is executed, although the prize ball obtained by the right-handed hit is small (only one round is obtained), since the draw of the disadvantageous second special symbol is not executed, it is usually performed. Never fall into mode. Therefore, the probability change state may continue semipermanently, and there is a possibility that an unexpected disadvantage is given to the hole. On the other hand, by setting the right variable winning device 657 so that only the right variable winning device 657 can enter the ball in the right-handed hit, the above-mentioned irregular gaming method can not be fundamentally established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall.

  In the third embodiment, by changing the ease of entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 during the jackpot according to the jackpot type, the retained balls held at the end of the jackpot are different from each other. The possibility that the jackpot is included (so-called on-hold in-house) is variable. In other words, by switching the direction in which a prize ball can be obtained by firing a ball in accordance with the type of jackpot, the possibility of physically generating a reserved in-house is different, but this is not a limitation. It is not something that can be done. For example, a configuration may be used in which the likelihood of occurrence of a reserved in-house is controlled in a variable manner. More specifically, for example, similar to the first embodiment, a special winning opening for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit is provided only on the right side of the game board 13 and the special symbol state is changed. The number of lotteries may be made different according to the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot where the number of lotteries in the probability change state is one and a jackpot where the number of lotteries is four) may be provided. With this configuration, in the case of the jackpot type in which the number of lotteries in which the probability change state is one, the probability of a jackpot in the second and subsequent special symbol lotteries is reduced, so that the first lottery is not performed. In such a case, there is a high possibility that all lotteries based on the reserved ball will be missed. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries in the probability change state is four, all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are executed in the probability change state of the special symbol, so that the lottery is suspended at the end of the jackpot. The chance of winning a jackpot in a lottery based on a reserved ball increases. Therefore, the same operation as the above-described third embodiment can be realized with only one variable winning device. In the case of a configuration in which the probable change state is terminated with a predetermined number of lotteries according to the jackpot type, as in the present modification, for example, all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are out of order. In such a case, it may be configured so as to reduce the time of the ordinary symbol as a privilege. That is, the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is in a certainty change state is different from the number of lotteries in which a normal symbol is in a time saving state, and regardless of the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is in a certainty change state, for example, 100 special symbol lotteries are performed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be in the time saving state of a normal symbol until it completes. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, a jackpot type in which the probable change state of the special symbol is not provided and only the time reduction state is provided may be provided. With such a configuration, since the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the end of the big hit can be all performed in a low probability state of the special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol may be completely removed. It is possible to increase the possibility of becoming.

  In the third embodiment, a jackpot type in which a reserved ball of the second special symbol easily accumulates during a jackpot and a jackpot type that is difficult to accumulate are provided. Is different for each jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting a jackpot type in which a reserved ball of a normal symbol is likely to be stored during a jackpot and a jackpot type in which a reserved ball of a normal symbol is unlikely to be stored during the jackpot, the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol at the end of the jackpot is reduced. It is good also as a structure which makes it different and makes it possible to change the possibility of a normal symbol hit after a big hit. In addition, by making the winning probability of the ordinary symbol after the jackpot vary according to the type of the jackpot, the ordinary symbol can be obtained for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (for example, until all the reserved balls of the ordinary symbol at the end of the jackpot are consumed). It is good also as a structure which makes the winning ratio different according to the big hit type. Also in the case of such a configuration, the degree of advantage of the player can be varied according to the type of the jackpot, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the type of the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, when the promotion effect is set, the ball enters the specific winning opening 656a in the first round, and even after it is determined that the special symbol will be in a certain state after the big hit, Each time the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, an effect (an effect of bombarding the third symbol) that excites the expectation of whether or not to be promoted is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be configured to be executed during the jackpot opening period. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is open (for example, an effect in which an image imitating the character “V” is displayed) may be executed. Good. With such a configuration, the player does not notice that the jackpot has started, and continues to see the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specific winning opening 656a (a jackpot of a probable change). Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the probability change state from being given after the big hit). Also, for example, in the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is open is displayed during the first round (even after the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a). It may be configured to continue to be executed, and to execute the promotion effect after one round is completed. Also in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a ball from being missed in the left specific winning opening 656a, and it is possible to suppress an excessive disadvantage to the player. Furthermore, the promotion effect is not executed at all (that is, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and the inside of the jackpot is a round in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened. The effect indicating whether or not may be continuously executed during each round. Thereby, it is possible to surely prevent the player from mistakenly launching the ball in the wrong direction.

  In the third embodiment, when the ball that has entered the inside of the left variable winning device 656 passes through the probable change switch 65e3, the pachinko machine 10 of the specification that shifts to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot is one big hit. In the round, the player wins the left specific winning opening 656a and notifies the result of the promotion effect after the probability change state is confirmed. However, the specifications to which the promotion effect can be applied are not limited to this. Absent. The promotion effect can be applied to a specification in which there is a case where, at a predetermined timing, there is a case where the state shifts to either an advantageous state for the player or a disadvantageous state compared to the advantageous state. For example, when a ball enters a specific area inside a variable prize device provided on a game board, a promotion effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 of a specification to which a jackpot is given. That is, in the lottery based on the start winning, the lottery is performed to determine whether or not the ball can easily enter the variable winning device (movability of the variable winning device), and the lottery of the variable winning device is won. In this case, even if the ball is thrown into the variable winning device and the ball does not enter the specific area, the jackpot is not given. In this specification, the type of the jackpot given when the ball enters the specific area may be notified after the ball hits the specific area and the jackpot is determined. More specifically, at the time when the lottery of the variable prize device is determined to be movable, the lottery of the jackpot type given when the player enters the specific area and the execution of the promotion effect are determined by lottery. Then, when the lottery of the promotion effect is won, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type (for example, the same even number) is displayed even if the player wins the advantageous jackpot type. Then, when the ball enters the variable winning device while the variable winning device is moved and the ball is allowed to enter, and the ball enters the specific area, the ball corresponds to the original jackpot type An effect of displaying the combination of the third symbols (for example, promoting to an odd identical number or maintaining an even identical number) is executed. With such a configuration, even after the ball enters the specific area, it is possible to draw attention to the effect in expectation of an advantageous jackpot type being notified by the promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from entering the specific area to ending the big hit from being merely like a task for obtaining a prize ball. That is, since the game can be prevented from being monotonous, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is not provided (the game state after the big hit is predetermined according to the big hit type), the game state after the big hit end can be notified by the promotion effect. You may. In other words, during the jackpot, the player is configured to make it difficult to distinguish between the time saving state and the probable change state after the jackpot, and a part of the case where the time saving state is set and the case where the probable change state is set Thus, at the end of the jackpot, it is notified that the time has been reduced. If the probable change state has been set, the promotion effect is executed after the jackpot, and based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, when a predetermined number of start winnings is detected), the promotion effect is changed to the probable change state. It may be configured to execute a promotion effect. In addition, when the time reduction state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and the promotion effect is executed, an effect that fails to promote to the probable change state may be executed based on a predetermined opportunity. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 in which the same opening pattern is set for a specific winning opening with a small hit and a so-called thorough odds is once notified that the small hit is a small hit, and the win is awarded with a chance. May be configured to notify the promotion to a thorough propulsion at a predetermined opportunity by a promotion effect. Furthermore, an open pattern that cannot be passed through the probable switch is set by a jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the probable switch and a jackpot type in which an open pattern that cannot be passed through the probable switch are set. The configuration may be such that the jackpot type is notified, and the promotion to the jackpot type in which an opening pattern that can pass through the probability change switch is set at a predetermined timing.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described third embodiment, when the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is started, the promotion effect is executed over the opening period of the jackpot, the first round period, and the interval period. In the promotion effect, an effect is performed in which the combination of the main symbols confirmed and displayed in the variable display effect that notifies the jackpot is promoted to a combination of the main symbols corresponding to the jackpot having a higher degree of advantage for the player, and the promotion is performed. If successful, the system is notified that the jackpot type is more advantageous.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, a configuration in which one variation display effect is executed in a pseudo manner in the execution period of the variation display for notifying the jackpot and the period from the start of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. It was. Thus, in addition to whether or not a jackpot is achieved, the type of the jackpot (whether a left-handed hit or a right-handed hit) in the case of a jackpot can be notified by the variable display effect of 1.

  FIG. 104 (a) is a display that can be displayed when a left-handed jackpot (any of the jackpots D3 and H3) is obtained in the special symbol lottery and when the reach state occurs due to the special symbol lottery. It is the figure which showed the aspect. As shown in FIG. 104A, in the present modification, when the reach state occurs, the character “Left strike” and the image of the left-pointing arrow are displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in the display area HR1. In the upper center portion of the display screen, a display area HR5 in which a character "strike to the left to stop the design!" Is displayed. By these displays, the player can easily understand that the symbol is stopped and displayed by firing the ball to the left.

  In the case of a jackpot, the display mode shown in FIG. 104A is set at the timing when the jackpot opening period is started. That is, in the present modification, the third symbol is not stopped and displayed even in the jackpot opening period, and remains in the reach state. Under this situation, if the player does not suggest left hitting, firing the ball toward the left specific winning opening 656a in the first round may be delayed. If the launch to the left specific winning opening 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be made to enter the ball during the opening period of the left specific winning opening 656a (the ball does not pass through the positive change switch 65e3), resulting in a positive change big hit. Nevertheless, there is a possibility that the probability change state will not be given after the jackpot. In order to prevent such a situation, in the present modification, at the time when the opening period is started during the execution of the variable display, an effect indicating left-handing (see FIG. 104A) is executed. Also, in order to prevent (suppress) the detection of a big hit from the display mode, a predetermined timing (for example, one second before the third symbol is fixedly displayed) even during the execution of the out-of-shift display. The effect (see FIG. 104 (a)) indicating that the player has left-handed is executed. This makes it possible to determine whether the game is a big hit or a miss until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's expectation of the big hit can be maintained for a longer time.

  FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when one of the jackpots D3 and H3 is reached and all the third symbols are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the number “7” is triggered by the fact that the player makes a left-handed operation and the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a during the performance indicating the left-handed operation. An effect in which a third symbol (a main symbol) imitating is prepared is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the left hit has been made. In addition, by using a configuration in which a jackpot is notified based on the fact that a ball has entered the left specific winning opening 656a, attention can be paid to the whereabouts of the fired ball (whether the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a). A game can be played. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. If a special symbol is drawn by lottery and an effect indicating left hit is performed, the left specific winning opening 656a is not opened, so that the ball fired by left hitting enters the left specific winning opening 656a. I will not do it. In this case, after a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed after the effect indicating left-handing has been executed, a stop symbol of a combination that is out of alignment (combination other than a double stitch) is stopped and displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 104, the case where the jackpots are D3 and G3 has been described as an example. However, a similar effect is executed for other jackpots. In other words, when the jackpots are A3 and E3, an effect is performed in which a third symbol (main symbol) imitating an odd number other than “7” is prepared. An effect in which a third symbol (a main symbol) imitating the numeral of (i) is prepared is executed. Also, in the case of the disconnection accompanied by the reach state, the reach state may be set by a number other than “7”.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a temporal change of the effect mode after the start of the variable display effect in a case where a special symbol lottery results in a big hit and a case where the special symbol is released with a reach state. First, with reference to FIG. 105 (a), a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when a big hit occurs.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows a change over time in the effect mode in the case of developing into a super reach and becoming a big hit. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is started, first, the normal variable display is performed for 10 seconds, and then the reach state occurs at the time of 10 seconds. . Thereafter, after a normal reach effect for 20 seconds, a super reach effect is developed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Further, after the super-reach effect has continued for 28 seconds, an effect indicating left-handing (left-hand navigation, see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the effect indicating left-handed is displayed, the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display corresponding to the jackpot has actually elapsed, and the opening period of the jackpot has entered. ing. Therefore, in the first symbol display device 37, the variation display of the first symbol (special symbol) ends when 58 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation, and a stop symbol indicating a big hit is displayed.

  When one second of the opening period elapses and a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a after the left specific winning opening 656a is opened, a third symbol (the third symbol imitating the same numeral) on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. An effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) in which the main symbols are aligned is executed. Then, it is notified that the big hit has been made, and an effect indicating that the big hit is being executed is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), even in the case of an out-of-order lottery result with a reach state, from the start of the variable display until the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed. Is common to the case of the jackpot (see FIG. 105 (a)). Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), in the case of a deviation, one second after the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed, the combination of the third symbols indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed. Then, it is notified that it has come off.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 105, the fluctuation time when the special symbol is a big hit is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time when the special symbol is lost by 2 seconds. This is because, when the out-of-change display is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol is notified during the execution period of the change display, whereas when the change display of the hit is executed, the big hit is displayed. This is because the variable display is performed over the opening period and the period of the first round. If the same fluctuation time is used for the jackpot and the miss, the timing of generating left-handed navigation will be different between the case of the big hit and the case of the miss, and the lottery result will be calculated before the end of the fluctuation effect due to the difference in the fluctuation time. There is a risk of being perceived. On the other hand, in the present modified example, since the variation time is longer in the case of the hit than the jackpot, the timing of displaying the left-handed navigation can be matched between the hit and the hit. Therefore, it becomes difficult to detect the result of the special symbol lottery based on the fluctuation time, so that the result of the fluctuation display effect can be noticed.

  As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern, the big hit opening period, and the first round period are changed. In this configuration, the variable display effect 1 is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the type of the jackpot in one variable display effect in addition to whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not. Can be.

  Note that, in the present modified example, in a case where a big hit occurs in the variable display effect, the reach state is set with the number type corresponding to the big hit type, but the promotion effect is executed as in the third embodiment described above. A lottery configuration may be used. Then, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect is performed using the remaining period after the jackpot symbol is announced in the first round of the jackpot and the interval period after the first round ends. May be executed. With such a configuration, even if the third symbols with even numbers are once prepared, it is possible to expect that the promotion effect is executed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In this modification, an image suggesting left-handing is displayed in the display area HR1 at the upper left of the display screen in the opening period of the jackpot and the last two seconds of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the departure. It is not something that can be done. For example, an effect indicating left-handing to the player may be performed in a manner that is more conspicuous than the changing third symbol. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above-described modification, a character “Aim for V!” And a left variable winning device 656 are provided on the layer on the front side of the changing third symbol. It may be configured to display a schematic image. When the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a (when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit), the image in which the third symbol imitating the same number is stopped and displayed is displayed. As a background, an image imitating the character “V” may be displayed on the near side of the third symbol. The display of the image imitating the character "V" may be continued until, for example, one round ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to look at the result of the effect without hitting the ball until the fluctuation display ends. Therefore, when a big hit occurs, the ball can be more reliably made to enter the left specific winning opening 656a in the first round. Further, for example, the changing third symbol may be displayed in a translucent manner so that the effect indicating left-handedness may be more conspicuous, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, a small hit is made with a high probability. When the small hit occurs, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the big hit E, The opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of F is configured to be the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the end of the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . Thus, regardless of whether the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol reserved at the end of the jackpot or in the case where all of the jackpots are off, the period until the door break mode effect is completed. The configuration was such that a series of opening and closing operations of the opening and closing door 65f1 were the same.

  On the other hand, in the present fourth embodiment, a jackpot of a type in which the player can easily detect whether or not the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is out of range, and a type of the jackpot which is difficult to detect. A jackpot was provided. Thus, depending on the type of jackpot, the game performance is such that it is not known whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door break mode production is confirmed, and the door break mode production is performed whether or not it has come off. It is possible to switch between game characteristics that are easy to detect during the game.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ROM 202 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b and the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed. It is different in that it is. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, in the fourth embodiment, five jackpot types of jackpots A4 to E4 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Also, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of jackpots F4 to H4 are provided.

  The jackpots A4, B4, D4, and F4 to H4 are jackpot types that perform the same operations as the jackpots A to F in the first embodiment. That is, the jackpots A4 and F4 each have a jackpot of 16 rounds, the jackpot B4 is a jackpot of 5 rounds, and the jackpot D4 is a jackpot of two rounds. When these jackpots occur, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds in each round, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the jackpot, and the ball can be easily passed to the positive change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Can be. The jackpot G4 is a jackpot with seven rounds, and the jackpot H4 is a jackpot with six rounds. When these jackpots occur, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at the maximum in each round, so that almost no prize balls can be obtained, and there is almost no possibility that the balls pass through the positive change switch 65e3 during the jackpots. Absent.

  The jackpot C4 operates in the same manner as the jackpot B4 (5 rounds jackpot), but after the jackpot ends, during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol, whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is removed. It becomes easy to determine. More specifically, at the time of the jackpot C4, when the jackpot ends and the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the fluctuation time (3 seconds) having a length different from the interval period (1 second) of the jackpots G4 and H4. Seconds). Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened, it can be estimated whether or not the lottery of the special symbol has been missed. In other words, if the player feels that the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened after the big hit clearly exceeds 1 second, the opening of this time becomes a special symbol (small hit). It can be recognized that there is a high possibility that the opening is based on the fact.

  The jackpot E4 has the same operation as the jackpot D4 (two rounds jackpot), but, like the jackpot C4, is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is out of place after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the case of the jackpot C4 or the jackpot E4, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened, it is determined whether or not the winning has occurred. It is configured to be able to guess. Thereby, after the end of the big hit, the game can be performed not only by the content of the door break mode effect but also by paying attention to the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1). In particular, during the performance of an effect that has a high risk of becoming a disadvantageous second special symbol jackpot (an effect of opening the door 814 using the tattered key 813), the identification is performed. If it is felt that the opening interval of the winning opening 65a exceeds one second, the possibility that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation is increased, so that the player can be relieved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the big hit (big hit C4, E4) in which it is easy to estimate whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is missed is referred to as “special hit”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the jackpots A4, B4, D4, and F4, as in the first embodiment, whether the lottery result of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is out (small jackpot) or jackpot. Cannot be identified (difficult) from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, depending on the type of the door break mode effect, it is not known whether or not the hit of the second special symbol is included until the result is confirmed. Since it is possible to switch between easy-to-detect game characteristics during execution of the door-break mode effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot B4 and the jackpot C4 are configured so that the operation during the jackpot (opening the specific winning opening 65a, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81) is exactly the same. I have. Similarly, the jackpot D4 and the jackpot E4 are configured so that the operations during the jackpot are exactly the same. For this reason, when the jackpot ends in 2 rounds or 5 rounds, it is difficult to know whether the hit of the second special symbol is included or not until the result of the door break mode production is confirmed, It is difficult to discriminate which of the game characteristics, which is easy to detect during the execution of the door break mode effect, is set. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is continuously set as the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, whether the second special symbol hit was included until the result of the door break mode effect was confirmed. It is possible to make the player think that the playability that is unknown is set. Therefore, the game can be performed with the expectation that the game mode will shift to the probability change mode until the door break mode effect is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 106, for the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit A4” is defined in association with the range of the value “0 to 9” of the first hit type counter C2, and “10 to 19” Is defined in association with "big hit B4", the range of "20-89" is defined in association with "big hit C4", and the range of "90, 91" is defined with "big hit". “D4” is defined in association with “big hit E4” in the range of “92 to 99”. In other words, in the five rounds of "big hit B4" and "big hit C4", "big hit C4" (special hit) is selected at a higher ratio (seven times easier to select). . In addition, in the “big hit D4” and the “big hit E4” of the two rounds, the selection rate of the “big hit E4” (special hit) is higher (five times easier to select). . With such a configuration, it is possible to easily set a game property that makes it easy to detect whether or not the player has come off during the execution of the door-break mode effect. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, the game can be played with more attention to the operation of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Since the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each of the big hits F4 to H4 is the same as the big hits D to F in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

  Next, a variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107A, the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A). The difference is that a hit / after hit table 202d8 and a special hit / after hit table 202d9 are added.

  The special winning after-hit table 202d8 indicates that the special symbol has been changed after the special winning (big hit C4 or E4) is finished and the number of times the special symbol has changed is four or less, and the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit. Is a data table referred to in FIG. In addition, the special hit after-miss table 202d9 indicates a case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed after the end of the special hit is four or less, and the lottery of the second special symbol results in a loss (small hit). Is a data table referred to in FIG. Details of the special hit / after-hit table 202d8 and the special hit / after-miss table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c).

  FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit / after-hit table 202d8. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), in the special hit-after-hit table 202d8, a "hit middle change" with a change time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the value "0" of the change type counter CS1. , “1 to 198”, a “short-period fluctuation” with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in association with the range. For this reason, if the big win is achieved by the lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the special win, the fluctuation time of one second is set with a high probability (198/199), but with a low probability (1/199). A change time of 3 seconds may be set. For this reason, when the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds), it is not determined that the lottery result of the loss (small hit) is determined, but the big hit is won. It is possible that

  FIG. 107 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit-and-miss table 202d9. As shown in FIG. 107 (c), the special hit-and-miss table 202d9 corresponds to "out-of-middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds for the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 66". In addition, a “short-circuit variation of one second” with a variation time of one second is defined in association with the range of “67 to 198”. For this reason, if a lottery of the second special symbol is lost (small hit) after the special hit, a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds or more. As described above, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol after the special hit, the change time of 3 seconds is selected only with a very low probability, so the change time is 3 seconds ( When the player recognizes that it has exceeded 1 second), it can be assumed that the currently displayed variable display is highly likely to be a variable display corresponding to the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to realize the gaming ability that the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode can be predicted from the set change time during the execution of the door break mode effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 108, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that a change counter 203ca and a post-special flag 203cb are added. Are different in that

  The fluctuation number counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation display (special symbol lottery) executed after the big hit. The initial value of the variation counter 203ca is set to 0, and is incremented by one each time the special symbol variation start timing is reached (see S2001 in FIG. 110 and S2201 in FIG. 112). Also, when a special symbol lottery wins, the initial value is reset to 0 (see S253 in FIG. 109). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the variation number counter 203ca (FIG. 111). See S2103 and S2109).

  The special hit flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether or not the previous big hit was a special hit (big hit C3 or E3). If the post special hit flag 203cb is on, it means that the previous big hit is a special hit, and if it is off, it means that the previous big hit is not a special hit. The initial value of the special hit flag 203cb is set to off, and is updated at the start of the big hit according to the big hit type (see S254 in FIG. 109). When the second special symbol lottery is executed, one data table for determining a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d with reference to the special hit flag 203cb (see FIG. 111). See S2105 and S2111). In the fourth embodiment, the special hit flag 203cb is updated when the start of the big hit is set. However, the update may be performed at the end of the big hit.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 4 (S131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S201 to 212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28). ), The same processes as those of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S207 ends, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol is performed. The process is executed (S251), and the process ends. The details of the special figure 2 change start process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S212 is completed, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed (S252), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 1 change start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off. At the same time, the variation counter 203ca is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S253). Next, the special hit flag 203cb is updated according to the type of the big hit that has been won this time (S254), and the process proceeds to S220. In the process of S254, the special hit flag 203cb is set to ON when the special winning (one of the big hits C3 and E3) is won this time, and is set to OFF when the other special hit type is selected. By switching the state of the special hit flag 203cb according to the big hit type, it is possible to switch the data table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern according to the state of the special hit flag 203cb after the big hit. Therefore, if the special hit flag 203cb is on, when determining the change pattern of the second special symbol after the big hit, the change pattern is referred to by referring to the special hit after-hit table 202d8 and the special hit after-miss table 202d9. Is determined, so that it is possible to relatively easily infer whether or not the game has come off based on the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a. Also, if the special hit flag 203cb is off, it is determined whether the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit has been won or missed from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a, so that it is difficult to distinguish the gaming ability. .

  Next, the details of the above-described special figure 2 change start process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 change start process (S251) is a process for starting a change pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, as described above.

  In the special figure 2 change start process (see FIG. 110), first, the value of the change number counter 203ca is updated by adding 1 (S2001), and the data of the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is obtained. (S2002). Next, the probable change flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the probable change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the probable change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state (S2003: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 per unit acquired in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol change state (the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S2003: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 is determined. , And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13B) (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol big random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 39”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

  Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S2004 or S2005 is executed (S2006). Details of this special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing (S2006) ends, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing (S2006) is set ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set (S2009), and the process ends. These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36).

  Next, the details of the above-described special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S2006) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is a process for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol as described above.

  In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S2101), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S2101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 110), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in S2002 of the special figure 2 change start process (see FIG. 110) is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106). , The jackpot type is determined. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot F4 (16 rounds of the probability variable jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of "5-49", it is a jackpot G4 (7 rounds regular jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50-99", it is a jackpot H4 (6 rounds regular jackpot). It is determined (see FIG. 106).

  In the process of S2102, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit F4 to H4). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit F4 to H4) is set as the stop type.

  Upon completion of the process in S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103). If the value is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), it is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d that the per-figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d5 is read (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2103, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is ON (S2105), and the special hit flag is determined. If the switch 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), the special hit / after-hit table 202d8 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2106), and the process shifts to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the post-special hit flag 203cb is off (S2105: No), the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (four or less variation) is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d ( (S2107), the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the result of the current lottery of the special symbol is out of place (S2101: No), first, a display mode at the time of out of place is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The stop type to be displayed at 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109). If it is determined that the value is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), the special pattern 2 deviates from the variation pattern selection table 202d (5 or more variations). ) Table 202d7 is read (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2114. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is ON (S2111), and If the flag 203cb is ON (S2111: Yes), the special hit / missing table 202d9 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process shifts to S2114. If it is determined in the processing of S2111 that the post-special hit flag 203cb is off (S2111: No), the table 202d6 for special figure 2 deviation (four or less fluctuation) is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2113). ) And the process moves to S2114.

  In the process of S2114, the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is determined based on the data table read by any of the processes of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112, and S2113 and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The variation pattern to be indicated is determined (S2114), and this process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described special figure 1 change start processing (S252) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 1 change start process (S252) is a process for starting a change pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, as described above.

  Among the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 112), in each of the processing of S2201 to S2205 and S2214 to S2216, S2001 to S2005 and S2007 to S200 of the above-described special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 110), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S2009 is executed.

  In the special figure 1 change start process (see FIG. 112), when the process of S2204 or S2205 ends, it is then determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol acquired in the process of S2204 or S2205 is a big hit ( If it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S2206: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) to determine what the big hit type is. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot A4 (16 rounds probability change jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of "10 to 19", it is a big hit B4 (five rounds of the probability change big hit), and if it is in the range of "20 to 89", it is a big hit C4 (five rounds special hit). It is determined that if it is in the range of “90, 91”, it is a jackpot D4 (two rounds of probability change jackpot), and if it is in the range of “92 to 99”, it is a jackpot E4 (two round special hits). The determination is made (see FIG. 106).

  In the process of S2207, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A4 to E4). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hits A4 to E4) is set as the stop type. When the process of S2207 is completed, the special figure per hit table 202d1 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is out of place (S2206: No), the display mode at the time of out of place is set (S2209). In the processing of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The stop type to be displayed at 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the probable change flag 203g whether the special symbol is in the probable change state (S2210). If it is determined that the probable change state is in progress (S2210: Yes), the special pattern 1 deviates from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. The (probable change) table 202d3 is read (S2211), and the process shifts to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2210 that the special symbol is not in the certainty change state (S2210: No), the special figure 1 departure (normal) table 202d2 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2212), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S2213.

  In the process of S2213, a variation pattern is determined based on the data table read out by any of the processes of S2208, S2211, or S2212 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process proceeds to S2214. I do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a jackpot of a type that allows the player to easily detect whether or not the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is out of range, It is configured to provide a jackpot of a type that is difficult to detect. More specifically, if the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is missed, the big hit type (special hit) in which the fluctuation time of a period different from the jackpot interval period of the second special symbol is likely to be selected. And a jackpot type that is difficult to select. Thereby, after the end of the special hit, the player can estimate whether or not the lottery result is out of order by paying attention to the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1. That is, it is possible to cause the player to predict the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode before the result of the door-break mode effect is notified. On the other hand, after the jackpot other than the special jackpot ends, it is determined from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 whether the opening / closing operation is due to the continuous small hit or the opening / closing operation due to the hit jackpot G4 or H4. It becomes difficult. Thus, depending on the type of jackpot, the game performance is such that it is not known whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door break mode production is confirmed, and the door break mode production is performed whether or not it has come off. It is possible to switch between game characteristics that are easy to detect during the game. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol after the special hit is lost (small hit), the interval period of the big hit of the second special symbol (1 second) is longer (3 seconds). ) Is set so that the change time is easily set (ratio of about 1/3), but the change time (that is, the interval until the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in the case of the deviation) is limited to this. Not something. The range may be arbitrarily determined as long as the player can determine that a period different from the interval period has been set. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is easily set. With this configuration, since the opening and closing doors 65f1 are opened and closed at clearly short intervals, there is a high possibility that the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 65f1 for the player this time is due to a small hit. You can make me think. Therefore, a game can be played by paying attention to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1. In addition, a variable member capable of performing a variable operation is provided separately from the opening / closing door 65f1, and the variable operation of the variable member is performed after a special hit or a special hit. It may be configured to be different.

  In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 which is disadvantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is premised, but when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, It may be applied to an advantageous pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, as the number of times that the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened at one-second intervals continues after the end of the jackpot, the sense of expectation about the advantageous second special symbol jackpot increases, so that the game is played. The player can play the game by paying attention to the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1.

  In the fourth embodiment, a configuration is provided in which the type of the variable operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 after the end of the jackpot is different between the case where the variable operation is out of place and the case of the jackpot, and the type of the jackpot which is likely to be the same variable operation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect of the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 may be such that a large jackpot type that is likely to be different between a case of a miss and a large jackpot and a jackpot type that is easily matched are provided. Further, for example, depending on the type of the jackpot, if the odds are lost in the special symbol lottery, the odds are small (that is, the open / close door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)). It is good also as a structure to make it. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the opening / closing door 65f1 will not be opened (that is, it will come off).

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 139. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 is set during a big hit. When the ball passes, the game state after the big hit is set to a probable change mode (probable change state of a special symbol and time saving state of a normal symbol) which is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, instead of the variable prize device 65, a V prize device 670 having the same appearance and internal structure as the variable prize device 65 and having the functions of the components different from each other is provided. ing. The V winning device 670 opens the opening / closing door 670f1 when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, and enters a state where game balls can enter. Inside the V winning device 670, a V winning switch 670e3 is provided at a position corresponding to the positive change switch 65e3 in the first embodiment. A game ball that has entered the V-prize device 670 during the opening period of the opening / closing door 670f1 passes through the above-described V-prize switch 670e3, so that a large hit game is provided after the small hit is completed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol lottery is a small hit and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the V winning device 670. In this case, a big hit is started. In the fifth embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability (for example, at 9/10) only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 6400). (The lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol), and the ease of entering the second entrance 6400 in accordance with the game state. It is configured to be variable. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the probability of a big hit in a special symbol lottery is set to be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second entrance 6400 (the normal symbol hit and the The probability of winning a small hit varies depending on the game status, and the possibility of winning a large hit depends on the game status. (So-called specifications of a type 1 and type 2 mixer).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, three types of game states are provided. Specifically, a time-short game state A in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400, a normal game state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second entrance 6400, and There are three types of time-saving gaming state B. In the time-saving gaming state A, by playing a game aiming at the second entrance 6400, a game ball can be made to enter the second entrance 6400 with a high probability, and the second ball is hardly reduced. The special symbol lottery can be executed continuously. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the time saving game state A, the time saving game state A is again set at a high rate (a ratio of 80%). Therefore, once the time saving game state A is reached, the time saving game state A and the big hit are achieved. It is easy to repeat. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state A is a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and therefore, it is difficult for the V prize due to a small hit to occur. Therefore, the possibility of a big hit is reduced. In addition, even if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of transition to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit is reduced (for example, a rate of 50%), so that the normal game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. It becomes. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state B, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400 in the same manner as in the normal game state. Since the rate of transition to the gaming state A is the highest (for example, a rate of 100%), the state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

  In the fifth embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the time saving game state A, either the time saving game state A or the time saving game state B is set as the game state after the end of the big hit. With this configuration, even if the time-saving game state A is not set, the time-saving game state B is more advantageous than the normal game state (it is easy to shift to the time-saving game state A when a big hit occurs). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game when the time-saving gaming state A ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the following description of the fifth embodiment, the most unfavorable normal gaming state is referred to as “normal mode”, the most advantageous time-saving gaming state A is referred to as “rensou mode”, and the disadvantageous staying state is changed to the extendeds mode. Is referred to as a "pull-back mode".

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. This is a change, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 113 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113, in the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 64a provided along with the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. Note that, at the first entrance 64 in the fifth embodiment, a game ball fired (left-hit) toward a flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front is viewed. While it is possible to enter the ball, the game ball fired (hit right) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the ball. Thus, the arrangement of nails and the like is set. In addition, below the first entrance 64, there is provided a variable winning device 650 that is set in a state in which game balls can enter in each round of the jackpot. The specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 is configured as a winning opening in which ten winning balls are paid out every time a game ball wins.

  A V winning device 670 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view. As described above, the V winning device 670 has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 4 to 6), but is configured differently in the function of each unit. More specifically, in the V winning device 670, the opening / closing door 670f1 on the upper surface is normally closed, and the opening / closing door 670f1 provided on the upper surface is closed for a predetermined period only when a small win is achieved by a special symbol lottery. It is released (for example, for 1.5 seconds), and a state is formed in which a game ball can enter the inside through the V winning opening 670a which is an opening. Inside the V winning device 670, instead of the normal discharge channel 65e1 (see FIG. 6 (a)) and the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6 (b)) in the first embodiment, the same structure is used. Are provided with a normal discharge channel 670e1 and a special discharge channel 670e2. The game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 670e1 and the special discharge flow path 670e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The special discharge channel 670e2 is provided with a V winning switch 670e3 that starts a big hit after a small hit when a game ball passes. Although the details will be described later, during the small hit, the game balls are basically distributed to the normal discharge channel 670e1, and are distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2 only for a short period (for example, 0.075 seconds). To form For this reason, even if a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 670 during the opening period (1.5 seconds) of the opening / closing door 670f1 based on the small hit, it is distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2. If the period is not a certain period, the normal discharge flow path 670e1 flows down, and the big hit does not start. In the fifth embodiment, when a game ball is continuously fired aiming at the V winning device 670, the game ball enters the special discharge channel 670e2 at a rate of about once every 20 small hits. It is configured to be.

  As shown in FIG. 113, a through gate 67 is provided in a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front face of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and a game ball enters below the through gate 67. A second ball entrance 6400 is provided as a trigger for executing a second special symbol lottery. In addition, as shown in FIG. 113, a large number of nails are planted in a region from the upstream side of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view to the second entrance 6400. With these nails, at least almost all game balls fired at a firing strength (for example, a firing strength of 95% or more) that collides with the return rubber 69 flow down to the second entrance 6400 (induction). can do. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, an area for guiding a game ball to the second entrance 6400 is referred to as a second entrance guide area.

  Note that the second entrance 6400 is for a horizontally long rectangular shaped electric accessory 6400a that covers the second entrance 6400, and an electric accessory for opening and closing forwardly with the lower side of the electric accessory 6400a as an axis. And a solenoid (not shown). The electric accessory 6400a is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot be won. In the closed state of the electric accessory 6400a, the electric accessory 6400a and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the electric accessory 6400a. In addition, when the electric accessory 6400a is tilted to the lower front side, an open state in which the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400 is temporarily formed. For this reason, even if the game ball is fired at a firing intensity that collides with the return rubber 6400, the game ball will be in the second state unless the electric accessory 6400 a is in the open state at the timing of reaching the second entrance 6400. The ball passes through the entrance 6400 without being able to enter the ball, and flows downward (a region where the V winning device 670, the variable winning device 650, the out opening 66, etc. are provided).

  As shown in FIG. 113, the inside of the second entrance opening area and the upstream side of the second entrance 6400 are branched into a right passage R1 and a left passage R2. Further, a through gate 67 is provided in the left channel R2 as shown in FIG. Further, on the upstream side of the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2, a game ball that has entered the second entrance guide area is placed in one of the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2. A distribution member 6600 for distribution is provided. Although the details will be described later, depending on the interval at which the game balls reach, the distribution member 6600 makes it easier to be distributed to one of the flow paths, or the distribution member 6600 makes it easier to be distributed to both flow paths alternately. Is variable. More specifically, when the firing interval of the game balls (the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600) becomes long (for example, when the firing interval and the arrival interval become 1.5 seconds or more). In the case where the game balls are distributed only to the right channel R1 by the distribution member 6600, the firing interval of the game balls (the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600) is shortened (for example, In the case of the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds), the game balls are alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 by the distribution means. In addition, when the game ball is fired at the firing interval of 0.6 seconds to 1.5 seconds, depending on the arrangement of the distribution member 6600 at the time of reaching the distribution member 6600, the right flow path R1 Whether the distribution is made or the distribution is made to the left channel R2 is variable. Therefore, if the firing interval can be accurately adjusted between 0.6 seconds and 1.5 seconds, it is possible to keep the game balls distributed only to the left channel R2. The configuration of the distribution member 6600 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 114A to 114D are diagrams illustrating the operation contents of the distribution member 6600. FIG. FIG. 114A shows a state in which the game ball has flowed down (dropped) toward the distribution member 6600 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the distribution member 6600 includes a rotating shaft 6600a, a substantially rod-shaped right receiving portion 6600R extending rightward with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a, and an upper left corner with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a. The left receiving portion 6600L of a substantially rod shape extending in the direction, the substantially rod-shaped hanging portion 6600b extending (hanging down) to the lower left with respect to the rotation axis, and the right side of the hanging portion 6600b joined to the right side in front view. And a substantially rectangular parallelepiped deflected portion 6600c. The distributing member 6600 is configured to be rotatable in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rotation axis 6600a as a rotation axis about the rotation axis 6600a, and the hanging part 6600b is moved relative to the rotation axis 6600a. By being arranged vertically downward, the configuration is such that it has a substantially "Y-shaped" shape when viewed from the front. Note that the unbalanced portion 6600c is made of a material having a higher density than the other portions (the right receiving portion 6600R, the left receiving portion 6600L, the hanging portion 6600b) of the distribution member 6600, and the center of gravity of the entire distribution member 6600 is A difference is provided between the mass of the deflected portion 6600c and the other portion to such an extent that it substantially matches the center of gravity. Specifically, for example, while the weighted portion 6600c is made of iron and has a mass of 4 g, all other portions are made of PS material, and the total mass is 0.5 g. Have been. In a state where no force other than the gravity G is acting on the distribution member 6600, the position is finally stabilized at the position where the center of gravity is the lowest (the state where the potential energy is the smallest). Even if it moves to the disposition, if there is no action other than the gravity G (the action of the external force), it finally returns to the disposition shown in FIG.

  The distribution member 6600 is configured to be able to receive a game ball flowing down from above the second entrance guide area by the right receiving portion 6600R and the left receiving portion 6600L. At the initial position (stationary position) of the distribution member 6600, when a game ball flows down from above the second entrance guide area (see FIG. 114 (a)), the game ball is mainly received by the right receiving portion 6600R. Can be When the game ball collides with the right receiving portion 6600R, a downward force acts on the right receiving portion 6600R in front view. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front about the rotation shaft 6600a. Here, since the mass of the game ball is configured to be heavier (approximately 5.5 g) than the total mass (approximately 4.5 g) of the distribution member 6600, the game ball collides with the distribution member 6600. The right receiving portion 6600R is pushed down, and the distribution member 6600 is rotated clockwise in front view. This causes the distribution member 6600 to rotate so that the right receiving portion 6600R forms an inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 114B). Therefore, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 6600R flows down in the front right lower direction along the inclination formed by the right receiving portion 6600R, and falls into the right channel R1. That is, the game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1.

  In this manner, the game ball that first reaches the distribution member 6600 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position (completely stopped) is distributed to the right channel R1. I have. As described above, the through flow gate 67 is provided in the left side flow path R2, but the through flow gate 67 is not provided in the right side flow path R1. The flow path is disadvantageous for the player because there is no possibility of the flow being performed. By allocating the initial position of the distribution member 6600 to the disadvantageous channel, it is possible to prevent the initial state of the gaming machine from becoming an advantageous state.

  After the game ball is distributed to the right channel R1 (falls from the right receiving portion 6600R), a force (load due to the weight of the game ball) for rotating the distribution member 6600 clockwise in front view is applied. Since it disappears, only the gravity G acts on the distribution member 6600. Here, immediately after the game balls are distributed to the right channel, the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 is moved to the upper left from the initial arrangement. Therefore, of the gravitational force G acting on the distribution member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction is a force for rotating the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise in front view (right downward in front view). By the component Gc of the rotation direction of gravity, the distribution member 6600 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Even if the distribution member 6600 reaches the initial position due to this rotation, the distribution member 6600 does not stop immediately, but once passes through the initial position. This is because kinetic energy is generated during the rotation operation from the arrangement of FIG. 114 (b) to the initial arrangement. Therefore, the distributing member 6600 continues to rotate in the counterclockwise direction even after passing through the initial arrangement, and temporarily stops when the kinetic energy becomes 0 (the rotational speed becomes 0) ( FIG. 114 (c)). Note that if the player has continuously fired the game ball into the second entrance guide area (that is, fired at the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds, the initial period), The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 before and after this temporary rest position (see FIG. 114 (c)), which is arranged after passing through the arrangement. That is, the movable range in which the height of the end of the right receiving portion 6600R opposite to the rotating shaft 6600a is higher than the height of the end of the left receiving portion 6600L opposite to the rotating shaft 6600a ( The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 while moving in the rotation range).

  As shown in FIG. 114D, when the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 after the distribution member 6600 has passed, the game ball mainly collides with the left receiving portion 6600L. The left receiving portion 6600L hit by the game ball exerts a force in a direction of being pushed downward in a front view due to the weight of the hit game ball. That is, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As described above, since the mass of the game ball is heavier than the total mass of the distribution member 6600, the distribution member 6600 is rotated, and the left receiving portion 6600L is inclined downward from the upper right to the lower left in front view. Form. The game ball received by the left receiving portion 6600L rolls along this inclination, and falls into the left channel R2 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. That is, the game ball is distributed to the left channel R2.

  After the game ball is distributed to the left channel R2 (falls from the left receiving portion 6600L), a force (a load due to the weight of the game ball) for rotating the distribution member 6600 in a counterclockwise direction in front view. Is eliminated, so that only the gravity G acts on the distribution member 6600. Therefore, similarly to after the game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 (see FIGS. 114 (b) and (c)), of the gravity G acting on the distribution member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction is used. As a result, a force returning to the direction of the initial arrangement acts, so that the distribution member 6600 rotates clockwise in front view.

  Thereafter, while the game balls continue to be fired continuously at the shortest (0.6 second) firing interval, the distribution member 6600 causes the game balls to flow through one flow path (the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R1). The operation of distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths R2) and the operation of rotating the game ball to an arrangement capable of distributing the game ball to the other flow path by the reaction of distributing the game ball are repeated. Thus, by continuously firing the game balls at the shortest firing interval, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2. As described above, since the through gate 67 is provided in the left side channel R2, by continuously firing game balls at the shortest firing interval, the through gate 67 is provided at a rate of one for two game balls. 67 can be passed.

  On the other hand, when the game balls are continuously fired at a firing interval of 1.5 seconds or more, the arrangement is such that the game balls can be once distributed to the left flow path R2 by the recoil that has been distributed to the right flow path R1. Although it rotates to the initial arrangement again, the pendulum operation centering on the initial arrangement is performed thereafter. In this pendulum operation, the amplitude decreases over time due to air resistance, dynamic friction acting on the rotating shaft 6600a, and the like. When 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the range in which game balls can be distributed to the right flow path R1 (the rotating shaft) The pendulum operation is performed (or stopped) only in the range in which the hanging portion 6600b is disposed on the left side of the perpendicular drawn vertically downward from the frame 6600a. For this reason, when the game balls are fired at intervals of 1.5 seconds or more, the game balls are distributed only to the right channel R1, and the game balls are distributed to the through gate 67 provided in the left channel R2. It is impossible to pass the ball. In other words, since it becomes impossible to execute the normal symbol lottery, it is particularly easy for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 (when the normal game hits the game ball, In the extended play mode, where the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol easily entering the second entrance 6400 and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a are set), it is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the extended play mode, a player who wants to distribute game balls to the left channel R2 can fire game balls at the shortest firing interval. That is, in the extended play mode, the game balls can be continuously fired, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Furthermore, by adjusting the firing interval between the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) and 1.5 seconds in accordance with the operation of the sorting member 6600, the sorting member 6600 performing the pendulum operation. It is also possible to cause the game balls to reach the distribution member 6600 only at a timing that changes the arrangement to allow the game balls to be distributed to the left channel R2. In addition, in order to fire the game ball at the shortest firing interval, it is sufficient to perform a relatively simple operation content of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount, but adjust the firing interval to obtain the shortest. In order to fire a game ball at a firing interval other than the firing interval as intended, a delicate operation on the operation handle 51 is required. Therefore, except for some players who have a high game skill, it is more likely that the game ball will be continuously fired at the shortest firing interval by maintaining the operation handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount. By allocating the ball to the left channel R2, it becomes possible to execute lottery of the ordinary symbols more.

  As described above, the distribution member 6600 in the fifth embodiment can change the flow path along which the game ball flows down according to the operation of the player on the handle 51. That is, by performing the operation of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the rotation amount and continuously firing the game ball at the shortest firing interval, the game ball reliably flows down the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 alternately. Can be done. In other words, there is an unfavorable flow path (right flow path R1) in which a normal symbol lottery is not executed even when a game ball passes, and an advantageous symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes. It can be alternately distributed to the flow path (left flow path R2). In addition, while the distributing member 6600 performs a pendulum operation centering on the initial arrangement (see FIG. 114 (a)) by the reaction of distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths, the game is moved to the left flow path R2. By operating the operation handle 51 so as to reach the game ball for a period during which the movable range in which the ball can be distributed is moved, most of the fired game balls are transferred to the left side where the through gate 67 is provided. It is also possible to distribute to the flow path R2. In other words, it is also possible to realize an operation of distributing by disproportionately distributing to a flow path that is advantageous to the player. Although there is no merit for the player, by operating the operation handle 51 so that the firing interval becomes 1.5 seconds or more, it is also possible to modulate a flow path that is disadvantageous for the player and distribute the game ball. It becomes possible. Therefore, the operation content of the operation handle 51 can be made different depending on the skill of the player and the operation to be realized, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400 in the extended play mode (time saving gaming state A). Is done. That is, a very short fluctuation time of 0.1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. In addition, 0.2 seconds is set as an open period of the electric accessory 6400a when a normal symbol is hit. It takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to reach the second ball entry port 6400, so that the game ball just enters the second ball entry port during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. Reached 6400 and entered the ball. Therefore, during the extended play mode, all game balls distributed to the left channel R2 can be set to the second entrance port 6400 simply by continuously hitting the game balls at the maximum launch intensity and the shortest launch interval. You can enter the ball. That is, a game ball can be made to enter the second entrance 6400 at a ratio of about one in two.

  On the other hand, in the pullback mode (time saving game state B), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is also fired to the second entrance guide area next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67, and the right flow path A fluctuation period (0.5 second) of a normal symbol is set in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball distributed to R1 to enter the second entrance 6400. When the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set, and a normal symbol is hit, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400a is opened (after 0.2 seconds, which is the period of flow down the flow path from the gate 67 to the second entrance 6400). In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 second similarly to the extended play mode, the opening period of 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after one game ball passes through the through gate 67 is set. It is impossible to make the ball enter the second ball entry port 6400 unless another game ball is reached. However, even if the game ball continues to be fired to the second entrance guiding area at the shortest firing interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and the second ball is distributed to the second flow path R1. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the entrance 6400, the ball enters the second entrance 6400 after the elapse of the opening period. Therefore, even if the player hits the ball at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400, which is naughty. It becomes a very disadvantageous condition that only the number of possessed balls is reduced. Therefore, in the pullback mode, the player can perform a game method in which the player advances a game by causing a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-handing (to perform a lottery of a special symbol). In other words, a game method similar to that in the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given. It is possible to realize a novel game that can be done.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the pull-back mode has a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is more likely to shift to the extended mode after the big hit is completed than in the normal mode. Configuration. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times after the end of the extended-villa mode. More specifically, when the jackpot E5 is reached in the extended villa mode, the pull-back mode is set until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times after the jackpot is completed. The mode is set to the retraction mode until the end of the operation. On the other hand, when another jackpot type (jackpots A5 to D5) is set in the extended play mode, the extended play mode is set again after the end of the jackpot. For this reason, after the end of the extended-village mode, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot, the pull-back mode is maintained until the special symbol lottery ends 30 or 100 times. In other words, after the end of the extended-villa mode, at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, the pull-back mode is maintained. Therefore, after the end of the extended-villa mode, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue the game at least until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 30 times. That is, the game can be continued at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times even after the end of the extended-villa mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Here, in the case of a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, or in a gaming machine of a specification in which a jackpot is given when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer), the gaming state is In the normal game state in which the game ball does not easily enter the specific area, and in the time-saving game state in which the game ball easily enters the specific area, only two types of game states are provided. In general, there is a specification that shifts to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, at the time of transition to the disadvantageous normal game state, there is a possibility that the motivation of the player for the game may be greatly reduced, and the player immediately quits the game at the time of the end of the time reduction game state. There was a possibility.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the extended play mode, at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, a special easy-to-transfer to the extended play mode in the event of a jackpot is achieved. The state (retraction mode) is set. Thereby, even if the extended play mode ends and the game ball enters an unfavorable game state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from decreasing the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended-play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that, in the fifth embodiment, when the extended-village mode ends, the mode is always shifted to the retraction mode. In other words, if a jackpot has been won by lottery of the second special symbol in the normal symbol time saving state, only the jackpot type that shifts to the retreat mode after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot type that shifts to the pullback mode after the end of the jackpot Is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. At a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%), a jackpot type that shifts to the normal mode after the end of the jackpot may be provided.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the game balls are continuously fired at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), the distribution member 6600 allows the game ball to be distributed to the right flow path R1 and the operation range to the left. The configuration is such that the cycle of switching to the operation range that can be distributed to the flow path R2 and the firing interval of the game balls are substantially the same. That is, the distributing member 6600 of the present embodiment is configured such that during the period of 0.6 seconds from when the game ball is distributed to one flow path to when the next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600, the other flow path is used. (The half cycle of the pendulum operation of the distributing member 6600 is substantially the same as 0.6 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this. . If a game ball can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2 when the game ball is fired at the shortest firing interval, the next game ball arrives after distributing one game ball. The operation range that can be distributed to one flow path and the operation range that can be distributed to the other flow path may be reciprocated by a pendulum operation one or more times during 0.6 seconds before the operation. . In other words, odd half times of the pendulum operation of the distributing member 6600 may be configured to be substantially the same as the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Even with this configuration, each time a game ball fired at the shortest firing interval reaches the distribution member 6600, the game ball can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2.

  In the fifth embodiment, by displacing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 by providing the deflected portion 6600c, an arrangement in which the game balls can be distributed to the right flow path R1 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is stationary (FIG. 114). (See (a)), but the invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the weighted portion 6600c, after the distribution member 6600 performs a rotating operation by distributing the game balls using an elastic body such as a spring, the initial arrangement shown in FIG. It may be configured to return to.

  Next, the operation of the V winning device 670 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the V winning device 670 opens the opening / closing door 670f1 and enters a state where it can enter the ball when a small win is achieved by a special symbol lottery. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an opening period of the opening / closing door 670f1 based on a small hit and a flow path through which a game ball can flow down inside the V winning device 670.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 115, when the small hit is won, the open / close door 670f1 is opened. This open period continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the opening / closing door 670f1 is closed and the small hit ends. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 115, for 0.5 seconds after the small hit is started, the game ball flowing into the inside of the V winning device 670 is guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. , The flow path solenoid 670k is kept off. This makes it difficult for the game ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 670e2 for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit, so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 670e3. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 by setting the channel solenoid 670k to be ON for 0.075 seconds. (Normally, it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the discharge channel 670e1). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds is guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and easily passes through the V winning switch 670e3.

  After 0.075 seconds have elapsed since the passage solenoid 670k was turned on, the passage solenoid 670k is turned off until the small hitting ends. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 is set in a state where it is easily guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. With these operation contents, if the game ball can enter the V winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds during which it is easily guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and can reach the special discharge channel 670e2, the game ball Passes through the V winning switch 670e3, and a big hit is given after the small hit is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small hit, the big hit is not given.

  Since the special discharge channel 670e2 can only pass for 0.075 seconds while the small hit opening period is 1.5 seconds, the game that enters the V winning opening 670a at one small hit The probability that the ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 is 1/20 (0.075 / 1.5). As described above, in the extended play mode, it is difficult for the game balls to enter the second entrance 6400 unless the game balls are continuously fired at the shortest firing interval. The player basically keeps firing the game ball at the shortest firing interval. That is, since it becomes difficult to adjust the firing timing of the game ball for a period during which the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass, it is determined whether the game ball flows down the special discharge channel 670e2. It depends only on the fluctuating time of the symbol and the flowing direction of the game ball. In other words, there is little room for the skill of the player to intervene, and the big hit expectation at the time of the small hit winning is always constant (1/20). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the extended-play mode can be made substantially constant irrespective of the skill of the player, so that even a player who is not accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 can play the game with peace of mind. Can be.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit, the extended play mode is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times or the big hit is achieved. In the fifth embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 9/10, and the probability of a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is 1/200. The probability of ending the extended play mode without winning a symbol or a jackpot without winning a jackpot is about 0.6%. That is, once the mode is shifted to the extended game mode, a very advantageous state is formed in which the extended mode and the large hit are almost repeated until the winning type of the type to which the pull-back mode is given is won after the end of the large hit. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with one goal being to shift to the extended play mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116 and FIG. 117, an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment and that indicates the degree of expectation of the pullback mode will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times after the end of the extended-villa mode. That is, when a big hit is won, the state is set to be an advantageous state in which the mode always shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit. For this reason, while the pullback mode is set, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued. That is, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. However, if the number of special symbol lotteries set as the pull-back mode is too large, the rate of re-entering the extended mode (the rate of returning the extended mode) becomes too large, which is excessively advantageous for the player. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, after providing a variation in the number of lotteries in which the pull-back mode is set (that is, in a configuration in which either 30 times or 100 times is set), any of the lotteries is set. The configuration is such that the selection of the number of times is not specified (concealed). Then, according to the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of selected lotteries (the period of the pullback mode) is suggested. With this configuration, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether the pull-back mode has ended or is continuing, so that even if the number of lotteries exceeds 30 which is the minimum number of lotteries when shifting to the pull-back mode, the game can be played. It can make you want to continue. Therefore, the game can be played for a longer time after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since it is possible to realize the gaming ability of predicting whether or not the pull-back mode has ended based on the type of the back image, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game after the end of the extended-play mode.

  In the fifth embodiment, three types of back images are provided as back images that indicate the degree of expectation that the retraction mode is continuing. That is, a rear image with a high degree of expectation (see FIG. 116 (a)), a rear image with a medium degree of expectation (see FIG. 116 (b)), and a rear image with a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 117) are provided. If the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 after the pull-back mode is set, a process of re-selecting the rear image is executed every 10 special symbol lotteries are performed. In accordance with the update state of the back image, the player can be predicted whether or not the retraction mode is continuing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 116 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a back image with the highest expectation (back image for high expectation) in which the pullback mode is continued is displayed. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), when the back image with the highest expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 moves through the forest. Further, in the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a display area HR6 in which characters "CHANCE !!" are displayed is formed. These display contents can indicate to the player that the pull-back mode is likely to be continued.

  FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a back image with a medium expectation degree in which the retraction mode is continued is displayed. As shown in FIG. 116 (b), when a back image with a medium degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 goes down the river. Further, the character displayed inside the display area HR6 is “CHANCE !?”. Due to these display contents, the expectation degree of the pull-back mode is lower than the case where the rear image for high expectation (the rear image for medium expectation) is displayed (it is more likely that the mode has shifted to the normal mode). ) Can be suggested to the player.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a state in which a rear image with the lowest expected degree (back image for low expected degree) in which the pullback mode is continued is displayed. As shown in FIG. 117, when the back image with the lowest degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 advances in the wilderness. The characters displayed inside the display area HR6 are "CHANCE ...?". These display contents can indicate to the player that the degree of expectation in the retraction mode is extremely low (it is highly likely that the mode has been shifted to the normal mode).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured to indicate whether or not the pullback mode is continued by the display mode of the rear image. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game property for predicting whether or not the pull-back mode is continued based on the type of the rear image, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Note that the pull-back mode is continued until a special symbol lottery is executed up to 100 times after the jackpot that has been won in the extended-villa mode ends. Conversely, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the mode always shifts to the normal mode. For this reason, after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, a back image (not shown) for the normal mode is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 118A, the configuration of the ROM 202 received in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 118A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that a small hit type selection table 202da and a time saving The difference is that a number-of-times selection table 202db and an ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202dc are added. In addition, in the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment, the contents of the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed.

  First, the first random number table 202a according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the first random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of “0, 1” are defined as the determination values for determining the big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 118 (b)). As in the first embodiment, the jackpot determination value is common to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, “2 to 399” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118B), and it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be a small hit. The value is not specified (see 202a3 in FIG. 118 (b)). In addition, “2 to 40” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118B), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 118B).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit. This makes it possible to form a state in which the V winning switch 670e3 is more easily passed in the consecutive play mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed. As a result, the degree of advantage in the extended game mode can be further increased, so that a great joy can be given to the player when the mode is shifted to the extended game mode.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment, two types of big hits A5 and B5 are provided as the big hit types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C5 is provided as a special symbol jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), for the first special symbol, "big hit A5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". (See 202b1 in FIG. 119 (b)). The "big hit A5" has five rounds, and the big hit type (5 rounds) in which the game state after the big hit is set to the normal symbol time-saving state A (rensou mode) regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Time-saving jackpot). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit A5" is 50, so "big hit A5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 50% (50/100).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), for the first special symbol, the "big hit B5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". (See 202b2 in FIG. 119 (b)). The “big hit B5” is a big hit type (5 round special big hit) in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds and the game state after the big hit varies according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, when the "big hit B5" is reached in the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode), the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit. If the "big hit B5" is reached in the normal symbol time saving state (pull-back mode or extended play mode), a normal symbol time saving state A (extended mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit. The correspondence between the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the set gaming state is defined in a time-saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) described later. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B5" is 50, so "big hit B5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), for the second special symbol, "big hit C5" is defined in association with all possible values of the first hit type counter C2 (FIG. 119 ( a) 202b3). The “big hit C5” is a big hit type (10 round special big hit) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds, and the game state after the big hit varies according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, in the case of "big hit C5" in the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode), the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit. If the "big hit C5" is reached in the normal symbol time saving state (pull-back mode or extended play mode), the normal symbol time saving state A (extended mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  As described above, half of the first special symbol jackpot is set as a special jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot when the normal mode is won, and the consecutive play mode is set after the jackpot when the winning is performed in a mode other than the normal mode). Particularly, in a plurality of game states (normal mode, pullback mode) in which it is mainly necessary to execute the first special symbol lottery (the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute), a difference in the degree of advantage can be provided. That is, if the first special symbol hits in the normal mode, the consecutive play mode is set after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas if the first special symbol lottery wins in the pullback mode, the 100% rate is set. It can be configured so that the extended play mode is set after the big hit. Thereby, the advantage degree until the jackpot is won in the normal mode and the pull-back mode is made common (an unfavorable state in which it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400), and the jackpot is won when the jackpot is won. The degree of advantage can be configured to be higher in the retraction mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, at least during the retraction mode, the player can be made to think that it is better to continue the game, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the extended game mode ends (when a jackpot in which a mode other than the extended game mode is set after the jackpot is won), the system always shifts to the pullback mode. I have. Thereby, even after the end of the extended play mode, it is possible to make the player intend to continue the game at least until the retraction mode ends. In other words, in the extended game mode, the player who has obtained a large amount of prize balls by repeating the jackpot and the extended game mode is satisfied with the game at the time when the last big jackpot in the extended game mode ends and immediately quits the game. Can be suppressed. That is, it is difficult for game balls to enter the second entrance 6400, and the game can be continued in a disadvantageous state (pull-back mode) as compared with the extended play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Can be improved.

  Further, similarly to the pull-back mode, when a lottery of the first special symbol in the extended game mode results in a big hit, the consecutive game mode can be set after the big hit at a rate of 100%. Thereby, for example, it shifts to the extended game mode in a state where the reserved ball of the first special symbol remains, and when the special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol wins a jackpot, the extended game mode is always set. Can be continued. In other words, an absurd situation occurs in which, after shifting to the extended-village mode, the lottery of the first special symbol wins and immediately shifts to the normal mode or the pull-back mode (even once in a small win). (The end of the extended-game mode without performing the extended-game mode) can be suppressed, so that the player's motivation to play the game in the extended-game mode can be increased. In addition, even if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the extended holiday mode, a special jackpot is established, and the extended holiday mode is always set after the large jackpot. It is possible to more reliably eliminate the possibility that the mode will end without winning. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the motivation of the player in the extended play mode for the game.

  Furthermore, not all the jackpots of the second special symbol are set to the special time jackpot but to all the special jackpots, so that it is possible to prevent an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode. That is, in the normal mode, a right-handed shot is performed, and an irregular game method of playing a game by entering a game ball into the second entrance 6400 is always the most disadvantageous after the end of the jackpot even if the jackpot is reached. Since it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a normal mode is set, it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring irregular game methods.

  Next, the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. The small hit type selection table 202da is a data table in which a determination value for determining a small hit type is determined when a small symbol is determined by lottery, and the determination value of the small hit type counter C5 is determined. Is defined in association with each small hit type.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 49”, “small hit A” is defined in association with the small hit type. (See 202da1 in FIG. 119 (b)). This “small hit A” is a small hit type to which “big hit C5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As described above, the jackpot C5 has the number of rounds of 10 rounds, and if a win is made during the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the end of the jackpot, but in a mode other than the normal mode (pull-back mode or extended mode). This is a jackpot type in which the consecutive play mode is set after the jackpot has been won. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “Small hit A” is 50, so if the small hit is a small hit, “Small hit A” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), as for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “50 to 79”, “small hit B” is defined in association with the small hit type ( See 202da2 in FIG. 119 (b)). The “small hit B” is a small hit type to which “big hit D5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the “big hit D5” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds and the game shifts to the extended game mode after the end of the big hit regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of "small hit B" is 30 since the counter value of "small hit B" is 30. The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), for the range of the small hit type counter C5 of “80 to 94”, “small hit C” is defined in association with the small hit type (see FIG. 119B). FIG. 119 (b), 202da3). The “small hit C” is a small hit type to which “big hit E5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the "big hit E5" has 10 rounds, and the pullback mode is set from the end of the big hit to the end of the special symbol lottery 30 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “small hit C” is 15, so if a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, “small hit C” is The determined ratio is 15% (15/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), for the range of the small hit type counter C5 of “95 to 99”, “small hit D” is defined in association with the small hit type ( FIG. 119 (b), 202da4). This “small hit D” is a small hit type to which “big hit F5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, in the “big hit F5”, the number of rounds is 10 rounds, and the pull-back mode is set from the end of the big hit until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, there are five counter values that are "small hit D". The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, four small hit types are provided, and the big hit types executed (started) when passing through the V winning switch 670e3 differ according to the small hit types. It is configured. In the extended play mode (and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set), the small ball is won in the small hit A or the small hit B, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game. As a result, the jackpot C or the jackpot D is started, and the game mode (mode) after the end of the jackpot is set again to the extended play mode. Therefore, it can be said that the small hits A and B are small hit types that are relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, since the small hit B is larger in the number of big hit rounds executed when passing through the V winning switch 670e3, the small hit B is smaller in the small hit type than the small hit A in the small hit type. There is. The percentage of winning the small hits A or the small hits B is 80% (50% + 30%) in total, and as described above, the consecutive cottage mode ends without being a jackpot at all in the consecutive cottage mode ( Since the possibility of elapse of 100 time-saving periods is about 0.6%, once in the extended mode, the extended mode is repeated at a rate of about 80% (looping the extended mode). .

  In the extended play mode (and the pullback mode in which the normal symbol time saving state is set), the small hit C or the small hit D is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hit game. As a result, the jackpot E or the jackpot F is started, and the retraction mode is set as the game state (mode) after the end of the jackpot. Since the pull-back mode is a gaming state (mode) having a lower degree of advantage than the extended play mode, it can be said that the small hit C and the small hit D are small hit types that are relatively disadvantageous for the player. The small hit C and the small hit D have the same performance as the big hit (the number of rounds) executed when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, but the period of the retraction mode set after the big hit. The (number of times) is configured to be shorter in the pullback mode based on the small hit C. Therefore, it can be said that the small hit D is a small hit type having a higher degree of advantage than the small hit C. Since the ratio of winning in either the small hit C or the small hit D is 20% (15% + 5%), when the jackpot is reached in the extended mode, the mode is shifted to the pullback mode at a rate of about 20%. . In the case of winning a special symbol lottery in the consecutive winning mode in the consecutive playing mode (when a large winning is won without passing through the V winning switch 670e3), the mode always shifts to the consecutive playing mode after the large winning.

  On the other hand, in the normal mode, when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 after winning a small hit (small hit A, C, D) other than the small hit B, the normal mode is set as a mode after the end of the big hit. Would. That is, when the player passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the normal mode, the normal mode is set after the big hit at a rate of 70%. Therefore, an irregular game method of performing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode is performed. Doing so would be extremely disadvantageous for the player. As described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode shifts to the extended play mode after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, 100% After the big hit, the mode is shifted to the normal mode again. In addition, in the normal mode, the lottery of the second special symbol causes a small hit, and even if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, the normal mode is re-entered after the big hit at a rate of 70%. Therefore, when a game method in which only the second special symbol is drawn by performing an irregular game method is performed, the transition rate to the extended mode, which is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, is achieved. Is low, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, an irregular game method is performed in which the player is forced to enter the second entrance 6400 where game balls are unlikely to enter in the normal mode and only performs the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the merit can be eliminated, in the normal mode, a left-hitting game can be performed so that the game ball enters the first entrance 64. Therefore, by implementing the irregular game method, it is possible to more reliably prevent the hole from causing an unexpected disadvantage or conversely causing the player to lose excessively. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119 (c), the details of the number-of-times-saving-time selection table 202db will be described. FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving number selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment. The time saving number selection table 202db is referred to at the end of the jackpot, and sets the number of time savings after the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol lotteries until shifting to the normal mode) according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. Is a data table in which the data for use is specified. The time saving number selection table 202db defines not only the number of time savings after the end of the big hit but also data indicating the type of the time saving state (whether it is the time saving state A or the time saving state B).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot types A5 and D5 are defined in association with the jackpots A5 and D5 irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning, as the number of times saved is 100 times. The time-saving state A is defined in association (see 202db1 in FIG. 119 (c)). For this reason, the jackpot A5 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202b1 in FIG. 119 (a)), or the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the open period of the small jackpot B and the jackpot D5 is won. In this case (see 202da2 in FIG. 119 (b)), regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, after the end of the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the time reduction state A of the ordinary symbol (the extended mode) ) Is set. As described above, since the extended play mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the jackpot A5 is used mainly in the normal mode in which the game needs to be advanced by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the pullback mode. Is one of the preferred (pleasant) jackpot types for the player. In addition, in the extended play mode in which it is necessary to mainly advance the game by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot D5 is one of the jackpot types preferable for the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot types B5 and C5 are defined in association with the jackpot types B5 and C5 as 0 times as the number of times saved in the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode). The time-saving state A is set 100 times in association with the time-saving state (pull-back mode, extended mode) (see 202db2 in FIG. 119 (c)). Therefore, in the normal mode in which the normal state is set to the normal state of the symbol, if the jackpot B5 is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot, so the jackpot B5 is an unfavorable jackpot for the player. It is one of the types. On the other hand, in the pull-back mode, even if the big hit B5 is reached, the mode shifts to the advantageous extended play mode after the big hit is completed, so that it becomes one of the big hit types preferable for the player. In addition, in the extended play mode in which it is necessary to progress the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot C5 which shifts to the advantageous extended play mode after the jackpot is one of the preferred jackpot types for the player. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot E5 is defined as the jackpot type in association with the jackpot E5 as the number of times saved in the normal state of the ordinary symbol. The time saving state B of 30 times is defined in association with the extended vacation mode (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)). It should be noted that in the normal mode or the pullback mode in which it is necessary to mainly advance the game by the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot E5 is not basically won, but temporarily or irregularly in the normal mode. Even if the player wins the jackpot E5 by performing the lottery of the second special symbol and wins the jackpot E5, the jackpot E5 shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot, so the jackpot E5 is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in the normal mode. One kind. In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the pullback mode and the big hit E5 is won, the game shifts to the pullback mode after the big hit. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, even though the game mode shifts to the 100% extended play mode, the pullback mode is uselessly looped. It is one of the unfavorable (unfavorable) jackpot types. In addition, when the small hit C and the large hit E5 in the extended game mode result in a transition to a withdrawal mode that is disadvantageous to the player as compared to the extended game mode, the large hit E5 in the extended game mode is It is one of the unfavorable (unfavorable) jackpot types.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot F5 is defined as the jackpot type in association with the jackpot F5 in the normal state of the normal symbol as 0 times as the number of time savings. The time saving state B is defined 100 times in association with the extended vacation mode (see 202db4 in FIG. 119 (c)). That is, when the big hit F5 is reached, the mode shift is the same as the big hit E5 (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)), but the length of the pullback mode to be shifted to when the winning is performed in the extended play mode (the number of special symbol lotteries). However, it becomes longer (the number of lotteries increases) as compared with the case where the jackpot E5 is won. Thus, the jackpot F5 is one of the unfavorable (disadvantaged) jackpot types in the normal mode or the pullback mode, like the jackpot E5. In addition, in the extended-villa mode, it is one of the unfavorable jackpot types. However, it can be said that the jackpot type is more advantageous than the jackpot E5 in that the retraction mode after the jackpot continues for a long time.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, by setting the number of time savings specified in the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)), the normal mode (the normal state of the normal symbol ), A retreat mode (normal symbol time-saving state A), and a pull-back mode (normal symbol time-saving state B). This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the mode (game state) after the big hit, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202d is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment. It is a data table to be performed.

  FIG. 120A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 120A, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A) in that FIG. A single special figure 1 departure table 202d11 is provided instead of the deviating (normal) table 202d2 and the special figure 1 deviating (probable change) table 202d3. A single special figure 2 per table 202d12 is provided instead of the special table 2d4 and the special figure 2 per (five fluctuations or more) table 202d5. 202d6 and the table 202d13 for the special figure 2 (normal / return) instead of the table 202d7 for the special figure 2 (five or more fluctuations), And use the table 202d14 is different in that provided. The contents of the special figure 1 departure table 202d11 are the same as those of the special figure 1 departure (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 15C) in the first embodiment. Is omitted.

  The special figure 2 winning table 202d12 is a data table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern (variation time) when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected for each mode (game state) at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed is stored in the special figure 2 winning table 202d12. Stipulated. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the normal mode and the pull-back mode, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation time exceeds 180 seconds as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The long fluctuation is determined. On the other hand, when a big win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the extended-play mode, a middle variation per 10 seconds is determined as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, in the normal mode or the pull-back mode in which the game needs to be advanced by the lottery of the first special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time is set in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Thus, it is possible to reduce the game efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed irregularly or illegally in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the random or illegal execution of the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The special figure 2 departure (normal / return) table 202d13 determines a fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the lottery of the second special symbol is departed (including a small hit) in the normal mode and the retraction mode. This is a data table that is referred to in order to execute. As shown in FIG. 120 (c), the special figure 2 departure (normal / pull-back) table 202d13 has only a departure super long fluctuation of 180 seconds as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is stipulated. As described above, in the normal mode or the pull-back mode in which the game needs to be advanced by the lottery of the first special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time is set when the lottery is lost (or a small hit) by the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the game efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is irregularly or illegally performed in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the random or illegal execution of the lottery of the second special symbol.

  In addition, the special figure 2 departure (rensou) table 202d14 is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the lottery of the second special symbol is departed (or a small hit) in the denomination mode. It is a data table to be performed. As shown in FIG. 120 (d), the fluctuation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result is defined in the special figure 2 departure (rensou) table 202d14. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), when the second special symbol deviates, the deviating middle fluctuation of 10 seconds occurs for all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the consecutive-villa mode, if a lottery is lost in the second special symbol lottery, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 174”, and the variation time is short for 5 seconds. Fluctuations are defined in association with each other, and the small hit middle fluctuations in which the fluctuation time is 10 seconds are defined in association with the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “175 to 198”. According to these prescribed contents, in the extended game mode, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, only a relatively short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set, so that the game efficiency in the extended game mode is reduced. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the superiority of the extended play mode can be further enhanced, and the joy of the player when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the extended game mode for the game.

  In addition, when a small hit with a high probability of winning in the consecutive play mode is set, the rate of setting a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is increased, and a relatively low rate when the small hit is reached (about 1/4). ), A relatively long (10 second) fluctuation time is set as in the case of a hit or miss. Thereby, every time a relatively long fluctuation time is selected, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol has directly made a big hit. Therefore, in the extended play mode, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the fluctuating time, so that the interest of the player in the extended play mode can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121 (a), the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc will be described. This normal pattern change pattern selection table 202dc is a data table referred to for setting the change time of the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and as shown in FIG. The game state (mode) at the time when the symbol lottery is executed and the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), for a normal state (normal mode) of a normal symbol, a long fluctuation of 30 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 121 (a)). 202dc1). On the other hand, with respect to the time-saving state A (long-shed mode) of a normal symbol, a short-time fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is defined in association (see 202dc2 in FIG. 121 (a)). For the normal symbol time saving state B (pull-back mode), a short variation B having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in association (see 202dc3 in FIG. 121A).

  For this reason, when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in the ordinary mode, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to be much longer than that in the time saving state (the extended mode or the pullback mode). The game efficiency when playing the game aiming at the gate 67 and the second entrance 6400 can be extremely deteriorated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal mode. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the extended-short mode (time saving state A) to 0.1 second, when the ordinary symbol is hit, the game ball passing through the through gate 67 is directly placed in the second entry. It can be configured to make it easy to enter the ball opening 6400. Therefore, during the extended-play mode, the game ball is continuously struck right at the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), and is distributed to the left channel R2 (see FIG. 113). It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 with a high probability (at a standard symbol probability of 1 / 1.2).

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the pullback mode (time saving state B) to 0.5 seconds, even if the ordinary symbol is won by lottery, the game ball (through Both the game ball that passed through the gate 67 and the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 and then fired to the second entrance guide area and distributed to the right channel R1 (see FIG. 113). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second entrance 6400. In other words, when a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set and a normal symbol is hit, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400 is opened (after 0.2 seconds, which is the flow-down period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 6400). In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is 0.2 seconds, another game ball does not reach another game ball within 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after one game ball passes through the through gate 67. Becomes impossible to enter the second entrance 6400. However, even if the game ball continues to be fired to the second entrance guiding area at the shortest firing interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and the second ball is distributed to the second flow path R1. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the entrance 6400, the ball enters the second entrance 6400 after the elapse of the opening period. Therefore, even if the player hits the ball at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400, which is naughty. It becomes a very disadvantageous state only to reduce the number of holding balls. Therefore, in the pullback mode, the player can perform a game method in which the player advances a game by causing a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-handing (to perform a lottery of a special symbol). In other words, a game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is used instead of the game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the normal symbol time saving state being given. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game method of playing a game aiming at the first entrance 64 can be performed.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 121 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that the counter 203da for saving time and the storage area 203db for the jackpot type. , A mode type storage area 203dc, a V passing flag 203dd, and a winning mode storage area 203de. Further, the difference is that the probability change flag 203g, the probability change setting flag 203h, the probability change passage counter 203i, the probability change enable flag 203n, and the probability change enable timer 203o are deleted.

  The time reduction counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the remaining special symbols until the normal symbol time reduction state ends. If the value of the time reduction counter 203da is 1 or more, it means that it is a normal symbol time reduction state (either the extended-run mode or the pullback mode), and if the value of the time reduction medium counter 203da is 0, it is normal. It means that the symbol is in the normal state. The initial value of the time saving counter 203da is set to 0, and the number of time savings specified in the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) is set at the end of the big hit (see S1323 in FIG. 133). ). In addition, the value of the counter for hourly savings 203da is updated by decrementing by one in the hourly savings number updating process (see FIG. 128) executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (see S2302 in FIG. 128). When executing the lottery of the ordinary symbol, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is in the time saving state based on the value of the time reduction counter 203da, and the random number table per ordinary symbol for the high probability time (see FIG. 14B) 202c3, 202c4) to determine whether to perform a normal symbol lottery or a low probability random symbol per symbol symbol table (202c1, 202c2 in FIG. 14B) to perform a normal symbol lottery. (See S608 in FIG. 130).

  The jackpot type storage area 203db is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the type of the hit jackpot when the jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203db, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery (see S331 in FIG. 127). Further, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, and when the small hit passes through the V winning switch 670e3, data indicating a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is stored (see S1629 in FIG. 134). The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db is retained until the end of the winning jackpot and is used to select the number of time savings from the time saving number selection table 202db at the end of the jackpot (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

  The mode type storage area 203dc is a storage area for storing data indicating the current mode (game state). If “00H” is stored as data in the mode type storage area 203dc, it indicates that the current mode is the normal mode (normal state of a normal symbol), and if “01H” is stored, It indicates the extended mode (normal symbol time reduction state A), and if "02H" is stored, it indicates the pullback mode (normal symbol time reduction state B). When selecting and setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol from the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc (see FIG. 121 (a)), the fluctuation time corresponding to the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is set. Is done.

  The V passing flag 203dd is a flag for indicating whether or not the player has passed the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hitting game (whether or not it is determined that the big hit will occur after the small hitting end). . If the V passing flag 203dd is on at the end of the small hit, the start of the big hit is set at the end of the small hit, while if the V passing flag 203dd is off, the big hit is not started and the small hit is not started. Will be terminated. The V passing flag 203dd is set to an initial value of OFF, and is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 during execution of the small hitting game (FIG. 135). See S2506). In addition, after the start of the jackpot based on passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is set, it is set to off (see S1630 in FIG. 134).

  The winning mode storage area 203de is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating a mode (game state) when a jackpot is won. In the winning mode storage area 203de, data in the same format as the mode type storage area 203dc is stored. At the start of the jackpot, the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is transferred to the winning mode storage area 203de, and the data is held until the jackpot ends. At the end of the jackpot, the mode at the time of the jackpot is determined using the data stored in the winning mode storage area 203de, and the corresponding number of time savings is read from the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)). It is issued and set (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a method of shifting a gaming state (mode) in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is roughly provided with three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 122 (the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the extended mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122 (the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol), and the pullback shown in the lower right part of FIG. Mode (ordinary symbol time-saving state B) is provided.

  The normal mode indicates the normal state of the normal symbol as described above, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and even if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the extended game mode is set. , It is the most unfavorable game state for the player. As described above, the extended play mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state A of a normal symbol is set, and the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400, so that a small hit with a high probability is achieved. Is generated and the chance of passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is increased, so that the gaming state is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal mode. In addition, since the extended play mode is easily set again after the end of the big hit, the gaming state is most advantageous for the player.

  Further, the pull-back mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state B of a normal symbol is set. As described above, since the game ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 6400, the return mode is the same as in the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play a game aiming at one entrance 64, when the jackpot is won, the game mode is shifted to the extended game mode at a rate of 100%, which is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal mode.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, when a lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot and the jackpot A5 is determined as the jackpot type, the extended play mode is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the big hit B5 is determined, the normal mode is set as the game state after the big hit end, so that the most disadvantageous game state is repeated. That is, in the normal mode, if the jackpot A5 determined at a rate of 50% of the jackpot cannot be won, the game does not shift to another game state. In other words, even if a jackpot is won, a very disadvantageous gaming state in which the same state is looped at a rate of 50% is achieved.

  As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the extended mode to another mode in addition to the case where the jackpot has been hit and the case where the number of times of normal symbols has been reduced. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 122, the lottery of the second special symbol causes a small hit and a V winning (event in which the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hits E5 and F5 Is determined, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the retraction mode. If the special symbol lottery has been completed 100 times without a big hit, the normal symbol will be shifted to the normal mode after the number of times of the normal symbol has been reduced. On the other hand, if the big hits C5 and D5 are determined when the V prize is won, or if the big win is achieved by the special symbol lottery, the extended play mode is set again after the big hit ends. In addition, as described above, the probability that the change of the special symbol of 100 times without losing the jackpot is about 0.6%, and thus is an event that hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to the other mode in the extended-villa mode is when the big hits E5 and F5 are almost won. The small hits (small hits C and D) corresponding to the big hits E5 and F5 are determined at a rate of 20% of all the small hits. It becomes a very advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the extended-villa mode as one goal, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the pull-back mode to another mode not only when the jackpot has been won but also when the number of times of normal symbols has been reduced. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot becomes A5, the jackpot becomes B5, and the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to the extended mode. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol for the number of working hours is completed without a big hit, the mode shifts (falls) to the normal mode. In the normal mode, even if the first special symbol hits, the mode shifts to the extended game mode only at a rate of 50%, whereas when the first special symbol hits in the preparation mode, the mode always shifts to the extended game mode. Therefore, while the preparation mode is continued, it is possible to play the game in a strong desire to win the jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the preparation mode can be improved.

  As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to switch back and forth between three types of modes having different degrees of advantage. This makes it possible to add sharpness to the game, thereby preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 123A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 123A, the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20A) in that an expectation degree selection table 222da is added. Are different. The expectation degree selection table 222da is used to randomly select a rear image during a predetermined period (until the change of the special symbol is completed 100 times) after the end of the extended-villa mode (transition to the retraction mode). It is a data table used. Here, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, either 30 times (big hit E5) or 100 times (big hit F5) is set as the number of special symbol lotteries in which the pullback mode is continued. That is, if the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 after shifting to the pullback mode, the mode may shift to the normal mode (fall). In the fifth embodiment, it is not clearly notified whether the mode has shifted to the normal mode or the retraction mode is continued, and whether or not the retraction mode is continued based on the type of the rear image (see FIGS. 116 and 117). By suggesting the degree of expectation, a playability that allows a player to predict whether or not the mode is the pullback mode is provided.

  More specifically, after shifting to the retraction mode (that is, after the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5 is completed), the number of special symbol lotteries is within 30 (that is, staying in the retraction mode). Is determined, the back image for the high degree of expectation is set as the back image, and when the number of lotteries exceeds 30 (that is, the number of lotteries in which the pull-back mode may be terminated) ), Every time the special symbol lottery is executed ten times, the back image is selected again using the expectation degree selection table 222da (the expectation degree is updated every ten lotteries). I have. Details of the expectation degree selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 123 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the expectation degree selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the expectation degree selection table 222da stores the rear image for each mode (game state) at the time of executing the lottery (re-lottery of the expectation degree) for reselecting the rear image. The type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223da are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), for the normal mode, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da falls within the range of “0 to 4” and the rear image for the high degree of expectation (FIG. 116 (a) ) Is defined in association with the range of “5-49”, and the back image for medium expectation (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “5-49”. A back image (see FIG. 117) for use is defined in association with each other.

  Since the effect lottery counter 223da can take 100 values of “0 to 99”, when the re-lottery of the degree of expectation is executed in the normal mode, the rate at which the rear image for the high degree of expectation is set is 5%. % (5/100). On the other hand, the ratio at which the back image for medium expectation is set is 45% (45/100), and the ratio at which the back image for low expectation is set is 50% (50/100). Therefore, when the mode has been shifted (falled) from the pullback mode to the normal mode (when the pullback mode in which the number of time savings is 30 has been set after the end of the previous big hit), the rearrangement for the low expectation is performed by the re-lotting of the expectation. While the possibility that an image is set is the highest, the possibility that a back image for high expectation is set is extremely low.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), in the pull-back mode, the back image for the high expectation degree (see FIG. 116 (a)) is set so that the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is in the range of “0 to 9”. The back image for medium expectation (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “10 to 79”, and the back image for low expectation in the range of “80 to 99”. An image (see FIG. 117) is defined in association with the image. Therefore, when the lottery of the degree of expectation is performed in the pull-back mode, the ratio of setting the rear image for the high degree of expectation is 10% (10/100), and the rear image for the medium degree of expectation is set. The ratio is 70% (70/100), and the ratio at which the back image for low expectation is set is 20% (20/100). Therefore, when the pull-back mode is continued (when the pull-back mode in which the number of time savings is set to 100 after the end of the previous big hit is set), the rear image for the high expectation is set by the re-lotting of the expectation. The possibility increases twice as compared to the case where the mode has already been shifted to the normal mode, and the possibility that the rear image for low expectation is set is reduced by half or less. Further, the ratio of setting the rear image for the medium expectation is increased by 25%.

  Therefore, when the back image for the high degree of expectation is set, the possibility that the pullback mode is continued (expectation) increases, while when the back image for the low degree of expectation is set, the pullback mode ends. (It has been shifted to the normal mode). Therefore, the mode can be guessed by the player according to the type of the rear image, so that the interest in the game during the period from the end of the extended play mode to the end of the 100 special symbol lotteries can be improved. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 124, the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 20B) in that an effect lottery counter 223da and a variation counter 223db are provided. They differ in that they are added. Another difference is that the breakthrough effect counter 223g is deleted with the breakthrough effect not being executed in the first embodiment.

  The effect lottery counter 223da is a counter used to select one back image (expectation) from the expectation selection table 222da described above. The value of the effect lottery counter 223da is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When selecting the back image, the random number value (counter value) defined in the expectation degree selection table 222da is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223da, and the corresponding one back image is selected. The effect lottery counter 223da is updated, for example, every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 45).

  The change number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the special symbol after the end of the big hit (the number of executions of the change display). The initial value of the change number counter 223db is set to 0. When the execution of the change display effect is set based on a new change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the value is incremented by one. It is updated (see S5601 in FIG. 139). Further, when the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0. From the time the pull-back mode is set after the jackpot is completed to the time the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the fluctuation counter 223db is referred to each time the fluctuation display effect is set, and the expectation degree selection table 222da is used. It is determined whether it is time to execute the re-lottery of the degree of expectation (see S5603, S5605 to S5608 in FIG. 139).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the timer interrupt processing 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) is executed instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. , For example, is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds.

  Of the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, in each of steps S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 are executed. Further, in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing of S102 ends, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, The two-hit random counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S141). That is, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated in addition to the various counter values updated in the process of S103 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. After the process of S141, the special symbol variation process 5 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104, see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment (S142), and the process proceeds to S105. Details of the special symbol change process 5 (S142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing in S105 is completed, next, the normal symbol change processing (S106, see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is replaced with a normal symbol change processing. The symbol variation process 5 is executed (S143), and the process proceeds to S107. Details of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-described special symbol variation process 5 (S142) will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 5 (S142). This special symbol variation process 5 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and includes the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28). ), The same processes as those of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed. In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S207 or the process of S212 ends, the special symbol variation start process (see S213 and FIG. 29) of the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the special symbol change start process 5 is executed (S261), and this process ends. Details of the special symbol change start process 5 (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the mode type storage area 203dc is stored. After the data is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S262), the counter value of the time reduction counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S263), and the process proceeds to S220. By transferring the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc to the winning mode storage area 203de before returning the jackpot state to the initial state (normal state of a normal symbol) in the processing of S263. Until the end of the jackpot, data indicating the mode (game state) at the time of winning the jackpot can be held. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state when the jackpot is won can be accurately determined, and the corresponding number of time reductions can be set.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S218, it is determined that the current lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (that is, a miss or a small hit). In this case (S218: No), in the case of the time saving state (that is, in the extended mode or the pullback mode), a time saving number updating process for updating the number of time savings is executed (S264). The details of the time saving update process (S264) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the time saving number update process (S264) ends, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S265). If it is determined that the small hit is a small hit (S265: Yes), the small hit is determined. Then, a small hit start process for setting the start of the opening operation is performed (S266), and the process proceeds to S221. Details of the small hit start processing (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S265, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S265: No), the process of S266 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, details of the above-described special symbol change start process 5 (S261) will be described. The special symbol change start process 5 (S261) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a special symbol change start process (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. In the same manner as in the first embodiment, a special symbol lottery (whether it is determined) is performed based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, and the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is performed. This is a process for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of.

  Of the special symbol change start processing 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S312, each of the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment (see FIG. 29) is performed. The same processing as the processing is performed. In the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. 127) according to the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the current special symbol lottery result is a big hit (S305: Yes), the current winning is performed. The data corresponding to the hit jackpot type is stored in the hit jackpot type storage area 203db (S331), and the process proceeds to S306. By storing the data corresponding to the jackpot type in the jackpot type storage area 203db in advance in the process of S331, the jackpot type is accurately determined based on the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db at the end of the jackpot. Can be determined. Therefore, the game state after the end of the big hit can be set accurately.

  In the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the current special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S305: No), It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S332). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S332: Yes), the small hit type determination table 202da and the small hit type The display mode of the first special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the small hit type specified from the value of the counter C5 is set (S333), and the change pattern corresponding to the small hit is set in the change pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 120). ) Is determined (S334), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S332 that the current lottery result of the special symbol is not a small hit (S332: No), it means that the current lottery result is out of order, and the process proceeds to S308. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the above-described time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) will be described. This time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) is one of the special symbol variation processes 5 (see FIG. 126), as described above, and is a process for updating the number of time savings of a normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 128, in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203da during time saving is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2301). If it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203da is 0 (S2301: No), the current state is the normal state of the ordinary symbol (normal mode), and the time saving state is not set (the number of time savings need not be updated). ), The processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the value of the time reduction counter 203da is greater than 0 (one or more) (S2301: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203da is updated by subtracting one. (S2302), a command to notify the sound ramp control device 113 of the value of the updated time saving medium time counter 203da is set (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203da has become 0 (S2304). If the value of the time reduction counter 203da has become 0 (S2304: Yes), the extended-villa mode or the pullback mode ends. Therefore, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the transition to the normal mode is set (S2305), and the normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc. The data "00H" is stored (S2306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da after updating by the process of S2302 is not 0 (S2304: No), the processes of S2305 and S2306 are skipped. This processing ends as it is. By executing the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 128), the number of time savings can be appropriately updated in the extended mode and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  Next, the small hitting start process (S266) described above will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the small hit start process (S266) is one of the special symbol variation processes 5 (see FIG. 126), and is a process for setting the start of the small hit opening operation.

  As shown in FIG. 129, in the small hit start process (see FIG. 129), first, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 corresponding to the small hit type is read (S2401). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the opening door 670f1 of the V winning device 670 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds elapse from the start of the opening period, It is set so that the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass through for a period of 0.075 seconds (see FIG. 115).

  When the process of S2401 ends, next, data indicating the big hit type corresponding to the current small hit type is stored in the big hit type storage area 203db (S2402). As described above, if the small hit is A, the corresponding big hit type is the big hit C5 (see 202da1 in FIG. 119 (b)), and if the small hit is B, the corresponding big hit type is the big hit D5 ( If the small hit C, the corresponding big hit type is big hit E5 (see 202da3 in FIG. 119 (b)). If the small hit D, the corresponding big hit type is the big hit. F5 (see 202da4 in FIG. 119 (b)).

  When the processing in S2402 ends, the start of the small hit is set (S2403), and this processing ends. By executing the small hitting start process (see FIG. 129), when the variation pattern corresponding to the small hitting stops, the corresponding small hitting operation pattern can be started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, details of the above-described ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S143) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) instead of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, similarly to the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, in each of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623, the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed. In the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, after setting the display mode according to the ordinary symbol lottery result in the process of S612 or S613, the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202dc (See FIG. 121) is read out (S641), and from the read out table, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the current mode indicated by the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is read out and set (S642). This processing ends.

  Further, in the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the ordinary symbol is not in the time saving state (the value of the counter 203da during the time saving is 0) ( (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 6400a are set to 0.1 seconds × 1 time (S643), and the process proceeds to S623.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (the value of the counter 203da during the time reduction is 1 or more) (S620: Yes), the opening time and opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are determined. The number of times is set to 0.2 times × 1 (S644), and the process proceeds to S623.

  By executing the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130), the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol are appropriately set according to the mode. be able to. Thereby, in the normal mode and the pullback mode, it is possible to form a state in which it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a, while the extended play mode is provided. In this configuration, it is possible to form a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. In this manner, in the pullback mode, although the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is advantageous for the player to make a left-handed shot aiming at the first entrance 64 so that the player has a novel playability. Can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the startup process 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The start-up process 5 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. This is a process to be started.

  Of the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment, in the processes S901 to S910 and S912 to S916, S901 to S910 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are respectively performed. The same processes as those in S912 to S916 are executed. In the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are read out (S931). Then, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the game state specified from the read data is set (S912), and the process proceeds to S913. By executing the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131), the mode at power-on can be accurately grasped by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (1031) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 5 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (S1004, see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a. .

  Among the jackpot control processes 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processes as those in S1107 to S1109 are executed. In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening 650a is opened. This is set (S1141), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1142), and this processing ends.

  In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), the specific winning opening 650a It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S1143). As described above, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round of the jackpot, or when ten or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established. In the process of S1143, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1143: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 650a is set (S1144), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1143 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1105: No), the process proceeds to S1107.

  In the big hit control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that the big hit end timing has come (the end timing of the ending effect has come) (S1109: Yes) ), Instead of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, a jackpot ending process 5 (S1145) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process 5 (S1145) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 5 (S1145). As described above, the jackpot end process 5 (S1145) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot end process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Similarly to the above, it is a process for setting the game state (mode) after the end of the big hit.

  In the jackpot ending processing 5 (see FIG. 133), first, the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) is read (S1321), and the number of time savings specified in the read table and the type of the time saving state are set. Of these, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db and the mode at the time of the jackpot win indicated by the data stored in the win mode storage area 203de, and the mode (hour reduction) The status type is specified (S1322). When the processing of S1322 is completed, the specified number of times saved is set in the medium time counter 203da (S1323), and data indicating the mode (type of time saving state, game state) specified in the processing of S1322 is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc. (S1324). Next, a state command indicating the set gaming state (mode) is set (S1325), the big hit flag 203r and the winning mode storage area 203de are reset (S1326), and the process ends.

  By executing the big hit end process 5 (see FIG. 133), the game state after the big hit end can be appropriately set according to the big hit type and the game state (mode) at the time of winning.

  Next, a small hit control process 5 (1032) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit control process 5 (S1032) is a process executed in place of the small hit control process (S1005, see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning device 670. is there.

  Of the small hit control processes 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in each of S1601 to S1604 and S1607 to S1610, in each of the small hit control processes (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, see S1601 to S1601. The same processes as those in S1604 and S1607 to S1610 are executed. In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1604 that the small hit game is being executed (that is, the small hit flag 203s is on). (S1604: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621). If it is determined that it is the opening timing (S1621: Yes), the V winning opening 670a is opened. (S1622), this processing ends.

  In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621: No), then, at the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a. It is determined (S1623) whether or not there is, and if it is determined that it is the timing to close the V winning opening 670a (S1623: Yes), the closing of the V winning opening 670a is set (S1624), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1623 that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1623: No), the process proceeds to S1607.

  In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1609 that the timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the game ball for the V winning switch 670e3 is determined. (S1625), and terminates the present process. Details of the V passage detection processing (S1625) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1610 ends, next, the V passing flag 203dd is turned on (the V winning switch 670e3 is set to the game ball during the small hit). Is determined (S1626), and if it is determined that the V-pass flag 203dd is ON (S1626: Yes), the processes of S1627 to S1630 for setting the execution of the jackpot are performed. Execute. Specifically, first, the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627), and the data in the time reduction counter 203da and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1628). Next, the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data of the jackpot type storage area 203db is set (S1629), the V passing flag 203dd is set to off (S1630), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1626, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S1626: No), the execution condition of the big hit is not satisfied during the execution of the small hit game (V winning switch 670e3). Does not pass through any game balls), the processing for starting the big hit (the processing of each of steps S1627 to S1630) is skipped, and this processing is ended as it is.

  By executing the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134), when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game, the start of the big hit corresponding to the small hit type is accurately performed. Can be set.

  Next, details of the above-described V passage detection processing (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. This V passage detection processing (S1625) is one of the small hit control processing 5 (see FIG. 134), and is a processing for monitoring the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch 670e3 as described above.

  In the V passage detection process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501). If it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501: Yes), In this small hit, it means that the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 has already been detected, and it means that the execution of the big hit has already been determined after the end of the small hit, so this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S2501: No), it is next determined whether a game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502), and the V winning switch 670e3. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through (S2502: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502: Yes), the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is detected during the normal period (V (S2503). Here, as the V validity period, the special discharge flow path 670e2 is set to be passable for 0.075 seconds, and the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 670e2 just before the end of the period reaches the V pass switch 670e3. Is set to 0.2 seconds, which is a period that can be required by the time.

  In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is not detected during the V validity period (S2503: No), an illegal act of illegally passing the V winning switch 670e3 and executing a jackpot is performed. Since it may have been performed, an error command is set (S2504), and the process ends. By setting the error command, the display of the error image is set in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the clerk of the hall or the like who has visually recognized the error image can recognize the occurrence of the wrongdoing at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2503, if it is determined that the V-prize switch 670e3 has passed during the V-valid period (S2503: Yes), the sound lamp controller 113 notifies that the game ball has passed the V-prize switch 670e3. Is set (S2505), the V-pass flag 203dd is set to ON (S2506), and the process ends. By setting the V passing flag 203dd to ON, it is possible to set the start of the big hit after the end of the small hit.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. First, with reference to 136, details of the command determination process 5 (S4141) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment. This is a process for executing control according to the type of command output from the main control device 110.

  Of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215, S4201 to S4209 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as the respective processing of S4213 to S4215 is executed. In the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110, (S4209: Yes), state command processing for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified by the state command is executed (S4221), and this processing ends. Details of this status command will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned status command processing (S4221). This state command processing (S4221) is processing for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified by the state command, as described above. In this state command processing (4221), first, the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S5501). That is, the data is updated to data indicating the game state notified from main controller 110.

  Upon completion of the process in S5501, it is next determined whether or not the status command received this time is a status command for notifying that the mode has shifted to the extended holiday mode (S5502). If it is determined that the command is a command to be displayed (S5502: Yes), the back image for the extended-villa mode is set (S5503), and the process ends. When the mode is shifted to the extended-villa mode, a back image (not shown) dedicated to the extended-villa mode is set, so that the player can easily understand that the extended-villa mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the shift despite the shift to the extended play mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the command is not a command for notifying that the mode has been shifted to the extended-villa mode (S5502: No), then it is determined whether the command is a command for notifying a gaming state at the time of power return. It is determined (S5504) whether or not it is a status command output when the power is restored (S5504: Yes), and a back image for the normal mode is set (S5506), followed by terminating the present process. A state command that is not a state command for notifying the extended mode and is a state command output when the power is restored is a command that indicates the retraction mode or the normal mode. The same back image is set in both the pull-back mode and the normal mode, particularly when the mode shifts to the pull-back mode and the power is cut off in a situation where the number of fluctuations exceeds 30 and within 100. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the game state from the back image when the power is restored (it is difficult to distinguish between the normal mode and the pullback mode). That is, the game ability before the power is cut off (the game property that predicts whether the mode has been shifted to the normal mode or the pull-back mode is continued) can be taken over even after the power is turned on again. Therefore, when the power is shut off due to a so-called instantaneous stop or the like, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from deteriorating.

  In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the current status command is not the command at the time of power restoration (S5504: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicates the normal mode (S5505). If it is determined that the command is a command to be displayed (S5505: Yes), the process proceeds to S5506 to set the back image for the normal mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5505 that the command is not the command indicating the normal mode (that is, the command is the command indicating the pullback mode) (S5505: No), the back image for high expectation (see FIG. 116A) ) Is set (S5507), and this process ends. By setting the back image for high expectation when the pullback mode is notified, the player can be recognized as being in a relatively advantageous state. Therefore, the game can be continued even after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a variable display setting process 5 (S4142) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The variable display setting process 5 (S4142) is executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. This is a process for causing the three symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect.

  Of the variable display setting processing 5 (see FIG. 138), in each processing of S4801 to S4809, the same processing as the processing of each of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. Further, in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 138) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4805 is completed, next, in order to re-lottery the rear image showing the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pull-back mode is continued. Is executed (S4831), and the process proceeds to S4806. Details of the expectation degree update processing (S4831) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the above-described expectation degree update processing (S4831). In the expectation degree update processing (S4831), first, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is updated by adding 1 to the value (S5601). Next, whether the current mode is the extended mode (continuously in the gaming state storage area 223h). It is determined whether data indicating the Zhuang mode is stored) (S5602). In the process of S5602, when it is determined that the mode is the extended-villa mode (S5602: Yes), the possibility of the pull-back mode is 0, and there is no need to indicate the degree of expectation from the rear image. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S5602, when it is determined that the current mode is not the extended-villa mode (S5602: No), it is next determined whether or not the normal mode back image is set (S5603). If it is determined that the rear image is set (S5604: Yes), there is no possibility of executing a re-lottery of the rear image (the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot, and the normal mode is continued). ), The processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5603 that the back image for the normal mode is not set (S5603: No), the pullback mode is set after the previous big hit, and the camera has already fallen to the normal mode. Or, it means that the pull-back mode is continued, so it is first determined whether or not the value of the change number counter 223db is 101 (S5604). If the value of the change number counter 223db is 101 (S5604: Yes), whether the previous jackpot is the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5 means that the change number of the pull-back mode has ended and the normal mode has been set, The back image for the normal mode is set (S5605), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5604 that the value of the change number counter 223db is not 101 (S5404: No), then it is determined whether the value of the change number counter 223db is greater than 30. (S5606), when it is determined that it is 30 or less (S5606: No), whether the previous jackpot is the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5, it is the number of fluctuations that determines that the retraction mode is continued, and the high expectation degree. Since there is no need to change from the back image for use, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5606, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is greater than 30 (S5606: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223db is 31. (S5607). In the process of S5607, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is 31 (S5607: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for performing the lottery of the expected degree is executed. More specifically, the expected degree selection table 222da is read (S5609), and from the read table, a back image (expectation) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is specified and set as the back image (S5610). Then, the present process ends. This allows the player to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not the retraction mode is continuing at the time when the retraction mode has reached the number of changes that may have ended. Can be predicted whether or not is continued. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, in the process of S5607, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 31 (S5607: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608). (S5608: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for re-lotting the degree of expectation is also performed. That is, after the number of fluctuations at which the pullback mode may have ended is reached, the degree of expectation can be updated every time the fluctuation display is performed ten times. Therefore, the more the game is continued, the more accurately it can be predicted whether or not the mode is the pullback mode, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the process of S5608, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is not a multiple of 10 (S5608: No), the process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the V winning switch inside the V winning device 670 that allows the player to enter the ball in the case of a small hit in addition to the case of the special symbol lottery. Even when a game ball passes through 670e3, a jackpot game is executed. In addition, small hits cannot be won in the first special symbol lottery, but are won with a high probability (9/10) in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a big hit can be expected if the lottery results in a small hit, even if the lottery result does not become a big hit. It can be said that the special symbol lottery is a lottery more advantageous to the player. In the fifth embodiment, the rate at which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (ease of execution) is made different according to the game state. That is, a game state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second entrance 6400, and a game state in which game balls are easy to enter are provided. More specifically, in the normal mode in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is reduced, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the ordinary symbol is hit. In such a case, the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is shortened. Therefore, even if the player continues to aim at the through gate 67 by right-handing, the rate of opening of the electric accessory 6400a becomes extremely low, and the game proceeds to the second entrance 6400. It is also difficult to get the ball into the ball. On the other hand, in the extended-villa mode in which the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is increased, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the ordinary symbol is hit. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in the above is also long, it is possible to make many game balls enter the second entrance 6400 simply by continuously firing the game balls aiming at the through gate 67 by right-handing. . Therefore, in the extended mode, it is possible to form an advantageous state that is likely to be a big hit as compared with the normal mode.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the normal mode and the extended-villa mode, a pull-back mode in which the time saving state B of a normal symbol is set is provided. In this pull-back mode, although the probability of hitting a normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of hitting a normal symbol are common to the extended mode, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is different from the extended mode. It is configured. In the extended play mode, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set such that the electric accessory 6400a is opened at a timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400. Is set, but in the pullback mode, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second entrance 6400, and when the next game ball reaches the second entrance 6400, Normally, the fluctuation time of the symbol is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is opened only in front. In this manner, in the pullback mode, although it is possible to frequently open the electric accessory 6400a by continuously firing the game ball aiming at the through gate 67, the game ball almost reaches the second entrance 6400. Since the ball does not enter, it is in a very disadvantageous state that only the number of balls is unnecessarily reduced. Therefore, in the pullback mode, the player can perform a game method in which the player advances a game by causing a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-handing (to perform a lottery of a special symbol). In other words, a game method similar to that in the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given. It is possible to realize a novel game that can be done.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the pullback mode becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, there is a higher possibility that the mode will be shifted to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit. . In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times after the end of the extended-villa mode. For this reason, after the end of the extended-villa mode, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue the game at least until the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. Here, in the case of a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, or in a gaming machine of a specification in which a jackpot is given when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer), the gaming state is In the normal game state in which the game ball does not easily enter the specific area, and in the time-saving game state in which the game ball easily enters the specific area, only two types of game states are provided. In general, there is a specification that shifts to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, at the time of transition to the disadvantageous normal game state, there is a possibility that the motivation of the player for the game may be greatly reduced, and the player immediately quits the game at the time of the end of the time reduction game state. There was a possibility. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the extended play mode, at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, a special easy-to-transfer to the extended play mode in the event of a jackpot is achieved. The state (retraction mode) is set. Thereby, even if the extended play mode ends and the game ball enters an unfavorable game state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from decreasing the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended-play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that the mode transition ratio (ratio of each jackpot type) is not limited to the contents of the fifth embodiment, and is arbitrarily determined within a range in which the normal mode is the most disadvantageous and the extended mode is the most advantageous. be able to. For example, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, the game state after the end of the jackpot is configured to be either the extended mode or the normal mode. However, the pull-back mode may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%). Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the pull-back mode, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the system always shifts to the extended play mode. However, the normal mode and the return mode are also lower than the extended mode. It is good also as a structure which can be set by a ratio.

  In the fifth embodiment, the number of times of the pullback mode is set to only 30 or 100, but the number is not limited to this, and the number of times may be further diversified. This makes it more difficult to determine whether or not the retraction mode has been completed, so that the player can more seriously predict how long the retraction mode will be continued. In addition, a part of the jackpot won during the extended-villa mode is configured to shift to the normal mode, and a suggestion of the degree of expectation based on the type of the rear image is performed as in the case where the pull-back mode is set. It may be configured. With this configuration, even when the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot, the player can continue the game in an attempt to determine whether or not the pull-back mode has been set based on the type of the rear image. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, the state of the distribution member 6600 includes a state in which game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 and a state in which game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2 by passing (distribution) of game balls. Although the switching configuration has been adopted, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing interval of game balls is determined and the state of the distribution member 6600 is electrically switched. In this case, for example, in the time reduction state A, the operation may be performed so that the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 are alternately distributed, and in the time reduction state B, the operation may be performed such that the distribution is performed only to the right flow path R1. . With this configuration, even in the time-saving state B, even reaching the through gate 67 is impeded, so that the game can be played more reliably by left-handing.

  In the fifth embodiment, two types of states in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400 and one type in which a game ball cannot easily enter the second entrance 6400. (Normal mode, pullback mode). That is, in the extended play mode, a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400, while in other modes (normal mode, pullback mode), it passes through the through gate 67. Also, the game ball that has been shot next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has flowed down the right side flow path R1 will not be able to enter the second ball entry port 6400, so that the normal design will not be possible. Although the fluctuating time and the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a have been set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which two types of game states are provided as game states in which game balls easily enter the second entrance 6400. Specifically, for example, both the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B are configured as a game state in which it is easy to enter the second entrance 6400. In the time-saving state A, the game ball is fired at the shortest firing interval. If the game ball continues to pass, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 (the game ball that has been fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and passes through the right channel R1). On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the game ball that has been fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and have the right flow path R1 The opening period of the electric accessory 6400a may be set so that both of the gaming balls that have passed through are allowed to enter. That is, in the time-saving state A, an opening period is set for a length in which the electric accessory 6400a is closed before the game ball following the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400. In the time-saving state B, an opening period may be set such that the electric accessory 6400a is closed after the game ball following the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls in the time reduction state B when the game ball is continuously struck to the right continuously in the time reduction state A than in the time reduction state A. Therefore, the time saving state B can be set to a state having a higher degree of advantage, and the player who is set to the time saving state B can be more pleased than the case where the time saving state A is set.

  In the fifth embodiment, by changing the normal symbol fluctuation time between the time saving state A and the time saving state B, in the time saving state A, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time saving state B, neither the game ball passing through the through gate 67 nor the game ball fired next to the game ball passing through the through gate 67 cannot enter the second entrance 6400 in the time saving state B. It was configured as follows. That is, in the time saving state A, when the game ball is continuously struck right at the shortest firing interval, most of the game balls distributed to the left channel R2 by the distribution member 6600 enter the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, neither the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the right flow path R1 nor the game ball distributed to the left flow path R2 can enter the second entrance 6400. Although the configuration has become possible, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the normal symbol fluctuating time, by changing the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a according to the type of the time saving state, the game ball enters the second entrance 6400 in the time saving state B. It is good also as composition which becomes hard to ball. Specifically, for example, in the time saving state A, as in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 0.1 second, and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 second. Thus, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, after the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.1 second elapses, it is momentarily released (for example, 0.01 second), and then 0.4 seconds elapses. The electric accessory 6400a may be opened for a relatively long time (for example, 0.19 seconds). With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400 before and after the electric accessory 6400a is instantaneously opened. It becomes impossible to enter the ball entry port 6400. In addition, the game ball fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entrance 6400 only after a relatively long opening time (0.19 seconds) has elapsed. Even if the player hits right, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400. Therefore, the same operation as that of the fifth embodiment can be realized, and the game can be played by left-handing in the time saving state B.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the time saving state A, the fluctuation time of the symbol is always 0.1 seconds (the fluctuation time in which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 easily enters the second entrance 6400). In the time-saving state B, it is configured such that 0.5 seconds (variation time during which it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400) is always set as the variation time of the normal symbol. It may be provided. Specifically, for example, in the time-saving state A, a change time of 0.5 second is set with a low probability (for example, 10%), and in the time-saving state B, a change time of 0.1 second is set with a low probability. May be set. This makes it possible to diversify the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  In the fifth embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the time saving state A, when the ordinary symbol is hit, the game ball passing through the through gate 67 can enter the second entrance 6400 directly. Although the configuration is such that a certain time is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be set so that the game ball which is fired next to the game ball passing through the through gate 67 and distributed to the right channel R1 can enter the ball. With such a configuration, in the time-saving state A, it is not possible to make the ball enter the second entrance 6400 simply by passing the game ball through the through gate 67. You can continue firing the ball. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, by displacing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 to the lower right by the deviating portion 6600c of the distribution member 6600, the game ball does not reach the distribution member 6600 for 1.5 seconds or more. In such a case, the configuration is such that the state of the distribution member 6600 is returned to the state of being distributed to the right flow path R1, but the deviating portion 6600c is not necessarily provided. Regardless of the firing interval of the game balls, the game balls reaching the distribution means may be alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is changed to the most disadvantageous state (the state where the number of balls is easily reduced and the unfavorable second special symbol is easily drawn). The extended play mode in which the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol is set is the most advantageous state (a state in which the number of holding balls is hardly reduced and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed). Further, in the retraction mode in which there is a possibility of shifting to a jackpot in the extended play mode, it is necessary to advance a game by entering a game ball into the first entrance 64 by left-handing as in the normal mode. However, in the pull-back mode, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of shifting to the extended-play mode is higher than when the jackpot is won in the normal mode. That is, two types of modes, a normal mode and a pullback mode, are provided as disadvantageous modes (game state) in which the game needs to be advanced by lottery of the first special symbol, and a predetermined mode after the end of the extended game mode is set. A relatively advantageous retraction mode is set only during the period.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state B of the ordinary symbol is set to the most disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to shift to the extended game mode even if a big hit occurs. The transition rate to the extended play mode in the case of a big hit is higher than in the time saving state B. More specifically, when a large symbol wins in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time reduction state B of the normal symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends becomes the normal symbol time reduction state B at a high rate, and the game mode changes to the extended play mode at a low rate. On the other hand, when a lottery is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the 100% extended mode. As a result, the time saving state B of the ordinary symbol ends, and the transition to the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol becomes easier to shift to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, when the time saving state B is set, the time saving state is changed. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played with an expectation of the end.

  In the sixth embodiment, a lottery is won with a low probability (for example, 1/200) even in the lottery of the first special symbol. The small hit type of the first special symbol is a small hit type that shifts to the extended game mode after a big hit given when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, or a small hit that shifts to a normal state of a normal symbol. A hit type is provided. For this reason, if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 after winning a small win, there is a possibility that the state will shift to an advantageous state. It is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played with an expectation of a small hit rather than a large hit.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the case where the number of special symbol lotteries has been completed a prescribed number of times (for example, 100) in the one time reduction state, a small hit of a specific type (small hit A6) in the one time reduction state When the number of wins becomes a specified number of times (for example, once), the state is directly shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. In other words, when a specific type of small hit (small hit A6) is won in the normal symbol time saving state B, the small hit ends without the game ball passing through the V winning switch 670e3, and the remaining time saving is achieved. Regardless of the number of times, a direct transition is made to the relatively advantageous normal mode. Thereby, in the time-saving state B of the most unfavorable ordinary symbol, a game can be performed in the expectation that a specific type of small hit (small hit A6) will be won at an early stage (small number of special symbol lotteries). it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the most disadvantageous time-saving state B is set, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, in a small win of a specific type (small win A6), it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is more advantageous that no V winning occurs.

  In the following description of the sixth embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the time-saving state B of the most disadvantageous ordinary symbol is referred to as a “normal mode”, and when the time-saving state B is larger than the time-saving state B, The normal state of a normal symbol that is easy to shift to the extended mode is referred to as “preparation mode”. It should be noted that the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol is the most advantageous state as in the fifth embodiment, and is therefore referred to as the “rensou mode” as in the fifth embodiment.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The point is that the executed control processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 140, a description will be given of a selection effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit occurs in the normal mode (ordinary symbol time saving state B) in the sixth embodiment. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the player passes the V prize switch 670e3 during the small hit period and becomes a big hit, the small hit type (small hit B6, C6 ), And at least a small hit type (small hit A6) in which the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode by ending the small hit without passing through the V winning switch 670e3. In other words, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a small hit, a small ball hit type in which it is more advantageous for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 670e3 and execute the big hit, and pass through the V winning switch 670e3. A small hit type is provided in which it is more advantageous to end the small hit as it is without doing so. In this selection effect, an effect is executed in which the player selects between right-handed to pass the V-win switch 670e3 or left-handed so that the game ball does not pass through the V-win switch 670e3. Is done.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, when the small hit is won during the normal mode, “3”, “4”, and “1” indicating the small hit are displayed in the display area Ds2 in the upper right portion of the display screen. Is stopped and displayed in combination with the third symbol. In addition, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a display mode in which the display screen is divided into two parts on the left and right. Is formed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, in the left half of the display screen, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR8 in which the character “V is to avoid the preparation mode !?” is formed. Displays an arrow image YG1 imitating a left-pointing arrow on which the character “left” is displayed. In the right half of the display screen, there is formed a horizontally long rectangular display area HR9 in which the characters "V jackpot! , An arrow image YG2 imitating a right-pointing arrow on which the character “Right” is displayed.

  According to these display contents, the player may shift to the preparation mode by left-handing. On the other hand, when the player performs right-handing and the V prize occurs, the player shifts to the extended play mode in addition to the jackpot. Can be understood. This allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a right-handed shot for the V prize or to make a left-handed shot to avoid the V prize. Since the game can be played by the method, the interest of the player can be improved each time a small hit is achieved. In the sixth embodiment, when the V winning is avoided, the small hitting type (small hitting A6) which shifts to the preparation mode when the V winning is avoided is determined to be 50%. The rate at which the small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to the extended play mode after the big hit is determined is 40%, and the mode shifts to the preparation mode (time saving state B) after the small hit due to the occurrence of the V winning. The rate at which the small hit type (small hit C6) is determined is 10%. Further, when the V prize occurs at the small hit A6, the normal mode is reset 100 times after the big hit. Therefore, when a game is played aiming at the V prize and a V prize occurs as intended, a big hit is always given, but the normal mode is looped rather than the possibility of shifting to the extended play mode. The likelihood is higher. Further, when avoiding the V winning, the mode is shifted to the preparation mode at a rate of 50%, and the normal mode is maintained at a rate of 50%. Therefore, it is more serious to decide whether to avoid the V winning or aim for the V winning. Can be determined. Further, the determination of whether to avoid the V prize or to aim for the V prize can be made different depending on the number of remaining time savings (the remaining number of times in the normal mode). More specifically, for example, when the number of times reduced in the normal mode is few, the player who avoids the V winning is more likely to risk the player from winning the V and resetting the normal mode. Can be considered good. In addition, when the number of time savings is large, even if the number of time savings is reset, the shock is small, so that it is possible to make it think that the V prize should be actively aimed at. Therefore, since the game method when the selected effect is generated can be changed according to the remaining number of time savings in the normal mode, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 118 (a)) in that a small hit number selection table 202ea is added. It is different in that it is. In addition, the first random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the small hit type selection table 202da, and the content of the time saving number selection table 202db are partially different. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described fifth embodiment (see FIG. 118A), and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, with reference to FIG. 141B, details of the first random number table 202a according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), in the first random number table 202a according to the sixth embodiment, five random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 4” are defined as the determination values for determining the big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 141 (b)). As in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot determination value is common to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Of the 400 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers determined to be a big hit is 5, and therefore, in the sixth embodiment, a special symbol lottery is executed. The probability of a big hit in this case is 1/80 (5/400). That is, it is set to be twice or more higher than the jackpot probability (1/200) in the fifth embodiment. As a result, it becomes difficult to make the number of times reduced before the big win in the first special symbol draw in the normal mode. Therefore, when the mode is shifted from the normal mode (the normal symbol time saving state B) to the preparation mode (the normal symbol normal state), the player can be more satisfied. The normal mode basically continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. The probability that the special symbol lottery will be performed 100 times and the jackpot will never be a big hit is about 28.4% (79/80 to the 100th power), so the possibility of shifting from the normal mode to the preparation mode is 28. 4%.

  In addition, “5 to 397” is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141B), and the determination is made that it is determined to be the small hit of the first special symbol. "398, 399" is defined as the value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141 (b)). Therefore, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/200 (2/400). That is, in the normal mode, the probability of a small hit is set to be lower than the probability of a big hit in a special symbol lottery. In other words, it is configured such that the possibility of shifting to another mode after a large hit or the reduction of the number of working hours becomes higher than that of shifting to another mode triggered by a small hit.

  In addition, “5 to 40” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141B), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141B). As a result, similarly to the fifth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a high probability (9/10), so that the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 670e3. Is also set more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the time-saving state A (long-run mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed.

  Next, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (c). FIG. 141 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141 (c), in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot A6 and the jackpot B6 are provided as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot C6 is provided as the jackpot of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the big hit type of the first special symbol, “big hit A6” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 69”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 141 (c)). The “big hit A6” is a special big hit in which the number of rounds is 5 lands and the mode after the big hit is varied according to the gaming state (mode) at the time of the big hit winning. More specifically, if the "big hit A6" is reached in the time saving state (normal mode, extended holiday mode), the normal mode in which the number of time savings is 100 is set after the end of the big hit, while the normal state of the normal symbol (preparation mode). ), When the "big hit A6" is reached, the extended play mode in which the number of times saved is 100 is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A6” is 70, so the first special symbol Is "70%" when the jackpot is won in the lottery.

  In addition, since the extended play mode is a gaming state in which the game proceeds mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is necessary to proceed with the game by the lottery of the first special symbol in most cases where the "big hit A6" is won. This is a normal mode or a preparation mode. If the "big hit A6" is set in the normal mode, the most disadvantageous normal mode is set again after the big hit ends, and 100 times of the number of times saved are reset regardless of the number of times saved at the time of winning the big hit. Therefore, in the normal mode, “big hit A6” is the most disadvantageous big hit type. On the other hand, if the "big hit A6" is set in the preparation mode, the most advantageous extended play mode (saving time state A) is set after the end of the big hit, and if the "big hit A6" is set during the preparation mode, it is advantageous for the player. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "big hit B6" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". (See 202b2 in FIG. 141 (c)). This “big hit B6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to the extended game mode regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. That is, in the normal mode, the jackpot type is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B6” is 70, so the first special symbol Is "30%" when the jackpot is won in the lottery. In other words, in the normal mode, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A6" in which the normal mode is set again after the big hit at a rate of 70% is determined, and only at a rate of 30%, "Big hit B6" in which the extended-village mode is set is determined. In other words, even if a big hit occurs in the normal mode, the degree of expectation to shift to another mode is low (a rate of 30%). It is possible to provide a novel playability that makes the player want to exit the normal mode (end the time saving state) and shift to the preparation mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, “big hit C6” is defined in association with all the values of the first hit type counter C2 (FIG. 141). (See 202b3 of (c)). This “big hit C6” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds and the mode shifts to the extended play mode after the big hit is completed. Therefore, if a jackpot is achieved in the extended game mode in which the game is progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the mode always shifts to the extended game mode after the end of the large hit. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, similar to the fifth embodiment, in the extended game mode, the winning in the lottery of the second special symbol is larger than the winning in the second special symbol after the big hit, rather than the big hit. The possibility of going into the Zhuang mode increases. Therefore, the player can be pleased when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202da in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a). FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table 202da.

  As shown in FIG. 142A, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, "small hit A6" is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "0 to 49". (See 202da1 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit A6” is a small hit type to which “big hit D6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. The jackpot D6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, the "small hit A6" is a small hit type in which the gaming state after the big hit is most disadvantageous if a V prize is made during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “small hit A6” is 50, so if a special pattern lottery results in a small hit, “small hit A6” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100). The "small hit A6" is a small hit which is an opportunity to end the time saving state regardless of the number of remaining time savings. For this reason, in the normal mode, if it is "small hit A6" and no V prize occurs, the mode shifts to the relatively advantageous preparation mode after the small prize. Is a special small hit type in which the gaming state is advantageous.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, "small hit B6" is associated with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "50 to 89". It is specified (see 202da2 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit B6” is a small hit type to which “big hit B6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, the jackpot B6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the extended play mode is set after the end of the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, the "small hit B6" is a small hit type in which the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous state by making the V winning during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “small hit B6” is 25, so if the special symbol lottery results in a small hit, “small hit B6” is The determined ratio is 25% (25/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, "small hit C6" is associated with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "90 to 99". It is defined (see 202da3 in FIG. 142 (a)). This “small hit C6” is a small hit type to which “big hit E6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. The "big hit E6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is five and the preparation mode is set after the big hit is completed regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, the "small hit C6" is a small hit type in which the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous state by making a V prize during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of "small hit C6" is 10, so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit C6" The determined ratio is 10% (10/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit D6" is defined in correspondence with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 29". (See 202da4 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit D6” is a small hit type to which “big hit C6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, the “big hit C6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the extended play mode is set after the end of the big hit regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, the "small hit D6" is given as the "small hit D6" because the largest number of rounds and the game state after the big hit are most advantageous by giving the V prize during the small hit game. Is one of the most advantageous small hit types for the player. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes “small hit D6” is 30. Therefore, if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, “small hit D6” is changed. The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit E6" is defined in association with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "30 to 79". (See 202da5 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit E6” is a small hit type to which “big hit F6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. The “big hit F6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the game state after the end of the big hit is changed according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the "big hit F6" is reached in the time saving state (normal mode, extended holiday mode), the extended holiday mode in which the number of time savings is 100 is set after the end of the big hit, while the normal state of the ordinary symbol (preparation) When the "big hit F6" is reached in (mode), the number of times saved is set to 0 (the preparation mode is set). Therefore, in the extended play mode, when the "big hit F6" is reached, the extended play mode is continued even after the end of the big hit, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the "big hit F6" in the preparation mode, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. It is disadvantageous compared to the case of a jackpot. This is because if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the preparation mode, the mode shifts to the advantageous extended mode at a rate of 100%. Therefore, in the preparation mode in which it is necessary to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handing, when an irregular game for executing the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the degree of advantage for the player Can be reduced, so that an irregular game method can be suppressed. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes “small hit E6” is 50, so if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, “small hit E6” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" is defined in association with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "80 to 89". (See 202da6 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit F6” is a small hit type to which “big hit G6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. The “big hit G6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the big hit is completed. In addition, the period of the normal mode (the number of special symbol lotteries until shifting to the preparation mode) set after the “big hit G6” is completed has a different configuration depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the "big hit G6" is reached during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal mode (hour saving state B) is set 50 times after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit" is set during the normal state of the normal symbol. G6 ", the normal mode is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, if the "big hit G6" is reached in the extended play mode, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the end of the big hit, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, since the number of times smaller than the number of times of the normal mode (100 times) set in the case of "big hit A6" in the normal mode is set, it is easy to leave the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the game is shifted to the preparation mode or the jackpot is won before the game is shifted to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes "small hit F6" is 10, so if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" becomes The determined ratio is 10% (10/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit G6" is defined in correspondence with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "90 to 94". (See 202da7 in FIG. 142 (a)). This “small hit G6” is a small hit type to which “big hit H6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. Like the “big hit G6”, the “big hit H6” has 10 rounds and is a big hit type in which the normal mode is set after the big hit is completed. Specifically, if the "big hit H6" is reached during the time saving state of the normal symbol, 25 normal modes (hour saving state B) are set after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit" is set during the normal state of the normal symbol. H6 ", the normal mode is set 100 times after the end of the big hit. Therefore, if the "big hit H6" is reached in the extended play mode, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the end of the big hit, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, the number of normal modes (100 times) set when “big hit A6” is set in the normal mode, and the number of normal modes set (25 times) when set to “big hit G6” in consecutive mode Since the number of times is set to be smaller than that in ()), it is easier to shift from the normal mode to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the game is shifted to the preparation mode or the jackpot is won before the game is shifted to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes “small hit G6” is five, so if a small hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, “small hit G6” is The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit H6" is defined in correspondence with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "95 to 99". (See 202da8 in FIG. 142 (a)). This “small hit H6” is a small hit type to which “big hit I6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. Like the “big hit G6” and the “big hit H6”, the “big hit I6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the big hit is completed. Specifically, if the "big hit I6" is reached during the time-saving state of the normal symbol, one normal mode (hour-saving state B) is set after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit" during the normal state of the normal symbol is set. In the case of "I6", the normal mode is set 100 times after the end of the big hit. Therefore, when the "big hit I6" is reached in the extended play mode, after the big hit is completed, if the lottery is removed by the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to shift to the preparation mode. Then, it is most advantageous for the player (it is easy to shift to the preparation mode). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are five counter values that are "small hits H6". Therefore, if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hits H6" is The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  In the sixth embodiment, in the extended-villa mode, when the mode is shifted to the normal mode after the end of the big hit, the number of times that the normal mode (time-saving state B) is continued is not clearly indicated to the player. That is, similar to the sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation as to whether or not the mode has shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode is indicated according to the type of the rear image. With such a configuration, for a predetermined period (50 times after the end of the big hit in the sixth embodiment) after the end of the extended mode, the mode has shifted to the preparation mode, or the normal mode is maintained. It is possible to provide a game property that allows the user to predict whether the player is present. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142B, the details of the number-of-times-saving-times selection table 202db in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving number selection table 202db. The time-saving number selection table 202db, like the time-saving number selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment, indicates the number of time savings after the end of the big hit (the number of special symbol lotteries until shifting to the normal mode) at the time of the big hit and the big hit. 3 is a data table in which data to be set in accordance with the game state is specified.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot A6 is defined in association with the time saving state A of 100 times in the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal symbol, and the time reduction state of the normal symbol ( The time saving state B 100 times is defined in association with the normal mode and the extended mode (see 202db1 in FIG. 142B). Therefore, in the preparation mode set to the normal state of the ordinary symbol, if the jackpot A6 is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the extended play mode is set after the jackpot, which is one of the preferred jackpot types for the player. . On the other hand, in the normal mode or the extended-villa mode, if the jackpot A6 is reached, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, and thus it becomes one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player. In the extended play mode, since the game progresses mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the game is disadvantaged by the jackpot A6 (the disadvantageous normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot). ) Is almost the normal mode.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the jackpot types B6 and C6 are defined in association with the jackpots B6 and C6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times in the time saving state A (FIG. 142B). 142 (b), 202db2). Therefore, even if the jackpots B6 and C6 are won in any of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the extended play mode, the most advantageous extended play mode is provided after the end of the jackpot. The jackpots B6 and C6 are one of the most advantageous jackpot types.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, 100 time saving states B are defined in association with the jackpot D6 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (FIG. 142 ( b) 202db3). Therefore, the jackpot D6 is most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. In addition, as the jackpot type, the jackpot E6 is defined as being associated with 0 times as the number of time savings (see 202db4 in FIG. 142 (b)). Therefore, even if the big hit E6 is won in any of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the extended game mode, the preparation mode becomes relatively advantageous after the big hit ends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), the jackpot F6 is defined as the jackpot type in the normal state of the normal symbol (preparation mode) in the normal state (preparation mode). The time saving state A of 100 times is defined in association with (the normal mode and the extended mode) (see 202db5 in FIG. 142B). The big hit F6 is a small hit E6 in the lottery of the second special symbol, and is a big hit type that is won when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the small hit game, and is basically a big hit only in the consecutive play mode. . When the jackpot F6 is reached in the extended play mode, the extended play mode is set again after the end of the jackpot, so the jackpot F6 is one of the jackpot types in which the gaming state after the jackpot is most advantageous. The reason why the number of times saved is set to 0 when winning during the normal state of the ordinary symbol is to suppress an irregular playing method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode. . That is, in the preparation mode, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode shifts to the extended play mode at a rate of 100%. However, if the lottery of the second special symbol becomes the small hit E6 and the big hit F6 is won. , Loops through the preparation mode. Therefore, if the second special symbol lottery is executed irregularly, it is disadvantageous on the contrary, so that it is possible to suppress the irregular game method.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot G6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and 50 times in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol. (See 202db6 in FIG. 142 (b)). Therefore, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the extended play mode, a relatively large number of normal modes are set, which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot H6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and 25 times in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol. (See 202db7 in FIG. 142B). Therefore, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the extended play mode, the normal mode is set a smaller number of times than when the jackpot G6 is reached, so that it becomes easier to end the normal mode than the jackpot G6. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the jackpot G6 is reached and the extended play mode ends. Also, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times in the same manner as the jackpot G6. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method that attempts to execute the second special symbol lottery in the preparation mode. Can be planned.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot I6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and once in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol. (See 202db8 in FIG. 142 (b)). Therefore, when the jackpot becomes I6 in the extended play mode, the normal mode is set in a smaller number of times than when the jackpot becomes G6 or the jackpot H6. Can be. Therefore, it becomes more advantageous for the player than when the jackpot G6 or the jackpot H6 is reached and the extended play mode ends. In addition, when the jackpot is I6 in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times in the same manner as the jackpot G6 and the jackpot H6. Therefore, an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the details of the small hitting specified number selection table 202ea will be described. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit specified number selection table 202ea. The prescribed number of small hits selection table 202ea is a data table that is referred to for setting an end condition of the time saving state for each small hit type. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the number of wins until the end of the time saving state is defined for each type of small hit, separately from the number of time savings (number of lotteries for special symbols). When the specified number of times has been reached, the time reduction state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time reductions. This makes it possible to give a sense of expectation that the specified number of times has been reached each time a small hit occurs in the disadvantageous normal mode.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the specified number of small hits selection table 202ea is associated with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the number of winnings (the specified number) until the time reduction state for each small hit type is ended. Number) is specified. More specifically, for the big hit A6, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types in the normal state of the ordinary symbol. On the other hand, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, once as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, and 100 times as the specified number of times for the small hit types other than the small hit A6 (see FIG. 143). 202ea1). That is, when the extended mode is set, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, whereas when the normal mode (time saving state B) is set, the big hit A6 is set. On the other hand, once is set as the specified number of times, and 100 times is set as the specified number of times for other small hit types. Regarding the big hits B6 and C6, 100 times are defined as the specified number of times for all the small hit types regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (see 202ea2 in FIG. 143). That is, when the big hits B6 and C6 in which the extended play mode is set irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, the jackpot D6 and the jackpots G6 to I6 are defined as a predetermined number of times with respect to the small jackpot A6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, and For the small hit type of, the specified number of times is set in association with 100 times (see 202ea3 in FIG. 143). That is, when any one of the big hits D6 and G6 to I6 in which the normal mode is set regardless of the game state at the time of the winning, one time is set as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, 100 times is set as the specified number of times.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 143, for the big hit E6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 0 times are defined as the specified number of times for all the small hit types (see FIG. 143). 202ea4). That is, when the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit, 0 is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types. In addition, for the jackpot F6, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, 0 is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, while in the normal symbol time saving state, all the small hit types are set. Is defined as 100 times as the specified number of times (see 202ea5 in FIG. 143).

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the extended-village mode is set, 100 is set as the specified number of times for terminating the time-saving state for all the small hit types. That is, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the time saving state is surely continued. Thus, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from being forcibly ended before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times in the extended-villa mode, and to shift to the preparation mode, thereby preventing the player from being disappointed. In addition, when the normal mode is set, the small hitting A6 is set to one time as the specified number of small hits for terminating the time saving state. Accordingly, in the normal mode, if the small hit A6 is won, the number of time savings can be forcibly ended and the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode. A game can be played in expectation of winning A6. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game in the normal mode is merely an operation in which the game ball is continuously entered into the first entrance 64 until the number of times saved has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the normal mode for the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode only, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. Although the number of times was set to 100, the number is not limited to this. The correspondence between the prescribed number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the extended play mode, a small hit type with a small number of times (for example, five times) may be provided in the small hits of the second special symbol. With such a configuration, in the multi-villa mode, as the failure to win a V of about 1/20 continues, the possibility of the multi-villa mode being terminated is increased. You can have. Further, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the specified number of small hits may be determined by summing the number of wins of one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times of small hits B6 and small hits C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the V prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it is possible to positively grasp that the specified number of times before shifting to the preparation mode is reduced. Motivation for a player's game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 144, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 121 (b)) in that a storage area 203ea for the prescribed number of small hits is added. They differ in the point.

  The prescribed number of small hits storage area 203ea is used to store, for each small hit type, the remaining number of wins of small hits for terminating the time-saving state (normal mode, extended-village mode) and shifting to the preparation mode. This is a storage area. In the normal symbol time saving state, the remaining winning number (specified number) corresponding to the winning type of winning is subtracted and updated each time a small winning is achieved (see S2412 in FIG. 150). Then, when the specified number of times corresponding to any of the small hit types becomes 0 (reached the specified number), the process shifts to the preparation mode regardless of the remaining number of time savings (number of special symbol lotteries). (See S2414 in FIG. 150). In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, the prescribed number of small hit types other than the small hit A6 is set to 100, and therefore, 100 times (or 50 times, There is no possibility that the time saving state is ended before the number of times (25 times, once) ends. Also, in the extended play mode, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, so the specified number of small hits is reached before the end of 100 times, which is the number of time savings in the extended play mode, ends. There is no possibility to go to the preparation mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a method of shifting the gaming state according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is roughly provided with three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 145 (time saving state B of a normal symbol), the extended mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145 (time saving state A of a normal symbol), and the lower right part of FIG. A preparation mode (normal state of a normal symbol) is provided.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates the time saving state B of the normal symbol, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and even if the first special symbol has been hit by a lottery, it is a consecutive holiday. Since it is difficult to shift to the mode, the game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. As described above, the extended play mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state A of a normal symbol is set, and the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400, so that a small hit with a high probability is achieved. Is generated and the chance of passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is increased, so that the gaming state is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal mode. In addition, since the extended play mode is easily set again after the end of the big hit, the gaming state is most advantageous for the player.

  Further, the preparation mode indicates a game state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. As described above, since the game ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 6400, the first mode is set similarly to the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play a game aiming at the entrance 64, if a jackpot is won, the game mode shifts to the extended game mode at a rate of 100%, which is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal mode.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the normal mode to another mode when a big hit occurs, when a small hit is won, and when the number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145, if a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot B6 is determined as the jackpot type, the extended play mode is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. When the number of time savings has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol for the number of time savings has been completed), the mode shifts to the preparation mode (normal state of the ordinary symbols). When the small hit A6 is reached and the small hit game is completed without a V winning, the mode shifts to the preparation mode because the specified number of small hits A6 in the normal mode has been reached. Further, when the small hit B6 is reached, the player makes a right-handed aiming for the V prize, and when the V prize occurs, the game shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit (the big hit B6) based on the V prize. . Further, when the small hit C6 is reached, the player makes a right-handed aiming for the V prize, and when the V prize occurs, the game shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit (big hit D6) based on the V prize. . On the other hand, when the big win A6 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and when the small win A6 is won and a V prize is generated, the normal mode is set again after the end of the big hit. Further, when the small wins B6 and C6 do not occur and the V winning does not occur, the normal mode is maintained.

  Therefore, in the normal mode, when a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode is shifted to the extended-villa mode only at a rate of 30%, and the normal mode is looped at a rate of 70%. That is, even if the first special symbol lottery wins, it is more likely that the normal mode will be looped than the shift to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the special symbol lottery is not so happy for the player. Becomes Therefore, in the normal mode, it is possible to make the player want to shift to the preparation mode after the number of times saved, rather than the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. , It is possible to provide the player with a novel playability that the player does not want to win. Further, in the normal mode, when a small win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit A6 is determined at a rate of 50%, the number of times of which the prescribed number of times until the time saving state is ended is one. Therefore, if the small hit A6 is reached and no V prize is generated, the mode shifts to the preparation mode. When the small hit is won with a probability of 1/200 in the special symbol lottery, the small hit A6 is determined. That the player expects. If a V prize occurs at the small hit A6, the normal mode is set again after the big hit is completed. For this reason, it can be said that the small hit A6 is a small hit type in which it is more advantageous not to generate a V winning than in a case where a V winning is generated, from the viewpoint of transition to a gaming state (mode). On the other hand, if the small hit type other than the small hit A6 is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming state (mode) is maintained unless a V winning is generated. That is, the small hit types other than the small hit A6 are the small hit types in which generating the V prize is more advantageous than not generating the V prize.

  As described above, the small hit type (small hit A6) which is advantageous if the V prize is not obtained and which is disadvantageous if the V prize is given, and the small hit type (the small hit B6) which is maintained in the disadvantageous state if the V prize is not set. By providing the configuration C6), it is possible to provide a playability that allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a V prize or to avoid the V prize when a small hit is won. it can. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the normal mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed regardless of the small hit type. This makes it difficult to infer the small hit type from the display mode, so that it is possible to more seriously determine whether or not to aim for the V winning. Therefore, every time a small hit is won, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the extended-villa mode to another mode in addition to the case where the jackpot has been won and the case where the number of times of normal symbols has been reduced. More specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, the lottery of the second special symbol causes a small hit and a V winning (event in which the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hits G6 to I6 Is determined, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode. Also, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times without a big hit, the normal symbol shifts to the preparation mode after the number of time reductions has elapsed. On the other hand, if the big wins C6 and F6 are determined when the V prize is won, or if a big win is achieved by a special symbol lottery, the extended-villa mode is set again after the big win ends. In addition, as described above, the probability that the change of the special symbol of 100 times without losing the jackpot is about 0.6%, and thus is an event that hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to the other mode in the extended-villa mode is when almost the big hits G6 to I6 are won. The small hits (small hits F6 to H6) corresponding to the large hits G6 to I6 are determined at a rate of 20% of all the small hits. It becomes a very advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the extended-villa mode as one goal, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in the lower right of FIG. 145, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the preparation mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 145, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot becomes A6, the jackpot becomes B6, and the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to the extended mode. In the preparation mode, basically, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed (a game ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400), but the second entry is performed by an irregular game method. When a game ball is thrown into the ball opening 6400 to be a big hit or a small hit and a V winning is generated, the game falls to the normal mode (when the big hit F6 to H6). , There is a possibility that the preparation mode is looped (when the jackpot hits D6 and E6). Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by the irregular game method, it is more difficult to shift to the extended play mode than when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

  Next, details of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 146 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 123 (a)) in that the expectation degree selection table 222da is deleted. The difference is that a rank-up lottery table 222ea is added.

  The rank-up lottery table 222ea indicates the number of remaining fluctuations up to the preparation mode by the rank-up mode of the rear image when the mode is changed to the normal mode as one of the jackpots G6 to I6 in the extended-villa mode. Is a data table that is referred to for setting a rank-up effect for the game. Details of the rank-up lottery table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b).

  FIG. 146 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the rank-up lottery table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), in the rank-up lottery table 222ea, for each value of the remaining number of time savings (J), the determination value for determining to update (rank-up) the back image with higher expectation. It is a data table in which (a counter value of an effect lottery counter 223da) is associated and defined. The update of the rear image is performed by lottery every time the number of times of change becomes a multiple of 10 in a range where the number of times of change is less than 50.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the value of the number of remaining working hours (J) is less than 20, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “0 to 29”, it is determined that there is no rank up. On the other hand, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “30 to 89”, it is determined that the rank is up by one, and when it is “90 to 99”, it is determined that the rank is up by two. Here, one rank-up is a middle-degree expectation rear image that is updated (rank-up) to a middle-degree expectation rear image when the current rear-view image is a low-expected degree rear-view image. In this case, this indicates that the back image for the high degree of expectation is updated (ranked up). That is, it means that the degree of expectation is increased by one step. If a back image for high expectation has already been set, the back image for high expectation is not changed. Also, "up two ranks" means that the back image is updated (ranked up) to a high expectation back image regardless of the type of the current back image.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the value of the remaining working hours (J) is 20 or more, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “0 to 59”, it is determined that there is no rank up, In the case of "60 to 97", it is determined to be one rank up, and in the case of "98, 99", it is determined to be two ranks up. As described above, when the number of time reductions is less than 20, the rate of raising one rank or two ranks becomes higher than in the case where the number of time reductions is 20 or more. Pay attention to the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 147, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 124) in that a rank-up lottery flag 223ea and an expected degree storage area 223eb are added. It is different in that it is.

  The rank-up lottery flag 223ea is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for performing a lottery for rank-up of the rear image using the rank-up lottery table 222ea. This rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot of the type that shifts from the extended-village mode to the normal mode ends (see S5706 in FIG. 154), and the fifty-first variation pattern effect after the jackpot ends. Is set to off at the start timing of (see S5624 in FIG. 156). In other words, in any of the jackpots G6 to I6, it is set to off based on the number of times of change that determines that the mode has been shifted to the preparation mode. Although omitted from the illustration, the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is also set to off when a jackpot is won. While the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, the rank-up lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea is executed every time the number of times the special symbol changes becomes a multiple of 10. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming ability for estimating whether or not the mode has shifted from the rank-up mode to the preparation mode (whether or not the number of remaining time savings before shifting to the preparation mode is less than 20).

  The expected degree storage area 223eb is a storage area for storing data indicating the expected degree indicated by the back type. When executing a lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea (see FIG. 146 (b)), the current degree of expectation is determined based on the data stored in the expected degree storage area 223eb, and the lottery is determined by the lottery. Identify the back type after reflecting the rank up.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. First, the special symbol variation process 6 (S151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 148. The special symbol variation process 6 (S151) is a variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 as in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processes of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265, the special symbol in the fifth embodiment is used. The same processes as S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265 of the variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) are executed. In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) according to the sixth embodiment, after the process of S262, all the data of the time-saving medium counter 203da, the prescribed number of small hits storage area 203ea, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset. , The process proceeds to S220, and the start of the jackpot is set.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is not a special symbol jackpot (S218: No), the fifth embodiment In place of the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 128) in the embodiment, the time saving number updating process 6 is executed (S272), and the process proceeds to S265. Details of the time saving update process 6 (S272) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S265: Yes), the small hit start process 6 is replaced with the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment. Is executed (S273), and this processing ends. Details of the small hit start processing 6 (S273) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, details of the above-described time saving number update process 6 (S272) will be described. This time saving number updating process 6 (S272) is a process executed in place of the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment, and includes the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment. Similarly, when the mode is the mode in which the time saving state is set (that is, in the extended mode or the normal mode), the processing is for updating the number of time savings.

  Of the time savings update processing 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, in the processing of S2301 to S2304 and S2306, S2301 to S2304 of the time savings number update processing (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as the processing of S2306 is executed. In the time saving number update process 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da has become 0 in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes), the small hitting specified number of times is stored. All data in the area 203ea is reset to 0 (S2311), and a state command indicating a normal state of a normal symbol is set (S2312). Next, “00H” indicating the preparation mode (the normal state of the ordinary symbol) is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2313), and this processing ends.

  Next, details of the small hit start processing 6 (S273) will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit start process 6 (S273) is a process executed in place of the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment, and includes a small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the start of the small hit opening operation.

In the small hit start processing 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, the respective processings in S2401 to S2403 correspond to the respective small hit start processings in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 129) in steps S2401 to S2403. The same processing is performed. Also, in the small hit start process 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S2403 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203da is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more). It is determined (S2411), and if the value of the time reduction counter 203da is 0 (S2411: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2411 that the value of the time reduction counter 203da is greater than 0 (S2411: Yes), the specified number of times for each small hit type stored in the small hit specified number storage area 203ea. Among them, the specified number of times corresponding to the type of the small hit won this time is updated by subtracting 1 (S2412), and it is determined whether or not the specified number of times after the subtraction has become 0 (S2413).

  In the processing of S2413, if it is determined that the specified number of times after the subtraction has become 0 (S2413: Yes), all the data in the hourly saving counter 203da and the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea are set to 0 in order to end the time saving state. (S2414), a state command indicating the intention of the ordinary symbol to the normal state is set (S2415), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, if it is determined that the specified number of times after the subtraction in the process of S2412 is not 0 (S2413: No), the process ends as it is.

  By executing the small hitting start processing 6 (see FIG. 150), when the small hitting A6 (the specified number of small hits is one) in the normal mode, the time saving state is changed regardless of the remaining number of time savings. It can be ended and shifted to the preparation mode.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode only, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. Although the number of times was set to 100, the number is not limited to this. The correspondence between the prescribed number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specified number of times is set to one in the extended-villa mode. With such a configuration, in the extended play mode, a small hit type with a small specified number of times (for example, five times) may be provided in the small hits of the second special symbol. With such a configuration, in the multi-villa mode, as the failure to win a V of about 1/20 continues, the possibility of the multi-villa mode being terminated is increased. You can have. Further, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the specified number of small hits may be determined by summing the number of wins of one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times of small hits B6 and small hits C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the V prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it is possible to positively grasp that the specified number of times before shifting to the preparation mode is reduced. Motivation for a player's game can be improved.

  Next, the jackpot end process 6 (S1151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot end process 6 (S1151) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in place of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment Similar to the big hit end process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the embodiment, this is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end.

  Of the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, in each of S1321, S1322, and S1324-S1326, S1321, S1322 of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. , And S1324-S1326. In the big hit end process 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1322 ends, the small hit specified number selection table 202ea is read (S1331), and the big hit type storage area 203db is read from the read table. The specified number of small hits corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the data and the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning indicated by the data in the winning mode storage area 203de is specified (S1332). Next, the specified number of small hits of each specified small hit type is stored in the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea, and the number of time savings specified in the process of S1322 is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203da (S1333). Is shifted to S1324.

  By executing the jackpot end process 6 (see FIG. 151), the number of times saved and the prescribed number of small hits can be appropriately set in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. First, the command determination process 6 (S4151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination processing 6 (S4151) is executed in place of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, and is the same as the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment. This is a process for performing control according to the type of the command received from the device 110.

  Of the command determination processing 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, in the processing of S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215, S4201 to S4209 of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) of the fifth embodiment, respectively. , And the same processes as those in S4213 to S4215 are performed. In the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the status command process in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 137) ), The status command processing 6 is executed (S4231), and this processing ends. The details of the status command processing 6 (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4209 (S4209: No), It is determined whether or not a command related to a win (such as an opening command for a small hit or an ending command for a small hit) has been received (S4232). If it is determined that a command related to a small hit has been received (S4232). : Yes), a small hit-related process for performing control according to the type of the command related to the small hit is executed (S4233), and this process ends. Details of the small hit-related processing (S4233) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4232 that the command related to the small hit has not been received (S4232: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the status command processing 6 (S4231) will be described. This status command processing 6 (S4231) is executed in place of the status command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, and is similar to the status command processing in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 137). This is a process for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified from the control device 110.

  Of the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment, S5501 to S5504 and S5506 are the respective processings of S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment. The same processing as the above processing is executed. In the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the current state command is not the command output when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored (S5504). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the status command is output at the end of the jackpot (S5511).

  In the process of S5511, if it is determined that the current status command is the status command output at the end of the big hit (S5511: Yes), after the end for setting the back image according to the gaming state after the big hit end The back side setting process is executed (S5512), and this process ends. Details of the post-end back setting process (S5512) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5511, when it is determined that the command is not the status command output at the end of the big hit (when shifting from the normal mode to the preparation mode due to the elapse of the number of time savings or reaching the specified number of small hits) (S5511: No), this process ends as it is. When the mode is shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode without going through the big hit, the small hit-related processing (see FIG. 155) or the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) to be notified or the rear image is used. The suggestion is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, details of the above-described post-completion backside setting process (S5512) will be described. The post-end back setting process (S5512) is a process for setting the back image after the end of the big hit according to the game state after the end of the big hit as described above. In the back side setting process after this end (S5512), first, it is determined whether or not the data in the gaming state storage area 223h updated based on the state command is data corresponding to the number of times of saving of time 100 (S5701). . Here, the back-side setting process after the end (S5512) is a process that is not executed in the case of the extended holiday mode. Therefore, when the number of remaining time savings is 100, only when the normal mode is set after the big hit. is there. Further, in the normal mode set after the end of the extended-villa mode, the number of time savings of 50 or less is set. Therefore, the fact that the normal mode in which the number of time savings is 100 is set means that the normal mode is looped. Means that. Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the number of remaining time savings is 100 (S5701: Yes), the back image for the normal mode is set (S5702), and this processing ends. This allows the player to easily understand that the normal mode has been set after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the remaining number of time savings is not 100 (S5701: No), then the remaining number of time savings is 0 (that is, after the jackpot is the preparation mode). ) Is determined (S5703), and when it is determined that the remaining number of time savings is 0 (S5703: Yes), a back image for the preparation mode is set (S5704), and the present process is terminated as it is. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the preparation mode is set after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5703 that the number of remaining time savings is not 0 (S5703: No), the normal mode is set after the extended-villa mode ends (one of 50 times, 25 times, and once). That is, the normal mode of the number of times reduced) is set, so that the rear image for the low expectation degree is set (S5705), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON (S5706), and this processing is ended. I do. By turning on the rank-up lottery flag 223ea, the rank-up lottery of the degree of expectation (the type of the back image) can be executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed ten times. Thereby, it is possible to realize the gaming ability of predicting the number of remaining time savings from the rank-up mode, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the above-described small hit-related processing (S4233) will be described. The small hit-related process (S4233) is one of the command determination processes 6 (see FIG. 152). As described above, when a command related to the small hit is received, the control according to the command type is performed. This is a process for executing.

  In the small hit-related processing (see FIG. 155), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S5801), and it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received. (S5801: Yes), then, it is determined from the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h whether or not the current mode is the normal mode (S5802). In the processing of S5802, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal mode (the time saving state B) (the preparation mode or the extended play mode) (S5802: No), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is turned on. Is determined (S5803), and if the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is off (S5803: No), it is in the extended-villa mode, or in the preparation mode, and the rear image for the preparation mode is already displayed. Since this means that the state is switched, execution of a right-handed navigation effect that prompts the player to perform a right-handed aiming at the V winning device 670 is set (S5804), and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5802, when it is determined that the mode is the normal mode (S5802: Yes), and when it is determined that the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on in the processing of S5803 (S5803: Yes), the selection effect ( (See FIG. 140) is set (S5805), and this process ends. Even if the mode is shifted to the preparation mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed when the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, so that the small hit is won during the execution period of the rank-up effect. Also, the display mode can be shared between the normal mode and the preparation mode. Therefore, during the execution period of the rank-up effect (between the end of the last jackpot in the consecutive mode and the end of the special symbol lottery 50 times), the mode is shifted to the preparation mode or the normal mode is maintained. Can be made more difficult to distinguish. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying attention to the rank-up effect of the rank-up effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the small hit opening command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S5801: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit ending command has been received. It is determined (S5806). In the process of S5806, if it is determined that the small ending command has been received (S5806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning has already been detected in the current small hit game (S5807). ), When it is determined that the V winning has not been detected (S5807: No), next, the specified number of small hits has been reached (the small hitting rule of any of the small hitting types in the gaming state storage area 223h). It is determined whether the data indicating the number of times is data corresponding to 0) (S5808).

  In the process of S5808, if it is determined that the specified number of small hits has been reached (S5808: Yes), the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5809), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to off. (S5810), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5808, when it is determined that the specified number of small hits has not been reached (the data indicating the specified number of times in the gaming state storage area 223h is not 0) (S5808: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5807, when it is determined that the V winning has been detected during the execution of the small hit game this time (S5807: Yes), the notification of the start of the big hit is set (S5811). The process ends.

  By executing the small hit-related processing (see FIG. 155), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode as the effect at the time of the small hit according to the gaming state. In addition, the notification content after the end of the small hit can be appropriately set.

  Next, the expectation degree update processing 6 (S4841) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The expectation update process 6 (S4841) is a process executed in place of the expectation update process (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment, and is a rear image indicating the expectation of whether or not the mode has shifted to the preparation mode. This is a process for setting a rank-up lottery.

  Of the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processing of S5601, S5603, and S5608, S5601 and S5603 of the key processing (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. , And S5608. In the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S5601 ends, it is next determined whether or not the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621). If it is determined that the up lottery flag 223ea is ON (S5621: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the change number counter 223db is 51 (S5622).

  In the process of S5622, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is 51 (S5622: Yes), the mode has been reliably shifted to the preparation mode even if the previous jackpot type was any of the jackpots G6 to I6. Therefore, the lottery period of the rank-up effect is ended, and the processing for setting the back image for the preparation mode (the respective processing of S5623 and S5624) is executed. Also, if it is determined in step S5603 that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 101 (S5603: No), it means that the mode has shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode, and the process shifts to S5623. In the processing of S5623, the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5623), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to off (S5624), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S5622, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is not 51 (S5622: No), it is determined whether or not the current back image is the back image for high expectation (S5625). If it is determined that the back image for the high degree of expectation has been set (S5625: Yes), the rank of the degree of expectation cannot be raised any more, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5625 that the type of the currently set rear image is not the rear image for high expectation (S5625: No), the process proceeds to S5608.

  In the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S5608 that the value of the fluctuation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608: Yes), the rank is increased. The lottery table 222ea is read out (S5626), the rank-up mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223da, and the remaining number of time savings is specified, the specified rank-up mode is set (S5627), and the process ends. I do.

  By executing the expectation degree update process 6 (see FIG. 147), the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times during a predetermined period (until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times) after the end of the extended-villa mode. Every time it is executed, it is possible to draw a rank up of the rear image. Thereby, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to estimate the number of remaining time savings according to the ease of rank-up.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the normal symbol time saving state B is set to the most disadvantageous game state (normal mode) in which it is difficult to shift to the extended game mode even if a big hit occurs, and the normal symbol is set. In the normal state (preparation mode), the transition rate to the extended play mode in the event of a big hit is higher than in the time saving state B of the ordinary symbol. By this, it is easier to shift to the extended mode, since it becomes easier to shift to the preparation mode after the number of time savings in the normal mode has elapsed and then to the jackpot, rather than the jackpot in the normal mode. In this way, a novel game can be realized in which a game is played with the expectation that the time-saving state will end. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that expects consecutive departures in a special symbol lottery in the normal mode.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit by generating the V prize as the type of the small hit to be won with a low probability (1/200). The small hit type (small hit A6) that is reset, the small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit due to the occurrence of the V winning, and the big hit ends when the V winning occurs A small hitting type (small hitting C6) which shifts to the preparation mode later is provided. Thereby, in the case of a small hit in the normal mode, it is advantageous in a case where the game state becomes disadvantageous due to the occurrence of a V winning (the number of time savings that have been completed is reset to 100). (To shift to the preparation mode or the extended-villa mode), it is better to make a V prize or avoid the V prize when a small hit occurs in the normal mode. It is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to judge whether or not the game is completed. In addition, when the small hit A6 occurs in the normal mode, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time savings. As a result, in the small hit A6, it is more advantageous as a gaming state to avoid the V winning and shift to the preparation mode than to set the normal mode again with the V winning. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the player can more seriously determine whether to make a right-handed shot for a V-win or a left-handed shot to avoid a V-win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the small hit occurs.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode only, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. Although the number of times was set to 100, the number is not limited to this. The correspondence between the prescribed number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the extended play mode, a small hit type with a small number of times (for example, five times) may be provided in the small hits of the second special symbol. With such a configuration, in the multi-villa mode, as the failure to win a V of about 1/20 continues, the possibility of the multi-villa mode being terminated is increased. You can have. Further, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the specified number of small hits may be determined by summing the number of wins of one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times of small hits B6 and small hits C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the V prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it is possible to positively grasp that the specified number of times before shifting to the preparation mode is reduced. Motivation for a player's game can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, as a small hit type of the first special symbol, a normal mode is set after a big win when a V win is made, a small win A is shifted to a preparation mode when a V win is avoided, and a preparation mode is set after a big win when a V win is made. Is set, but the small hit type in which the current mode is maintained when the V winning is avoided, and the extended play mode is set after the big win when the V winning is avoided, but the small mode in which the current mode is maintained when the V winning is avoided. Although the hit type is provided with three types, the small hit type is not limited to these three types, and the type may be arbitrarily increased or decreased. For example, by setting only the small hit type of the first special symbol to the small hit A6, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the V winning is avoided, the preparation mode is determined. The player can have great satisfaction at the time of winning the small hit. Conversely, in addition to the big hits A6 to C6, for example, a relatively advantageous small hit type that shifts to the preparation mode when a V prize is given or when the V prize is avoided may be provided. It is also possible to provide a relatively disadvantageous small hit type in which the mode is shifted to the normal mode when a winning is achieved, and the mode is maintained when the V winning is avoided. With such a configuration, it is possible to more seriously determine whether to win the V-prize or to avoid the V-prize when a small hit is won, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, a small hit type that is more advantageous when avoiding a V winning than when a V winning is generated, and when a V winning is generated is avoided when the V winning is avoided. Although the small hit type which is advantageous is provided, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a small hit type that is advantageous even when avoiding a V winning or generating a V winning is provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a predetermined number of times is one, and a small hit type in which the preparation mode is set after the end of the big hit when a V winning occurs. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which a small hit type is set to be in the normal mode even when the V winning is avoided or the V winning is generated.

  In the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, either the mode is shifted to the extended holiday mode or the time saving state B of 100 times is set. However, it is not limited to this. A case in which the mode is shifted to the preparation mode may be provided, or a variation may be provided in the number of times reduced in the normal mode after the end of the jackpot. Similarly, in other modes, the variation in the shift ratio to each mode and the number of times of reduction in the time of a big hit can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the sixth embodiment, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 in the case of a small hit is common regardless of the small hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an opening pattern in which the opening period of the opening / closing door 670f1 is short (a game ball is difficult to enter) and an opening pattern in which the opening period is long (a game ball is easy to enter) may be provided.

  In the sixth embodiment, the display mode shown in FIG. 140 is executed as a selection effect performed when a small hit occurs in the normal mode. However, it is determined whether a V prize is generated or not. It can be arbitrarily determined as long as it can be selected by the user. Further, the selection effect may be executed in a mode in which the type of the small hit can be reported or suggested at a predetermined ratio when the small hit occurs. Specifically, for example, in the case where the small win A6 in which it is more advantageous to avoid the V prize is won, an arrow with the character “left-handed” attached at a first rate (for example, a rate of 5%) If the image YG1 is displayed in red while another small hit type is selected, the arrow image YG1 is displayed in red at a second ratio (for example, 1%) lower than the first ratio. You may comprise so that it may be. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the small hit type is predicted based on the display mode of the selected effect and the firing direction is determined.

  In the sixth embodiment, the current mode is not specified until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times after the end of the extended-villa mode, and the mode shifts to the preparation mode according to the rank-up aspect of the rear image. It was configured to only suggest the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols up to. That is, until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times (no matter what the jackpot type is, the number of lotteries has definitely shifted to the preparation mode), the current mode is not clearly indicated to the player by the display mode or the like. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. The current mode may be notified at the time of an arbitrary number of lottery times from the end of the extended-villa mode to the number of lottery times (50 times) that has definitely shifted to the preparation mode. . More specifically, for example, after the end of the extended play mode (that is, after the end of the jackpots G6 to I6), when the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, the normal mode is maintained or the preparation mode has been shifted. Is determined, and a rear image according to the mode (a rear image for the normal mode or a rear image for the preparation mode) may be changed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the player wants to continue the game at least up to the number of lotteries in which the current mode is specified, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Also, even if the normal mode is notified when the 30 special symbol lotteries have been completed, the remaining number of lotteries until the preparation mode is 20 times, and the remaining lottery frequency until the preparation mode is half or more. Since the player is digested, it is possible to give the player the impression that "the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode soon". Therefore, even if the normal mode is notified, the game can be continued with the aim of shifting to the preparation mode.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. You can do it.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the state shifts to the disadvantageous state (normal mode) until all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which are executed after the jackpot, are completed. Although it was configured to notify whether or not there was a door break mode effect, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the ball is the reserved ball of the second special symbol or not, after the jackpot is over, it is determined whether the state has shifted to an unfavorable state (or advantageous) within a predetermined number of lotteries of the special symbol. It is good also as composition which notifies by breakthrough mode production. Specifically, for example, in the special symbol probable state, each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol lottery is shifted (falled) to the low probability state without going through the jackpot, separately from the special symbol lottery. By applying the door-break mode effect to the pachinko machine 10 of a specification (a specification in which it is more advantageous that a lottery result corresponding to a fall is not obtained) to perform a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, a fall probability of 1/100). Is also good. That is, in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the probability change state, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the door-through mode effect is executed until the 100 times of special symbol lottery ends after the jackpot ends. If the special symbol has fallen to the low probability state within 100 times, an effect that fails to break through the door is executed, and if not, an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed. . Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which the number of lotteries in which the probability change state is set is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, 130 after the big hit), the number of lotteries in which the probability change state is set becomes a big hit. Alternatively, it may be configured to indicate (notify) by the door break-through mode effect whether the probable change state has ended. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot during the probable change state, it is suggested that the player has an advantage (execution of an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed), and a predetermined number of times (130 If the lottery has been completed, it may be configured to suggest that it is disadvantageous for the player (execute an effect that fails to break through the door). Further, in this case, the door break mode effect may be executed over the entire period in which the probability change state is set, or may be performed for a part of the period (for example, the number of lotteries after the big hit is 125 or more). Only, it is good also as composition which performs door break mode production.

  Also, for example, as the gaming state after the big hit, the special symbol positive change state until the next big hit, and the big hit type (big hit a) which becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the lottery of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100)) In the pachinko machine 10 of the specification in which at least the special jackpot type (small jackpot b) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol time reduction state until the end is completed, the winning jackpot is determined. The jackpot a or the jackpot b is configured to be indistinguishable (difficult) from the effect or the like, and after the jackpot until a predetermined number (100 times) of lottery is executed. The game state set after the previous big hit may be notified by the door break mode effect. In other words, if the game state is a special symbol probable state and a normal symbol time reduction state, an effect indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (an effect that breaks through the door) is executed, and the game state is set. If is a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, an effect indicating that it is disadvantageous for the player (an effect of failing to break through the door) may be executed. In addition, for example, in a special symbol lottery, a small hit becomes a small hit with a lower probability than a loss, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a in the case where a partly-variable big hit (big hit c) is determined is equivalent to the small hit ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the door-through mode effect is applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the same specification or an operation in which the player has a difference that is indistinguishable by the player). In other words, it is difficult to determine which lottery result has been obtained depending on the effect, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, and the like in the case of the small hit and the case of the big hit c. Then, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the state is notified by the door-break mode effect after a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed after the small hit or the big hit c. It may be. In other words, if the low probability state of the special symbol is maintained as a small hit, an effect indicating a disadvantageous state for the player (an effect of failing to break through the door) is executed, and the big hit c is obtained. If the special symbol is shifted to the certain state, the effect indicating that the player is in a state advantageous to the player (the effect of successfully breaking through the door) may be executed.

  In each of the above embodiments, whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous state (mode) is notified by the door-break mode effect, but the content to be notified (suggested) by the door-break mode effect is not necessarily limited to the mode. . For example, a configuration may be used in which whether or not the effect mode is changed is notified by a door-through mode effect. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be used in which it is notified by a door-through mode effect whether or not to develop into a highly reliable reach effect, or whether or not to develop to the next step in a so-called continuous effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased to the upper limit number (four) at the end of the jackpot, but this is not limited to after the end of the jackpot. In a state different from the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the present invention is applicable if the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to the upper limit number. A configuration may be adopted in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes the upper limit value at the time or at the end of the time reduction state. In addition, for example, a configuration is provided in which a small win is likely to occur (a lottery probability is high or a lottery condition is easily satisfied), and a small win is unlikely (a lottery probability is low or a lottery condition is hardly satisfied). It is good also as a structure applied to the state which is easy to be a small hit.

  In each of the above embodiments, the second entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13, but the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) is used during the big hit. The arrangement may be changed to an arbitrary arrangement as long as the ball hitting toward can enter the second entrance 640. Further, the ball hit toward the variable prize device 65 (variable prize device 650) during the jackpot is difficult to enter the first ball entry port 64, but the first ball entry port 64 during the jackpot. You may comprise so that a sphere may enter a ball.

  In each of the above embodiments, the correspondence between the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot can be arbitrarily determined without departing from the spirit of each embodiment. .

  In the fifth and sixth embodiments, in the normal symbol time-saving state A, when a normal symbol is won by lottery, the game ball passing through the through gate 67 directly enters the second entrance 6400. The fluctuation time of the symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are set so as to make the ball swing, but the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are such that the game ball hit right in the ordinary symbol time saving state A easily enters the second entrance 6400, and the ordinary symbol time saving state It can be arbitrarily determined as long as the game ball hit right in B does not easily enter the second entrance 6400. Specifically, for example, in the normal symbol time saving state A, a game ball that has reached the distribution member 6600 next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has been distributed to the right flow path R1 has a second entrance. The configuration may be such that the normal symbol fluctuation time and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are determined so that the ball easily enters the ball 6400.

  In the fifth and sixth embodiments, a game ball fired at a firing intensity of 95% or more guides the game ball to the distribution member 6600 by a plurality of nails planted above the distribution member 6600. Instead of or in addition to this, the game balls fired at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) surely reach the distribution member 6600 at 0.6 second intervals. A configuration for adjusting the arrival interval of the game balls may be provided. More specifically, for example, immediately above the distribution member 6600, an open state in which the game balls can flow down to the distribution member 6600, and the game balls cannot flow down to the distribution member 6600 and stay at the upper side An opening and closing device that periodically switches between the closed state and the closed state may be provided. That is, the opening / closing device that repeats the open state period and the closed state period in which only one game ball can be dropped and the closed state period at a cycle of 0.6 seconds always causes the game ball fired at a firing intensity of 95% or more to be released. It is good also as a structure provided in the position which passes. With this configuration, when the game balls are continuously fired at the shortest firing interval, the intervals at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600 are more reliably set to 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, the game balls can be more reliably alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (gaming properties where it is more advantageous that no pending repetitions occur)
The first discriminating information is provided based on the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter the ball and the game ball entered the first ball entry means. A first discrimination information acquisition unit for acquiring, a first discrimination unit for performing a first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit, different from the first direction; Second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter, and second discrimination information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second discriminating information acquiring unit that acquires, a second discriminating unit that performs a second discrimination based on the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring unit, and a second discriminating information acquiring unit After the second discrimination information is obtained by the above, based on the obtained second discrimination information, Until the second discrimination is performed, discrimination information storage means capable of storing the second discrimination information with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and a position where a game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter. And a variable ball-in means which can be changed between a first state in which a game ball easily enters and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a game ball in the variable ball-in means. Based on the fact that a specific benefit has been obtained by the privilege providing means for providing a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the ball has entered, and the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the means is changed to a first state a predetermined number of times; and a first game state as a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed. 2nd game that is more advantageous to the player than 1 game state And a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least the game state. The ratio of setting the first game state as a game state after the execution of the variable game is higher when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination unit is higher. Gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means. First discrimination information is acquired by first discrimination information acquisition means. The first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls fired in the second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Then, the second determination information is obtained by the second determination information obtaining means. A second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit. After the second discrimination information is obtained by the second discrimination information obtaining means, the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means until the second discrimination based on the obtained second discrimination information is performed. It is stored with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which game balls easily enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. It is arranged in a position that is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the variable ballistics means. A variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment by the first judgment means or the second judgment means. . As the game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means, a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Is set by the game state setting means. The game state after the execution of the variable game by the game state setting means is determined to be the first game state when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. Is set higher.

  Thus, when a game ball is fired in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege during the execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, the ratio of being set to the first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than that of the second gaming state is high. In the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel playability can be realized.

  In the gaming machine A1, a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the variable ball-in means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern of the variable ball-in means. Variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, wherein the variable pattern setting means, when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means, more than the second variable pattern When the ratio of setting the first variable pattern increases and the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than that of the first variable pattern. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

  With this, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the second variable pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry unit is likely to be set. In the second determination based on the second determination information stored in the second determination information, it is possible to more strongly expect that a specific determination result will not be obtained.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, as a variable pattern of the variable ball-in means, a first variable pattern and a game ball in the variable ball-in means rather than the first variable pattern. Is provided with variable pattern setting means for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is difficult to enter the ball, and during a period from the start of the first variable pattern to the end thereof, In the case where the second discrimination information is obtained by the second discrimination information acquiring means, the second discrimination information acquisition means is configured to have a period at least longer than a period until the predetermined number of pieces of the second discrimination information are acquired. A gaming machine A3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 or A2. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, if the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction, a predetermined number of pieces of second determination information are obtained by the second determination information obtaining means. The period is at least longer than the period up to the end.

  Thus, during execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player keeps firing game balls in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege, at least a predetermined number or more of the second information is obtained. Is obtained. Therefore, every time after the variable game ends, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in expectation that all the second determinations of the upper limit number do not result in a specific determination result.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination unit is performed with higher priority than the first determination by the first determination unit. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination unit is performed with higher priority than the first determination by the first determination unit. Even if a game ball enters the first ball entry means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, the execution of the first discrimination can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be paid by the second determination.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a game ball fired in the second direction is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach, and the reached game ball is converted into a first flow path provided with the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a distribution unit that distributes the variable ball-in means to a second flow path provided with the variable ball-in means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means Since the distributing means for distributing the game balls to the game ball is arranged at a position where the game balls fired in the second direction can be reached, the downflow direction of the game balls fired in the second direction is biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine A5, the allocating means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, since the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, during the execution of the variable game, The ball can be alternately entered into the second entry means and the variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game ball fired in the second direction from eccentrically entering the second ball entry means or the variable ball entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a first position at which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means as compared to the first position. A variable means capable of changing to a second position at which the ball is difficult to ball, and variable control means for controlling a variable operation of the variable means, wherein the first game state is determined by the variable control means It is difficult to be changed to one position, and in the second game state, the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and the first position as compared with the first position. The variable means is changed to a second position at which the game ball hardly enters the ball entering means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second game state, the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. .

  Thereby, in the first game state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, and thus the game ball is easily entered into the first ball entry means. Therefore, in the first game state, the game can be played more efficiently, and there is an effect that the game can be played with more expectation of the first game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the first gaming state is such that the probability that the specific determination result is obtained by the first determination means and the second determination means is the first probability. In the second game state, the probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to a second probability that is lower than the first probability. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7. That is, in the first game state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to the first probability. On the other hand, in the second game state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

  As a result, in the first game state, the probability of a specific determination result being higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game is completed, the variable game is easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first game state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits can be obtained in a relatively short period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature B>
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed. Game state setting means for setting one game state from among states, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means, and a predetermined state during execution of the privilege game. A period until the privilege game ends based on the specific condition being satisfied, and a period until one or a plurality of the identification information dynamically displayed after the privilege game ends. And a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a period, wherein the specific effect can indicate to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by an effect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. Performed by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed. One game state from among the states is set by the game state setting means. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determining means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means. Dynamic display of a period until the bonus game ends and one or a plurality of pieces of identification information to be executed after the bonus game ends, based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the bonus game. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in a period until the end of the process. The specific effect is an effect that can indicate to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state.

  Accordingly, the specific effect can be executed over a period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information ends, and thus, the period until the privilege game ends. Alternatively, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect executing means is configured to execute the specific effect based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. A gaming machine B2 characterized by executing the following.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect is established based on the establishment of the specific condition. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, so that the specific effect is not changed to the first game state during execution of the specific effect, and the second game state is suggested in the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed while expecting that a specific determination result will not be obtained during execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means, Until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied, a discrimination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and stored in the discrimination information storage means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. Determining means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result includes the determination information, and determining an effect mode of the specific effect based on a determination result by the determination means. And a special effect execution means for executing the special effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Game machine B3 to.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means is obtained by the discriminating information obtaining means, and the discrimination information obtained by the discriminating information obtaining means is discriminated from the obtained discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the information is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the determination unit determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage unit includes the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. Based on the result of the determination by the determining means, the effect form of the specific effect is determined by the effect state determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  Thus, the result of the determination by the determining means can be determined in advance, so that there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode in accordance with the result of the determination actually performed by the determining means.

  In the gaming machine B3, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, a first privilege game, A type determining means for determining one of a plurality of privilege game types including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the second game state; Is for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game. An effect state that indicates that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state based on the determination that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means; And characterized in that to determine the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first bonus game after the execution is completed. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least the second privilege game in which the gaming state is set to the second gaming state. The determination unit determines whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage unit includes the determination information corresponding to the first bonus game. Based on the determination unit determining that the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, an effect mode indicating that the game state after the specific effect is completed is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.

  Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is performed in expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, wherein the specific effect is such that a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period regardless of the effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period of the specific effect irrespective of the effect mode. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the result of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be focused on the result of the specific effect to the end.

  In the gaming machine B5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means, and the display executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means, wherein the specific period is set after the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined by the dynamic display period determination means when all of the determinations by the determination means of a predetermined number of times are different from the specific determination results. A gaming machine B6, which is a sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result by the determining means. A dynamic display period is determined when the period from when the specific condition is satisfied to the end of the privilege game and when all of the predetermined number of determinations by the determination means are different from the specific determination result. The sum of the specified number of dynamic display periods determined by the means is set as the specified period.

  Accordingly, the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times ends, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended properly.

  In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display period determining means determines whether at least the specific period ends, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means within the specific number of times after the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine B7, wherein a period longer than the remaining period is determined as the dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means within a specific number of times after the end of the privilege game, at least the remaining time until the specific period ends. Since the period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, if a specific determination result is obtained within a specific number of times, the bonus game is performed before the specific period ends. Can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, by starting the privilege game before the end of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress the result of the specific effect from being known in advance, and thus there is an effect that attention can be paid to the specific effect.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, during execution of the privilege game, an expectation degree suggestion effect executing means for executing an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the second game state is indicated by the specific effect is provided. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B7, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the second game state is indicated by the specific effect during the execution of the bonus game is indicated by the expectation degree indicating effect executing means Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the effect mode and the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

<Feature C group> (It is difficult to determine whether or not a pending run occurs based on the operation of the attacker)
Privilege entry means to which a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of a game ball, a first position at which a game ball can enter the privilege entry means, and a game at a position higher than the first position. A variable means for changing to a second position at which the ball is difficult to enter, a determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a determination means for determining that the first determination result is obtained. A first variable control unit that controls the variable unit to change in a first variable mode, and a second determination result different from the first determination result determined by the determination unit. A game state setting unit capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination is performed; and a specific number of times based on the determination result by the determination unit being the second determination result. The discrimination by the discriminating means is all the The variable means is controlled so as to be variable in a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is hard to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times executed when the determination result of the above is obtained. And a second variable control means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege entering means based on the game ball entering, and the first position at which the game ball can enter the privilege entering means, The variable means is changed to a second position where the game balls are more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable control means performs the determination by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and changes the variable means in the first variable mode based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Is controlled by Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in the second discrimination, the discrimination is made from the first variable mode of the specified number of times executed when all the discriminations by the discrimination means of the specified number have become the first discrimination result In a second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is hard to see, the second variable control module controls the variable module to be variable.

  As a result, it is difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result has been obtained from the variable mode of the variable means, and it is determined whether a different game state has been set. This has the effect of making it difficult for the user to determine.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming state setting means can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the result of the determination by the determination means is the second determination result, the rate of setting the second game state is set higher than the rate of setting the first game state. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

  Thus, in the case of the second determination result, an adverse second game state is easily set, so that there is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation of the first determination result.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein the ratio of the first determination result in the determination by the determination means in the gaming machine C1 or C2 is set higher than the ratio of the other determination results.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the ratio of the first determination result in the determination by the determination unit is set to be higher than the ratio of the other determination results. The possibility that the first determination result is obtained continuously over the number of times increases. Therefore, even when the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode as the second determination result, it can be assumed that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not different game states have been set.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the determining means performs the determination when one of a first determining condition and a second determining condition different from the first determining condition is satisfied. The game state setting means sets a high ratio of setting the first game state when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment, the rate of setting the second gaming state disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, when either one of the first determination condition and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, the determination is performed by the determination unit. When the result of the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition is the second determination result, the ratio at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second gaming state disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher.

  Accordingly, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first game state having a higher degree of advantage than the second game state is easily set, and thus the first determination condition is set. A game can be played in the hope of being established. Therefore, when the determination by the determination unit is performed, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the determination condition that triggered the determination.

  In the gaming machine C4, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the second discrimination, and when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the bonus ball-in means is more than the second variable mode. A gaming machine C5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to change in a third variable mode in which a game ball is easy to enter.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means, and when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second variation mode is achieved. Since the third variable control means controls the variable means to be variable in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus ball input means, the second determination is made based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The degree of advantage in the case of a result can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be caused to play the game in expectation that the first determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a first ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, and a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, wherein the first determination condition is established based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and the privilege entry ball means is provided with a game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine C6 provided at a position where it is easy to hit a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, while the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, the second ball is set at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter the ball. Ball entry means and privilege entry means are provided. While the first determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, the second determination condition is determined based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Holds.

  Thus, when the bonus ball entry means is changed to the first position, when a game is fired in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easily performed after the privilege inputting means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine C6, the discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring discriminating information used for discriminating by the discriminating means based on that the game ball has entered the second ball-in means, and the discriminating information acquiring means acquires the discriminating information. A gaming machine C7 comprising: a discrimination information storage unit that can store the discrimination information at least up to a predetermined number of information until the discrimination unit performs the discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. That is, based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means is: With the predetermined number of information as an upper limit, the information is stored at least by the determination information storage unit until the determination by the determination unit is performed.

  With this configuration, in the case where the ball entry to the second ball entry unit is detected in a situation where the discrimination by the discrimination unit cannot be started, the discrimination information used for discrimination can be stored by the discrimination information storage unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the use of the ball for the second ball entry means from being wasted.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is performed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. A gaming machine C8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is greater than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Is also executed with priority, so that when the determination based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is performed, the result of the determination can be noticed.

<Feature D>
First determining means for performing a determination based on establishment of a first determination condition; second determining means for performing determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; Means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific result of the discrimination by the second discriminating means, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. Is determined as a type of one privilege game from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. Means, and a first state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied is set based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means. End condition is State setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state, based on the fact that the second state is established. The ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit than when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Is done. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game executing means based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment by the first judging means or the second judging means. The type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is a type from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determining means. A first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied is set by the state setting unit based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination unit or the second determination unit. On the other hand, a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state is set by the state setting means based on the end condition of the bonus game being satisfied. The type determining means determines that the rate of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific result is determined by the first determining means than when the specific result is determined by the second determining means, than when the type is determined by the first determining means. It is configured.

  Thereby, it can be suppressed that the second determination condition is satisfied in a state other than during the execution of the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the first privilege game with a low degree of advantage can be limited.

  In the gaming machine D1, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means And a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until the information is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination information to be used for the determination by the second determination unit is obtained by the determination information obtaining unit. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information storage means stores the predetermined number of information as an upper limit.

  Accordingly, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination unit is performed, the plurality of pieces of determination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the plurality of the second determination conditions. Is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine D2, the second discriminating means is acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during execution of the privilege game, and based on the discriminating information stored in the discriminating information storage means, after the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine D3 for performing a determination.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the privilege is obtained by the second discriminating means based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during execution of the privilege game and stored in the discriminating information storage means. Since the determination is performed after the end of the game, the opportunity for performing the determination by the second determination unit can be concentrated after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to cause the player to play the game, expecting that a specific determination result will not be obtained by the determination by the second determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on a game ball having entered, and a first position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball can easily enter than the first position, and the variable means is moved from the first position to the second position based on a specific determination condition being satisfied. A specific determining unit that determines whether the variable position is changed to the two positions; and the variable unit changes the position to the second position based on the determination that the specific determining unit changes the position from the first position to the second position. Variable control means for controlling the specific determination means in the second state than in the second state, when it is determined that the variable means is variable in the second state. Variable by means of Gaming machine D4 which is better when it is determined that the cause, wherein said varying means is used to control such a period for varying longer in the second position.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 to D3. In other words, the first position where the game ball is unlikely to enter the ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is more likely to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the satisfaction of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether to change the variable unit from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to change to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. When the variable means is determined to be variable by the specific determination means in the second state, the variable means is in the second position, compared to when the variable means is determined to be variable by the specific determination means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes longer.

  Thereby, the first state can make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied in the first state than in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on a game ball having entered, and a first position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball can easily enter than the first position, and the variable means is moved from the first position to the second position based on a specific determination condition being satisfied. A specific determining unit that determines whether the variable position is changed to the two positions; and the variable unit changes the position to the second position based on the determination that the specific determining unit changes the position from the first position to the second position. Variable control means for performing the control as described above, and the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means to the end thereof is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. A gaming machine D5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first position where the game ball is unlikely to enter the ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is more likely to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the satisfaction of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether to change the variable unit from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to change to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The first state is configured such that the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination unit to the end thereof is more likely to be shorter than in the second state.

  Thus, the period required for the specific determination unit to perform the same number of determinations in the first state is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, the chance that the variable means is changed to the second position can be obtained more times, so that it is possible to easily enter the game ball in the first state.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means provided in a specific flow path, wherein the second determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered, and a game ball flowing down the specific flow path is difficult. Opening / closing means that can be changed between a closed state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down and an open state in which the game ball can flow down, and the opening / closing means being set to the open state based on the first state. A gaming machine D6 comprising: opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball is provided in the specific channel. The opening / closing means is changed between a closed state in which the specific flow path is closed so that the game balls cannot flow down and an open state in which the game balls can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to an open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, and the opening / closing means is set to a closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. .

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

  In the gaming machine D6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, it is configured to be able to stop a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening / closing means. Machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, it is possible to stop a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when the game ball is set in the open state, the stopped game ball can be made to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied in the first state where the open state is set.

<Feature E group> (Include information corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the specific effect in the fluctuation pattern command from main to sub)
A gaming machine comprising: a display unit capable of displaying an effect mode; a main control unit for performing main control relating to the game; and a sub control unit for performing control relating to the game based on a command output from the main control unit. The main control means executes a discrimination means based on satisfaction of a discrimination condition, and executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. Privilege game execution means, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means, and dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time, information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and information corresponding to the dynamic display time. Command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least specific information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means outputs the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. Command receiving means for receiving a command, dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and predetermined specific conditions Is established, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect executable over one or a plurality of the dynamic display times on the display means, and the specific effect included in the dynamic display time command Based on the information, the specific effect end determining means for determining whether to end the specific effect, and the specific effect by the specific effect end determining means As an opportunity to be determined to be terminated, until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination is completed, A gaming machine E1 comprising: a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, it is advantageous to the player. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is output by the command output means. Output to slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and the dynamic display time is dynamically adjusted based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a specific effect executable over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed on the display unit by the specific effect execution unit. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, whether or not to end the specific effect is determined by the specific effect end determining unit. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination ends when the specific performance end determination means determines that the specific performance is to be ended. By this time, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect main hot water amount means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably ended.

  In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determining means that the specific effect is to be ended, the identification is performed based on information according to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. A gaming machine E2 comprising: an effect mode determining unit that determines an effect mode until the effect is terminated by the effect ending unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be ended by the specific effect end determining device, the determination is made according to the determination result by the determining device included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means is determined by the effect mode determining means, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the slave control means includes: a power-on determining means for determining power-on of the gaming machine; and if the power-on is determined by the power-on determining means, the slave control means includes the dynamic display time command. Based on the specific information thus obtained, a cutoff time determining means for determining whether or not the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned off is being executed, and execution of the specific effect by the cutoff time determining means. A gaming machine E3, comprising: after-insertion effect execution means for executing the specific effect based on the determination that the game device is in the middle.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the power-on of the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determining means in the slave control means, and the power-on is determined by the power-on determining means. Then, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the power-off of the gaming machine is determined by the power-off time determining means to determine whether or not a specific effect is being executed. The specific effect is executed by the after-insertion effect execution means based on the fact that it is determined that the specific effect is being executed by the cutoff time determination means.

  Thereby, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be restarted, so that the effect is different before and after the power is turned off, thereby preventing the player from being confused. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E3, the specific effect ending means terminates the specific effect executed by the post-insertion effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, the specific effect executed by the after-insertion effect executing means is terminated by the specific effect ending means. There is an effect that the specific effect can be appropriately ended even when the cutoff is performed.

  The gaming machine E5, wherein in the gaming machine E4, the specific effect execution means sets a predetermined specific period as an effect period of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, a specific period predetermined by the specific effect executing means is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so that a simple process is performed when the specific effect is set. There is an effect that it can be set with.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the main control unit obtains determination information used for determination by the determination unit based on satisfaction of the determination condition, and obtains the determination information by the determination information acquisition unit. A determination information storage unit capable of storing the determined determination information at least up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for determination by the determination unit, wherein the command output unit stores the determination information in the determination information storage unit. And outputting to the slave control means an information count command including information corresponding to the information count of the discrimination information, wherein the specific effect execution means outputs the discrimination information of the discrimination information included in the information count command. The gaming machine E6, wherein the specific effect is executed over dynamic display of the identification information less than or equal to the number of pieces of information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means at least until a predetermined number of information is used as the discrimination by the discrimination means. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information less than or equal to the information number of the discrimination information included in the information number command.

  Thereby, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that the production can be prevented from continuing.

  In the gaming machine E6, the information according to the number of pieces of the discrimination information is, during a period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when all discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit are completed, A gaming machine E7 comprising information corresponding to the number of remaining pieces of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, information according to the number of pieces of discrimination information is used for all discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied. Until the end of the process, the specific effect is more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means because the information is composed of information corresponding to the number of pieces of remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of discrimination information or less.

<Characteristic F group> (variable ease of execution of disadvantageous special drawing lottery according to winning symbols)
First ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, and first discrimination information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means. A first discriminating information acquiring unit that acquires, a first discriminating unit that performs a first discriminating process using the first discriminating information acquired by the first discriminating information acquiring unit, Second ball entry means arranged at a position where game balls fired in different second directions are easy to enter, and second discrimination information based on game balls entering the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, to perform a second discrimination that is likely to be more disadvantageous than the first discrimination result. A second determination unit to be executed, and the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit. Is determined by the first information discriminating means or the second information discriminating means. As a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, and as a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, it is more advantageous to fire game balls in the first direction than the second direction in at least a predetermined period. The privilege game of one of a plurality of types including a first privilege game that is easy to perform and a second privilege game that makes it easier to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction in the predetermined period. And a type determining means for determining the type of the game machine F1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that shifts to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous in that, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the gaming state given after winning is different, or the number of prize balls obtainable in each round is different. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter the ball. First discrimination information is obtained by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and using the first discrimination information obtained by the first information acquisition means. The first determination is performed by the first determination unit. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball. Second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination means executes a second discrimination that is more likely to result in a disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information obtained by the second discrimination information obtaining means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the result of the specific determination by the first determination means or the second determination means, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, it is easier to fire the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction in at least the predetermined period, and the first privilege game which is more advantageous in the first direction in the predetermined period. Also, the type of one privilege game is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including a second privilege game in which it is more advantageous to fire a game ball in the second direction.

  This makes it difficult for the first privilege game that is advantageous by firing the game ball in the first direction to perform the second determination that is likely to result in a disadvantageous determination result, so that the first privilege game and the second privilege The difference in the degree of advantage with the game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, so that when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to perform the game by paying attention to the type of the bonus game. There is.

  In the gaming machine F1, a first position in which a game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter the ball can be changed to a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball-in means, and a variable ball-discharging means which is disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter, and which can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter 2 variable ball entry means, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, In the first privilege game, the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which it can enter than the second variable ball pitch means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege. A gaming machine characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which it can enter a ball than a game. 2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, the first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter. Have been. At a position where the game ball fired in the second direction easily enters the ball, a second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged. I have. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means. In the first privilege game, the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which it can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means. The second privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the second variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the first privilege game.

  Thereby, during execution of the bonus game, it is possible to perform the game by paying attention to whether or not the launched game ball enters the first variable ball entry unit or the second variable ball entry unit. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is set as a game state after the privilege game is completed. A game state setting means for setting the game state of the first game state, the first game state after the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination means has been completed A gaming machine F3, wherein a ratio set as a later gaming state is higher than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1 or F2. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is over, one of the plurality of game states including at least the first game state and the second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is the game state. It is set by the setting means. In the first game state, the ratio set as the game state after the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination unit is higher than the second game state. It is configured to be.

  Thereby, when the determination by the second determination unit is performed, a novel game property can be realized in which a game is performed in the hope that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F3, the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the first privilege gaming or the second privilege gaming sets the first gaming state. The gaming machine F4, wherein the ratio is higher than the game machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F3, the rate at which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus gaming or the second bonus gaming ends is determined by the first gaming state. Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination performed based on firing of the game ball in the second direction in the predetermined period, and the first game state Can be made to feel that the player wants to avoid being set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the specific result of the second determination will not be a specific determination result after the end of the second privilege game.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating the determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. As an effect, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, one of a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect is determined. A gaming machine F5, comprising: a suggestion effect determination unit that determines the first suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. That is, the suggestion effect indicating the determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. As the suggestion effect performed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is indicated. It is determined by the effect determination means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination unit.

  With this, when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the game is the first privilege game, and the game can be performed in expectation that the second suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect. This has the effect. In addition, since the first suggestion effect may be executed even in the first bonus game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in expectation of the first bonus game. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine F5, when the suggestion effect execution unit executes the first suggestion effect based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination unit, the suggestion effect execution unit executes the first suggestion effect after the end of the first suggestion effect. A gaming machine F6 for executing a second suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestion effect is completed. Since the second suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first suggestion effect is executed, a game is performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed after the end of the first suggestion effect. There is an effect that can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, when the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the predetermined period, the second discrimination information acquisition unit may set the second discrimination information acquisition unit to output at least the predetermined information number or more of the second information. Gaming machine F7, characterized in that it is a period of time for which the discrimination information is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the second bonus game is achieved, and when the game balls are continuously fired in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since the predetermined number of pieces of the second determination information, which is the upper limit, is stored, it is possible to execute the second determination the number of times corresponding to the upper limit after the end of the second privilege game.

  In the gaming machine F7, the game ball fired in the second direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and is variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. Possible second variable ball-in means, variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball-in means to the first state in the predetermined period, and a game ball entering the second variable ball-in means. Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball hit, and a game ball fired in the second direction are arranged at a position where the game ball can be reached, and the reached ball is provided by the second ball entry means. A gaming machine F8 comprising: a first flow path provided therein; and a distributing means for distributing the first flow path to a second flow path provided with the second variable ball input means.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F7. A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are difficult to enter, at a position where game balls emitted in the second direction are easy to enter. Is arranged. The state of the second variable ball entry means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means. A first flow path provided with a second ball input means and a second flow path provided with a second variable ball input means at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction can reach. Distributing means for distributing the data to either of the above.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the downflow direction of the game ball fired in the second direction can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F8, the distribution means alternately distributes gaming balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F8, the game balls fired in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second privilege game are sent to the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. The ball can be entered alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress a game ball fired in the second direction from eccentrically entering the second ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

<Characteristic G group> (Notify the jackpot type based on winning V)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; , A variable position that can be changed to a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first position. Means, variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game, and the privilege game has been completed. As a later gaming state, a first gaming state advantageous to the player is set when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, and the ball is entered during execution of the privilege game. If the game ball does not enter the means, the first game state is set. Also, a game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player, a first privilege game as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and a first privilege game. A type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least an advantageous second privilege game, and at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game determined by the type determining means And a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating the determined type of the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. Machine G1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, whereby a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2003-325886). Also, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some gaming machines that do not notify the gaming state after the hit at the time of winning, and perform an effect indicating the gaming state after the hit during the winning state. Are known. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that after the effect indicating the game state after the end of the hit is executed, the remaining hit games are monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means. A bonus game advantageous to the game is executed. The variable means is changed to a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the bonus game. As a game state after the end of the privilege game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. It is determined by the type determining means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, a game suggesting the type of the determined bonus game is entered by the suggestion effect executing means into the ball-entering means. It is performed based on

  Thereby, even after the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is determined, attention is paid to the type of privilege game suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. Can play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous after entering the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine G1, the discriminating means performs a first discrimination based on establishment of a first discriminating condition as the discriminating condition, and a second discriminating different from the first discriminating condition. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the satisfaction of a condition, wherein the type determination unit determines that the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination by the first determination unit. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the first privilege game and the second privilege game, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the second privilege game. The type of the bonus game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the determination of the first bonus game, the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game than the second bonus game The third privilege that it is difficult for game balls to enter Determining one of a plurality of types including at least a technique, wherein the first privilege game is more than the second privilege game in the predetermined period after the privilege game is completed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is easy to make a determination.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit in the determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game by the type determination unit are provided as types of the bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination unit. One type is determined from the types. On the other hand, as the type of the bonus game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination by the second determination unit, the first bonus game and the second bonus game are more executed during the execution of the bonus game than the second bonus game. One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the third privilege game in which it is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the first privilege game, the second determination is more easily performed in the predetermined period after the privilege game is completed than in the second privilege game.

  Thus, when the first privilege game ends, the disadvantageous second determination is easily performed in a predetermined period, and therefore, when a specific determination result is obtained, it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game is determined. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game by paying attention to the type of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a specific effect execution for executing a specific effect at least during a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started to when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A gaming machine G3 comprising: means for executing a suggestion effect execution means, as a result of the specific effect, an effect indicating the type of the privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1 or G2. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means during a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started to when the game ball enters at least the ball entry means. As a result of the specific effect, an effect indicating the type of the bonus game is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit.

  Thereby, since it is possible to show a series of effects of the specific effect and the effect indicating the type of privilege game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A display unit capable of displaying identification information in the gaming machine G2 or G3; a dynamic display unit displaying dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit; Information that can determine one piece of identification information from among a plurality of pieces of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information as the identification information dynamically displayed by Determining means, wherein the identification information determining means determines the specific determination result by the determination means, and determines the first identification information when the type determining means determines the first privilege game. The gaming machine G4, wherein the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second privilege game is determined.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one of a plurality of pieces of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information is the identification information. Determined by the determining means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the first identification information is determined by the identification information determination unit. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

  Thereby, it is possible to confirm the dynamic display of the identification information in expectation of the display of the second identification information determined only in the advantageous second privilege game by the dynamic display. Further, by configuring the first identification information to be displayed also in the case of the second privilege game, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the second privilege game when the first identification information is displayed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine G4, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, In the type of the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is the second identification information. A gaming machine G5, wherein at least a second suggestion effect that is changed to identification information is provided.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G4. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display unit, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. In the type of the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

  Thereby, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the execution of the second suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine G5, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the gaming machine G5 includes a suggestion effect execution determination unit configured to determine whether to execute the suggestion effect, The identification information determination means determines the first identification information based on the determination that the suggestion effect execution determination means performs the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect execution means includes the type determination means. The first privilege game is determined by the above, and when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed, and the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine G6 for executing the second suggestion effect when the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G5. That is, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the suggestion effect execution determination unit determines whether to execute the suggestion effect. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the determination that the suggested effect is performed by the suggested effect execution determining means. The first identification information is determined by the type determination unit, and when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the suggestion effect execution determination unit, the first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means and the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect.

  Thus, the second suggestion effect is executed only when the second bonus game is determined, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the second suggestion effect being executed.

  In the gaming machine G6, the suggestion effect execution determining means performs the suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the ratio of determination is increased.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G6, the suggestion effect executing means determines that the second privilege game is determined by the type effect determining means, rather than by the type determining means. Since the ratio determined to execute the suggested effect increases, there is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggested effect is started.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and dynamic display thereof A dynamic display period of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution unit, and a period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable unit is changed to the first position. Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, wherein the suggested effect executing means executes a suggested effect indicating the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect. Gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is biased to the first position two positions. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the period. As a result of the specific effect, a suggestion effect indicating the type of the privilege game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  Thereby, since it is possible to show a series of effects of the specific effect and the effect indicating the type of privilege game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic H group> (varies the predictability of the occurrence of pending repetitions depending on the jackpot type)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; Type determination for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. Means, a variable means that can be changed in a predetermined variable mode, and a first variable mode based on a determination result that is different from the specific determination result by the determination means, and a first variable mode based on the first variable mode. First variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the mode, and the specific determination result obtained by the determination means. The second variable control means that changes the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the first variable mode; From the end to the time when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is easily changed in the first variable mode, and the second privilege Variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more easily changed in the second variable mode than in the first variable state during a period from the end of the game until the specific condition is satisfied; , A gaming machine H1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the hit is notified at the time of the hit, and the hit type is also notified. Therefore, after the notification is made, the hit is simply notified. In some cases, it became like a task of just digesting the hit, and the game became monotonous. Also, in some conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish whether a hit state or a small hit, which is a type of disconnection, based on a production mode, an opening / closing operation of a specific winning opening, and the like. A configured gaming machine is also known, and a gaming machine capable of expecting a winning even after the winning game is over is also known. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to determine whether the player has won or won, and there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game may be spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the bonus game execution unit executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. As the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. Based on the result of the discrimination determined by the determining means being different from the specific determination result, a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode are determined. In any one of the variable modes, the variable means is varied by the first variable control means. The third variable mode includes at least a specific variable mode that is hard to be distinguished from the first variable mode based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining module. Variable. From the end of the first privilege game to the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable state is changed by the first variable control means so that the variable means is easily changed in the first variable mode by the variable state setting means. Is set. On the other hand, a second variable state in which the variable means is more easily changed in the second variable state than the first variable state is set by the variable state setting means during a period from the end of the second privilege game to the satisfaction of the specific condition. Is done.

  This makes it difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between a case where the first bonus game has ended and a specific determination result after the end of the first privilege game, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied. In the meantime, it is difficult to determine whether or not the bonus game is executed based on the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the result of the discrimination is determined after the end of the second privilege game, the second variable mode is set, so that the player relatively discriminates whether or not the result of the discrimination is determined from the variable mode of the variable means. It will be easier. Therefore, the ease of identification of the deviation determination result until the specific condition is satisfied can be changed according to the type of the bonus game, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1, there is provided a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, and the variable means comprises a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball-entering means, and a game ball higher than the first position. Is variable to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the first variable aspect is that the variable means changes the second position from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of a first period. The second variable aspect is a variable aspect in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine H2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of the period.

  Thereby, by confirming the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position, it is possible for the player to easily discriminate between the first variable mode and the second variable mode. There is.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the discriminating means performs a first discrimination based on establishment of a first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the establishment, and wherein the first variable control unit determines the second determination based on a result of the disconnection determination determined by the first determination unit. The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable aspects including at least one variable aspect and the second variable aspect, and the second variable control means is provided with the first discriminating means. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that the variable means is varied in the third variable mode based on the result of the specific determination as a result of the determination.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H1 and H2. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode based on the result of the determination by the first determining unit. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is changed in the third variable mode by the second variable control means based on a specific result of the determination by the first determination means.

  Thereby, the variable mode of the variable means in the case where the result of the discrimination is a result of the discrimination by the first discriminating means is changed according to the type of the bonus game, so that the first discriminating means until the specific condition is satisfied. Each time the determination is made, the game can be performed while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the type determining means determines the type of the privilege game to be executed based on a result of the specific determination in the second determination by the second determining means. A gaming machine H4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the type of the privilege game executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination by the second determining means is determined by the type determining means. Since the determination is made, when the second determination is performed by the second determination means, the game may be performed by paying attention to whether the first bonus game is determined or the second bonus game is determined. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more easily satisfied than the second determination condition from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of a specific condition. Gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more satisfied than the second determination condition from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of the specific condition. This makes it easier to play the game by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball, and the game ball is fired in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter, and a second entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, and a predetermined value based on the entry of the game ball. The award ball entry means to which the award is granted and the state of the award ball entry means are changed from the first state in which the amusement ball is difficult to enter, based on the start of the award game, to the entry of the game ball. Variable control means for changing to a possible second state a predetermined number of times, wherein the first determination condition is established based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Gaming machine H6-and wherein the the at it.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H3 to H5. That is, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter, and a first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter the ball. Two ball entry means are provided. At a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, a privilege ball entry means is provided for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball having entered. The state of the bonus ball entry means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to the second state in which game balls can enter based on the start of the bonus game. The first determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is determined based on a game ball having been entered into the second ball entry means. Holds.

  Thus, the game ball can be launched into the first ball entry means by firing the game ball at the privilege entry means during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily satisfied when the bonus game is executed.

  In the gaming machine H6, first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, A determination information storage unit capable of storing the first determination information obtained by the first determination information obtaining unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, wherein the specific condition is determined at the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine H7, which is established based on execution of determination based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H6. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The specific condition is established based on the execution of the determination based on all the first determination information stored in the determination information storage unit at the end of the bonus game.

  Thereby, the first determination information acquired during the execution of the bonus game is stored in the determination information storage means, so that the first determination can be efficiently performed.

  In the gaming machine H7, the gaming state after the end of the privilege game is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. 1 game state determining means for determining a game state, wherein the type determining means determines the game state as a type of a privilege game executed based on a result of the specific determination in the first determination. A first type determining unit in which the ratio of determining the third privilege game in which the first gaming state is determined by the determining unit is higher than a ratio of determining the type of another privilege game; A second type that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game as the types of privilege games executed based on the determination result of Determining means; The game state determining means determines the second game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game, when the first bonus game or the second bonus game has been achieved. A gaming machine H8.

  According to the gaming machine H8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H7. That is, as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed, one gaming state is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Is determined by the game state determining means. As a type of privilege game executed based on a specific determination result in the first determination, a third privilege game whose first game state is determined by the game state determination means is determined by the first type determination means. Is higher than the rate at which the types of other privilege games are determined. As a type of the bonus game executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination, one of a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game is the first type. It is determined by two types of determination means. When the first bonus game or the second bonus game has been achieved, the second gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means as the gaming state after the completion of the bonus game.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the rate of determination of the first game state after the end of the bonus game is high, and thus the first determination stored in the determination information storage unit during execution of the bonus game. Based on the information, the game can be performed in the hope that all the first determinations performed after the end of the privilege game will be deviated and the determination result will be obtained. Therefore, a novel game characteristic that makes it possible to avoid a specific determination result can be realized, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic I group> (The probability of occurrence of pending runs varies depending on the type of jackpot)
A first determination unit that performs a determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, a second determination unit that performs a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit; and a bonus game execution unit. As the type of the privilege game to be executed, the first privilege game and the first privilege game are different from the first privilege game in the discrimination by the second discriminating means from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of a specific condition. A type determining means for determining one type of the privilege game out of a plurality including at least a second bonus game which is likely to be a specific determination result; and a first gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game is completed. And its Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the one game state, wherein the first privilege game and the second privilege game are The gaming machine I1 wherein the set ratio of the first gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state as a gaming state after the end of the privilege game.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that shifts to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous in that, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the gaming state given after winning is different, or the number of prize balls obtainable in each round is different. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The determination is performed by the two determination means. Based on the result of the specific determination by the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit. As the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first discrimination game and the discrimination by the second discrimination means from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of the specific condition, rather than the first bonus game. , The type of one privilege game is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least a second privilege game which is likely to be a specific determination result. As the game state after the bonus game has ended, one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state is set by the game state setting means. . In both the first bonus game and the second bonus game, the setting ratio of the second gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game has been completed.

  Thus, depending on whether the game is to be the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the possibility that the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit until the specific condition is satisfied, There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means.

  In the game I1, the type determining means may include a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to a player than the other privilege games. The third privilege game is determined by the second discriminating unit rather than by the first discriminating unit when the specific discrimination result is determined by the second discriminating unit rather than by the first discriminating unit. A gaming machine I2, wherein the ratio determined by the type determining means is high.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the type of one privilege game is a type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege games. Is determined by When the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the rate at which the third privilege game is determined by the type determination unit is higher than the determination by the first determination unit.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the rate of determining the disadvantageous third privilege game increases, and it is hoped that the specific determination result is not obtained by the determination by the second determination unit. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the first privilege game, rather than the second privilege game, which is likely to be a specific result of the determination by the second determination means.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first gaming state is determined by the first determining means or the probability that the specific determination result is obtained when the determination by the second determining means is executed is the second gaming state. The second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition from the end of the second bonus game to the satisfaction of the specific condition. A gaming machine I3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2. That is, the first game state is configured such that the probability of a specific determination result when the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit is performed is higher than that in the second game state. . From the end of the second bonus game to the satisfaction of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first determination condition.

  Accordingly, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result becomes higher than in the second gaming state, and thus it becomes easy to continuously enter the bonus game at relatively short intervals. Therefore, when the first game state is entered, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquisition means obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information is stored on the basis of the discrimination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. Erasing means for erasing the discrimination information of 1 from the discrimination information storage means, wherein the specific condition is that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means has become zero. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being established based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discriminating unit is obtained by the discrimination information obtaining unit based on the satisfaction of the predetermined obtaining condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the fact that the one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the one discrimination information is deleted from the discrimination information storage means by the deletion means. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means has become zero.

  As a result, until the information number of the discrimination information becomes 0, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is likely to be a specific discrimination result. Therefore, a game is performed by paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, a game ball fired in the first direction is fired in a first ball entry means arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means. Wherein the second determination condition is established based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and the second privilege game is a process in which the privilege game is started. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is easier for a player to shoot game balls in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period thereafter.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, the first ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter the ball. The first determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, while the second determination condition is determined that a game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is established based on. In the second privilege game, it is easier for the player to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

  Thus, when the second bonus game is established, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entry means by firing the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that a state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied after the end of the privilege game can be formed.

  In the gaming machine I5, a game ball fired in the first direction is disposed at a position where the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter can be changed. A variable ball entry means, a game ball emitted in the second direction is arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter; A second variable ball entry means, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, The gaming machine I6, wherein the two variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter at least during the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I5. That is, the first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which game balls can enter and a state in which game balls are difficult to enter is arranged at a position where game balls fired in the first direction can enter. Have been. At a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, a second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged. I have. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means. During the execution of the second scoring game, the second variable ball entry means is changed into a state in which the game ball can enter the ball for at least a predetermined period.

  Thereby, during a predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game, a player who wants to obtain a predetermined privilege can be caused to fire a game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be made to enter the second ball entry means during the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine I6, the first variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter at least during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game. Gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I6, the first variable ball entry means changes the state in which the game ball can enter the ball at least during a predetermined period during the execution of the first score game. Therefore, during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game, a player who wants to obtain a predetermined privilege can be caused to fire a game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the second ball entry means during a predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, Discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information obtaining means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and continuously firing game balls in the second direction during the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine I8 is a period of a length in which at least the predetermined number of pieces of the second discrimination information is obtained by the discrimination information obtaining means.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines I5 to I7. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discriminating means is acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The predetermined period is configured to have such a length that at least a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the discrimination information storage means when the game ball is continuously fired and displayed in the second direction.

  Thus, when the second bonus game is established, there is an effect that the discrimination information can be reliably stored in the discrimination information storage unit up to the upper limit number of information.

  In the gaming machine I8, a game ball fired in the second direction is sent to a first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means. A gaming machine I9 characterized by comprising a distribution means that can be distributed to either of the above.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I8, the game ball fired in the second direction is provided by the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Since it is distributed to one of the provided second flow paths by the distribution means, the game ball fired in the second direction enters the second ball introduction means with a bias, or conversely, the second ball enters. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from being biased into the variable ball entry means.

<Feature J group> (As the state of playing the game in the special 1, there are provided a state where time saving is easily given and a state where time saving is hard to be given)
A ball entry means into which game balls can enter, a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which game balls are more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, and a second variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. A variable control means for varying in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern; a determination means for performing a determination based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means; Based on at least the result of the specific determination in the determination, based on at least a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed. , The first game state and its Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state and a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state; The first game state and the second game state are those in which the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third game state. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that:

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Features JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the moment of the end of the winning state, the motivation of the player for the game is reduced, and the player is likely to quit the game. There was a problem.

  In particular, in a type of gaming machine that does not have a so-called probability variation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set via the time-saving gaming state. In such a case, since the player was able to play the game in the time saving game state, the player was satisfied with the game, and there was a possibility that it would be difficult to think that the player would continue the game in the normal game state thereafter.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, and the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is configured to be variable to the second position. The variable means, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, uses the variable control means to change the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for game balls to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. It is varied in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least. Based on at least a specific determination result obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit that is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, the bonus game execution unit executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. Is done. As the game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means, the first game state, the second game state different from the first game state, and both the first game state and the second game state One of a plurality of game states including at least different third game states is set by the game state setting means. The first gaming state and the second gaming state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third gaming state.

  Thus, it is difficult to distinguish from the first gaming state or the second gaming state based on the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are such that the probability of the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the probability that the first gaming state and the second gaming state will be a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the first game state and the second game state can be more difficult to be distinguished by the player.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, a second ball entry means different from the ball entry means, a second discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, A second privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on a result of the determination by the second determining means, wherein the first gaming state is determined by the second determining means. When the specific determination result is obtained in the determination, the third game state is set at a first ratio by the game state setting means, and the second game state is determined by the second determination means. A game machine J3 wherein the third game state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio by the game state setting means when the specific determination result is obtained. .

  According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, the discrimination is executed by the second discriminating unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entering unit different from the entering unit. The bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means based on the specific result of the determination by the second determination means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit in the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a first rate by the gaming state setting unit, while the second gaming state is set in the second gaming state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the third game state is set by the game state setting unit at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

  This makes it easier to set the third game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game in the second game state than in the first game state. There is an effect that a game can be played with a stronger expectation of becoming a game.

  In the gaming machine J3, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine J4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, when the bonus game is executed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is higher by the gaming state setting means than the first percentage by the third gaming state. In the third game state, the privilege game and the third game state are easily repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have great satisfaction in the third game state.

  In the gaming machine J4, in the second gaming state, a gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state based on at least a predetermined specific condition different from the specific determination result being satisfied. State transition means, wherein the third game state is one of the second game state and the third game state set by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine J5.

  According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J4. That is, in the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state shifting means based on at least a predetermined specific condition different from the specific determination result being satisfied. When the bonus game is executed in the third game state, one of the second game state and the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

  Thus, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state, the first game state is not set, and therefore, at least after the third game state ends, the first game state is set by the game state transition unit. Until the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, it is possible to cause the player to continue the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J5, the gaming state transition unit determines that the specific condition is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result continuously for a predetermined number of times in the determination by the determination unit, A gaming machine J6 for shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J5, the specific condition is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means has resulted in a different discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result continuously for a predetermined number of times. Since the game state shifting means shifts the game state from the second game state to the first game state, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the determination result of the miss. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the game state transition is performed based on the result of the disconnection determination over the first number of times determined by the determining means. The first state is shifted to the first game state by the means, and the second state is determined by the game state shifting means based on the result of the determination being made over a second number of times greater than the first number. A gaming machine J7 comprising type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type shifted to one gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J6, the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means has been determined to be out of the first number of times determined by the determining means. The first type that is shifted to the first game state by the game state transition means based on the first state, and the game state transition means based on the determination result that has deviated over the second number of times greater than the first number. Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type shifted to the first gaming state, it is determined that the second gaming state is continued over more determinations. Can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J7, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode and a first effect mode can be displayed on the display means when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The first effect mode is displayed from the time when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means to the time when the result of the disconnection determination is obtained for the second number of times. A gaming machine J8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J7. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means. The display of the first effect mode is restricted by the restricting means from when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means to when the result of the disconnection determination is obtained for the second number of times.

  With this, even if the result of the departure determination has been performed for the first number of times since the second game state was set, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times. It is difficult to identify whether the game is in one type of second game state or in the second type of second game state. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second gaming state, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued at least until the determination of the second number of times is executed, so that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine J8, the first effect mode is displayed based on the result of the disengagement determination being made for the second number of times after the second game state is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine J9 comprising display control means.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, the third display is performed based on the fact that the second game state has been set by the game state setting means and a disconnection determination result has been obtained for a second number of times. Since the first appearance appearance mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessively long period during which it is unclear whether the state is the first game state or the second game state.

  The gaming machine J10, wherein in any of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that a specific determination result in the second gaming state is obtained. There is an effect that it can be expected to be stronger.

<Characteristic K group> (Structure that makes it difficult for Special 2 to rotate during working hours)
A first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game balls including at least one of the following, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball into the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a position and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the variable operation of the variable means is transmitted to the ball entry means in the first game state. In the second control state, the game ball is controlled by the second control in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means. In the third game state, Game balls are easier to enter the ball entry means than the first control and the second control. 3 control controlled by variable control means gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises a and K1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Features JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the moment of the end of the winning state, the motivation of the player for the game is reduced, and the player is likely to quit the game. There was a problem.

  In particular, in a type of gaming machine that does not have a so-called probability variation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set via the time-saving gaming state. In such a case, since the player was able to play the game in the time saving game state, the player was satisfied with the game, and there was a possibility that it would be difficult to think that the player would continue the game in the normal game state thereafter.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first gaming state, the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. And a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the third gaming state. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means capable of entering the ball and a second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter the ball than the first position. I have. In the first game state, the variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball is transferred to the ball entry means in the second game state. Is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and is controlled by the variable control means in the third control in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means in the third game state.

  Accordingly, the degree of advantage is different between the first game state in which the control for making it difficult to enter the ball entry means is executed and the second game state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine K2 according to the gaming machine K1, wherein in the second control, the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second control is configured so that the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than the first control. Although the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control, there is an effect that a novel operation in which it is difficult to enter the ball entry means as in the first control can be realized.

  In the gaming machine K2, a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and a discriminating means for performing a discrimination based on the passing of the game ball by the passing means, the variable control means is provided by the discriminating means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result in the first game state. The first game state is determined by the determination by the determination means. The specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 1. The second gaming state and the third gaming state are determined by the determining unit at a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine K3 characterized by a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K2. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means. In the first gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at the first probability in the determination by the determining unit, while in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the second gaming state is higher than the first probability in the determination by the determining unit. A specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

  Thus, a novel operation can be realized in which the second game state and the third game state have different probabilities of entering the ball entry means even though the probability of a specific determination result is common. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine K3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball at a launch interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval is provided, and the second gaming state becomes the specific determination result by the determination by the determination means, and then the variable means A period until the variable position is changed to the first position is set as a first period, and a period from when the variable unit is changed to the first position until the variable position is changed to the second position is set as a second period. The period from when a game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period, and 1 The period from the passing of the game ball of the passing means to the game ball fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval next to the passed game ball reaches the variable means, Longer than the sum of one period and the second period Gaming machine K4, characterized in that those prone Ri.

  According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K3. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means at a firing interval longer than a predetermined interval. In the second game state, a period from when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set to the first period, and the variable unit is changed to the first position. The period from when the position is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passage means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passage means to when the game ball fired by the firing means at predetermined intervals next to the passed game ball reaches the variable means is a first period and a first period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

  Thereby, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the passage means in the second game state, the game ball reaches the ball entry means while the variable means is changed to the first position. Can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a special state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine K4, the third gaming state is such that a period from when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is longer than the first period. The third period is also set to be long, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set to the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A gaming machine K5 characterized by being shorter than the sum of

  According to the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K4. That is, in the third game state, a period from when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, A period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set as a second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passage means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and is the sum of the third period and the second period. It is easier to be shorter than this.

  With this, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination performed based on the passage through the passage unit, the game ball that has passed through the passage unit is directly entered into the ball entry unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be efficiently advanced.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, based on the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means and capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the ball entry means A first determination unit that performs a first determination, a second determination unit that performs a second determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit, and a first determination unit. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined first determination result obtained by the determination or the determination by the second determination means, The setting means sets the first ratio at a first rate as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination in the first game state. 3 Set a game state, and in the second game state, The third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination being determined. A gaming machine K6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5. That is, a first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the game ball having entered the ball entry unit. A second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit different from the ball entry unit. Based on the result of the first determination determined by the first determination unit or the first determination result determined by the second determination unit, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit. In the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a first rate by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second gaming state. Is set. In the second game state, the game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination. The third game state is set by the means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a game can be performed while strongly expecting a specific determination result during the second game state.

  In the gaming machine K6, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third gaming state. The gaming machine K7, wherein the third gaming state is determined at a third rate higher than the first rate.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K6, the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third gaming state. Since the third game state is determined by the game state setting means at a third rate higher than the first rate, in the third game state, the third game state is likely to be returned to after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a great satisfaction can be given to the player when the third game state is entered.

  In the gaming machine K7, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, since the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. There is an effect that a game can be performed with a stronger expectation.

<Characteristic L group> (a mechanism that can be played by a game method that is easily distributed to two routes by the distribution means and a game method that is easily distributed to one route)
Operating means operable by a player, firing means capable of firing game balls in accordance with the operation of the operating means, first flow paths through which game balls fired by the firing means can pass, While the first condition that can be satisfied by the operation of the first operation content being performed on the second flow path different from the one flow path and the operation means is satisfied, the game ball that has arrived is It becomes a state where it is easy to alternately distribute to the first flow path and the second flow path, and a second condition that can be satisfied by performing an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content is satisfied. Game machine L1 comprising: a distributing unit that makes it easier to distribute the reached game ball to the first flow path than while the first condition is satisfied.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member for distributing gaming balls to one of two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In such a conventional gaming machine, the configuration is such that game balls reaching the distribution member are distributed to two types of flow paths, one ball at a time, so that game balls can flow down to the two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-231902 A).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the game balls reaching the distribution member are alternately distributed to two types of flow paths regardless of the player's playing method, there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a game ball is fired by the firing means in accordance with the operation content on the operating means operable by the player. A first flow path through which a game ball fired by the firing means can pass, and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition, which can be satisfied by the operation of the first operation content being performed on the operation means, is satisfied, the state of the allocating means is such that the game ball that has reached the first flow path and the second flow path, It is in a state where it is easy to be alternately distributed to the flow path. While the second condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the second operation content different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the distribution unit is more than that while the first condition is satisfied. Also, the game ball that has arrived is easily distributed to the first flow path.

  Thereby, the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the allocating means can be changed according to the operation content of the player, so that the operation of the operating means can be devised.

  In the gaming machine L1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, a game ball is fired at a first firing interval by the firing means, and the operation of the second operation content is executed. A gaming machine L2 wherein the launching means launches a game ball at a second firing interval longer than the first firing interval.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired at the first firing interval by the firing means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at the second firing interval longer than the first firing interval. This makes it possible to easily change the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the allocating means simply by changing the firing intervals, thereby improving the convenience of the player.

  In the gaming machine L2, the allocating means includes at least a first movable range in which the reached gaming ball is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the reached game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path. The distributing means distributes a game ball to the first flow path in a state where the game ball is disposed in the first movable range, thereby distributing the second movable range. It is configured to be easy to move to the movable range and to be easily moved to the first movable range by distributing the game balls to the second flow path in a state where the game balls are arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L2. That is, the distributing means moves the specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the reached game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path. I do. By distributing the game balls to the first flow path in a state where the game balls are arranged in the first movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path in a state where the game balls are arranged in the second movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the first movable range.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the operation of alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path can be realized by continuously reaching the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine L3, the distributing means, when distributing a game ball to the first flow path and moving to the second movable range, is shorter than the length of the second firing interval, and The gaming machine L4, which moves to the first movable range for a period longer than the length of the firing interval of the game machine L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the distribution means is moved to the second movable range, the length is shorter than the length of the second firing interval. In addition, since the distribution means moves to the first movable range for a period longer than the length of the first firing interval, if the game ball is continuously fired at the firing interval longer than the second firing interval, There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be reliably set as the first movable range.

  In the gaming machine L4, the allocating means can be easily moved from the first movable range to the second movable range by the mass of the game ball distributed to the first flow path, and distributed to the second flow path. A gaming machine L5 characterized in that it is easy to move from the second movable range to the first movable range due to the mass of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, the mass of the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easy for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range, The mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths makes it easier for the distributing means to move from the second movable range to the first movable range, so that a power source for moving the distributing means can be eliminated. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine L4 or L5, the distribution means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range is an initial arrangement, and returns to the predetermined position when the game ball has not arrived for a predetermined period. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L4 or L5, the distributing means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range becomes an initial arrangement, and the game ball is used as the distributing means. On the other hand, since the distributing means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the predetermined period has not been reached, the distributing means is maintained in the first movable range unless the game balls are distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball that first reaches the distribution means can be surely distributed to the first flow path.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a passing means provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass, a game ball flowing down the first flow path, A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down a flow path can enter the ball, a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter the entry ball means, a determination means for performing a determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means, and the determination means A gaming machine L7 comprising: variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific result of the determination made by the game machine L7.

  According to the gaming machine L7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6. That is, the passage means is provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass. Ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path and game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter. The variable means can be configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. Have been. The determination by the determination unit is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing unit. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determination means, and thus has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine L7, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a player that is more advantageous than the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. And a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a third game state, wherein the variable control means sets a game state to the ball entry means in the first game state. In the first variable mode in which the ball is difficult to enter, the variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the second game state, the game ball is difficult to enter the ball-in means in the second variable mode. The variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third variable state, in the third variable state, a game ball is easier to enter the ball-in means than the first variable mode and the second variable mode. The variable means is controlled to be variable. Game machine L8 which is characterized the door.

  According to the gaming machine L8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L7. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. One of the plurality of game states including at least the game state is set by the game state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is changed in a first variable mode in which the game balls are hard to enter the ball entry means. In the second game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is changed in a second variable mode in which the game balls are hard to enter the ball entry means. In the third game state, the variable control means is controlled such that the variable means is changed in a third variable mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball-in means than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

  Thus, since a plurality of game states having different eases of entering the ball entry means are provided, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine L8, the first gaming state is a result of the specific determination at the first probability by the determining means, and the second gaming state is higher than the first probability by the determining means. A gaming machine, wherein the specific determination result is obtained at a high second probability, and the three game states are the specific determination result at the second probability by the determination means. L9.

  According to the gaming machine L9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L8. That is, in the first gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at the first probability by the determination unit. In the second gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at a second probability higher than the first probability by the determining means. In the third gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at the second probability by the determination means.

  This realizes a novel operation that makes it easy to enter the ball entry means differently in the second game state and the third game state even though the probability of a specific determination result is common. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic M group> (It is more advantageous to skip time savings)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based at least on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; One of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the execution of the bonus gaming by the bonus gaming executing means. A game state setting means for setting the game state of the first game state, and in a state where the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a specific transition condition at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game is satisfied. A game state transition unit that transitions from the first game state to the second game state based on the first game state.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Features JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal gaming state is set upon the end of the winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, in addition to the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, a configuration is provided in which a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the ordinary gaming state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state is provided. , After the end of the winning state, by configuring either the advantageous gaming state or the third gaming state to be set, so that the game is continued at least until the third gaming state is completed. There are things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when the lottery of a predetermined number of times is completed in the third gaming state, it is normal for the gaming machine to transition from the third gaming state to the normal gaming state. After that, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, based on at least the specific determination result obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit performed based on the establishment of the determination condition, the bonus game execution unit performs The game is executed. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, as a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means. The game state is set by the game state setting means. In the state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first gaming state is switched to the second gaming state based on a specific transition condition at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game being satisfied. It is shifted by the game state shifting means.

  This allows the player to play a game in the expectation that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the first game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine M1, the specific transition condition is a predetermined number of times, which is different from the specific determination result, determined by the determination unit executed after the setting in the first gaming state. A gaming machine M2, which is established when the following condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the discrimination by the discriminating means executed after the first gaming state has been set determines a predetermined number of times and a different discrimination result different from the specific determination result. When the result is satisfied, the specific transition condition is satisfied, so that in the first game state, it is possible to realize a novel playability that expects the result to be a departure determination every time the determination is performed by the determination unit. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, a ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball-in means, and the ball-in means from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball becomes difficult to enter, and a first variable control that makes the variable means easy to change to the first position in the first game state; A variable control execution means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position than in the first game state in the two game states, and Gaming machine M3, which is established based on that the game ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. In the first game state, the first variable control in which the variable means is easily changed to the first position is executed by the variable control execution means, and in the second game state, the variable means is changed to the first position more than in the first game state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control executing means. The determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the variable means being changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine M3, the gaming state setting means may include a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state. The variable control execution means sets the game state of the game ball more easily than the first variable control and the second variable control in the third game state. A gaming machine M4 for executing the following third variable control.

  According to the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M3. That is, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous than the second game state is set by the game state setting means. . In the third game state, the third control is executed by the variable control executing means, in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

  Thereby, in the third game state, the determination by the determination means is easily performed, and the game can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation of the third game state.

  In the gaming machine M4, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means determines the third gaming state at a first rate as a gaming state after the end of the privilege game. Is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate. Gaming machine M5.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, if a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the privilege game by the gaming state setting means. When the third game state is set in the second game state and a specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate. The third game state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the privilege game when a specific determination result is obtained in the game state. Therefore, in the first game state, there is an effect that a novel game property in which a game is played in expectation of a specific transition condition being satisfied, rather than a specific determination result, can be realized.

  In the gaming machine M5, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine M6 to be set.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M5, the gaming state setting means at the third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. Since the third game state is set, in the third game state, the third game state is likely to be set again after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have great satisfaction by entering the third game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, a ball entry area in which a game ball can enter, and a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the entry of the game ball into the entry area. And a gaming machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry area. The game can be played by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic N group> (Small hits are likely to be disadvantageous after the end of small hits if winning during the time reduction)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on a first discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. Means, and as the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. A type determining means for determining the type of the game, and a second determination result, which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game, based on a second determination result different from the first determination result determined by the determination means. (2) A second advantageous game executing means for executing an advantageous game, and a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means is defined as a first gaming state and the first gaming state. Is a different second game state, A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least one of the plurality of game states, and a determination result other than the second determination result obtained by the determination performed by the determination means executed in the first game state. A game state ending means for ending the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, wherein the specific condition is the first determination result by the determination by the determination means, In addition, when the first type is determined by the type determining unit, the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining unit, and when the second type is determined by the type determining unit. The gaming machine N1 is configured to be easily established.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hitting game or the like) executed based on a specific area (a winning switch or the like) provided in the V winning device. There has been proposed a pachinko machine capable of giving a privilege game (big hit game or the like) which is advantageous to a player by passing through the pachinko machine (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a small hit game is executed, a bonus game is not executed unless a game ball can be inserted into the V winning device. If the ball could not be entered, there was a risk that the player's interest in the game would be spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the first determination result is obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit that is performed based on the establishment of the determination condition is the first advantageous game. It is executed by the advantageous game execution means. As a type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type is determined by the type determining means. The type is determined. The second advantageous game execution means executes the second advantageous game which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on the fact that the second determination result different from the first determination result is obtained by the determination means. You. As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means, a game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. One game state is set by the state setting means. In the case where the discrimination performed by the discriminating means performed in the first gaming state indicates a result other than the second determination result, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is changed to the gaming state ending means. Is terminated by The first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the second type is determined by the type determination unit, as compared with the case where the first type is determined by the type determination unit. Is determined, the specific condition is more easily satisfied.

  Thereby, when the first determination result is obtained, there is an effect that a game can be played with expectation that the first type is determined.

  In the gaming machine N1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means may execute the first gaming state if the specific condition is satisfied. , The game machine N2 is configured to shift to the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1. That is, the second game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first game state. If the specific condition is satisfied, the game state ending means shifts from the first game state to the second game state.

  This allows the player to play the game in the first game state with expectation that the specific condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine N1 or N2 has a ball entry area in which game balls can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means sets a game in the entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the ball having entered, and the gaming state ending means performs the first number of times of the first type of the first advantageous game in one of the first gaming states. The first game state is terminated based on the execution, and the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number in the first game state. A gaming machine N3 for terminating the first gaming state based on the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N1 or N2. In other words, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game execution means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry area where the ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . In the first first gaming state, the first gaming state is terminated by the gaming state ending means based on the first type of the first advantageous game being executed the first number of times, while the first gaming state is terminated in the first first gaming state. The first gaming state is terminated by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the two types of first advantageous games have been executed a second number of times less than the first number of times.

  Thereby, during execution of the first advantageous game, it is possible to execute the second advantageous game by causing the game ball to enter the ball entry area or to establish the specific condition without entering the ball to the entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to select what to expect.

  In the gaming machine N3, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on that a gaming ball has entered the entering ball area during execution of the second type of the first advantageous game. A game machine N4 for determining the first game state as a game state after the end of the second advantageous game.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entry area during the execution of the second type of first advantageous game. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Predict more seriously and select whether to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or to expect the specific condition to be satisfied without entering the ball entry area. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N4, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on that a gaming ball has entered the entering ball area during execution of the first type of first advantageous game. A gaming machine N5 for setting the second gaming state as a gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entry area during the execution of the first type of first advantageous game. In this case, the game state setting means sets the second game state as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game. Therefore, if the first advantageous game is the first type, the ball is not made to enter the ball entry area. Therefore, the specific condition may be satisfied and the game may shift to the second game state. On the other hand, in the case of the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the ball entry area, and the second advantageous game is executed. It shifts to 2 game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be more seriously predicted.

  In the gaming machine N5, based on the result of the first determination by the determination means, a common specific effect is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine N6 comprising a specific effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5, based on the fact that the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means, regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means. Since the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, it is difficult to distinguish from the effect whether it is the first type or the second type. Therefore, it is possible to more seriously predict whether the type is the first type or the second type.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the gaming state setting means may include a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. And three game states, wherein at least one game state is set from among a plurality of game states, and the game state setting means performs a game after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. The third game state is set at a first rate as a state, and the second state higher than the first rate is set as a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the second game state ends. The gaming machine N7, wherein the third gaming state is set at a ratio of:

  According to the gaming machine N7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines N1 to N6. In other words, one of the plurality of game modes including at least a first game mode, a second game mode, and a third game mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first game mode and the second game mode is determined by the game mode setting means. A game state is set. While the third gaming state is set at a first rate by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state is completed, the gaming state is executed in the second gaming state. As the game state after the second advantageous game has ended, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a second rate higher than the first rate.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

  In the gaming machine N7, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a gaming state. A gaming machine N8 for setting three gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N7, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state to be higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Since the third game state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third game state is entered, the second advantageous game and the third game state are easily repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more satisfied when the third game state is entered.

  In the gaming machine N8, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N8, the second ratio tooth is configured to have a higher ratio than the third ratio. Is expected to be executed more strongly and the game can be performed.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko game machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
67 Through gate (passing means)
112 Launch control device (Launch means)
6400 Second entrance (entrance means)
6400a Electric accessory (variable means)
S611 determination means S623 variable control means S1323, S1324 game state setting means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some such gaming machine, in response to completion of state per are those advantageously degree is set to one of a plurality of different game state.

JP 2006-000392 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, and it is difficult to improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a specific direction can be reached, and a first state in which the game ball can enter and a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball. Also, based on the variable ball-in means configured to be variable to the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing of the game ball by the passing means. A first determination unit that performs a first determination, and based on a determination result of the first determination unit being a predetermined first determination result, the first determination unit starts executing the first determination. A first variable pattern in which the variable mode of the variable ball-in means is a first variable mode until the first determination can be newly performed, and the specific ball is fired in the specific direction more than the first variable mode. The second game ball that is difficult to reach the variable ball-in means in the first state. A variable control means for changing in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is variable by the variable ball-in means, and a game ball being entered in the variable ball-in means. A second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and a game at least based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination means being a predetermined second discrimination result. Game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous than the first game state, and the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state different from any of the state and the second game state, wherein the first game state and the second game state are provided. The state is the third game The variable ball input means is less likely to be changed in the first variable pattern by the variable control means than in the state, and the game ball reaching the variable ball input means in the second state is the variable ball input means. It passes through the ball means that is configured to easily flows down to the downstream side in the game board.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game ball fired in a specific direction is provided at a position where the game ball can reach, the first state in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball ingress than the first state. The first state is determined based on the variable ball-in means configured to be variable in the second state in which the ball becomes difficult, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball passing through the passing means. First determining means to be executed, and based on the fact that the determination result of the first determining means becomes a predetermined first determination result, the first determination is started after the first determination is started. A first variable pattern in which the variable mode of the variable ball-in means is a first variable mode until the ball can be newly executed, and a game ball fired in the specific direction more than the first variable mode. In the second variable mode, it is difficult to reach the variable ball-in means in the first state. A variable control means for varying in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern varied by the means, and the first determination based on a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means. A second discriminating means for executing a second discriminating process different from the first discriminating process, and a bonus game advantageous to the player based at least on the fact that the discriminating result of the second discriminating device becomes a predetermined second discriminating result. A first game state, a second game state more advantageous than the first game state, the first game state, and the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state different from the first game state, and the first game state and the second game state are the third game state. 3 above than the game state It is difficult for the control means to change the variable ball-in means in the first variable pattern, and the game ball reaching the variable ball-in means in the second state passes through the variable ball-in means. that it is configured to easily flows down to the downstream side in the game board.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line La-La in FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line Lb-Lb in FIG. (C) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. (A) is a rear view of a back cover body showing a state in which a switching member is operated so that a game ball is distributed to a special discharge channel, and (b) is a non-operating channel solenoid, and It is a rear view of the back cover body showing the state where the guidance piece of the switching member closed the opening face of the entrance of the discharge channel. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a display mode of a 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment which is displayed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a big hit displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a ball entering a second ball entrance during the big hit. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when a is detected. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a door-break mode effect performed at the start of the ending period after all rounds of jackpots are completed in the first embodiment, and (b). FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when a first door is broken through in a door-break mode effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of failing to break through the fourth door in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when all doors are successfully broken through in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening when shifting to the probability change mode, and (b) is the second holding ball of the second special symbol. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a display mode and a state of a specific winning opening when a normal winning mode is set and the normal mode is entered. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically. FIG. 3A is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a first hit type selection table set in a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating the main control according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the 2nd random number table set in ROM of the apparatus. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 1 departure (normal), and (d) is a figure showing a specification of a table for a special figure 1 departure (probable change). It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 2 big hit (4 fluctuations or less), and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 2 big hit (5 fluctuations or more). (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for a special figure 2 departure (four or less change), and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 departure (five or more change). FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a table. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating a state transition method according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. is there. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process performed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormal process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the small hit end performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed several command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an error command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a main control device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table set in a ROM of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the specified content of the 2nd random number table set in ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start-up processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows start-up process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process at the time of insertion performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a modification of the second embodiment in which the storage valve is in a protruding state (a state in which three balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve). FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a buried state in a modification of the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot opening displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in one round of the jackpot displayed by. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of one big hit round displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the interval after one round of big hits displayed on a display device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the third embodiment. (B) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regulation. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a release scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the main controller in the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a promotion effect lottery table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 7C is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows opening scenario selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 3 performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting processing 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows opening command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning command processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows closure command processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion effect lottery process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot opening and a leaching out of reach displayed on the third symbol display device in a modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st round of a big hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of form. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a change with time of the presentation mode in the case of a big hit in a modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a superimposition in a modification of the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation mode at the time of li-zhi. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a table of a special hit / after hit table in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the special hit-and-miss table | surface in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(d) is a figure which showed the operation | movement content of the distribution member in 5th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the correspondence between the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door of the V winning device and the switching of the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the V winning device is guided is schematically shown. FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode with the highest expectation of the pull-back mode, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the expectation degree of the pull-back mode is medium, which is displayed on the three-symbol display device. It is a figure showing the example of the display mode with the lowest expectation of the pullback mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the fifth embodiment. (B) is a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the main control according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hitting type selection table set to ROM of the apparatus, (c) shows the specification of the time reduction number selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to a fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the specified content of the table for special figure 2 per drawing, and (c) is for special figure 2 departure (normal and pullback) set in ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content of the table typically, (d) has shown typically the regulation content of the special figure 2 departure (rensou) table set in ROM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the main control according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the device. It is the figure which showed typically the mode transition method in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is an expectation degree selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regulation. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage detection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of winning a small hit in the normal mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the sixth embodiment. (B) is a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content, and (c) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hit type selection table set in ROM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the main control device in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving number selection table set in a ROM of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the specified content of the small hit specified frequency selection table set in ROM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the mode transition method in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a rank-up lottery table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regulation. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time savings number update process 6 performed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the back surface setting process after completion | finish performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree update process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to incline downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in response to the change, so that the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is described above. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 or another control device may detect a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a. May be configured to detect that the player has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the sorting member 660, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (starting port or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70, and a shot ball is formed. Area that flows down). The game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball is normally inserted. When passing through 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until seven balls are won). ) It is released and the release is repeated the number of times (round number) according to the type of jackpot. As a result, a large number of balls win in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are six types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" to "Big Jackpot F". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to the result of the jackpot game (Game value) is given to the player. Note that the three types of “big hits A to C” are big hit types that can be determined when a lottery executed in response to the ball entering the first entrance 64 becomes a big hit. The three types of "big hits D to F" are big hit types that can be determined in the event of a big hit in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball will be referred to as the second symbol lottery. A special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the ball opening 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result is obtained. Is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed. Then, the variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball in the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit. Normally, when the symbol hits, the first ball entry port 64 is changed to the open position by the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 being changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). Be released. In addition, since the electric accessory 64a is normally disposed at the closed position, the right side and the left side of the first entrance 64 in a front view are closed. Therefore, the ball that has rolled from the right and left sides of the front view toward the first entrance 64 cannot enter the first entrance 64 by being blocked by the electric accessory 64 a (difficult). ). Therefore, in normal times, basically only the ball that has flowed downward from above vertically in the first ball entry port 64 into the first ball entry port 64 can enter the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, in the case of a normal symbol hit, the ball rolled from the right and left sides in front view toward the first entrance 64 is opened by opening the electric accessory 64a. It is easy to enter the ball, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is performed. Be started.

  As described above, six types of special symbols such as "big hit A" to "big hit F" are provided.

When the "big hit A" and the "big hit D" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 round big hits), and when it becomes "big hit C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 2 rounds, and when it becomes "big hit E", When the number of rounds reaches the special gaming state of seven rounds (seven rounds big hit), and when it becomes "big hit F", the number of rounds becomes the special gaming state of six rounds (six rounds big hit). Furthermore, when the specific condition is satisfied during each of the above jackpot games (when the ball that has entered the variable prize device 65 passes through the later-described variable switch 65e3), the special symbol high probability state (special The pattern is changing). Also, if the special symbol high probability state is given,
The winning probability of the normal symbol is also increased (the normal symbol time saving state is given). The high probability state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continue from the end of the big hit until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the big hit game), the special symbol becomes the low probability state until the next big hit, and the normal symbol hits The probability also becomes the normal probability (it becomes the normal state of the ordinary symbol).

  Here, the “special symbol high probability state” refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, a so-called “special symbol high probability state” (special symbol change state), in other words, the special game state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-saving state” (normal symbol high-probability state) refers to a gaming state in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not the “normal pattern time reduction state”, it is called “normal pattern normal state” (normal pattern low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is in the normal state, that is, during normal time reduction. Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probable change period. In addition, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol time reduction period.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot differs according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the “special change state of the special symbol” and the “time reduction state of the ordinary symbol” given after the big hit are configured to continue until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the “special change state of the special symbol” and the “time saving state of the ordinary symbol” are limited until the number of special symbol lotteries is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lotteries to be in the “special symbol change state” and the number of lotteries to be in the “normal symbol time reduction state” may be different. Further, the number of lotteries may be varied according to the type of the jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “normal state of the ordinary symbol”. Then, when the ball becomes a jackpot and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it shifts from the “low probability state of the special symbol” to the “special variation state of the special symbol” and from the “normal state of the ordinary symbol” It shifts to "normal symbol time saving state". In this case, the set “special change state of the special symbol” and the “time saving state of the ordinary symbol” continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the ball has never passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at one jackpot, the state shifts to the "low probability state of special symbol" and the "normal state of normal symbol". Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when "big hits A to D" are reached, the ball easily passes through the positive change switch 65e3 during the big hit, and when "big hits E and F" are reached, the ball becomes the big hit. It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes one of "big hits A to C". Therefore, there is a high possibility that after the end of the jackpot, the "special symbol change state" and the "normal symbol time reduction state" will occur. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it becomes one of "big hit D to F". Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the rate of "big hit D" in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 5%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot becomes “big jackpot E, F” with a high probability (95% ratio), and the “low probability state of the special symbol” which is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot is finished. And "normal state of the ordinary pattern". Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), is being executed, by changing a lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. The number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) is the number of retained balls, which is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is entered. The number of times is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) can be realized with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (a special symbol corresponding to the jackpot A to F) when the jackpot is a jackpot. (1st symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change the display of the special symbol (first symbol). Be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. In addition, you may make it comprise the 3rd symbol display device 81 using a reel etc. instead of a display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 7B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured to imitate a number from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and about 4/5 of the upper portion is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower one-fifth is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls, a notice character, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol stops on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (0.5 seconds or more), it is determined whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is Oversight of whether or not it is a jackpot) can be suppressed. In addition, if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  Further, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered. Furthermore, when both a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol exist, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially performed. Be executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed is continued thereafter. This state is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), there is rarely a situation where there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all because the player quit the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is a ball whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of (reserved balls), is displayed by the number of reserved symbols indicating each reserved ball.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right and left sides of the front view, respectively. The reserved symbol displayed on the right side in front view is a reserved symbol (first reserved symbol) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol, and the reserved symbol displayed on the right side in front view corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a holding symbol (second holding symbol). FIG. 7B exemplifies a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank). I have.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball which enters into the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640 each may be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is four. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 displays a variation by displaying whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed as a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, by a lighting state, or performs a variation display. As a stopped symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through one of the left and right normal entrances 67, a symbol "O" as a symbol (second symbol) and a symbol "X" A fluctuating display in which symbols and symbols are turned on alternately is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 turns on the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened), and as a result, a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and also the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of balls passing through the normal entrance 67 is not more than three, or The number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters. The first entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electrically-powered objects 64a that can be opened and closed on each of the left and right sides, and when the electrically-operated accessory 64a is in an open state, vertically above the first entrance 64. In addition to the ball that has flowed down from the ball, a ball that has flowed down from the left and right directions can enter. It should be noted that the first ball entry port 64 is a ball (ball hit left) flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is in the open state. The nails and the like are arranged such that the ball is easier to enter than the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (ball hit right).

  A second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed on the upper right side of the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically, the ball that flows down the flow path provided to the right of the variable display unit 80. However, it becomes easier to enter a ball than a ball flowing down a flow path provided to the left of the variable display device unit 80.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the second entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until seven balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1, which normally closes the specific winning opening 65a, is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The specific winning opening 65a and the second entrance 640 are at positions where a ball (a right-hit ball) flowing down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 can enter (easily enter the ball). Are located in In other words, the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is located at a position where the ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of the prize ball during the jackpot (obtain a profit), the player only has to hit the ball right.

  Inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which the ball can pass are provided (see FIGS. 6A and 6B). The ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a positive change switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (a positive change state) of a special symbol after a big hit by passing a ball. This special discharge channel 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the jackpot. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds). (Big hits A to D) and a big hit (big hits E and F) where it is difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds at the maximum) are provided. .

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65 b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and on the back side of the opening forming member 65 b to form the variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has an LED board 65d disposed, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. Opening / closing unit 65f, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, a back cover body 65e and a flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, and a rear surface disposed on the rear side of the flow channel cover body 65g. A cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the rear side of the rear cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the rear side with a screw to the rear cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the variable winning device 65 has a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward and leftward so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side, and a non-entry state. The state is changed to a possible (closed to ball) closed state. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With such a configuration, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in an open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the specific winning ports. 65a can be awarded. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted, and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the passage cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the flow path cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. You. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by the positive change switch 65e3, which is configured by a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 and that can detect the passage of the game ball, to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is discharged.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit game is changed to the special symbol stable state ( Game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state or a probable-variable gaming state.

  As described above, since the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the jackpot, and the switching member 65h operates at a position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is opened at the same time as the start of the first round of the jackpot. At the same time as the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates to the position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 0.2 seconds. I have. As described above, in the jackpots E and F, since the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds at the maximum, unless the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened. Before the ball flows into the special discharge channel 65e2, the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2. For this reason, when the big hits E and F occur, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 during one big hit.

  Next, a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h, and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1, there is provided a ball discharge port switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the positive change switch 65e3. Therefore, when a problem such as clogging of the ball occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be found early.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (in this embodiment, 11 balls per one ball winning). Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the probability change switch 65e3, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a special winning port for giving a certain-variable gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A substantially semicircular distribution member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65 in a front view. The distributing member 660 has receiving portions on its left and right sides that can receive a ball flowing down from above. The distributing member 660 has two arrangements: the arrangement in which the right receiving part is located immediately below the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 and the arrangement in which the left receiving part is located immediately below the flow path. There can be a street arrangement. FIG. 2 exemplifies an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is located immediately below the flow path.

  In a state where the right receiving portion is disposed immediately below the flow path and the ball flowing down the flow channel is received by the right receiving portion, the distribution member 660 is moved by the weight of the ball. As a result of the clockwise rotation, the left receiving portion is disposed immediately below the flow path. In addition, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down to the lower right direction of the distribution member 660. The ball that has flowed downward and to the right of the distribution member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the ball that has flowed down the flow channel is received by the left receiving portion in a state where the left receiving portion is disposed immediately below the flow channel, the distribution member 660 is moved by the weight of the ball. As a result of the rotation in the counterclockwise direction, the receiving portion on the right side is arranged immediately below the flow path. In addition, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows downward in the lower left direction of the distribution member 660. The ball that has flowed down and to the lower left of the distribution member 660 flows down the second ball entrance 640 along the flow path, and about 80% of the ball flows into the second ball entrance 640.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the sphere (the right-hit sphere) launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is directed to the variable prize device 65 by the distribution member 660. And the direction of the second entrance 640. For this reason, in the special game state (big hit), when the ball is hit right in order to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a and obtain a prize ball, the ball is moved to the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Enter a lot of balls. As a result, in most cases, at the end of the big hit, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated to a value (four).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) in which the ball hardly passes through the probability change switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. Each of the jackpots E and F has an extremely short opening time (0.2 seconds) of the specific winning opening 65a in each round, and it is difficult to make a ball enter the jackpot. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, with a high probability (95%), almost no prize balls can be acquired, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol as much as possible because the lottery of the second special symbol is an undesirable lottery.

  However, as described above, if the player hits the ball to the specific winning opening 65a at the jackpot and makes a right hit to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second entrance 640, so that at least the jackpot After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol held during the jackpot is executed. Therefore, after the jackpot, a novel game can be realized in which a game is performed in the hope that the lottery of the special symbol will not become a jackpot until the reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol disappears. If all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are out of order as expected by the player, the player can perform only the lottery of the first special symbol by performing left-handing. The game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held until a type of jackpot (jackpots A to C) which is relatively advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, one prize ball is awarded when one ball enters the second entrance 640. When right-handed, one ball is distributed to two balls by the distribution member 660 in the direction of the second entrance 640, so that all the balls distributed in the direction of the second entrance 640 are the second balls. Even if the ball enters the entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by right-handed is paid out by the prize ball. Therefore, when the player makes a right-handed hit, the number of balls held tends to decrease, and the merit of making a right-handed shot can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in a normal state (a state other than during a big hit).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed after the big hit is completed, it becomes disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are removed. Is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the predetermined number of times (four times) of the lottery results after the end of the jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win any of the winning ports is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic effect of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, which is performed in the main display area Dm, with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player hits the right at the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, the ball enters the second entrance 640, and the second special symbol is obtained until the jackpot ends. Is configured to reach the upper limit number. If the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, during the execution of the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the player plays a game in the hope that the lottery will be lost. In the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not a lottery result of a second special symbol jackpot has been included in the retained balls until all the variable displays based on the retained balls of the second special symbol are completed. Is performed.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B, an effect performed during a big hit will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode during a big hit. As shown in FIG. 8A, during the jackpot, an effect in which the adventurer 811 searches for a cave is displayed. On the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally long display area HR1 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed. The current round number is displayed in the display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 8A, the character "1 round" is displayed, indicating that the current round is the first round.

  On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally long display area HR2 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed. In the display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8A, the characters “GET 0022” are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, two balls have been specified since the start of the jackpot). The ball has entered the winning opening 65a).

  On the right side of the third symbol display device 81, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed. Although details will be described later, the four display areas HR3a to HR3d indicate the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol which has been increased by the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit. The image is displayed. In addition, as described above, it is more likely that a result of a lottery in the second special symbol lottery will be a preferable result for the player than a big hit, so that the display areas HR3a to HR3d include An image showing the degree of expectation is displayed.

  Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a state in which there is no pending ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is provided with a symbol “?”. The image is displayed.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during a big hit. As shown in FIG. 8B, when a ball entry to the second entrance 640 is detected during a big hit, an effect is performed in which the adventurer 811 finds the treasure chest 812. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the mode of the key 813 indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol held based on the incoming ball will be lost. The more luxurious the key 813 is, the higher the expected degree of deviation is, and the poorer the mode is, the lower the expected degree of deviation is (the risk of winning in the second special symbol lottery increases).

  FIG. 8B illustrates a case where a key 813 in a normal mode is displayed. When the effect that the adventurer 811 finds the key 813 is performed, a key having the same aspect as the discovered aspect is displayed on the upper side of the display area in which “?” Is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. They are displayed in order from the area. The example of FIG. 8B illustrates a case where an image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a among the display areas where the symbol “?” Is displayed. As described above, by displaying the mode of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, the variable display based on each reserved ball executed after the current big hit is completed. Can be checked at any time by the player. Therefore, the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the main display area Dm is provided with the exclusive display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol. However, the exclusive display is not always required. There is no need to provide an area. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved symbol of the second special symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds is displayed in the form of a key discovered by the adventurer 811.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode at the time of starting an ending effect after all rounds of the jackpot have been completed. In the first embodiment, the jackpots E and E are stored in the reserved balls of the second special symbol from the ending period of the jackpot to the change time of all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol. An effect is executed to notify the player whether or not F exists. That is, even after all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol have been completed, it is suggested whether or not the gaming state is still “the probable change state of the special symbol” and “the time saving state of the ordinary symbol”. The effect for is performed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “special symbol change state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” that are game states that are advantageous to the player are referred to as “probable change mode” and are disadvantageous to the player. The “special symbol low-probability state” and the “normal symbol normal state”, which are the most important game states, are referred to as “normal mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot ending period starts, an effect is performed in which the adventurer 811 finds the door 814. Above the image of the door 814, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR4 is formed. In this display area HR4, the characters "Starting through the doors! Start through the four doors!" Are displayed. With these display contents, if four doors can be opened using four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the jackpot, it is advantageous for the player (the holding ball of the second special symbol). That the probable change mode continues even after the game is digested). In the upper left display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, an image of a left-pointing arrow and a character “left” are displayed. With these displays, the ball can be launched by the player in the left direction (the ball can be launched into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  The reason why the left-handing is notified at the start of the ending period is to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed after the end of the big hit. That is, during the ending period, the ball fired by right-handed by the player is changed to the second entrance 640 after the end of the jackpot (and after the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started). To prevent the number of lotteries of the second special symbol from increasing after the jackpot (the lottery of the second special symbol is executed beyond the four times held during the big hit) (Suppression). As described above, even if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, a prize ball can hardly be obtained during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a disadvantageous normal mode for the player. Therefore, as the number of lotteries of the second special symbol increases, it becomes disadvantageous for the player. For this reason, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit the right after the jackpot and to prevent the ball from newly entering the second entrance 640, the game is executed during the ending period. It is configured to notify left-handed to the person. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit can be limited to the one by the reserved ball of the second special symbol held during the big hit, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  When the big hit (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, as shown in FIG. 9B, an effect of breaking through the door 814 using the keys collected during the big hit is executed. FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through the door 814 using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image in which the door 814 is opened is displayed, and the character “Breakthrough !!” is displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the player breaks through the remaining three doors, the player will be in an advantageous state (it will be in the probable change mode).

  The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect of the adventurer 811 opening (breaking through) the first door using the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) is based on the first reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the variable display based on the second reserved ball. Similarly, the effect in which the adventurer 811 opens the second door using the second key is the third display after the variable display based on the second holding ball of the second special symbol is started. This is executed in a period until the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball is started. The effect that the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is that the variation display based on the third holding ball of the second special symbol is started and then the fourth holding ball is displayed. This is executed in a period until the fluctuation display based on the start is performed. The effect of using the fourth key to open the fourth door is executed during the variable display time based on the fourth holding ball of the second special symbol. In addition, these are the operations in the case where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the departure, and if a large hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, the door breaks through during the period of the big hit. The effect is performed one or more times.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to detect whether or not the second special symbol jackpot has been obtained from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. Thus, when the second special symbol comes off, the coming-off (so-called small hit) accompanied by the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined. Then, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 (0.2 seconds) in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 of each round in the case of the big hits E and F in the lottery of the second special symbol. Are matched. Furthermore, when the big hits E and F occur, the interval period between the rounds is set to be equal to the fluctuation time (1 second) when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost. With such a configuration, even when the jackpot E or the jackpot F is obtained during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol, the present is already the jackpot from the opening period and the opening interval of the opening / closing door 65f1. It can be difficult to determine whether or not. Thereby, a series of effects (door breakthrough mode effects) executed at the start of the ending period can be focused on to the end.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in a case where it has failed to break through the fourth door in the door breaking mode effect. That is, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where one of the jackpots E and F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the characters “failure...” Are displayed in the display area HR4, and the adventurer 811 possesses The effect of breaking the key is performed. With these display modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the probable change mode has ended (the one of the jackpots E and F has been won).

  FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the fourth door has been successfully breached in the door breach mode effect. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and characters "great success !!" and characters "entering probable change mode!" Are displayed in display region HR4. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the player can play the game in the advantageous variable mode.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the above-described door breakthrough is performed from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol increased during the jackpot. It is configured to execute a mode effect. By this door breakthrough mode effect, all the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is lost, and it is possible to play the game in the probable change mode. It can be suggested to the player whether or not the player will fall into the normal mode without performing the lottery of the first special symbol. With a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and the plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the game after all the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is finished depending on whether or not the number of doors according to the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be broken through. Although it has been configured to notify whether or not the state is the probability change mode, the effect form is not limited to this. In the end, any one of the two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation, or departure, etc.) may be provided, and for example, the adventurer 811 may be set to the enemy and the enemy. A configuration may be adopted in which the probable change mode is notified if a battle is won and an enemy is won.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between a temporal change of the effect mode during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and a temporal change of the state of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing state of the opening / closing door 65f1). FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the probability change mode is notified (that is, a lottery result in which all the reserved balls of the second special symbol correspond to the loss). On the other hand, FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship when the normal mode is notified (that is, when any of the jackpots E and F is included in the hold).

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when it is notified that the mode has shifted to the probable change mode (when all the lotteries of the second special symbol are out of order), the start screen of the door-break mode effect is displayed together with the start of the ending period. FIG. 9A is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed during the ending period of one second, and ends when the ending period ends and the jackpot ends. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (reserved 1) of the second special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (FIG. 9 (b) ) Is started. This effect is continued until the start timing of the change based on the second hold ball (hold 2). In addition, as described above, when a lottery is lost in the second special symbol lottery, it is almost a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the fluctuation display for one second based on the hold 1 ends, the small hit is started, and the door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is displayed that the door has been successfully breached.

  Thereafter, similarly, the fluctuation display for one second and the opening of the open / close door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small hit are repeated. In accordance with this, an effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the doors could be broken through during each opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1. . As described above, the result of whether or not the door can be breached is notified during the opening period of the small hit after the fluctuation time has elapsed, so that the door can be breached for the fluctuation period of one second. Expectations can be further increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect during the opening period of the small hit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the hit has already been made from the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 65f1. it can.

  In the effect of breaking through the fourth door, after the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and is notified of the shift to the probability change mode (after the fourth small hit is completed), a dedicated display mode of the probability change mode (Not shown) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the mode has shifted to the probable change mode.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is the big hit F. In this case, in the door-breaking-mode effect, when the transition to the normal mode is notified (when either the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol), the ending period is also set. With the start of, the door break mode production is started. When the big hit ends and the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the change of the special symbol based on the first holding ball, an effect of trying to break through the first door is performed, and the opening period of the small hit is performed. , The adventurer 811 breaks through the first door.

  When the variation display of the special symbol based on the second holding ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the fluctuation display for one second is executed based on the second holding ball, and the big hit F is started after the elapse of one second. When the big hit F occurs and the first round is started, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is notified that the adventurer 811 has succeeded in breaking through the door. At the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, an effect of trying to break through the third door is executed, and the opening period of the second round after the elapse of the one second interval period (0.2 (Seconds), it is reported that the third door has been successfully breached.

  Further, when the interval period after the end of the second round is started, an effect of trying to break through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round (0. During 2 seconds), it is notified that the fourth door could not be broken through (see FIG. 10A).

  After being notified that the door has failed to break through, a result display (not shown) indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the current probability change mode is executed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot is completed, the display mode is set to the exclusive display mode in the normal mode.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit, the time of the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the variable display and the small hit are repeated is shown. The change (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the time-dependent change in the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the jackpot E or F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol (see FIG. 11 (b)) are at least. It is configured to match until the end of the door break mode effect. That is, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of the big hits E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the small hitting open period. Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F is completed is set to 1 second which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, even if any of the first to fourth retained balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door break mode effect is finished. The operation of the door 65f1 can be the same as the case where the probable change mode is notified (see FIG. 11A). Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not the big hit E or F has occurred from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1, so that attention can be paid to the door breaking mode effect to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, FIG. 11B illustrates an example in which, even when the second holding ball becomes a jackpot F (falls to the normal mode), the third door is broken through and the fourth door fails. However, it may be configured such that an effect of failing to break through the door is executed simply when any of the jackpots E and F is changed while the holding ball of the second special symbol is being digested.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time an update is performed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first input area. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball opening 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter is set. If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability (a special symbol). And the number of large random numbers included in each of them are set differently (see FIG. 13B). In this way, by making the number of random numbers which are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is updated. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol big hit, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit indicates the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are four random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 3” are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 13B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 4, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/100”. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. On the other hand, random numbers other than the above-mentioned jackpot random numbers correspond to outliers. As described above, the deviation of the special symbol includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 13B, at the time of the low probability of the special symbol, the number of random numbers that are lost in the lottery of the first special symbol is 396 "4 to 399". On the other hand, the random numbers that are lost in the second special symbol lottery are 37 “3 to 40”, and the random numbers that are small hits in the second special symbol lottery are “41 to 399”. There are 359.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 40 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 39” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. FIG. 13A). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 40 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 40, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “1/10”. Also, when the special symbol has a high probability, 360 random numbers “40 to 399” are lost in the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, only "40" is specified as the random number value which is lost in the second special symbol lottery, and the random number value which is a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 359 of "41-399". Individuals are specified.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9” is “big hit A” ( 16 rounds with a big hit). When the value is “10-89”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot B” (five rounds probability variable jackpot), and when the value is “90-99”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot C”. (2 round probability change jackpot).

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, the big hit type is “big hit D” (16 round positive change big hit). When the value is “5-49”, the jackpot type is “big hit E” (7 rounds normal jackpot), and when the value is “50-99”, the jackpot type is “big hit F”. (6 rounds regular jackpot).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that six types of hits (big hits A to F) are determined by the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Have been. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the special change state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In other words, even if the jackpot type is determined, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the probability change state. The “probable jackpot” described above means a jackpot of a type in which a ball easily passes through the probable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and a “normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot of a type in which the ball is difficult to pass through the probable switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Means

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball has entered the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a large-hit table is provided for a high-probability state in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 89, so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely deviated” is easily selected. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” and “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a narrow low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and rear out of range” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 32) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15A) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 15A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol 202d1 per special figure 1 (see FIG. 15B). In addition, at least a table 202d2 for deviating from the special figure 1 (normal) (see FIG. 15C) and a table 202d3 for deviating from the special figure 1 (probable change) (see FIG. 15D) are defined at least. Further, as tables for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 for each special figure 2 (four or less fluctuation) (see FIG. 16A) and a table for each special figure 2 (five or more fluctuation) ) Table 202d5 (see FIG. 16 (b)), special figure 2 departure (four or less change) table 202d6 (see FIG. 16 (c)), and special figure 2 departure (five or more change) table 202d7 (see FIG. 16 (c)). 16 (d)) at least.

  First, with reference to FIG. 15B, the table for special figure 1 per table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 table 202d1. The special figure 1 per table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. Each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special figure per hit table 202d1.

  Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with a fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “180 to 198”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which a special symbol lottery result is a big hit. It is selected from the special table 1 per table 202d1.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short and a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the outreach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 149” and various super reachs are out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) are set in “198”.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol variation state. In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by a stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach (reach in front and rear, reach other than out-of-front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for each special figure 2 (four or less fluctuation). This special figure 2 per (four or less fluctuation) table 202d4 is selected when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is four or less after the big hit is completed, and when the special special lottery is a lottery. 4 is a data table in which the types (variation times) of the variation patterns to be performed are specified. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbol changes is four or less, the fluctuation pattern is a short-period fluctuation per one second regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Selected.

  FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the table 202d5 for each special figure 2 (five or more fluctuations). This special figure 2 winning (more than 5 fluctuations) table 202d5 is selected when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the big hit is completed, and when the big winning is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol. 4 is a data table in which the types (variation times) of the variation patterns to be performed are specified. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), after the big hit, if the number of times of the change of the special symbol is 5 or more, regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, the change pattern has a long change of 300 seconds per change time. Selected.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure (four or less change) table 202d6. This special figure 2 departure (four or less change) table 202d6 indicates that after the big hit is completed, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is four or less, and the special pattern is deviated by lottery (including small hits). 9 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the data pattern becomes invalid. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), if the number of times the special symbol changes after the big hit is four or less, a short-time change with a change time of 1 second as a change pattern is performed regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Selected.

  FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure (five or more change) table 202d7. The table 202d7 for special figure 2 (five or more fluctuations) is out of the special symbol lottery (including small hits) when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is five or more after the big hit is completed. It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in the case is specified. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), if the number of times the special symbol changes after the big hit is 5 or more, a long change with a change time of 300 seconds as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Selected.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of times of performing the special symbol variable display is four or less after the big hit, the lottery result is deviated (small hit). ) Or a jackpot, the variation time is always set to one second. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not one of the big hits E or F is obtained from the change time during the execution of the change display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether or not the game state after the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is all in the probability change mode. Therefore, a player who wants to know whether or not to enter the probability change mode can be caused to play a game by paying more attention to the result of the door-break mode effect, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol is 5 or more, as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. The configuration is such that 300 seconds is always set. Thus, if the player makes a right hit in a state other than during the big hit, it is possible to attain a state in which the special symbol lottery is executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) at the minimum (very low game efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from right-handing in a state other than during the big hit. If the player hits right during a state other than during the jackpot, particularly during the probability change mode, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Very likely to be. That is, it is highly possible that a prize ball can hardly be obtained, and that a jackpot falls into the normal mode after the jackpot. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied with the game because the normal mode is set to be disadvantageous while the game in the advantageous probability change mode cannot be sufficiently enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the game efficiency in the case where the right hit is performed in a state other than during the big hit is deteriorated, so that it is possible to suppress the player from right-handing in the state other than the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to more enjoy the game in the probability change mode.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number which is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in a normal state of a normal symbol) and for a high probability of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability (a symbol of a normal symbol). And the number of jackpot random numbers included therein are set differently (see FIG. 14B). In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are hits of the ordinary symbol, and the values are "5 to 28". As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240 out of the total number of the random numbers, and the total number of the random number of the jackpot is 24. Therefore, the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. As a symbol, a symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 64a is opened “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random numbers, and thus the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  If the ball passes the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened “1 second × 3 times”. Is done. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, such as “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, as compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. Since it is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is opened only for “1 second × 3 times” when the normal symbol hits. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. 10, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, and I / Os. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 36), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 35). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to NMI, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, at least a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored as part of the fixed value data. ing.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 3” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 13B), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out of range. "4-399" is defined as a range of the judgment value to be determined (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B). In addition, “3 to 40” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 13B). In the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol, “0 to 39” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a4 in FIG. 13B). “40 to 399” is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B). In addition, “40” is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol has been removed (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B), and “41 to 399” is determined as the determination value for determining the small hit of the second special symbol. (See 202a6 in FIG. 13B). When the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the winning start matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big hit defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B). Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, “big hit A” is defined in association with the first special symbol in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 9”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 14A). The “big hit A” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit A", so if a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit A" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit A" is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, in each round, the upper limit number (seven) of balls can be almost certainly won to the specific winning opening 65a before the elapse of 30 seconds just by continuing to make a right hit. When the jackpot A is reached, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. Also, in one round in which the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, if the player keeps right-handing, the ball almost certainly passes through the positive change switch 65e3. Therefore, after the "big hit A" ends, the probable change mode is almost certainly achieved. As described above, the “big hit A” is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the big hit is set to the certainty change mode.

  For the first special symbol, “big hit B” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 89” (see 202b2 in FIG. 14A). . The “big hit B” is a big hit with five rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B" is 80, so "big hit B" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 80% (80/100). Like the “big hit A”, the “big hit B” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. In the first round of the jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly set after the end of the "big hit B". As described above, since the “big hit B” has a smaller number of rounds than the “big hit A” (and “big hit D” described later), the prize balls that can be obtained are smaller than the “big hit A” (and “big hit D”). However, many prize balls can be paid out. In addition, since the gaming state after the big hit is in the probability change mode, the game state shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the big hit as in “big hit A”.

  For the first special symbol, “big hit C” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit C” is a big hit with two rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit C" is 10, and therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). Like the “big hit A” and the “big hit B”, the “big hit C” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” or “big hit B”. Also, in the first round of the jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly achieved after the "big hit C" ends. As described above, since the “big hit C” has the smallest number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is small, but the prize balls can be paid out, so that the number of balls held by the player can be increased. In addition, since the gaming state after the jackpot is the probable change mode, the game state shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot, as in the case of the "big hit A" and the "big hit B".

  In this way, when the first special symbol lottery wins, a prize ball can be paid out for 2 to 16 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big win is almost certainly in the probability change mode. Regardless of the type of jackpot, it is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), for the second special symbol, the "big hit D" is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 14A). This "big hit D" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit D". Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. Is 5% (5/100). Since the “big hit D” has the same operation as the “big hit A”, it is the most advantageous big hit type for the player like the “big hit A”.

  For the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5-49" (see 202b5 in FIG. 14A). . This "big hit E" is a big hit with seven rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit E" is 45, so "big hit E" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 45% (45/100). The "big hit E" is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 0.2 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, it is difficult even for one ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a in each round, and almost no winning ball can be obtained. In addition, since it becomes difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the positive change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the game state after the “big hit E” ends is a “normal mode” which is almost disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, the "big hit E" is a type of the big hit that is disadvantageous for the player because it is very unlikely that a prize ball can be obtained and the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the big hit is extremely high.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in a range of “50 to 99”, and “big hit F” is associated with the value (see 202b6 in FIG. 14A). . This “big hit F” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit F" is 50, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. Is 50% (50/100). Like the “big hit E”, the “big hit F” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes for 0.2 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the "big hit E", since a prize ball can hardly be obtained and the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the big hit is extremely high, the big hit type is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, with a high probability (95% ratio), almost no prize balls can be obtained, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is almost certainly in the normal mode. , F, there is a high possibility that it will be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to expect that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which have been increased by the balls entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, will come off. It can provide novel playability.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14B). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 14B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to. , It is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, the detailed description is omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a second Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probable change flag 203g, probable change setting flag 203h, probable change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probable variable enable flag 203n , A positive change valid timer 203o, a discharge number counter 203p, a fluctuation time counter 203q, a big hit flag 203r, a small hit flag 203s, a round end flag 203t, and at least a memory area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type. Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Out of the vacant areas from 1 area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area ( (See FIG. 17), and based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the winning winning in the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed in the main controller 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is the same as the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved area into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, a maximum value of 4 is set. Are incremented by one (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30). S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of reserved balls can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 increases the actual variable display held by the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if the number of balls is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value of the variable ball is increased every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of suspended display balls increases. Are incremented by one (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 28). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 33). ).

  The probable change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable change state (probable change mode). ), And if the probability change flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal mode) of the special symbol. In addition, as described above, in the probable change mode, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, if the probable change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probable change state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to an initial value of OFF, and is set to ON when the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (see S1302 in FIG. 39). The probability change flag 203g is reset to off when the big hit game is started (see S219 in FIG. 28).

  The probability change flag 203g is referred to in the special symbol change start processing to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process (S213 in FIG. 29), the probability change flag 203g is referred to. If the flag is ON, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, while the probability change is performed. If the flag 203g is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The probability change flag 203g is also referred to in the normal symbol change process to determine whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 32). More specifically, the probability change flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability change flag 203g is ON, a random symbol lottery is performed based on the second probability random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 32), if the probability change flag 203g is off, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second probability random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 32). Further, in the ordinary symbol variation processing, the probable variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the ordinary symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 32). S620).

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probable change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 39). Note that the probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when returning (when turning on the power). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, the probability change switch 65e3 determines whether or not the power has passed before the power is turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the certainty variable switch 65e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a certainty variable passage counter 203i to be described later has a value larger than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the game store side by judging whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h while the power is turned off. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 in one round of the jackpot game (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been exhausted, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203p described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one each time the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed (S1415 in FIG. 40). In addition, after performing the process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1511 in FIG. 41). Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the value is incremented by one and updated (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable prize device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of dischargeds (the total value of the discharged number counter 203p and the positive variable passing counter 203i) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether the values match, it is reset to the initial value “0” (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball flying period after one round is completed and the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203m described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time since the opening and closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether or not the time required for the ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203m is a time required for discharging the game balls that have won the variable prize device 65 when the open / close door 65f1 of the variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is previously set to the remaining ball timer. It is set as the upper limit of 203 m. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203m (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65. Further, it is possible to illegally leave the ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of flowing the ball to the special discharge channel 65e2 at the timing of the first round of the jackpot E or the jackpot F.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the certain change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  The probable change enable flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the ball passes the probable change switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change valid flag 203n is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. 65e3 or less. In other words, this indicates that the passage of the ball through the probability changing switch 65e3 is a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203n was set to ON. After the probable change valid timer 203o turns off the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probable change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probable change switch 65e3 is 0.3 second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to pass.

  Thus, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge channel 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge channel 65e2 to allow the game ball to pass through the positive change switch 65e3 or the piano from below the positive change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up a game ball with a line or the like, or erroneously detecting that a magnetic sensor is passed by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the ball discharge switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls winning the variable prize device 65 matches the number of discharges (S1511 in FIG. 41).

  The fluctuation time counter 203q is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. The counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (see S311 in FIG. 29). Further, the fluctuation time counter 203q is decremented by one in the special symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 28) (see S214 in FIG. 28), and it is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q. Is determined.

  The big hit flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is in progress. If the big hit flag 203r is on, it means that a big hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203r becomes a big hit due to the lottery of the special symbol, and the big hit (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1103 in FIG. 37). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28), it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made by referring to the big hit flag 203r (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The small hitting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not a small hitting is being made. If the small hit flag 203s is on, it means that a small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that no small hit is in progress. The small hitting flag 203r becomes a small hit by a special symbol lottery, and the small hit is started and set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 42). Also, it is turned off at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the small hit flag 203s is referred to determine whether or not a small hit is occurring (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not a ball throwing period has ended after the jackpot round has ended. If the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that the ball throwing period has ended after the round, and if it is off, it indicates that the ball throwing period has ended.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize the novel gaming ability described above, in which a game is played in the hope that the ball will be missed with the second special symbol holding ball.

  Next, a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables specified in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is roughly provided with three states (modes). That is, a normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, a door breaking mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, and a probable change mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 19 are provided.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and the probability of a jackpot is low, and the ball is unlikely to enter the first entrance 64. This is the most unfavorable game state for the player. Further, as described above, the probability change mode indicates the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and has a high jackpot probability, and the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. This is the most advantageous game state for the player.

  In addition, the door breaking mode indicates a state in which there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol acquired during the execution of the probable jackpot (big hits A to D), and all the lotteries based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are lost. If so, this is a state indicating that the game can be played in the advantageous probability change mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same as the probability change mode except that a reserved ball of the second special symbol exists. That is, there is a high probability of a big hit in the special symbol lottery (1/10), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ratio of all the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the jackpot to be missed is about 65.6% (9/10 to the fourth power), so the door breaking mode is 65.6%. Thus, it can be said that the probability change mode can be expected.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol hits a jackpot (jackpots A to C), and if the ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 in the first round, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode after the jackpot ends. . As described above, in the big hits A to C, the ball almost passes through the probable change switch 65e3 simply by right-handing in one round. If the ball does not pass through the probable change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V does not win) because the player did not launch the ball, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode again. Is done.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, the mode shifts from the door breach mode to another mode not only when a big hit occurs but also when all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the change display based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols is completed in the door breach mode, the mode shifts to the positive change mode.

  Also, in the case of a jackpot D determined at a rate of 5% of the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the ball almost passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Move to If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V does not win) because the player did not launch the ball, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot E or a jackpot F determined at a rate of 95% of the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the ball is moved to the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, almost no ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the jackpots E and F are completed, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 19, the mode is changed from the probability change mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot (jackpots A to C), and in the first round, if the ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3, the door breakthrough mode is set after the jackpot ends. Transition. Each of the jackpots A to C is a jackpot type in which the ball can easily pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the mode almost shifts to the door breaking mode. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V does not win) because the player did not launch the ball, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. .

  As described above, in the first embodiment, by switching back and forth between the three types of modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot is completely removed. Thus, it is possible to realize a characteristic playability that a game can be played in an advantageous probability change mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player to make a jackpot again within the hold after the jackpot is over (so-called extended casino in the hold). It is possible to cause the player to perform an advantage in the hope that no extended play will occur. Therefore, a novel game characteristic different from a general pachinko machine can be provided, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to open and close the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to execute a rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a dependent variation time counter. 223f, a breakthrough effect counter 223g, a game state storage area 223h, and at least another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area including one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. I have. Winning information is stored in each area. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is selected, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and divides the prize information into prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110, and the second special symbol. The symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of holding balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be obtained. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the retained ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and outputs the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 adds the number of reserved balls of the variable display due to the entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or a special symbol in the main control device 110. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after subtraction is displayed. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved special ball count command from the reserved special ball count command 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 46). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, the display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the retained ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special ball number The drawing of the image is controlled such that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the symbol retained ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value is changed in synchronization with 203e. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The variable time counter 223f is a counter that counts the variable time of the variable display of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in subordinate fluctuation time counter 223f.

  The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors to be broken through before shifting to the probability change mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has ended.

  The gaming state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223h is updated every time a state command is output from the main control device 110 each time a change is made to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4210 in FIG. 46). The game state storage area 223h is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the least significant bit is in the time saving state of a normal symbol, and whether the second least significant bit is in a probable change state of a special symbol. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the lower two bits are “00B”, while in the “door breaking mode” and the “probable change mode”, the lower two bits are “11B”. The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio ramp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game status storage area 223h.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, an elapse timer for measuring an effect time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is formed by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound ramp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 53) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a process of drawing the next one frame of image and a process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used when drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the above, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (the storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed in the main controller 110 is displayed by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a beforehand, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the operation shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22 (c), on the display screen of the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main controller 110. The result is judged, and when it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. The image to be displayed is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  When the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main time image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. FIG. 23B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and FIG. 23B shows a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 23, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding back image. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “sand beach stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making the entirety resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 23A to FIG. 23B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 23A and 23B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position “b” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b 'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 7) numbered "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display 64 or the second symbol 640 has been hit, the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect, but the third symbol display device. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. It is. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "adventures" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are displayed in the character design area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading image data resident in advance in the image data. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, image data necessary for drawing an image thereafter, from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, This is an area in which transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is out of place, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged scale than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size from the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. One or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the elapse of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, in the variable display data table, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified. This back type is to display either the back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”), or to be different from the back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A and B as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage where the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variable symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 24) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image list to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the operation of the user, and thus the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 25 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes a start address (storage source start address) and a final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and a start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 64B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 55B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 55 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction with respect to is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 26) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 55 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 61) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, (See FIG. 26), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is stored before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes the transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 55 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and transmits the sprite of the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device is performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the large hit flag 203r and the small hit flag 203s is on. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S201, when it is determined that neither the special symbol is a big hit nor a small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired. (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the executed second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area → the third area in the hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of times the variable display is suspended based on the lottery N1) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209).

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol retaining ball number is determined. The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command in the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 performed after the process of S207 or S212, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and the process ends. The details of the special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the value of the change time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the updated change time counter is updated. Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 has become 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of the jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S219), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. I do. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the process of S219, when the big hit control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. Is performed (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S218, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the processes of S219 and S220 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. , And the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S301).

  Next, the probability change flag 203g is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol variation state (S302). In the process of S302, if the probable change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the probable change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probable change state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol for a high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol change state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 is determined. , And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13B) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol big random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 39”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) to determine what the big hit type is. I do. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot A (16 rounds, the variable jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of “10-89”, it is a jackpot B (five rounds variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of “90-99”, it is a jackpot C (two rounds jackpot). The determination is made (see FIG. 14A). On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery wins, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that the hit is the big hit D (16 rounds, the probability change big hit), If it is in the range of "5-49", it is determined to be a jackpot E (7 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (6 rounds normal jackpot) ( FIG. 14 (a)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A to F). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpots A to F) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern (corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1) is determined. Fluctuating time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol is out of the way (including the small hit) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The stop type to be displayed at 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the low probability stop type selection table. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36). When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for executing a holding process of the values indicated by the various counters when a winning start is made.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is obtained (S401). S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether the ball has won a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) the second entrance 640 (S407). In this process, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times of change display holding N2 in the special symbol) is obtained (step S407). S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing are updated. It is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  In the process of S413, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is executed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S413), and this process ends. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry to the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 30). (S501), if a new ball has not been detected (S501: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S501 that a new incoming ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected incoming ball is the upper limit value (ie, 4) It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), the timing of starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is whether or not the special symbol is in a certain change state. Is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probable change state according to the current game state and the result of the look-ahead of the reserved ball held before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball, the current game state matches the timing of starting the fluctuation display based on the ball detected this time, so that the current game state is in a probable change state. Is determined. Also, when a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the probability jackpot is suspended, the state shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is suspended, the state transitions to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is in the positive change state.

  In the process of S503, when it is determined that the start of the variation based on the currently detected ball entry is a state of probable change of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the ball entry and the high probability The lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired based on the first hit random number table (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the change is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), based on the type of the entrance where the ball is detected and the first random number table for low probability. Then, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the processing of S506 executed after the processing of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that has detected the current entrance and the lottery result obtained in the processing of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance port notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the normal symbol (second symbol) change display and the first entrance opening performed by the second symbol display device 83 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the electric accessory 64a attached to the motor 64.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is performed during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period during which the special symbol is in the probable change state and the period during which the normal symbol is in the time saving state coincide with each other. Therefore, in the processing of S608, if the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and if it is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  In the processing of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S607 and the normal random number table for high symbol time On the basis of the result, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is off (see FIG. 14B).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the random number table per probability symbol for probability time, a lottery result as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239 ”, It is determined that the symbol has been removed (see FIG. 14B).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611). The display mode of the hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (whether the probability change flag 203g is ON) (S614). If the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S614: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability change flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), and terminates this processing.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S617). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing in S615 or S616 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S617, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol or not. Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is a hit of a normal symbol (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (that is, whether the probability change flag 203g is on) (S620), and the time reduction state is determined. If it is not in the middle (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S621), and the processing is performed. The process moves to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the time of the normal symbol is being reduced (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to “1 second × "2 times" (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the processing of S623, the opening time and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening determined in the processing of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 end. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspend it.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the main control device 110 is turned on. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S914 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S914 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S915, S916).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S915, S916) is performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the processing of S916 ends, the process moves to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the processing of S910 ends, the probable variable flag 203g is read (S911), and a status command is set based on the read state of the probable variable flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the current game state. After the processing of S912 is completed, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the processing shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) and the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1004 is completed, next, if the small winning state is established, a small winning control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small hit control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small hit, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed during the open period of the small hit or whether a specified number of balls have been won. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the small hit control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1005 is completed, next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors product 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started when the opening / closing control start of the electric auditors accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32). Note that the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32).

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed at 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 is set. Starts a variable display. Thus, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately turned on as the ordinary symbol (second symbol). Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, and thus the remaining time until the next execution timing of the main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 34 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S901 in FIG. 35). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the specific winning port 65a are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S220 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot starts (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1102, the big hit flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1001 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol big hit (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the process of S1004, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1104: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is a new round start timing (S1105), and if it is a new round start timing (S1105: Yes). ), A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when the special game state (all rounds of the jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1107: Yes), the ending command is set (S1108), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1107 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), then a jackpot end process for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1110), and this process ends. I do. The details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (special gaming state) (S1109: No), a winning process for performing a process according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111). . The details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the prize-winning process (S1111) is completed, an abnormal process is performed to determine whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally ejected (S1112), and the process ends. Details of the abnormal processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1106). The jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the current round is not the first round, the process of S1203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1204. In the processing of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204), and this processing ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), it is possible to open the special winning opening 65a in each round of the jackpot, and to set the first round to be able to pass through the special discharge channel 65e2. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A to D, the ball almost surely passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round only by the player right-handed, so that the probability change mode (special change state of the special symbol and , A normal symbol time saving state). Also, in the case of the jackpots E and F, although the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds) as described above, Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during one round, the possibility that the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, if any of the jackpots E and F is reached, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot is completed. Thereby, the lottery of the first special symbol, in which one of the types of the big hits A to C is determined in the case of the big hit, is determined to be an advantageous lottery for the player, and the high probability (95% of The lottery of the second special symbol in which one of the jackpots E and F is determined by the (ratio) can be set as a lottery disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1110). The big hit end process (S1110) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for setting the game state after the big hit end as described above.

  In the big hit end processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1301). If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the probability change setting flag 203h is ON (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to the probable change mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the probability change flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 28), the process of S1302 is skipped, and the probability change flag 203g is turned off after the jackpot. That is, the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit.

  In the processing of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g (S1303). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the gaming status storage area 223h in accordance with the gaming status notified by the status command. Thus, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the big hit flag 203r and the probability change setting flag 203h are set to off (S1304), and this processing ends.

  By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 39), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ending according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1111). The winning process (S1111) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for controlling according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a as described above.

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current time is a round valid period (S1401). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of S1401, if it is not the round validity period (S1401: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the current time is the round validity period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S1402). If a winning has been detected (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j and updated (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning in the specific winning opening 65a has been detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, if the winning in the specific winning opening 65a is not detected in the processing of S1402 (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 and S1404 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the processing of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406). (S1406: Yes), and it transfers to the process of S1407. In the process of S1406, if the current jackpot is the jackpots A to D, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, and if the jackpots are E and F, the start of the round is determined. It is determined that the round time has elapsed when 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the start.

  In the processing of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). If it is determined that the closing is based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid is closed. The (positive change solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process shifts to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is due to the completion of a round other than one round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is turned on. Is not set, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the probability change valid flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. If the value of the winning counter is determined to be 6 or less in the processing of S1405 (S1405: No), and if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S1406 (S1406: No), S1407 is performed. Steps S1411 to S1411 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1412 that the round end flag 203t is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the probable change valid flag 203n is on (S1416). In the processing of S1416, if the probable change valid flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probable change valid flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probable change valid timer 203o (S1417), and it is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1417). S1418). If the value of the probable change enable timer 203o is not the upper limit (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, where the probable change switch 65e3 is monitored and the process of updating the probable change setting flag 203h is executed. Accordingly, if the probability change valid timer 203o is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a probability change state from being improperly caused by passing a ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probable variable valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probable variable valid flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to off (S1419), and the value of the probable variable valid timer 203o is reset (S1420). ), End this processing.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 (S1413). If the ball has not passed through the probability changing switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the probable variable switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable passage counter 203i (S1414), the probable variable setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormal processing (S1112). This abnormal process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37). As described above, it is determined whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally ejected. It is processing for.

  In the abnormal processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the round validity period (S1501). If the current time is not the round validity period (S1501: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 in the process of S1502 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), since the ball is in the throwing period, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203m and updated (S1505). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then, the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probable variable passage counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203p) is awarded. It is determined whether the number matches the value (the value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of illegally entering a ball into the special discharge channel 65e2 and passing through the positive change switch 54e3 while the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S1507: Yes), the processing of S1508 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to off (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203p, and the positive change passage counter 203i are reset (S1511), and the process ends.

  Executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 41) causes a problem that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It can be detected and notified early.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As described above, the small hit control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 when the small hit state is set.

  In the small hit control process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit start timing (S1601). An opening command indicating the winning opening is set (S1602), the small hitting flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the timing is not the start of the small hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is being made (S1604), and if it is determined that the small hit is not made (S1604). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that the player is in the small hit (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small hit ( If it is the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the opening / closing door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the opening operation start timing (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the ending period start timing (S1607), and if it is the ending period start timing (S1607: No). Yes), an ending command indicating that the small hit ending period has started is set (S1608), and this processing ends.

  Also, in the processing of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609). (S1609: Yes), the small hit flag 203s is set to off (S1610), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1609 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the small hit middle prize processing for determining the end of the small hit opening period is executed (S1611). The details of the small hit prize winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the small win prize-winning process (S1611) ends, an abnormal process of determining whether the number of spheres winning the specific prize port 65a matches the number of ejected spheres is executed (S1612), and this process ends. I do. This abnormality processing (S1612) is the same processing as the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37), and thus the details thereof are omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the small hit prize winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small hit open period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hit prize winning process (S1611). In the small hit prize winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit round is valid (S1701). The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the current period is the round valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1702), and the winning of the ball is detected. If it is determined that it has been performed (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1702 that the winning for the specific winning opening 65a has not been detected (S1702: No), the processing of S1703 is skipped and the processing shifts to S1704.

  In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704). If the value is less than 7 (S1704: No), the round time (0.2 seconds) elapses. It is determined whether it has been performed (S1705). In the processing of S1705, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), the processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the small hit opening period. On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and when it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the processing of S1705 (S1705: Yes). This means that the condition for terminating the small hit opening period has been satisfied, so that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1706), and this processing ends.

  Note that it is almost impossible to make seven or more balls enter the specific winning opening 65a during the small hit round time of 0.2 seconds. After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing in S4116 is performed (see FIG. 45) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), sound lamp control device 113 executes a power-off process in S4116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4116 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cutoff). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1616 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the processing of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4116, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set ( (S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4116 (see S4115 in FIG. 45). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  After the processing in S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 31) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the gaming state storage area 223h. Is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time of power-on. After the processing in S4012, the interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed through steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to the process in S4006 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S4102 to S4110 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the fluctuation effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S4107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illuminations 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing in S4110 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4111). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S4112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4112, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S4113, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4115), and the power-off is performed. The processing is executed (S4116). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S4117), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a store clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4201). In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4203), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). The processing ends. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4204 that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). . Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, (The number of times N1 of the variable display is held based on the lottery of the first special symbol) or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display is held based on the second special symbol) is extracted. Is stored in the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). In the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is set. . After the processing of S4208 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 when a ball has won (started winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol are processed by the processing of S08. The value of the symbol holding ball counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S4208 is performed, the display reserved ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Several commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data of the gaming state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, based on the information according to the game state (whether the state is the probable change state) notified by the state command, when the probable change mode is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to “11B”. On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to “00B”. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4209 that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4211). If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing for performing control according to the new start winning prefetch result notified by the winning information command is executed. Then (S4212), the processing ends. Details of the winning information command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the jackpot (one of the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command) has been received. It is determined (S4213). If it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), a jackpot-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). The processing ends. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4213: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4215), and this process ends. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, the details of the above-described winning information command processing (S4212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning information command processing (S4212).

  In the prize information command processing (see FIG. 47), first, the information notified by the received prize command (information indicating the type of the entrance where a new start prize is detected and the lottery result) is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the process of S4301 is completed, it is determined whether or not the notification of the current winning information command is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302). In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the information notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current winning information is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpots A to D are being executed (S4303). If it is determined that any of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the ending period is in progress (S4304). Selects the mode of the key 813 in the effect of finding the key 813 (see FIG. 8B) (S4305). In the process of S4305, if the current prize information is the prize information corresponding to the lottery result of the departure (small hit), the ratio of selecting the gorgeous mode key 813 increases, and the current prize information becomes the big hits E and F. In the case of the winning information corresponding to, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in the poor (tattered) form becomes high. When the process of S4305 ends, an effect of finding the key 813 in the mode selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the jackpots A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and when it is determined that the ending period of the jackpots A to D is in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes). As a result of the player performing right-handing during the period in which the player should make left-handing, it means that a start winning prize for the second entrance 640 has been detected. A warning effect for notifying the user is executed (S4307), and this processing ends. This warning effect (not shown) is more strongly left-handed to the player than the image of the character “left-handed” and the left-pointing arrow displayed on the display area HR1 during the execution of the door-break mode effect. Is performed. Specifically, for example, an effect is displayed in which the character “left-handed” is displayed in a large size on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the sound “please return to left-handed” flows repeatedly at the maximum volume. Is done. By executing the warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from right-handing in a situation other than during the execution of the jackpots A to D. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation where the player keeps right-handing during the normal mode or the probable change mode, and the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

  By executing the winning information command processing, it is possible to appropriately set the mode of the key 813 found during the big hit based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the door-break mode effect, the player can be made to predict the degree of expectation of the probability change mode based on the mode of the key 813. Can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 can be changed simply in accordance with whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol newly notified by the winning information command is out (small hit). However, the configuration of the key 813 is selected based on not only the winning information based on the new winning information command but also the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Is also good. Specifically, for example, prior to receiving the current prize information command, among the prize information already stored in the prize information storage area 223a, the prize information corresponding to one of the jackpots E and F is included. In the case where the key 813 is included, the selection ratio of the key 813 in a poor (tattered) mode may be increased irrespective of the lottery result of the winning information this time. With this configuration, the possibility that the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol increases as the keys 813 in the poor (tattered) form continue, so that the player It is possible to more accurately estimate whether the jackpots E and F are included in the retaining ball. Further, for example, when all of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a before receiving the current winning information command and the current winning information command is out of place (small hit), the selection ratio is reduced. A configuration in which the height is increased (or selected only in this case) (for example, the configuration of the key 813 made of diamond) may be provided. With this configuration, when the mode is displayed, an expectation of shifting to the probable change mode can be further increased.

  In the first embodiment, when the winning information command corresponding to the second entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. Even when a new ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit value, a warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D. It may be configured. In particular, during the ending of the jackpots A to D or during the execution of the first variation display, the possibility that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit value is extremely high. In such a case, if the player makes a right-handed hit, a new start winning prize is generated for the second entrance 640, so that the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed five or more times after the jackpot. There is a possibility that the player may lose. On the other hand, when a ball entry to the second entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, a warning effect is set so that the player loses. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, the jackpot-related processing (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S4214).

  In the jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401), and if an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81. When the process of S4402 ends, the big hit-related process (see FIG. 48) ends. If the current opening command is a command corresponding to the opening of the big hit E, F or the small hit, and the door break mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door break mode is executed. The production continues as it is. In this case, the opening command itself may not be output to the display control device 114, or the display control device 114 may determine whether or not the door break mode effect is being executed and select the effect mode. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4401 that an opening command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4403). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4404), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing in S4405, this processing ends. Note that, similarly to the case where the opening command is received, when it is time to start a new round of the jackpots E and F during the execution of the door break mode effect, the door break mode effect is continued as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4403 that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not a closing command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4406). If it is determined that the close command has been received (S4406: Yes), a close command process for performing control according to the situation where the close command has been received is executed (S4406), and this process ends. Details of the close command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that the closing command has not been received (S4405: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), an ending command process for performing control according to the type and situation of the ending command is executed (S4408), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), the process ends as it is. By executing the jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the above-described close command processing (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the close command processing (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot being executed is any of the jackpots A to D (S4501). S4501: Yes), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than the jackpots A to D (either the jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), then the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is larger than 0. (That is, whether the door break mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed), and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door break mode effect is not being executed). ) (S4502: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door break mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4503). Then, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process ends as it is in order to continue the door break mode effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the remaining period until the end of the jackpot is reached. The result display is set (S4505), and the process ends. Note that the result display indicates a display content in which the total number of prize balls paid out by repeating the current jackpot and the probability change mode, the number of jackpots, and the like are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By setting the result display, the number of jackpots won by the player, the number of acquired prize balls, and the like can be easily grasped, so that the player can have a sense of accomplishment.

  Next, the details of the above-mentioned ending command processing (S4408) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The ending command process (S4408) is a process for performing control according to a jackpot type, a game situation, and the like when an ending command is received, as described above.

  In this ending command processing, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command indicating a small hit ending (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a small hit ending (S4601: Yes), the small hit is determined. Is performed (S4602), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the ending is not a small hit (S4601: No), the ending command of this time is output to notify that the big ending institution has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot under execution is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603).

  In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is not any of the jackpots A to D (S4603: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the running big hit is one of the big hits A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning information of the second special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read winning is read. It is determined whether or not the jackpot D is included in the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is an advantageous jackpot type that is the only one of the jackpots of the second special symbol in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained and the probability change mode is set almost after the jackpot.

  In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), the door break mode in a special mode in which it is notified that the big hit has occurred during the execution of the door break mode effect. An effect is set (S4606), and this processing ends. As described above, after the jackpots A to D are finished, it is basically advantageous for the player if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. This is because if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, either the jackpot E or F which is disadvantageous with a high probability (a ratio of 95%) is obtained. However, in the case where the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot D which is advantageous to the player with a low probability (a rate of 5%) may be obtained. In this case, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the big hit, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the big hits E and F are reached. Therefore, in this case, by setting the door break mode effect in a special notification mode, the player can easily understand that the big hit D has occurred.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4605 that the jackpot D is not included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4605: No), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is set to 4 (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the big hit is included, it means either the big hit E or F during the execution of the door-break mode effect, and the mode shifts to the normal mode after the big hit end. Finally, a door break-through mode effect of setting a mode of notifying the fall to the normal mode (a mode of failing to break through the door) is set (S4609), and the process ends. Note that the same production time of 5.8 seconds is set as the production time of the door break mode production regardless of whether or not a jackpot is included. During the period of 5.8 seconds, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hits), the period from the start of the ending institution until the small hit based on the fourth reserved balls ends. Period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not there is a big hit in the holding ball from the effect time, the effect time of the door break mode effect is set to the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

  In the process of S4608, when it is determined that the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball (S4608: No), the door break mode effect in a mode of finally notifying the shift to the probable change mode is set (S4610). ), End this processing. By executing the ending command process (see FIG. 50), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the content of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the small hit end processing (S4602) will be described. The small hit end processing (S4602) is a processing executed when it is determined in the ending command processing (see FIG. 50) that the received ending command is a small hit ending command.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hit end processing (see FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed). It is determined (S4701), and if the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and the process is terminated as it is. In addition, the case where a small hit occurs outside the execution period of the door break mode effect is a case where the player intentionally or negligently makes a right-hand outside the execution period of the big hits A to D (a period in which a left-hand should be performed). is there. In this case, at the time when the start winning prize for the second entrance 640 is detected, the warning effect has been set by the processing of S4307 of the prize information command processing (see FIG. 47). It is thought that there is. Therefore, at the end of the small hit, control such as performing a warning effect again is not performed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from having a discomfort due to the repeated repetition of the warning effect despite returning to the left.

  In the process of S4701, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after the subtraction is set to 0. It is determined whether or not (S4703). If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result of being out of place (small hit) (that is, all of the door breakthrough mode effect is being performed). This means that the fluctuation has come off), so an effect mode indicating entry into the probable change mode is set (S4704), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, The processing ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4801). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). In the process of (1), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process shifts to S4806. In the process of S4805, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4807), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) In, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808 (S4809), and this process ends. By receiving the display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to perform the stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effector.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start program of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 64A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is performed (see S7502 in FIG. 64A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the change pattern command for display from the main control unit 110 via the sound lamp control unit 113, that is, when the change pattern command for power supply is received, the change image at power-on is displayed immediately during the change effect period, and the simple change You can make a production. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 55B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process has been executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 26, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A to F, small hit, reach out of front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear miss, reach out of front / rear miss, complete out of position indicated by the display stop type command) ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of the big hits A to F, the small hits, the out of reach, or the completely out of the way) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Note that the start of the change is always determined at least several seconds in the main control device 110, so that no more than two display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing an opening command process. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7002. .

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or the back B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7002 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6414, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is next determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If (S6416: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the warning image to be displayed.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6418 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. After extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 57 (b)) corresponding to the respective commands, A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S6502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S7208: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The content is cleared (S7210) by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and a simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 55 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and store them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-described drawing processing (S6306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). In other words, in the process of S7801, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 55B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the position at which the ball is likely to enter the ball when left-handed (a game method in which the ball is fired toward the flow path on the left side in front view of the game board 13) is performed. When the ball is hit right (a game method in which the ball is fired toward the right channel in the game board 13 when viewed from the front in the game board 13), the ball easily enters (left hit). And a second ball entry port 640 disposed at a position where the ball becomes difficult to enter the ball). When a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is disadvantageous for the player (because almost no prize ball is obtained during the jackpot) While it is highly probable that the game will shift to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot), if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the game It is configured to increase the possibility that the player will be advantageous (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained at the jackpot, and a transition to the advantageous variable mode after the jackpot is made advantageous). Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel that he wants to execute a more advantageous first special symbol lottery than the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery.

  In addition, the channel on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front is provided with a specific winning opening 65a which is opened during a big hit and in which a large amount (11) of prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters. Like the second entrance 640, the specific winning opening 65a allows the ball to enter when hitting right (easy entry) and impossibility to enter when hit left (difficult to enter). It is provided at a position where For this reason, in order to obtain a prize ball by winning the ball to the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit, it is necessary to right-hit the ball. As described above, when the player hits right, the ball also enters the second entrance 640, so that after the big hit, the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be accumulated to the upper limit. For this reason, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to form a state where the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous at the time of the jackpot, is continuously executed. The game can be played in the hope that all the reserved balls of the symbol will come off (small hit). That is, in a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player that the jackpot is again set in the hold after the jackpot is completed (so-called extended holding), but in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, It is possible to cause the player to perform an advantage in expectation that the reserved in-house will not occur. Therefore, a novel game characteristic different from a general pachinko machine can be provided, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, each time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the execution of the jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased reserved ball is pre-read, and the effect of the mode according to the pre-read result is provided. Is executed. In other words, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is out of order (small hit) is executed. More specifically, an effect is executed in which the adventurer 811 acquires a key 813 in a mode according to the prefetch result of the increased lottery result of the reserved ball. With this effect, it is possible to make the player guess from the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the probability change mode during the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit from being merely an operation for obtaining a prize ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the big hit game.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the sphere of the second special symbol from the ending period of the jackpots A to D until the variation time of all the variable display based on the sphere of the second special symbol elapses. An effect is executed to notify the player whether or not the jackpots E and F exist therein. That is, even after all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are finished, an effect is performed to suggest whether the game state remains in the probable mode or falls to the normal mode. . With a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and the plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a small hit is made with a high probability. Then, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each of the rounds of the big hits E and F are the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the end of the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F is set to 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . With this configuration, even if any of the first to fourth retained balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door break mode effect is completed. A series of opening / closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as the case where the probable change mode is notified (when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are small hits). That is, regardless of whether the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the end of the jackpot until the end of the door breakthrough mode effect is performed. The operation can be unified to the operation of repeating the closing for one second and the opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 after the end of the big hit, it becomes difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is due to the continuous small hit or the opening / closing operation due to the big hit E or F. It is possible to draw attention to the door break mode production to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed prior to the lottery of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specification in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel may be adopted. With this configuration, it is possible to make a big hit by the variable display of the first special symbol before the draw of the disadvantageous second special symbol is executed. , It is possible to make the left-hander more positive. In this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, a variation pattern of a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%). . With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol one or more times during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that there is a chance to win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. Can be formed.

  In the first embodiment, a left-handed notification is issued from the start of the ending period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the player can be notified so as not to continue right-handing after the end of the jackpot. "May be displayed so that the player can switch to left-handing immediately after the end condition of the final round is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 after the end of the big hit.

  In the first embodiment, when the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is uniformly 3 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a when the ordinary symbol is hit is 1 second × Although the configuration is set to twice, it is not limited to this. For example, after the jackpot is completed, only the fluctuation time of the first ordinary symbol may be set to a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than a period until at least all the fluctuations based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. Good. With this configuration, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the normal symbol does not hit, so from the opening time of the ordinary symbol, the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in a lottery and the ordinary symbol has a low probability state. It can be difficult to determine whether the driver has fallen or the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the result of the door break mode effect.

  In the first embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a small win is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the second special symbol comes off, instead of the configuration in which all are just mere coming off, the fluctuation time in the case of a big hit is varied according to the number of changes after the big hit, and the door breaking mode The period from the start of the effect to the start of the second special symbol jackpot, and the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode effect to the end of all four variable displays corresponding to the second special symbol being disengaged. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the period (the period until shifting to the probable change mode) is matched. More specifically, if a big hit is made in the first lottery of the second special symbol after the big hit, a change time of 4 seconds is set, and a big hit is made in the second lottery of the second special symbol. Is set to 3 seconds as the fluctuating time, and in the case of a big hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol, 2 seconds is set as the fluctuating time and a big hit in the fourth lottery of the second special symbol. In such a case, one second may be set as the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, when the holding balls of the four second special symbols are all missed, the total of the fluctuation time is 4 seconds (1 second x 4), and when a big hit occurs on the way, The period until the jackpot is started (4 seconds) can be matched. Therefore, for 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door break mode effect, the specific winning opening 65a is not opened even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the certainty change mode before the operation of the specific winning opening 65a ends the door breakthrough mode effect. During the period from the start of the door break mode effect to the start of the second special symbol jackpot, the variable display corresponding to four times of the second special symbol coming off from the start of the door break mode effect is displayed. If it is longer than the period up to the end, the jackpot will not be started at least during execution of the door-break mode effect. Therefore, when the second special symbol is simply hit, the variation time may be set to be equal to or more than the sum of the variation times of the variable display corresponding to the four times of the second special symbol.

  In the first embodiment, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the first to fourth rounds in the big hits E and F is the same as the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the small hit (0.2 seconds). However, the difference may be arbitrarily determined as long as it is not possible for the player to discern whether the difference is the open period of the big hit or the open period of the small hit by the bodily sensation. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery of the first special symbol is advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. Then, if the second special symbol lottery wins, the door break mode directs a success in which the door breaks through, and if all the second special symbol lotteries are missed, the door breaks off. May be configured to be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize a more intuitive game property, that is, a big hit if the door is successfully breached. Further, in this case, the first entrance 64 may be deleted and only the second entrance 640 may be provided. That is, it may be configured that only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

  In the first embodiment, it is difficult to know whether the lottery of the second special symbol has been a big hit or a small hit while the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is being executed. Although the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set as described above, it is not limited to the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol that makes it difficult to determine whether the winning is a big hit or a small hit. For example, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is determined, the big hit type in which the small hit and the same action as the small hit (the same action or an action in which the player cannot distinguish it from the small hit) is determined. Good.

  In the first embodiment, a jackpot ending period is started to determine whether or not all the reserved balls of the second special symbol held during the jackpot are to be released (small hits) (to shift to the probability change mode). , The process is executed over a period until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least part of the transition to the probable change mode, a configuration may be provided to notify the transition to the probable change mode during the ending period. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol is pre-read, and if it is determined that all the pre-read results are out of place (small hit), the probability is changed during the big hit ending period with a predetermined probability. A configuration for notifying the transition to the mode may be adopted. With such a configuration, the player can be notified of the transition to the probable change mode more quickly, so that the player can be pleased. Note that when notifying the transition to the probable change mode during the ending period, an effect that breaks through four doors may be executed at a stretch, or an effect that is different from the normal door break mode effect may be executed. Is also good. Here, as an effect that is different from the normal door break mode effect, for example, an effect in which the theme song of the adventurer 811 flows may be executed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is blacked out. After that, an effect may be executed in which the character “determination of the probability change mode” appears on the display screen. Furthermore, when an effect that determines to shift to the probability change mode is executed during the ending period, the effect is not changed until the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol ends (that is, until the probability change mode is started). ) It may be configured to keep executing. With this configuration, it is possible for a player who has learned to shift to the probability change mode early (during the ending period) to shift to the probability change mode in the remaining period before shifting to the probability change mode. It can be immersed in the lingering sound. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

  Further, a configuration may be provided in which the transition to the probable change mode is notified before the ending period. More specifically, when the starting winning corresponding to the fourth holding ball of the second special symbol is detected, and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command. It is determined whether all the winning information of the second special symbol is out of place (small hit). Then, when all pieces of winning information are out of place (small hits), an effect indicating a shift to the probable change mode may be executed at that time. In addition, as an effect indicating the transition to the probability change mode, for example, an effect that the adventurer 811 finds a key 813 in a special (premium) mode may be executed. The configuration may be such that the music flowing inside is changed to a special (premium) music.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 is set during a big hit. When the ball passes, the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change mode. In addition, as long as the signal passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode and the jackpot are repeated indefinitely.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which the gaming state after the jackpot is determined in advance for each jackpot type. In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive special change states of the special symbol, and if the upper limit is reached, even after the winning of the probability change big hit, after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, I have.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, in order to prevent the player from making a right-handed hit at a normal time (a state other than during a big hit), when a start winning prize to the second ball entrance 640 is detected at a normal time, It was configured to execute a warning effect.

  On the other hand, in the present second embodiment, the motorized accessory 640b is provided to the second ball entry port 640, and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 at normal times because it is obstructed by the motorized accessory 640b. It is configured to be difficult. Also, during the jackpot state, by controlling the electric accessory 640b provided along with the second entrance 640 so as to be easily opened, the second special during the jackpot as in the first embodiment. It is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit number. In addition, since the electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. .

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. It is partly changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a normal entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, a variable winning device 650 and a second ball entrance 640 are provided downstream of the normal ball entrance 67. The variable prize device 650 is provided in place of the variable prize device 65 in the first embodiment, and is used as a prize port in which 13 prize balls are paid out every time a ball wins in the specific prize port 650a of the variable prize apparatus 650. It is configured. The specific winning opening 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can enter (easy) and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter (difficult), and is opened in each round of the jackpot. Set to state.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a closed position where the ball is prevented from entering the second entrance 640 and an open position where the ball can enter. FIG. The case where it is variable is illustrated. Although the details will be described later, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled such that the ball easily enters the ball in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol than in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (time saving state). Is More specifically, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is slightly higher than in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (199/240 → 200/240), but the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is long. At the same time (3 seconds → 30 seconds), the opening period of the motorized accessory 640b when a normal symbol is hit is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol as a whole. Therefore, in the probable mode in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is disadvantageous in the second special. Execution of a symbol lottery can be suppressed. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  In addition, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640 eliminates the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment. Then, below the first ball entrance 64, a special figure 1 small hit prize winning device 655 is provided. The special figure 1 small hit prize winning device 655 sets the ball into the inside by setting the special figure 1 small hit prize winning port 655a to the open state when a small win is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol. You will be able to enter the ball. In the second embodiment, when the probability change mode is set, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is greatly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000). In such a case, the number of balls to be consumed is equal to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the special figure 1 small hit prize hole 655a, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is equal to the number of balls to be consumed. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the case where the left-handed operation is performed during the probable change mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the sorting member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the downstream side of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is provided. Are branched in substantially three directions. That is, the flow path toward the second ball entrance 640, the flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and the out port 66 without going to any of these (the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning port 650a). And a flow channel that flows down toward. With such a configuration, similarly to the first embodiment, a part of the ball that is shot toward the specific winning opening 650a by right-handing during the big hit can be made to enter the second opening 640. it can. Therefore, the configuration can be such that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit number during the big hit. Thereby, also in the second embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel playability that hopes that all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol executed after the big hit will be missed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a flow path toward the second entrance 640 by a plurality of nails, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out opening 66. And form. Therefore, by adjusting the nails by the clerk of the hall, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second entrance 640 and the ratio of the balls distributed to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted according to the management policy of the hall, and the pachinko machine 10 with higher convenience can be realized.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the second embodiment, the range of possible values of the first hit type counter C1 is expanded to 0 to 999.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0-9” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 68 (a)). As in the first embodiment, the jackpot determination value is common to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, “10-998” is defined as the range of the determination value for determining that the first special symbol has deviated (see 202a2 in FIG. 68A). "999" is defined as the range. Also, "10, 11" is defined as the range of the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is out of range (see 202a2 in FIG. 68A), and the determination value for determining the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “12 to 999” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 68A).

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value to be a big hit, the judgment value to be out of range, and the range of the judgment value to be a small hit are all the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is common to the two special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), “0 to 10” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a4 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the determination is made to be out. “11” is defined as the value (see 202a5 in FIG. 68A), and “12 to 999” is defined as the determination value for determining the small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 68A).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is made different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol In this configuration, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls to be consumed when the player hits the left during the probable variation mode and the lottery of the first special symbol become a small hit, and the ball enters the special figure 1 small hit winning opening 655a. It is configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out is equal. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the case where the left-handed operation is performed during the probable change mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  The small hits of the second special symbol and the small hits of the first special symbol are configured so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is different, and the small hits of the first special symbol have more prizes. The ball can be obtained. On the other hand, in the small hit of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for only 0.2 seconds, so that it becomes difficult for the player to acquire the prize ball. Therefore, if the player hits the ball at the right time during normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and it is easy to determine a disadvantageous jackpot type even if the jackpot becomes large, and the prize ball is given even if the small jackpot is reached. Since it can hardly be acquired, it is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of performing left-handed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in normal times.

  Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the second embodiment, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and the jackpot D2 is set as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the first special symbol, "big hit A2" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9". (See 202b1 in FIG. 68 (b)). This “big hit A2” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 16 and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit A2", so if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit A2" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The “big hit A2” is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. Accordingly, in each round, the upper limit number (six) of balls can be made to win the specific winning opening 650a almost certainly before the elapse of 30 seconds just by continuing to make a right hit. When the jackpot A2 is reached, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  For the first special symbol, "big hit B2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 69" (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (b)). . The "big hit B2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds and the special symbol probable change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B2" is 60, so "big hit B2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). Like the “big hit A2”, the “big hit B2” is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as in "big hit A2".

  For the first special symbol, "big hit C2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 68 (b)). . The "big hit C2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of “big hit C2” is 30. Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, “big hit C2” is determined. Is 30% (30/100). Like the “big hit A2” and the “big hit B2”, the “big hit C2” is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. . Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” or “big hit B”.

  As described above, when the first special symbol is a lottery, a prize ball of two rounds, seven rounds, or sixteen rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the end of the big hit is almost certainly changed in the probability change mode. Therefore, regardless of the type of the jackpot, it is advantageous for the player. In addition, since the ratio of determining the 7 rounds and the 16 rounds, which are relatively large, is high (ratio of 70%), it is possible to expect to obtain a large amount of prize balls when the first special symbol hits a jackpot. Therefore, the player can be pleased when a large hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, the "big hit D2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 68 (b)). This “big hit D2” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit D2", so "big hit D2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit D2" is opened until the specific winning port 650a passes for 30 seconds or until six balls are won in each round of the big hit. Therefore, a relatively large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, the "big hit E2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5-99". (See 202b5 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit E2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four and the special symbol change state is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 95 counter values that are "big hit E2". Therefore, if a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E2" is determined. Is 95% (95/100). This "big hit E2" is different from other big hit types, and in each round of the big hit, the specific winning opening 650a is opened until 0.2 seconds elapse or until six balls are won. Since it is difficult to make a ball enter the specific winning opening 650a for 0.2 seconds, the "big hit E2" is a disadvantageous big hit type in which a prize ball cannot be acquired. Also, as described above, the upper limit (four times) is provided for the number of consecutive special symbol change states, and if a jackpot is reached when the upper limit number of times has been reached, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type is changed. It is configured to be in the disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if the "big hit E" is reached, the prize ball cannot be obtained, and the number of times required to shift to the normal mode is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a winning ball cannot be obtained with a high probability (a ratio of 95%) and the remaining jackpot until the normal mode is set. The big hit type (big hit E2) in which the number of times is reduced is determined. That is, similarly to the first embodiment, the configuration is such that when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the possibility of an undesirable result for the player increases. Accordingly, a novel game can be realized, in which a game can be performed in the hope that the lottery result will be lost during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, details of the second random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 203” is defined as the determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). Also, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 69). In other words, the configuration is such that the number of the determination values determined to be the hit of the ordinary symbol differs by only one in the ordinary state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. As a result, even in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the winning probability can be made substantially equal to that in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is longer than that in the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric power when the ordinary symbol is hit is obtained. The opening period of the accessory 640b is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol as a whole. Therefore, in the probable mode in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is disadvantageous in the second special. Execution of a symbol lottery can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a state other than the state in which the door break mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 202. As shown in FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 202 according to the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 202 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that a probable variable limit counter 203aa and a counter 203ab during breakthrough mode are added. Are different. In addition, the difference is that the probability change setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the probability variation valid flag 203n, the probability variation valid timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are deleted.

  The probability change limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of consecutive times of the probability change state until the normal mode is set. When the normal mode is set as the state after the end of the jackpot, the certainty variable limit counter 203aa is set to 4, which is the maximum number of consecutive times of the certainty change state (see S1314 in FIG. 78). , Is subtracted by one (see S1311 in FIG. 78). If the value of the probability limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the big hit, the normal mode is set after the big hit is finished.

  The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter that indicates the remaining number of changes in the door breakthrough mode effect. At the end of the big hits A2 to D2, the number of balls retained in the second special symbol is set as a counter value (see S1316 in FIG. 78). ), The value is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of the fluctuation (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode (the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the door breakthrough mode effect) is transmitted in the form of a fluctuation pattern command. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 reads out the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab from the fluctuation pattern command, and grasps the remaining number of fluctuations until the door break-through mode effect ends. In particular, since the storage contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 are not backed up, if the power is shut off during execution of the door break mode effect, the progress of the door break mode effect after the power is restored is controlled by the sound lamp control. The information cannot be grasped on the device 113 side.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since information corresponding to the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is included in the variation pattern command and output to the sound ramp control device 113, the door breakthrough mode effect is produced. Even if the power is shut off during execution and the contents stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, after the power is restored, the first variation pattern command received is analyzed to execute the door-break mode effect. It can be grasped whether or not it is in progress and the progress thereof. Thereby, even if the power is shut off during the execution of the door break mode effect, the effect can be restarted from the continuation of the door break mode effect after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect contents from being changed before and after the power is turned off, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect contents.

  Next, a state transition method according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, three types of states are switched between a normal mode, a door breaking mode, and a probability change mode. In the second embodiment, the contents of the door breaking mode are changed from those of the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the above-described first embodiment is a state in which the special symbol is surely changed, and is a time saving state of a normal symbol, and only shows a state in which a reserved ball of the second special symbol exists. In addition, in the second embodiment, the state in which the special symbol is in the low probability state and the ordinary symbol is in the normal state, and the state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol is present is also in the door breaking mode. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of description, the door breaking mode in which the special symbol probable change state and the normal symbol time saving state are set is referred to as door breaking mode 1, and the special symbol low probability state, and The door breaking mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as a door breaking mode 2. Note that the door breaking mode 1 is illustrated on the middle left side of FIG. 71, and the door breaking mode 2 is illustrated on the middle left side of FIG. 71.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility that the state is shifted to another state only when a big hit occurs. More specifically, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode always shifts to the door breaking mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (at most 30 seconds) in each round of the jackpot. When the ball is launched, a large amount of the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, at the end of the big hit, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit value, and the state after the big hit is the door breaking mode (door breaking mode 1).

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, in the door breaking mode (door breaking modes 1 and 2), the second special symbol lottery is basically a big hit, or the second special symbol lottery is completely removed. If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 becomes 0, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state. The state of the transition destination in the case of a jackpot is common to the door breaking modes 1 and 2, but the state of the transition destination when the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 is the door breaking mode 1 This is different from Door Breakthrough Mode 2. Specifically, in the door breaking mode 1, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the probability change mode (see the middle left side of FIG. 71). In the probable change mode, by performing left-handing, the player can execute only the lottery of the first special symbol which is advantageous, and the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol increases (for small hitting). The winning opening 655a is easily opened), so that the game can be continued until the first special symbol hits the jackpot without substantially reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the door breaking mode 2, when the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 71). In the normal mode, since the small hitting probability is low, if the player hits the left to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, the number of possessed balls will continue to decrease until the jackpot is reached, which is disadvantageous for the player compared to the probability change mode. Become.

  As shown in the middle section of FIG. 71, in the case of the door-break mode, when the jackpot E2 is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, after the end of the jackpot, on the condition that the number of consecutive probable changes has not reached the upper limit. The mode shifts to the probable change mode (common to door break modes 1 and 2). At the jackpot E2, as described above, the opening time of the specific winning opening 650a is short (0.2 seconds), and a prize ball cannot be obtained even if the player hits right. Also, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, the large hit E2 and the small hit of the second special symbol are notified to the left. Therefore, unless the player intentionally makes a right-handing against the notification, the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not accumulate during the execution of the jackpot E2, and after the jackpot E2 is over, shifts to the direct change mode directly. I do. Note that, in this case, the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa that counts the number of times the remaining probability change state continues until shifting to the normal mode is decremented by one. Therefore, when the big hit E2 occurs, the winning ball cannot be obtained, and the number of times of the probability change state is subtracted, which is an undesirable result for the player. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds a plurality of times in the door breaking mode, the player wants all the opening operations to be due to the small hit of the second special symbol. It is possible to realize a novel game property of making a wish.

  When the second special symbol jackpot E2 is reached in the door breaking mode and the probability variable limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (the number of consecutive probability variation states reaches the upper limit value), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the large hit. Therefore, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breach mode effect, an effect in which the breach of the door fails is executed, and the transition to the normal mode is notified.

  As shown in the middle section of FIG. 71, when the jackpot D2 is won during the door break mode, the door break mode (either the door break mode 1 or the door break mode 2) is performed again after the end of the jackpot D2. Move to. More specifically, if the number of consecutive probable changes has not reached the upper limit, door breakthrough mode 1 (probable state of special symbols and time saving of ordinary symbols) is set, and the number of consecutive probable changes is the upper limit. If it has reached, the door break mode 2 (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of ordinary symbol) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, the game can be shifted to the certainty change mode if the holding ball of the second special symbol does not cause a big hit, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the door breaking mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), the ball falls into the normal mode, so that the big hit becomes more advantageous. .

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability change mode, when a special symbol hits, a transition is made to another game state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and the number of consecutive probability change states has not reached the upper limit value (the probability change limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breaking mode is started after the end of the jackpot. . On the other hand, when the number of consecutive probable change states has reached the upper limit value (probable change limit counter 203aa has become 0), the state after the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit during the big hit. That is, an effect of notifying that the state after the end of the jackpot is the normal mode is executed, for example, in the ending period of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode, a prize ball can be acquired with a high probability (95%, which is a rate at which the jackpot E2 is determined). This results in an unfavorable result for the player, in that the remaining number of consecutive times in the probability variation state (the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) is decremented. Therefore, in the door breach mode, it is possible to play a game in the hope that the second special symbol will not be a big hit.

  In the door break mode effect of the second embodiment, if the jackpot E2 is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, an effect of failing to break through the door is temporarily performed (see FIG. 10A). You. If the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit value (the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa is not 0), as a result of the adventurer 811 challenging the door again through a so-called resurrection effect, the door breaks through. A successful production is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot E2 is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit value, the resuming effect is not performed, and the process directly shifts to the normal mode. With such a configuration, even when the mode is shifted to the probable change mode, it is possible to recognize that the remaining number of continuous times has been reduced when a resurrection effect is accompanied.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability change mode, the state shifts to another state only when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, if the first special symbol hits the jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode 1 after the end of the jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit number of times. In this case, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode 2 after the end of the big hit.

  Note that when the door break mode 2 is entered, the door break mode is directed to the normal mode when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are released (small hits). An effect to notify the transition is executed. In other words, an effect is executed that has the opposite result to the door breaking mode 1 (and the door breaking mode effect in the first embodiment). Further, when the jackpot E2 is reached in the door-break mode 2, the probability change mode is notified through the resurrection effect, similarly to the case where the remaining continuous number of times in the probability change state remains in the door break mode 1.

  Thus, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, a state where the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit (limit), in which the door breakthrough mode 1 shifts when any of the jackpots A2 to D2 is reached in a state where the number of times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit. And a door break-through mode 2 that shifts to any one of the jackpots A2 to D2. As in the first embodiment, the door breaking mode 1 shifts to the probable change mode which is advantageous to the player when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit). It is more advantageous not to win the jackpot in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is a state in which the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol are internally set, and the upper limit of the continuous number of the probability change state is reset. Therefore, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off, the mode shifts to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, the second special symbol wins during the door break mode 2, so that the mode can be shifted to the door break mode 1 or the probable change mode. Is more advantageous for the player. In the door breaking mode 2, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hits), and if the mode shifts to the normal mode, a large amount of possessed balls may be consumed before the big hits. It is.

  Depending on the type of the door breaking mode, it may be more advantageous if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are advantageous, or it may be advantageous if the reserved ball of the second special symbol includes a jackpot. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the door breaking mode, it is possible to predict which mode is the current door breaking mode. Then, depending on the predicted mode type, it is possible to expect a departure or a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20B) in that a post-input flag 223i is added. are doing. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The post-input flag 223i is a flag indicating that the power has been turned on again after the door opening mode has been set to the middle stage due to the power cutoff of the pachinko machine 10 during the execution of the door opening mode, and the door opening mode has been restarted. It is. The post-input flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the door-breaking-mode effect is being executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and that the change is other than the last change in the door-breaking-mode effect. (See S5102 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the details of the special symbol change start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This special symbol change start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes of S301 to S309 and S311, S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing of S311 is executed.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after determining the variation pattern in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value is read. And a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 (S322).

  In the special symbol change start process 2 (see FIG. 73) according to the second embodiment, after the process of S311 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S323). In the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is larger than 0 (that is, the door break mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is decremented by one. Then (S324), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S323 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door break mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped. This processing ends as it is.

  By the special symbol change start process 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress status of the door break mode effect (the value of the counter 203ab during the break mode) is included in the change pattern command and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a deviation between the actual remaining number of times of the door break mode effect and the effect mode executed by the sound lamp control device 113. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the contents stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the variation pattern command is configured to include the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab, it is possible to easily analyze the variation pattern command that is output first after the power is restored, and to easily perform the analysis before the power is turned off. Can be grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the effect state before the power is cut off.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the situation where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is basically only during the big hit and during the execution of the door break mode effect. Therefore, in a situation where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more and the jackpot is not being hit, it seems that it is sufficient to determine that the door break mode effect is being executed. However, also in the case where the player makes a right-handed intentionally or erroneously at the normal time, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may become one or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, it is notified that the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more by the reserved ball number command, so that the sound lamp control device 113 side opens the door. There is a problem that the user mistakenly recognizes that the breakthrough mode effect is being executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the progress status of the door break mode effect is included in the variation pattern command and output, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more at the time of power restoration, It can be understood whether the door breaking mode is being executed or whether the player has just intentionally or mistakenly made a right-handed operation at normal times. Therefore, the effect mode after the power is restored can be accurately returned to the state before the power was cut off.

  In the second embodiment, the number of times of change until the door break mode effect is completed is grasped by the break mode counter 203ab, and is output in the change pattern command. A configuration may be adopted in which only information on whether or not the program is being executed is included in the variation pattern command and output. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to grasp the number of times of change until the door break mode effect is completed, based on the information and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the main control device 110 can omit the process of updating the counter 203ab during the door breach mode, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623, the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S614 that the current time is in the ordinary symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), the variation of the ordinary symbol is performed. The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S614, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the ordinary symbol (S614: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this processing is ended.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second ball entry is performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b attached to the mouth 640 are set to “1 second × 2 times” (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the current symbol is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640 are set to “ 0.2 times × 1 time ”(S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the normal symbol in the normal state is shorter in fluctuation time of the normal symbol than in the normal symbol time reduction state, and the opening time when the normal symbol is hit is reduced. It is configured to be long. Further, as described above, the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment indicates whether the normal symbol is in the normal state (low-probability state) and the normal symbol is in the high-probability state. The configuration is such that the number of determination values to be determined differs by only one. As a result, even in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability is almost the same as the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, so that in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol as a whole, the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the probable mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so the disadvantageous second special symbol is used. Execution of the lottery can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a state other than the state in which the door break mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  Next, a start-up process 2 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

  Of the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, in the processes of S901 to S910 and S913, S901 to S910 and S913 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed. In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, a status command setting process for setting a status command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. Details of the state command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the status command setting process (S921). In this status command setting process (S921), first, the probable variable flag 203g is read (S1801), and a status command is set based on the read status of the probable variable flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol is changing (S1803). If the special symbol is changing (S1803: Yes), the data of the execution area and the value of the change time counter 203q are read (S1804). . Next, the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is read (S1805), and a variation pattern command is set based on the read values (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1803 that the special symbol is not fluctuating (S1803: No), each processing of S1804 to S1807 is skipped, and the present processing ends as it is.

  By executing the state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is turned off, the progress of the door breach mode effect, and the like are recorded in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75). The notification can be made to the lamp control device 113.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

  Among the jackpot control processes 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. Also, the same processes as those in S1107 to S1109 are executed.

  Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. The state is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and the process ends. In the second embodiment, a variable winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharging channel 65e1 and the special discharging channel 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, in the big hit control process 2 (see FIG. 77), it is not necessary to execute the process of switching the flow path, and thus these processes (S1202 and S1203 in FIG. 38) are deleted.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) according to the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the jackpot ending timing (S1109: Yes), the jackpot ending process (S1109: Yes) in the first embodiment. Instead of the big hit end processing 2 (see S1110 in FIG. 37), the big hit end processing 2 is executed (S1123), and this processing ends. Details of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), the prize processing 2 is executed instead of the prize processing in the first embodiment (see S1111 in FIG. 37) (S1124). ), End this processing. Details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment does not include a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. This is because, in the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability change state after the jackpot is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65. This is because in the second embodiment, there is a difference that the game state after the big hit is determined according to the big hit type. For this reason, in the second embodiment, when the ball is left inside the variable winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not the probability change state occurs, but an illegal act that leaves the ball inside. It does not hold itself. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not an abnormality in which a ball remains inside the variable winning device 650 has occurred is deleted (see FIG. 41).

  In the second embodiment, naturally, a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment may be executed. Accordingly, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 650, an error can be notified early.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1123) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S1123). In the big hit end processing 2 (S1123), first, the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1311), and it is determined whether the counter value after the subtraction has become 0 or not.

  In the process of S1311, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive probable change states has not reached the upper limit (limit), and therefore the probable change flag is set. 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, when it is determined that the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa after the subtraction has become 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit value. Then, without executing the process of S1313 for turning on the probable variable flag 203g (leaving the probable variable flag 203g off), the value of the probable variable limit counter 203aa is set to 4 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315. .

  In the processing of S1315 executed after the end of the processing of S1313 or S1314, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode. (S1316). Then, a status command is set based on the status of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the probable change limit counter 203aa in the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps not only the game state after the jackpot but also the remaining number of times until the number of continuous probable states reaches the upper limit (limit). be able to. When the processing in S1317 ends, the big hit flag 203r is set to OFF (S1318), and the processing ends.

  Next, the details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described with reference to FIG. This winning process 2 (S1124) is a process executed in place of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the winning processing 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408, respectively, S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing from S1408 to S1408 is executed.

  In the prize processing 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the processing in S1404 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431). If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1431, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1409 to S1420 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, and determining whether or not a ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at normal timing. This is because the processing is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in which the discharge passage 65e2, the positive change switch 65e3, and the like are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 80, start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment.

  In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, the processes in S4001 to S4013 are the same as the respective processes in S4001 to S4013 in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process in S4012 ends, the power-on state is then determined based on the state command and the variation pattern command output from main controller 110. Is executed (S4021), and the process shifts to S4013. Details of the insertion state determination processing (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the state determination process at the time of insertion (S4021). In the closing state determination processing (S4021), first, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4901), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No). Then, a back image according to the game state at the time of power-on is set (S4902), and this processing ends. Here, the game state at the time of power-on is determined based on the data in the game state storage area 223h updated in the processing of S4012 of the start-up processing 2 (see FIG. 80), and if the current state is a probable change state. The back image for the probable change state is set, and the back image for the normal state is set in the normal state. Note that the door break mode effect is an effect that is performed during the change of the second special symbol, and thus there is no possibility of the door break mode when the power is turned on when the change is stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S4903). ), It is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed. If the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

  In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is not 0 (the door break mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door break mode effect is performed. A mode selection process is performed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. Details of this breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the change pattern command is 0 (that is, the door break mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the remaining change The effect mode according to the time and the lottery result is determined (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the process of S4907, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906 (S4907), and the process ends.

  Next, details of the breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905).

  In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 1 (S5001). If there is any (S5001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern (S5002). In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation pattern (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h is data indicating a probable change state (S5003). If it is in the probable change state (S5003: Yes), the power is cut off during the execution of the fluctuation display based on the last second special symbol reserved ball in the door breach mode 1 (see the middle left side of FIG. 71), and the execution is performed. It means that the last ball in the middle was missed (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed with the remaining fluctuation time, an effect mode for notifying the transition to the probable change mode is determined (S5004), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5003, if it is determined that the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h is the data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breaking mode 2 (the middle part of FIG. 71) (Refer to the right side) means that the power supply was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last retained ball of the second special symbol, and that the last retained ball being executed was released (small hit). Therefore, in this case, the effect mode for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined as the effect mode to be executed with the remaining fluctuation time (S5004), and the present process ends. By the processing of S5003 and S5004, even if the state at the time when the power is turned on again is the execution of the last variable display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is determined based on the lottery result and the game state. The result of the breakthrough mode effect can be accurately reported.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is not 1 (it is 2 or more) (S5001: No), and if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 If it is determined that the variation pattern being executed at the time of power restoration is the jackpot variation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is the jackpot E2 (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot E2 (S5006: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of consecutive probable changes has reached an upper limit (limit) (S5007). It should be noted that the remaining number up to the upper limit value of the continuous number of times of the probability change state is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a state command together with the game state at the time of power-on.

  In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probable change state has been reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the big hit becomes the normal mode, so that the transition to the normal mode is notified. Then, the processing shifts to the processing of S5005 described above. On the other hand, in the processing of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probable changes has not been reached, the state after the jackpot is the probable change mode, and the door breakthrough succeeds through the resurrection effect. The effect mode is determined (S5008), and the process ends. As described above, this resurrection effect is based on the fact that the jackpot E2 has reduced the number of remaining times up to the upper limit (limit) of the continuous number of probable changes even though the prize ball was not obtained. It is the production shown. The resurrection effect allows the player to recognize that the big hit E2 has been won during the door break mode effect.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5006 that the hit pattern is not the big hit E2 (S5006: No), then, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is the big hit D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the jackpot D2 (S5009: Yes), a special effect mode indicating that a big hit has occurred in the door breakthrough mode effect is determined (S5010). Then, the present process ends.

  In the process of S5009, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a deviation (small hit) and the current fluctuation pattern Means that this is not the last change in the door break mode, so that the state of the breakthrough effect corresponding to the value of the extracted break mode counter 203ab is determined (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 according to the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is determined. Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the post-insertion flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and the process ends. By setting the post-insertion flag 223i to ON, it is possible to determine that the effect has been restarted in the middle of the door breach mode at the time of power-on, even when the next and subsequent fluctuation patterns are received.

  The door break mode effect in the second embodiment is basically 5.8 seconds from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the fourth special winning opening 650a opening period, similarly to the first embodiment. A series of effects of the effect time are set. That is, at the start of the door break mode effect, the result of the door break mode effect is determined in advance based on the result of the look-ahead of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, during the execution of the door break mode effect, when a new variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received, it is only necessary to simply execute the predetermined effect mode as it is. However, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door-break mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, and the progress of the door-break mode effect and the result of the effect are produced. Etc. cannot be grasped. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the power is shut off during the execution of the door-break mode effect, and when the power is turned on again, it is possible to recognize the fact by the post-input flag 223i. While the post-insertion flag 223i is on, every time the variation pattern command is received, the door break mode is set based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect, and to set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door-break mode effect while keeping the information output from the main control device 110 to a minimum.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. In the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) of the second embodiment, in S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment, S4801 to S4803, respectively. Also, the same processing as the respective processing of S4805 to S4809 is executed.

  In the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 is completed, then, the rough variation display mode (notified by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110) Based on the (variation time), a variation pattern determination process for determining a detailed effect form of the variation pattern is performed (S4811). Details of this variation pattern determination processing (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4811 is completed, a display variation pattern command is set based on the detailed effect of the variation pattern determined in the process of S4811 (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, the details of the above-described variation pattern determination processing (S4811) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the post-input flag 223i is on (S5101). If the post-input flag 223i is off (S5101: No), the main control device 110 Based on the rough mode of the variation pattern extracted from the output variation pattern command, the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern is determined (S5102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the post-input flag 223i is on (S5101: Yes), the power is turned off and then turned on again during the execution of the door breach mode effect. Therefore, a process for determining an effect mode during the door break mode effect is executed according to the information of the break mode counter 203ab included in the fluctuation pattern command and the lottery result.

  Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the change pattern command (S5103), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the last change in the door breakthrough mode effect). Is determined (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then, it is determined whether the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a deviation variation pattern. If it is determined (S5105) and it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation pattern (S5105: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current state is the special symbol variation state based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h. (S5106).

  In the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current state is the special symbol change state (S5106: Yes), an effect mode (see FIG. 10B) for notifying the shift to the certainty change mode is determined, and the process is performed. The process moves to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol (S5106: No), an effect mode (see FIG. 10A) for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

  In contrast, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and when the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), and when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation pattern has been notified (S5105: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot is E2 (S5109).

  In the process of S5109, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probable variations has been reached. Then, if the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times has been reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the end of the jackpot E2 cannot be set to the certainty change mode, so that the transition to the normal mode is notified. The flow shifts to the process of S5108 for determining an effect mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5110, when it is determined that the number of consecutive probable changes has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect form of the resurrection effect is determined (S5111), and the process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5109, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the big hit E2 (S5109: No), it is next determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit D2. If it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the jackpot D2 (S5112: Yes), the special door break mode effect for notifying the jackpot is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. And migrate.

  In addition, in the process of S5112, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5112: No), the variation pattern of this time is a variation pattern of small (small hit), and the remaining number of times of the variation in the door-through mode effect ( Since the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol) is 2 or more, the effect mode of the door break mode effect is determined according to the value of the break mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 (S5114). Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and the process ends.

  In the processing of S5116 executed after any of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 ends, the post-insertion flag 223i is reset to off, and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), this process ends.

  By executing this variation pattern determination process, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door-break mode production, after the power is turned on again, the production is performed from the middle of the door break mode production. The mode can be restored. More specifically, if the power is shut off during the execution of the door-break mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, so that the progress status of the door-break mode effect, the result of the effect, and the like can be grasped. You will not be able to. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the power is shut off during the execution of the door-break mode effect, and when the power is turned on again, it is possible to recognize the fact by the post-input flag 223i. While the post-insertion flag 223i is on, every time the variation pattern command is received, the door break mode is set based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect, and to set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door-break mode effect while keeping the information output from the main control device 110 to a minimum.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which the gaming state after the big hit is predetermined for each big hit type. Also, an upper limit (limit) is set for the number of consecutive special symbol change states, and if the upper limit is reached, the special symbol will be set to the low probability state after the big hit even if the winning is won. Make up. With such a configuration, it is possible to form two types, a door breaking mode (a door breaking mode 1) in which a special symbol is in a probable state and a door breaking mode in which a special symbol is in a low probability state. it can. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility that the mode shifts to the normal mode even if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed. Therefore, according to the number of times the probability change state continues, it is possible to provide a novel gaming property in which it becomes more advantageous or disadvantageous to have a big hit during the door breach mode.

  In the second embodiment, the motorized accessory 640b is provided for the second entrance 640, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary design, the electric accessory 640b is less likely to be opened. In the normal state (low probability state) of the symbol, the electric accessory 640b is configured to be easily opened. With this configuration, in the probable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. In addition, it is possible to suppress the execution of the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a state other than the state in which the door break mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. In addition, during the big hit set to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 includes information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the door break mode effect (the value of the break mode counter 203ab). Is included. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door-break mode effect, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 after the power is turned on again is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By simply analyzing on the side, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door break mode effect is being executed and the progress status in the case where the door break mode effect is being executed. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door breach mode effect while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern command is output including the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab, so that whether or not the door break-through mode effect is being executed when the power is restored is controlled by the voice lamp control. Although the apparatus 113 is configured to be able to determine, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only information on whether or not the second special symbol is being reserved and exhausted after the end of the jackpot is included in the variation pattern command. That is, it is not necessary to include the information of the remaining variable display count until the end of the door break mode effect in the variation pattern. Then, when the power is restored during execution of the door break mode effect, based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the type of the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command (hit or not). Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is the last change of the door break mode effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern command is always output including the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, after the power is turned on, only the first variation pattern command is output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Thereby, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is output by being included in the variation pattern command. However, it is not always necessary to include the value in the variation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode may be separately prepared. That is, the main controller 110 may notify the sound lamp controller 113 by a command only when the value of the counter 203ab is changed during the breakthrough mode. With this configuration, the data amount of the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, when the power is turned on, the game state is notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by a state command, and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the pre-read result of each reserved ball may be notified again by the winning information command. With this configuration, when the power is turned on while the door break mode effect is being executed, not only the fact that the door break mode effect is being executed but also the result of the door break mode effect is provided. When the power is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the condition. Therefore, the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the effect of the effect.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, the motorized accessory 640b is provided in association with the second entrance 640. Then, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b is longer when the ordinary symbol is hit. With this configuration, the ball is prevented (suppressed) from entering the second entrance 640 in the probable change mode in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a storage valve 63a capable of storing (stopping) a ball in the upper part of the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a ball stored in the storage valve 63a. When the stored state is released, there is provided a general winning opening 63 into which the stored ball can enter. Although details will be described later, the second entrance 640 in the present modification is provided at a position where entry of a ball is basically impossible (difficult) even if the ball is hit right. As an exception, a ball can enter the second entrance 640 only when the ball is right-handed in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when right-handed is performed in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, the ball that has flowed down by right-handed hits the third stored ball. The trajectory of the sphere may be changed to a trajectory capable of entering the second entrance 640. In the present modified example, the storage state is canceled at the normal time, and the storage state is set only during the big hit, so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 only during the big hit. .

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to attach the electric accessory 640b to the second entrance 640. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a can be attached to the first entrance 64. As a result, similarly to the first embodiment, in the probable change mode, the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so that the player can play a game without reducing the number of balls. In addition, with the configuration in which the motorized accessory 64 a is attached to the first entrance 64, the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “time saving state of the ordinary symbol” are set in the above embodiments. A missing game state can be provided. More specifically, the game state when the number of consecutive probable change states reaches the upper limit (limit) is set to the “low probability state of special symbol” and the “time saving state of ordinary symbol”, whereby the probable change mode is set. Is completed (after the limit is reached), a state in which a special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the holding ball for a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times) (so-called so-called lottery). Pullback state) can be set. This can prevent the player from immediately stopping the game after the probable change mode ends, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “low probability state of special symbol” and the “time saving state of ordinary symbol” will be referred to as “pull-back mode”.

  First, a game board 13 according to a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present modification, similarly to the first embodiment, an electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64. As a result, in the “probable change mode” and the “pull-back mode” that are set to the normal symbol time saving state, the electric accessory 64 a is easily released, and the ball is easily inserted into the first entrance opening 64. Therefore, in the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, it is configured such that the lottery of the first special symbol does not cause a small win.

  In addition, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80, a general winning opening 63 is provided in addition to the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 650. The general winning opening 63 is configured as a winning opening where one prize ball is paid out when the ball enters. A storage valve 63a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. The storage valve 63a can be changed between a protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) protruding toward the near side in front view and a buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) buried inside the game board 13. It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63a, the ball reaching the storage valve 63a can be prevented from flowing down to the general winning opening 63 by storing (stopping) the ball on the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, when the storage valve 63a is buried, a ball can pass through the storage valve 63a in front of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general winning opening 63. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86, in this modified example, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) at normal times other than during the big hit, and the storage valve 63a is set at the start of the big hit. Is changed from the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)). Then, at the end of the big hit, the storage valve 63a is again changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)).

  The protruding state and the buried state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the storage valve 63a projects in accordance with the start of the big hit, the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63 is closed by the storage valve 63a. Thereby, the sphere that has reached the flow path is stored (stopped) above the storage valve 63a, up to three spheres. Note that during the big hit, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless a ball is made to enter the specific winning opening 650a, so that the player almost right-hands during the big hit. In the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63, nails, windmills, and the like are arranged so that one out of two spheres fired by right-handed travels. Thus, during one round of the big hit, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), if three balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve 63a, and the ball is further right-handed, the right-handed ball is moved. In some cases, it may collide with the third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The ball that collides with the stored third ball is reflected in the direction opposite to the flowing direction so far, and in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the ball enters the general winning opening 63. The trajectory is such that the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modification of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a enters the storage state based on the jackpot, and the storage state is maintained until the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the player hits the ball into the specific winning opening 650a during the big hit and makes a right hit, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. If the player makes a right-handed hit to obtain a prize ball in a state where three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a, the newly fired ball collides with the stored ball. As a result, the ball enters the second entrance 640. In this way, the player continues to make a right-handed attempt to obtain a prize ball during the jackpot, so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit number (four) at the end of the jackpot. Can be. Although illustration is omitted, in a state in which three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, some of the balls fired by right-handing do not collide (interfere) with the stored balls. It flows down in the direction of the specific winning opening 650a. This allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 650a during the big hit.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As described above, when the big hit is completed, the state is changed from the protruding state to the buried state, and the buried state is maintained (held) until the next big hit. When the storage valve 63a is in a buried state, the sphere can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general winning opening 63. Therefore, the ball fired to the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the near side of the buried storage valve 63a and enters the general winning opening 63, or It flows down a flow path provided to the specific winning opening 650a, which is provided between the winning opening 63 and the second ball opening 640. In the present modification, since the storage valve 63a is buried until the next big hit after the big hit is finished, it is assumed that the right-handed ball normally enters the second entrance 640 in the normal state. Can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous lottery of the second special symbol from being executed at the normal time, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being too disadvantageous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a state transition method in this modification. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, probability change mode, door breaking mode 1 and door breaking mode 2) provided in the above-described second embodiment, a pullback mode is also provided. Is provided.

  The pullback mode is a state in which a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time saving state are set. In the present modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the continuous number of the probability change state is reached, the state after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. For this reason, in this modification, when the door breaking mode 2 is in the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in the door breaking mode 2, the pullback mode is set. .

  As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pull-back mode shifts to another mode when a lottery of a special symbol for a set number of time savings (25 times) is completed without a big hit or without a big hit. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbols for the number of working hours is lost, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In the pullback mode, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the continuous number of the probable change state is reset. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the mode shifts to the door breaking mode 1. .

  In this modification, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened in the normal symbol time saving state. Accordingly, since the opening control of the electric accessory 64a is the same in both the probability change mode and the pullback mode, it is difficult to determine from the appearance whether the mode is the probability change mode or the pullback mode. In this modified example, when the number of time savings ends and the player falls from the pullback mode to the normal mode, the player can recognize that the mode is the pullback mode. In other words, when a lottery of the first special symbol is won in the pullback mode, it is difficult to know whether the jackpot has been won in the probability change mode or in the pullback mode. Therefore, a big hit in the pullback mode can make the player feel as if the probable change state is continuing beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive probable change states. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, with the configuration in which the probable change mode and the pullback mode cannot be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 64a or the like, in this modification, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol have come off in the door breaking mode 2. Also in this case, an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed. Thereby, when the effect that the adventurer 811 succeeds in opening all the doors in the door break mode production is performed, whether the mode has shifted from the door break mode 1 to the certainty change mode, or from the door break mode 2 to the pullback mode. It can be difficult to understand whether the transition has been made. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is not known how long the jackpot and the mode in which the normal symbol time-saving state is set (probable change mode or pullback mode) continue.

  As described above, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the ball is configured to be able to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a, and the right-handed ball is set depending on whether or not the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a. It is configured to be able to switch the direction in which the flows down. When no ball is stored in the storage valve 63a, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, while the storage valve 63a stores the upper limit number (three) of balls. If so, the flow direction of a part of the newly fired ball is switched by the stored ball, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory capable of entering the second entrance 640. did. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that the ball does not easily enter the second ball entry port 640 even when right-handed when the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state. In addition, during a big hit in which the storage valve 63a is set in the protruding state, the ball can enter the second entrance 640 when the player hits right. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player at the normal time.

  Further, in the modification of the second embodiment, when the number of consecutive probable changes is the upper limit, a time-saving state of an ordinary symbol which is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. Configuration. With this configuration, when the number of consecutive times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit, until the predetermined number (25 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the number of balls held. Can be executed (pull-back mode). Therefore, even if the number of consecutive probable changes reaches the upper limit and the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the pull-back mode and the probability change mode, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set for both, so that it is difficult to distinguish each other from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, even if a big hit occurs in the pullback mode, it is possible to make the player feel as if a big hit has been made in the certainty change mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which it is possible to make the user feel as if the probability change state continues beyond the upper limit of the probability change state.

  In a modification of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and depending on the state of the storage valve 63a, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Although the configuration in which the state in which the ball can enter the ball is switched, the invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general winning opening 63, a storage valve 63a may be provided above the second ball entrance 640. The storage valve 63a is set in the buried state during the big hit so that the right-hit ball can enter the second entrance 640. The valve 63a may be configured to be in a protruding state so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. As a result, the general winning opening 63 can be omitted, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the modified example of the second embodiment, the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive probable changes, but instead, an upper limit may be set to the number of special symbols drawn in one probable state. In other words, when the probability change jackpot is reached, the special symbol change state may be continued after the jackpot, for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probable changes has been reached, so that the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Also, in this case, when the first special symbol jackpot is reached, the special symbol positive change state and the normal symbol time saving state are set, while if the second special symbol lottery wins, With a high probability (for example, a rate of 95%), almost no prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type that shifts to a certain state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol after a jackpot may be determined. . With this configuration, similar to the above-described embodiments, a novel playability in which a game is performed in the hope that a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated during the jackpot does not become a jackpot is realized. be able to.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above has a configuration in which the second entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 65a are provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 in a front view. There is a possibility that only the right-handed ball may flow into the right-hand flow path in front view (the ball does not flow into the right-hand flow path in front view even if left-handed). In both the mouth 640 and the specific winning opening 65a, when the player hits right, the ball can enter the ball (easy entry), and when the player hits the ball left, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter the ball). For this reason, when a large hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the ball is hit right to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second entrance 640. It is possible to set the state in which the reserved balls of the symbols are accumulated up to the upper limit. Thereby, after the big hit of the first special symbol, a state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the big hit occurs, is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the player hits the ball left, the ball can enter (easy entry), and when the player hits the ball right, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). Two types of specific winnings: 656a and a right specific winning opening 657a in which the ball can enter (easy entering) when the ball is hit right and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) when hitting the left. A mouth was provided. Then, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, only the left specific winning port 656a is opened in all rounds (the right specific winning port 657a is hard to be opened), and the left specific winning port 656a in the first round. Is opened, and a big hit type in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened) is provided. That is, there are few opportunities to make a right-handed hit during the jackpot (there is a difficulty in storing reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot), and there are many opportunities to make a right-handed action (holding balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot). The jackpot type (which is easy to accumulate) is provided. If the jackpot type is such that there is little opportunity to make a right-handed hit (the reserved ball of the second special symbol is difficult to accumulate during the jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot is included in the reserved ball existing at the end of the jackpot is reduced, The possibility of shifting to the probable change mode can be increased. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is such that there are many opportunities to make a right hit (the reserved ball of the second special symbol easily accumulates during the jackpot), there is a high possibility that the jackpot is included in the reserved balls existing at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode is relatively low. This makes it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the type of jackpot, so that when a jackpot occurs, attention can be paid to the type. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation until the jackpot type is determined can be further increased.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable display, as the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol is increased. The type of jackpot type is suggested by the type of. More specifically, the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (reserved balls of the second special symbol easily accumulate). In the case of an unfavorable jackpot type, it is notified that a jackpot has been reached by arranging three main symbols imitating the same number on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (reserved balls of the second special symbol easily accumulate). In this case, a notification is provided in which three main symbols imitating any of the eight types of numbers other than “7” among the numbers “1 to 9” are arranged on the display screen. Furthermore, when the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot type in which all rounds are left-handed), one of the third symbols imitating the numbers “1 to 9” May be aligned. That is, when three main symbols with odd numbers other than “7” are aligned, it indicates that the jackpot is at least 16 rounds, and when the main symbols with “7” are aligned, Means that in addition to the 16 rounds, the type of jackpot is such that a prize ball can be acquired by performing a left-handing in all rounds of the jackpot. This allows the player to play the game paying attention to the types of the main symbols aligned on the display screen at the end of the variable display, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot type in which all rounds are digested by left-handing) is the most advantageous jackpot type, and numbers other than “7” are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, after that, a promotion effect that is changed to "7" (promoted) is executed by the promotion effect performed during the jackpot. In other words, at the most advantageous jackpot, during the variable display effect or during the jackpot after the variable display effect, the “7” completes indicating the most advantageous jackpot are reported. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (the reserved ball of the second special symbol is easily accumulated). In the case where the numbers are aligned, a promotion effect that is changed (promoted) to an odd number of numbers other than “7” is performed by the promotion effect performed during the jackpot. That is, in the 16th round jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened other than in the first round, an odd number of numbers other than “7” is notified during the variable display effect or the big hit after the variable display effect. In addition to the first round, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened, and in the case of a small number of rounds (5 rounds or 2 rounds), even numbers are aligned by a variable display effect, and the promotion effect has been developed. Even in this case, even numbers are kept aligned without being changed (promoted) to odd numbers. In this way, by providing the promotion effect, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot types having a once lower degree of advantage in the variable display effect (even numbers of the same number corresponding to five rounds or two rounds of jackpots) are reproduced. Even if the combination of the third symbol that has been stopped is displayed, the combination corresponding to the jackpot type having a high degree of advantage by the promotion effect (the most advantageous large jackpot, which corresponds to “7”) (E.g., combination) can be expected from the player. This can improve the interest.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. , The configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 88, in the gaming board 13 according to the third embodiment, instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment being deleted, a left variable winning device 656 is provided in the left channel of the gaming board 13. In addition, a right variable winning device 657 is provided in the right channel. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment. That is, the ball that has entered the left specific winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharging channel 65e2 inside the left variable winning device 656. As described above, the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the big hit, and when the ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3, the special change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit ends. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 657 has only a function of paying out eleven prize balls when detecting a ball entering the right specific winning opening 657a. In other words, the winning device has a simple configuration in which a switch (probable change switch 65e3) for determining whether or not to apply the probable change state is not provided inside.

  The left specific winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is the first round (in the case of the jackpot A3 to C3 described later) or all rounds (in the case of the jackpot D3 described later) when the first special symbol jackpot is won. ). On the other hand, the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds when the jackpots A3 to C3 are reached. When the jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, a prize ball can be obtained only by continuing left-handing during the jackpot. In other words, there is no need to make a right-handed hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the jackpot is completed, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous (that is, a probable change state is given). Difficult) There is no possibility of a big hit (low). In other words, there is no possibility of a big hit again (low) in the lottery executed after the big hit based on the reserved ball existing at the end of the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to give the player greater satisfaction. Hereinafter, a jackpot type that can digest a jackpot by performing left-handing in all rounds is referred to as “left-handed jackpot”. On the other hand, a jackpot type that digests the jackpot by right-handing after the second round is referred to as “right-handed jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type in which the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless the player hits right in the second and subsequent rounds. (It becomes difficult), and a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, at the end of the big hit, it is possible to bring the state in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol have accumulated to the upper limit. If there are many reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit, the possibility of a big hit after the big hit in the lottery based on the reserved balls becomes higher than that of the left-handed big hit. For this reason, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to form a state where the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous in the case of the jackpot, is continuously executed. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to play a game in the hope that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the big hit will come off (small hit).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, a promotion effect which is a type of display effect in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as described above, the main symbol with the number “7” may be aligned only during the variable display that informs the left-hand hit. In addition, the main symbols to which odd numbers other than “7” are attached may be aligned during the variable display for reporting the 16-round jackpot. In other words, even in the variable display for notifying the left hit and the 16-round variable display, the main symbols with even numbers may be aligned. In the third embodiment, in the variable display for notifying the 16-round jackpot or the left-handed jackpot, if the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, after the opening period of the jackpot to one round is completed. Over the interval period, the main symbol once aligned in the fluctuation display is changed (promoted) to a main symbol imitating a number “7” or a main symbol imitating an odd number other than “7”. Be executed. Accordingly, even when the main symbols imitating the even numbers are prepared in the variable display, it is possible to expect that the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot and the symbol is imitated to the odd numbers. Therefore, even when even-numbered symbols are aligned in the variable display, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being reduced. In addition, the promotion effect is configured such that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is higher than that when the promotion fails. Thereby, at the time when the promotion effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation for promotion can be improved.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a jackpot opening period in which a promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), during the jackpot opening period in which the promotion effect is set, the third symbol (the main symbol imitating “2” in the example of FIG. 89 (a)) in the variable display is displayed. Continues to be displayed. In addition, a display area HR5 in which characters of “CHANGE UP !!!! Further, to the left of the display region HR5, a display region HR1 in which a character “left” and an image of an arrow pointing left are displayed. On the lower right side of the display screen, a cannon 815 is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the effect using the cannon 815 is performed by performing the left hit.

  Note that the left-handed notification is made during the opening period because the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left-handing during the opening period, a ball can be efficiently won at the left specific winning opening 656a at the start of the first round.

  FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), during one round, when the winning of the ball (entering the ball) with respect to the left specific winning opening 656a is detected, the third symbol (the main symbol imitating "2") is changed by the cannon 815. The effect of bombardment is performed. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the third symbol, the position where the shell is bombarded is blocked by the smoke K1. Thereafter, every time a ball is detected in the left specific winning opening 656a, an effect of bombarding the third symbol (bombardment effect) is executed, and smoke increases.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in a jackpot in which a promotion effect has been set. As shown in FIG. 90A, at the end of one round, smokes K1 to K7 are displayed so as to cover all of the third symbol. By obscuring all the third symbols, it is possible to make the player predict whether the third symbols appearing after the clearing of the smoke has remained an even number or have been promoted to an odd number. Can be improved with respect to the promotion of.

  FIG. 90 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an interval period after one round is completed in a case where the promotion to the left-handed jackpot is successful (that is, the current jackpot type is the left-handed jackpot). . As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the promotion to the left-handed hit is successful, after the smokes K1 to K7 have cleared, an effect in which three main symbols imitating the number “7” appear is executed. Is done. In addition, in the display area HR5, a character "Promote to a super big bonus !!" is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the left hit has been made. Therefore, a great sense of satisfaction can be given to the player.

  When the symbol is promoted to a symbol representing a 16-round right-hitting jackpot (a main symbol imitating an odd number other than "7"), the character "promote to big bonus !!" is displayed in the display area HR5. Is displayed. If the promotion fails (that is, if the current jackpot type is a right-handed jackpot other than 16 rounds), the main symbol is changed to an even-numbered symbol even after the smokes K1 to K7 have cleared. The effect that is not performed is performed, and the character “Promotion failure...” Is displayed in the display area HR5. These display contents allow the player to easily understand whether or not the promotion has been successful, and if the promotion has been successful, the jackpot type. Therefore, an easy-to-understand effect can be provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the positive variable switch 65e3 is provided inside the left variable winning device 656, and the left variable winning device 656 is used for both left-handed hits and right-handed hits. The specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the opening operation can be the same in both the case of the left hit and the case of the right hit until the interval period of one round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a, it is difficult to distinguish between a left-handed hit and a right-handed hit. Therefore, when the promotion effect is executed, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the contents of the effect, so that the effect of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is executed in the first round in which the left variable winning device 656 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is provided is operated. With this, when the promotion effect is executed, even if the ball wins (enters) into the left specific winning opening 656a and it is determined that the ball will be changed to a certain state after the big hit, attention is paid to whether or not the ball is promoted. Thus, the remaining games in the first round can be played.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, a game during a jackpot is performed with the most attention being paid to whether or not a probable change state occurs. That is, it is general to play a game during a big hit by paying the most attention to whether or not a ball wins a winning opening having a built-in probability change switch. However, once the ball has passed the probable change switch and is determined to be in the probable state, the player is satisfied at that point and the remaining game at the jackpot is just like working to get a prize ball. There was a case that would be.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing through the probable change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and is determined to be in the probability change state, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so that the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from simply becoming an operation for obtaining a prize ball, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91A, the ROM 202 according to the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that an open scenario selection table 202e is added. Are different. Also, the difference is that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the third embodiment, four types of big hits A3 to D3 are provided as big hits of the first special symbol. In addition, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbol. The jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment, respectively, and have the number of rounds of 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds, and 16 rounds, respectively. In other words, it is a jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in a round other than the first round of the jackpot. In the right-hitting jackpot, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened from the second round. Therefore, if the right-hand winning is not performed after the second round, the ball cannot be won in the right specific winning opening 657a to obtain a prize ball. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, by continuing to make a right hit during the jackpot, a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 and the jackpot ends. At times, a disadvantageous second special symbol reserved ball may be accumulated to the upper limit. Therefore, after the end of the jackpots A3 to C3 and E3, it is possible to shift to the door breaking mode, similarly to the end of the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment. Thereby, after the end of the jackpots A3 to D3 and E3, it is possible to provide a novel gaming property in which a game is performed in the hope of not winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. it can.

  On the other hand, the jackpots D3 and H3 are left-handed jackpots with 16 rounds, and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. When the left hit is a big hit, a prize ball can be obtained only by keeping the left hit during the big hit. In other words, there is no need to make a right-handed hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the jackpot is completed, it is disadvantageous in the second special symbol lottery (that is, a probable change state is given). Difficult) There is no possibility of a jackpot (transition directly to the probable change mode without going through the door breach mode). Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type (jackpot D3, H3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to give the player greater satisfaction.

  The jackpots F3 and G3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots E and F in the first embodiment, and are jackpot types in which it is difficult for a ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, in each round of the jackpot, the right specific winning opening 657a is a jackpot type that is opened only for 0.2 seconds. Since the right variable winning device 657 is not provided with the probable change switch 65e3, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from passing through the probable change switch 65e3 when the jackpots F3 and G3 occur. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be made more disadvantageous. Note that, with the configuration in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round when the big hits F3 and G3 occur, in the third embodiment, even when the small hitting occurs, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened. It is configured to be open. Thereby, when the right specific winning opening 657a is opened, it is difficult to determine whether the opening is due to the big hits F3 and G3 or the small hit. it can. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not the second special symbol has been hit from the operation of the right specific winning opening 657a. As in the case of the first embodiment, attention is paid to the result of the door breaking mode effect. A game can be played.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), for the first special symbol, the "big hit A3" of 16 rounds is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". (See 202b1 in FIG. 91 (b)), and in the range of “5 to 84”, “big hit B3” having five rounds is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 91 (b)). ), The range of “85 to 94” is defined in association with “big hit C3” having two rounds (see 202b3 in FIG. 91B), and the range of “95 to 99” is round. A "big hit D3" of 16 rounds is defined in association (see 202b4 in FIG. 91 (b)). The value that the first hit type counter C2 can take is 100 "0 to 99", so that when the first special symbol hits, the "big hit A3" is determined at a rate of 5% (5 / 100). Similarly, the rate at which "big hit B3" is determined is 80% (80/100), the rate at which "big hit C3" is determined is 10% (10/100), and "big hit D3" is determined. Is 5% (5/100). That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of the right-handed jackpot (big hit A3 to C3) is 95%, and the ratio of the left-handed jackpot (big hit D3) is 5%. Since the ratio of the left-hand hitting jackpot is extremely lower than the ratio of the right-hand hitting jackpot, the player can be made more satisfied when an advantageous left-hand hitting jackpot is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), for the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 3”, “big hit E3” of 16 rounds is included. It is defined in association (see 202b5 in FIG. 91 (b)), and in the range of “4 to 48”, “big hit F3” having seven rounds is associated and defined (see FIG. 91 (b)). 202b6), the range of "49 to 98" is associated with the "big hit G3" of six rounds (see 202b7 in FIG. 91B), and the number of rounds is "99". The "big hit H3" of 16 rounds is defined in association (see 202b8 in FIG. 91B). Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the rate at which "big hit E3" is determined is 4% (4/100), and the rate at which "big hit F3" is determined is 45% (45/100). The rate at which the "big hit G3" is determined is 50% (50/100), and the rate at which the "big hit H3" is determined is 1% (1/100). That is, in the case where a jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, the rate at which the jackpot (any one of the jackpots F3 and G3) to which the probable change state is hardly given is determined is 95%. Therefore, when the second special symbol has a big hit during the door breaking mode, the mode is shifted to the normal mode at an extremely high ratio (95%). The percentage of the jackpot where the left specific winning opening 656a is opened (the probability change state is given after the jackpot) is 5%, of which 4% is a right-hit jackpot (jackpot E3) and 1% is a left-hit jackpot ( Jackpot H3). Therefore, in the case of a left-handed hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to make the player feel very lucky, and to make the player feel more joy. .

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect may be executed even when the jackpots E3 and H3 are reached. Each of the jackpots E3 and H3 is a jackpot of 16 rounds. Therefore, the jackpots E3 and H3 become jackpots E3 and H3. When a promotion effect is executed, an effect is displayed in which the main symbols imitating odd numbers other than “7” are displayed in the variable display. After that, in the promotion effect, an effect of whether or not to be promoted to the main symbol imitating “7” is executed. The jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that can only be selected at a rate of 1% in the jackpot of the second special symbol, but excludes the possibility of the jackpots F3 and G3 occupying 95% of the jackpot when the jackpot is announced. Is done. That is, when the jackpot is notified in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined that the distribution is the jackpot E3 of 4% or the distribution is the jackpot H3 of 1%. Therefore, the jackpot H3 is obtained at a rate of 1/5, so that the player can be made aware that this is the most advantageous jackpot chance. Furthermore, as described above, the promotion effect is set so that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is set to be higher. Therefore, the jackpot is announced by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the promotion effect is developed. In this case, the player's expectation of the jackpot H3 can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the release scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The open scenario selection table 202e indicates, for each jackpot type, a specific winning opening type (either the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) to be opened in each round of the jackpot as an opening scenario, and an opening period ( It is a data table that defines a long release for a maximum of 30 seconds or a short release for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. When the jackpot is won, the open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won this time is read from the open scenario selection table 202e, and stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba described later. During the big hit, the opening operation of each round is set according to the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot types “jackpot A3” to “jackpot C3” and “jackpot E3” (ie, right-handed jackpot), a left specific prize for the first round The long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the mouth 656a is associated and defined, and the long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the right specific winning opening 657a is associated and defined for each round after the second round (FIG. 92 (a), 202e1). As a result, in the case of a right-hitting jackpot, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each of the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless a game during a jackpot is performed by aiming at the right specific winning opening 657a by right-handing, so the second entrance provided on the right side of the game board 13 A large number of balls enter the 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, the reserve ball of the second special symbol can be set to the upper limit value at the end of the right-hitting big hit, and the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is continuously executed after the big hit is completed. Mode "can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is performed with the expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be continuously deviated after the end of the jackpot.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “jackpot D3” and “jackpot H3” (that is, left-hit jackpot), the length of the left specific winning opening 656a for all rounds is set. Opening (up to 30 seconds) is defined in association (see 202e2 in FIG. 92A). As a result, in the left-hitting big hit, in all rounds, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained only by performing the left-hand aiming at the left specific winning opening 656a. That is, there is no need to make a right hit during the big hit, and there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-hitting jackpot, in many cases, the number of unfavorable second special symbols at the end of the jackpot is 0, and the most advantageous directly after the jackpot without going through the “door breaking mode”. The mode can be shifted to the “probable change mode”. Thereby, in the case of a left-hand hit, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “jackpot F3” and “jackpot G3”, the right specific winning opening 657a is shortly opened for all rounds (up to 0.2 seconds). ) Are defined in association with each other (see 202e3 in FIG. 92A). As a result, in the case of "big hit F3" and "big hit G3", it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball, and the ball is made to enter the left specific winning opening 656a, and passes through the probability changing switch 65e3. There is no possibility to do it. In other words, it is possible to form a disadvantageous jackpot without obtaining a prize ball and without giving a certain change state after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, by setting the opening operation according to the opening scenario specified in the opening scenario selection table 202e, the same opening operation can be accurately set every time in all jackpot types. Can be.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92B, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The open scenario storage area 203ba has a storage area for storing (storing) the open scenario when the open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is read out from the open scenario selection table 202e after winning the jackpot. It is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, according to the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba and the number of new rounds, the type of specific winning opening to be opened (left specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening). The mouth 657a) and the opening period (either long opening for a maximum of 30 seconds or short opening for a maximum of 0.2 seconds) are determined.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 93A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93A, the ROM 222 of the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20A) in that a promotion effect lottery table 222b is added. Are different. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. The promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery). Values) are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit A3” as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j (FIG. 93). (See 222b1 in (b)). Although the details will be described later, the effect lottery counter 223j is configured as a random number counter that generates a value in a range of “0 to 99”, and can take 100 values of “0 to 99”. Therefore, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined when the “big hit A3” is reached is 50% (50/100). When it was "Big hit A3" (16 round right-handed big hit) and the promotion effect was decided, an effect in which three main symbols (third symbol) imitating the same even number in the variable display were executed. Thereafter, in the promotion effect at the jackpot, an effect of promoting to the main symbol imitating the same odd number other than “7” is executed, and it is reported that a 16-round right-handed jackpot has been achieved. On the other hand, when the promotion effect has not been determined, an effect in which the main symbols imitating an odd number other than “7” are prepared in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, but the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), “0-19” is associated with “big hit B3”, “big hit C3”, and “big hit E3” as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (See 222b2 in FIG. 93 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 20 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so "big hit B3" and "big hit C3". , And "big hit E3", the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 20% (20/100). In the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes “Big hit B3” (5 round right-handed jackpot) or “Big hit C3” (2 round right-handed jackpot). After an effect in which three main symbols imitating the same number are arranged is performed, an effect in which promotion is failed in the promotion effect at the jackpot is executed. If the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect in which the main symbols imitating the even numbers are aligned in the variable display effect, a normal jackpot effect without developing into the promotion effect (see FIG. 8) Is executed.

  In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes "big hit E3" (right-handed hit of 16 rounds), and when the promotion effect is determined, the same odd number other than "7" is imitated in the variable display. After an effect in which three symbols are aligned is performed, an effect in which the promotion fails in the promotion effect executed during the jackpot is executed. In the case where the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect in which the main symbols imitating the same odd number other than “7” are arranged in the variable display is executed, the normal jackpot without developing into the promotion effect is performed. An effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), for "big hit D3" and "big hit H3" (left-handed big hit of 16 rounds), "0-79" is set as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (See 222b3 in FIG. 93 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 80 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so that "big hit D3" or "big hit H3" Is "80% (80/100)". When the promotion effect is determined by the "big hit D3" in the lottery of the first special symbol, the effect in which three main symbols imitating the same even number are aligned in the variable display is performed, and then the promotion in the jackpot is performed. In the effect, the effect is promoted to the main symbol imitating the number "7", and the 16th round left hit is notified. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is determined to be "big hit H3" and the promotion effect is determined, an effect is executed in which three main symbols imitating the same odd number other than "7" are displayed in the variable display. After that, in the promotion effect at the jackpot, an effect of being promoted to the main symbol imitating the number of “7” is executed, and it is notified that it is a 16-round left-handed jackpot. If the promotion effect is not determined, an effect is executed in which the main symbols imitating the number “7” are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, but the normal jackpot effect is executed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 93 (c), the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 20 (b)) in that the effect lottery counter 223j and the promotion It is different in that a rendering flag 223k is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The production lottery counter 223j is a counter used for the lottery of the production mode such as the determination of the execution of the promotion production (lottery). This production lottery counter 223j is. The value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When the promotion effect is drawn by lottery, it is determined whether any one of the random number values (counter value) specified in the promotion effect lottery table 222b matches the value of the effect production lottery counter 223j, and if the values match, the promotion effect is performed. Is determined.

  The promotion effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether a promotion effect is set. If the in-promotion effect flag 223k is on, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. The promotion effect flag 223k is set to ON when a special design lottery is selected, and one of the jackpots A to E or G is won, when the promotion effect execution lottery executed at the start of the change of the third symbol is won. (See S5405 in FIG. 103). In addition, it is set to off after setting the end of the promotion effect (see S4515 in FIG. 101).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, the processes in S201 to S221 are the same as those in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, when the process of S219 is completed, then, the opening scenario for selecting the opening scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type from the opening scenario selection table 202e. A scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of the release scenario selection processing (S241) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the above-described open scenario selection processing (S241). In the release scenario selection processing (S241), first, the release scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 92A) is read (S1901), and the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified (S1902). Next, the specified open scenario is stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and the process ends.

  According to the release scenario specified in the release scenario selection process (see FIG. 95) and stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba, the release operation of each round during the big hit can be set to an appropriate operation according to the big hit type. .

  Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during the jackpot.

  Of the jackpot control processes 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processes as those in S1107 to S1112 are executed. In the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 38), a jackpot operation setting process 3 is executed (S1131), and the process ends. Details of the big hit operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131). The jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the number of jackpot rounds. In the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1202 to S1204 are the same as the processes of S1202 to S1204 of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

  When the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment is executed, first, the data of the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba is read (S1211), and the read data is read. , The type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the current round (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) and the opening time are specified (S1212). Next, the opening of the specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) of the type specified in the processing of S1212 is set (S1213), and the opening time specified in the processing of S1212 is started this time. The time is set as the round time of the round (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1202.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97), the opening operation can be accurately set for each round according to the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the jackpot-related process 3 (S4221) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot-related process 3 (S4221) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

  Of the jackpot-related processes 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, the respective processes of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are the respective jackpot-related processes (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are executed.

  In the jackpot-related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the opening command has been received in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then, whether or not the promotion effect is set , An opening command process for setting a corresponding opening effect is executed (S4411), and this process ends. Details of the opening command processing (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot-related process 3 (see FIG. 98) of the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4403 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the round number command (S4403: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a winning command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4412). In the processing of S4412, when it is determined that the winning command is included (S4412: Yes), the specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 656a or A winning command process for setting a winning effect when a winning for the right specific winning opening 657a) is detected is executed (S4413), and the process ends. Details of the winning command processing (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that the winning command is not included (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4405.

  In the jackpot-related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4405 that the close command has been received (S4405: Yes), the close command process (FIG. 98) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the close command process 3 is executed (S4414), and this process ends. Details of the close command processing 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the above-described opening command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the opening command processing (S4411).

  In the opening command process (see FIG. 99), first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201: Yes), An opening effect (see FIG. 89 (a)) corresponding to the promotion effect is determined (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5204. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, when it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5201: No), the opening effect of the mode according to the current jackpot type is determined (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. In addition, the mode according to the jackpot type, in the case of the jackpots F3 and G3, is an effect in a mode as if the door breakthrough mode effect is continuing. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type other than the jackpots F3 and G3, the effect is such that a jackpot is notified.

  In the process of S5204, a display opening command indicating the mode of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and the process ends. By executing the opening command process, an opening effect in an appropriate mode can be executed according to whether or not the promotion effect is set.

  Next, the details of the above-described winning command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When the winning command processing (S4413) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301: Yes) ), A bombardment effect of bombarding the main symbol with the cannon 815 (see FIG. 89 (b)) is executed (S5302), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5301: No), a normal winning effect is set (S5303), and the process ends. Note that the winning effect in the normal mode refers to an effect suggesting the acquisition of a prize ball, for example, an effect for acquiring gold coins is performed, or an effect in which characters “GET” are displayed is executed.

  By executing the winning command processing (see FIG. 100), in one round of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set, the main design is stepped by the shelling effect every time the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a. It can be hidden with smoke images. By executing an effect in which the main symbol is hidden and it is not known whether to be promoted or not, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation for promotion.

  In the third embodiment, the notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed in the interval period after one round is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the result. If the lottery is won, the end condition of one round (7 or more balls are won) , Or 30 seconds have elapsed), the result may be reported even if the condition is not satisfied. Further, for example, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, it may be configured to determine by lottery the number of times the winning in the left specific winning opening 656a will be notified of the result of the promotion effect. With this configuration, it is possible to expect that the promotion is notified every time the ball wins the left specific winning opening 656a. Therefore, the game in the first round of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is set. Of the elderly can be further improved. Further, in a case where the result of the promotion effect can be notified even if the end condition of the first round is not satisfied, the result may be notified before the end condition is satisfied only when the promotion is performed. . That is, in the case where the promotion fails, the promotion failure is always notified in the interval period after the first round is completed. On the other hand, in the case where the promotion is successful, the left specific winning opening is provided at a predetermined rate. The notification may be performed with the number of winnings less than the upper limit number of winnings for 656a. With such a configuration, while the promotion is expected to be notified each time a winning is made to the left specific winning opening 656a, if the promotion fails, the feeling of expectation for the promotion is longer (until the end of one round). Can be maintained.

  Next, the details of the close command processing 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This close command process 3 (S4414) is a process executed in place of the close command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the closing command processing 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, the processing in S4502 to S4505 is the same as the processing in S4502 to S4505 in the closing command processing (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

  When the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effecting flag 223k is on (S4511). If it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion effect flag 223k is ON (S4511: Yes), it means that the first round end condition of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is satisfied. That is, it means that it is the timing to notify the result of the promotion effect, and next, it is determined whether the ongoing big hit is any of the big hits B3, C3, or E3 (S4512). In the process of S4512, if it is determined that none of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: No), it is determined that the jackpot type for which the promotion effect is set this time is the jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, it means that the type of jackpot is successful promotion. In this case, an interval effect (see FIG. 90 (b)) for notifying the successful promotion is set (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4515. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4512, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is any of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that the jackpot type fails to be promoted. An interval effect of notifying of the promotion failure is set (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the promotion effect is set by turning off the promotion effect flag 223k (S4515), and the process ends.

  In the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion effecting flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the running big hit Is a big hit F3 or G3 (S4516). In the process of S4516, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is either the jackpot F3 or the G3 (S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4516 that the jackpot being executed is neither the jackpot F3 nor the G3 (S4516: No), an interval effect in a mode according to the number of rounds is set (S4517), and the process is terminated. finish.

  By executing the close command process 3 (see FIG. 101), when the end condition of the promotion effect is satisfied (it is the end timing of one round), a result in an appropriate mode is notified according to the jackpot type. be able to.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. In the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) of the third embodiment, the respective processes of S4801 to S4809 are the same as the respective processes of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment. The processing is executed.

  In the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, a promotion effect lottery process for determining whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery) is executed (S4821). ) And the process moves to S4804. Details of the promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that notifies any of the jackpots A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401). If it is determined that the variation pattern is not a variation pattern for notifying any of them (that is, it is either out of place or one of the jackpots F3 and G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility of executing the promotion effect, so this processing is performed as it is. To end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the variation pattern is to notify any of the jackpots A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401: Yes), a process for selecting whether or not to execute the promotion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read out (S5402), and among the read out tables, the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is set to the range of the counter value (random number value) corresponding to the current jackpot type. It is determined (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be performed by determining whether there is a matching value (S5403). Then, it is determined whether the execution of the promotion effect has been determined in the determination (lottery) by the processing of S5403 (S5404).

  In the process of S5404, when it is determined that the execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5404 that the execution of the promotion effect has been determined (S5404: Yes), the execution of the promotion effect is indicated by setting the promotion effect flag 223k to ON (S5405), and this time It is determined whether the jackpot type is one of the jackpots E3 and H3 (S5406).

  In the process of S5406, when it is determined that neither the big hit E3 nor the H3 is made, it means that the execution of the promotion effect is determined as the big hit of the first special symbol, and the third symbol imitating the even number is changed. The stop symbol at the time of stop is set (S5407), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, when it is determined that the hit is one of the jackpots E3 and H3 (S5406: Yes), it means that the execution of the promotion effect has been determined as the jackpot of the second special symbol. A third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” is set as a stop symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop (S5408), and the process ends.

  By this promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), it is possible to determine whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery) and to set a stop symbol when the promotion effect is won.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the player hits the ball left, the ball can enter (easily enters the ball), and when the player hits the ball right, the ball cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). The left specific winning opening 656a and the right specific winning opening 657a in which the ball can enter when the player hits the right (ball entry is easy) and the ball cannot enter the ball when the player hits left (difficult to enter the ball). Two types of special winning ports are provided. When a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a during the big hit, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656, so that a special symbol is formed after the big hit. Is given. On the other hand, when the ball enters the right specific winning opening 657a, the same number of prize balls as when the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a is paid out, but the gaming state set after the big hit Does not affect In the third embodiment, as a type of the jackpot, a left-handed jackpot in which only the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds (a victory ball is more played when a left-handed player is hit than a right-handed player in all rounds). The right-handed jackpot 656a is opened in the first round, and the right-specified winning port 657a is opened in other rounds (the right-specified winning port 657a is easily opened) in the first round. In the second and subsequent rounds, a right hit is easier than a left hit than a left hit. In the case of a left-hitting jackpot, it is not necessary to make a right-handing during the jackpot (there is little chance of making a right-handing). A prize ball cannot be obtained (is difficult) if the player does not make a right-handed shot after the round, so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol easily accumulates during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, it becomes difficult to execute the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot (the possibility that the jackpot of the second special symbol is suspended at the end of the jackpot becomes low). On the other hand, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, a disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed after the end of the jackpot (at the end of the jackpot, the second special symbol jackpot may be reserved). Is higher than the left-handed jackpot). Thereby, after the end of the left-handed hit, a game can be performed with confidence until the next hit. On the other hand, after the end of the right-hitting big hit, a game can be performed in the expectation that the big hit will not become a hit until all the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is completed. As described above, in the third embodiment, the playability after the end of the jackpot can be switched according to the jackpot type, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot, the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol after the jackpot (ease of holding the in-condominium) may be changed according to the jackpot type. Can be. This makes it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. Therefore, when the most advantageous left-handed jackpot is achieved, a greater satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing through the probable change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and is determined to be in the probability change state, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so that the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from simply becoming an operation for obtaining a prize ball, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, whether the right-hit jackpot or the left-hit jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the round in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened and the number of times may be arbitrarily determined. In the case where the right specific winning opening 656a is opened in a round other than the first round due to a right-handed hit, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in the first round to start the first round. At the time, the jackpot type is known. Therefore, the promotion effect may be executed during the opening period while the jackpot type is unknown.

  In the third embodiment, two types of variable prize apparatuses, a left variable prize apparatus 656 and a right variable prize apparatus 657, are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, respectively. The variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13. Then, the storage valve 63a may be provided upstream of the second entrance 640, similarly to the modification of the second embodiment described above. Then, instead of providing a left-handed hit and a right-handed hit, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during the big hit (that is, even if the right-handed hit is made during the big hit, the ball reaches the second entrance 640). It is also possible to provide a jackpot type that is not possible and a jackpot type in which the storage state is released (that is, a ball can reach the second entrance 640 when the player hits right during the jackpot). With this configuration, the number of variable winning devices can be reduced, and the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the effect of bombarding the third symbol with the cannon 815 is executed as the promotion effect, but the effect of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any production mode may be set as long as it is a production that can easily inform the player of two types, a mode in which promotion is successful and a mode in which promotion is unsuccessful. An effect in which the person 811 attacks the third symbol to promote the symbol may be executed. Further, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. Instead of displaying the third symbol, for example, the adventurer 811 and the enemy may perform a battle effect, and the victory over the enemy may be notified of the left hit. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the effect can be further increased.

  In the third embodiment, the timing for notifying the result of the promotion effect is set to the end timing of the first round, but is not limited to this. For example, the result of the promotion effect may be notified when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in the left specific winning opening 656a. Further, the winning number that triggers the notification of the result does not need to be fixed, and may be determined by lottery, for example. In this case, a winning number that is selected in the case of a left-handed hit and a winning number that is selected in the case of a right-handed hit may be set. With such a configuration, a player who wants to detect a jackpot type (whether a left-handed hit or a right-handed hit) at an early timing based on the timing at which the result of the promotion effect is notified is identified with a left identification. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have won (entered) the winning opening 656a. Therefore, the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the promotion effect by lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to always execute the promotion effect. Thereby, the lottery process of the promotion effect can be omitted, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, for example, when a right-handed hit is made, a promotion effect in which promotion is always failed is executed, and when a left-handed hit is made, a number “7” is displayed in a variable display effect by lottery. A configuration that determines whether the third symbol imitating the number is fixedly displayed or the main symbol imitating an even number is once displayed, and is promoted to the third symbol imitating the number “7” by the promotion effect. It may be. With this configuration, in the event of a right-handed hit, a game during a big hit can be performed in anticipation of promotion each time. Furthermore, the third design corresponding to the jackpot type may be definitely displayed in the variable display effect without executing the promotion effect in all the jackpot types. Thereby, an arbitrary effect can be executed in the opening period of the jackpot or in the first round, so that the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased.

  In the third embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol results in a left-handed hit, and in the case of executing the promotion effect, the variable design effect always displays the third symbol imitating the even number in the variable display effect. , But is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” is fixedly displayed and promoted to a main symbol imitating the numeral “7” by a promotion effect. In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is executed from the opening period of the jackpot to one round of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be such that a promotion effect is executed within the fluctuation period of the variable display effect that informs the jackpot, or a configuration where the promotion effect is executed over the fluctuation period and the opening period of the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying whether the hit is a left-handed hit or a right-handed hit. However, there is no distinction between a left-handed hit and a right-handed hit. It is good also as composition applied to machine 10 (for example, a general game machine with a probability change big hit and a normal big hit). More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability change jackpot, a third symbol imitating an even number or a third symbol imitating an odd number is determined and displayed by a variable display effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a third symbol imitating an even number is fixedly displayed by the variable display effect. Then, when the third symbol imitating the even number is confirmed and displayed at the probability change jackpot, a promotion effect of promoting the third symbol imitating the odd number may be performed thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the promotion effect in which the promotion fails may be executed at a predetermined ratio. Thereby, the versatility of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the probable change switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable winning device 656, and if a ball does not enter the left variable winning device 656 during the big hit, a special symbol certain change state is given after the big hit. Was not configured. That is, in the first round, even in the case of a right-hitting big hit, the game is performed by aiming at the left variable winning device 656 by left-handing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be such that the positive variable switch 65e3 is provided inside the right variable winning device 657, similarly to the left variable winning device 656. Then, in the case of a right-handed hit, only the right variable winning device 657 may be configured to be able to enter the ball in all rounds. With this configuration, in the case of a right-hitting jackpot, only the first round passes the ball through the probability changing switch 65e3 by left-handing to obtain a prize ball, and stops the launch of the ball in the remaining rounds. The method can be prevented from being performed. That is, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the right-hitting jackpot, the ball is launched only in the round (first round) in which the left specific winning opening 656a can enter. Irregular game methods can be suppressed. When this irregular game method is executed, although the prize ball obtained by the right-handed hit is small (only one round is obtained), since the draw of the disadvantageous second special symbol is not executed, it is usually performed. Never fall into mode. Therefore, the probability change state may continue semipermanently, and there is a possibility that an unexpected disadvantage is given to the hole. On the other hand, by setting the right variable winning device 657 so that only the right variable winning device 657 can enter the ball in the right-handed hit, the above-mentioned irregular gaming method can not be fundamentally established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall.

  In the third embodiment, by changing the ease of entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 during the jackpot according to the jackpot type, the retained balls held at the end of the jackpot are different from each other. The possibility that the jackpot is included (so-called on-hold in-house) is variable. In other words, by switching the direction in which a prize ball can be obtained by firing a ball in accordance with the type of jackpot, the possibility of physically generating a reserved in-house is different, but this is not a limitation. It is not something that can be done. For example, a configuration may be used in which the likelihood of occurrence of a reserved in-house is controlled in a variable manner. More specifically, for example, similar to the first embodiment, a special winning opening for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit is provided only on the right side of the game board 13 and the special symbol state is changed. The number of lotteries may be made different according to the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot where the number of lotteries in the probability change state is one and a jackpot where the number of lotteries is four) may be provided. With this configuration, in the case of the jackpot type in which the number of lotteries in which the probability change state is one, the probability of a jackpot in the second and subsequent special symbol lotteries is reduced, so that the first lottery is not performed. In such a case, there is a high possibility that all lotteries based on the reserved ball will be missed. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries in the probability change state is four, all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are executed in the probability change state of the special symbol, so that the lottery is suspended at the end of the jackpot. The chance of winning a jackpot in a lottery based on a reserved ball increases. Therefore, the same operation as the above-described third embodiment can be realized with only one variable winning device. In the case of a configuration in which the probable change state is terminated with a predetermined number of lotteries according to the jackpot type, as in the present modification, for example, all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are out of order. In such a case, it may be configured so as to reduce the time of the ordinary symbol as a privilege. That is, the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is in a certainty change state is different from the number of lotteries in which a normal symbol is in a time saving state, and regardless of the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is in a certainty change state, for example, 100 special symbol lotteries are performed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be in the time saving state of a normal symbol until it completes. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, a jackpot type in which the probable change state of the special symbol is not provided and only the time reduction state is provided may be provided. With such a configuration, since the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the end of the big hit can be all performed in a low probability state of the special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol may be completely removed. It is possible to increase the possibility of becoming.

  In the third embodiment, a jackpot type in which a reserved ball of the second special symbol easily accumulates during a jackpot and a jackpot type that is difficult to accumulate are provided. Is different for each jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting a jackpot type in which a reserved ball of a normal symbol is likely to be stored during a jackpot and a jackpot type in which a reserved ball of a normal symbol is unlikely to be stored during the jackpot, the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol at the end of the jackpot is reduced. It is good also as a structure which makes it different and makes it possible to change the possibility of a normal symbol hit after a big hit. In addition, by making the winning probability of the ordinary symbol after the jackpot vary according to the type of the jackpot, the ordinary symbol can be obtained for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (for example, until all the reserved balls of the ordinary symbol at the end of the jackpot are consumed). It is good also as a structure which makes the winning ratio different according to the big hit type. Also in the case of such a configuration, the degree of advantage of the player can be varied according to the type of the jackpot, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the type of the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, when the promotion effect is set, the ball enters the specific winning opening 656a in the first round, and even after it is determined that the special symbol will be in a certain state after the big hit, Each time the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, an effect (an effect of bombarding the third symbol) that excites the expectation of whether or not to be promoted is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be configured to be executed during the jackpot opening period. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is open (for example, an effect in which an image imitating the character “V” is displayed) may be executed. Good. With such a configuration, the player does not notice that the jackpot has started, and continues to see the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specific winning opening 656a (a jackpot of a probable change). Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the probability change state from being given after the big hit). Also, for example, in the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is open is displayed during the first round (even after the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a). It may be configured to continue to be executed, and to execute the promotion effect after one round is completed. Also in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a ball from being missed in the left specific winning opening 656a, and it is possible to suppress an excessive disadvantage to the player. Furthermore, the promotion effect is not executed at all (that is, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and the inside of the jackpot is a round in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened. The effect indicating whether or not may be continuously executed during each round. Thereby, it is possible to surely prevent the player from mistakenly launching the ball in the wrong direction.

  In the third embodiment, when the ball that has entered the inside of the left variable winning device 656 passes through the probable change switch 65e3, the pachinko machine 10 of the specification that shifts to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot is one big hit. In the round, the player wins the left specific winning opening 656a and notifies the result of the promotion effect after the probability change state is confirmed. However, the specifications to which the promotion effect can be applied are not limited to this. Absent. The promotion effect can be applied to a specification in which there is a case where, at a predetermined timing, there is a case where the state shifts to either an advantageous state for the player or a disadvantageous state compared to the advantageous state. For example, when a ball enters a specific area inside a variable prize device provided on a game board, a promotion effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 of a specification to which a jackpot is given. That is, in the lottery based on the start winning, the lottery is performed to determine whether or not the ball can easily enter the variable winning device (movability of the variable winning device), and the lottery of the variable winning device is won. In this case, even if the ball is thrown into the variable winning device and the ball does not enter the specific area, the jackpot is not given. In this specification, the type of the jackpot given when the ball enters the specific area may be notified after the ball hits the specific area and the jackpot is determined. More specifically, at the time when the lottery of the variable prize device is determined to be movable, the lottery of the jackpot type given when the player enters the specific area and the execution of the promotion effect are determined by lottery. Then, when the lottery of the promotion effect is won, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type (for example, the same even number) is displayed even if the player wins the advantageous jackpot type. Then, when the ball enters the variable winning device while the variable winning device is moved and the ball is allowed to enter, and the ball enters the specific area, the ball corresponds to the original jackpot type An effect of displaying the combination of the third symbols (for example, promoting to an odd identical number or maintaining an even identical number) is executed. With such a configuration, even after the ball enters the specific area, it is possible to draw attention to the effect in expectation of an advantageous jackpot type being notified by the promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from entering the specific area to ending the big hit from being merely like a task for obtaining a prize ball. That is, since the game can be prevented from being monotonous, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is not provided (the game state after the big hit is predetermined according to the big hit type), the game state after the big hit end can be notified by the promotion effect. You may. In other words, during the jackpot, the player is configured to make it difficult to distinguish between the time saving state and the probable change state after the jackpot, and a part of the case where the time saving state is set and the case where the probable change state is set Thus, at the end of the jackpot, it is notified that the time has been reduced. If the probable change state has been set, the promotion effect is executed after the jackpot, and based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, when a predetermined number of start winnings is detected), the promotion effect is changed to the probable change state. It may be configured to execute a promotion effect. In addition, when the time reduction state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and the promotion effect is executed, an effect that fails to promote to the probable change state may be executed based on a predetermined opportunity. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 in which the same opening pattern is set for a specific winning opening with a small hit and a so-called thorough odds is once notified that the small hit is a small hit, and the win is awarded with a chance. May be configured to notify the promotion to a thorough propulsion at a predetermined opportunity by a promotion effect. Furthermore, an open pattern that cannot be passed through the probable switch is set by a jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the probable switch and a jackpot type in which an open pattern that cannot be passed through the probable switch are set. The configuration may be such that the jackpot type is notified, and the promotion to the jackpot type in which an opening pattern that can pass through the probability change switch is set at a predetermined timing.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described third embodiment, when the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is started, the promotion effect is executed over the opening period of the jackpot, the first round period, and the interval period. In the promotion effect, an effect is performed in which the combination of the main symbols confirmed and displayed in the variable display effect that notifies the jackpot is promoted to a combination of the main symbols corresponding to the jackpot having a higher degree of advantage for the player, and the promotion is performed. If successful, the system is notified that the jackpot type is more advantageous.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, a configuration in which one variation display effect is executed in a pseudo manner in the execution period of the variation display for notifying the jackpot and the period from the start of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. It was. Thus, in addition to whether or not a jackpot is achieved, the type of the jackpot (whether a left-handed hit or a right-handed hit) in the case of a jackpot can be notified by the variable display effect of 1.

  FIG. 104 (a) is a display that can be displayed when a left-handed jackpot (any of the jackpots D3 and H3) is obtained in the special symbol lottery and when the reach state occurs due to the special symbol lottery. It is the figure which showed the aspect. As shown in FIG. 104A, in the present modification, when the reach state occurs, the character “Left strike” and the image of the left-pointing arrow are displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in the display area HR1. In the upper center portion of the display screen, a display area HR5 in which a character "strike to the left to stop the design!" Is displayed. By these displays, the player can easily understand that the symbol is stopped and displayed by firing the ball to the left.

  In the case of a jackpot, the display mode shown in FIG. 104A is set at the timing when the jackpot opening period is started. That is, in the present modification, the third symbol is not stopped and displayed even in the jackpot opening period, and remains in the reach state. Under this situation, if the player does not suggest left hitting, firing the ball toward the left specific winning opening 656a in the first round may be delayed. If the launch to the left specific winning opening 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be made to enter the ball during the opening period of the left specific winning opening 656a (the ball does not pass through the positive change switch 65e3), resulting in a positive change big hit. Nevertheless, there is a possibility that the probability change state will not be given after the jackpot. In order to prevent such a situation, in the present modification, at the time when the opening period is started during the execution of the variable display, an effect indicating left-handing (see FIG. 104A) is executed. Also, in order to prevent (suppress) the detection of a big hit from the display mode, a predetermined timing (for example, one second before the third symbol is fixedly displayed) even during the execution of the out-of-shift display. The effect (see FIG. 104 (a)) indicating that the player has left-handed is executed. This makes it possible to determine whether the game is a big hit or a miss until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's expectation of the big hit can be maintained for a longer time.

  FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when one of the jackpots D3 and H3 is reached and all the third symbols are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the number “7” is triggered by the fact that the player makes a left-handed operation and the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a during the performance indicating the left-handed operation. An effect in which a third symbol (a main symbol) imitating is prepared is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the left hit has been made. In addition, by using a configuration in which a jackpot is notified based on the fact that a ball has entered the left specific winning opening 656a, attention can be paid to the whereabouts of the fired ball (whether the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a). A game can be played. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. If a special symbol is drawn by lottery and an effect indicating left hit is performed, the left specific winning opening 656a is not opened, so that the ball fired by left hitting enters the left specific winning opening 656a. I will not do it. In this case, after a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed after the effect indicating left-handing has been executed, a stop symbol of a combination that is out of alignment (combination other than a double stitch) is stopped and displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 104, the case where the jackpots are D3 and G3 has been described as an example. However, a similar effect is executed for other jackpots. In other words, when the jackpots are A3 and E3, an effect is performed in which a third symbol (main symbol) imitating an odd number other than “7” is prepared. An effect in which a third symbol (a main symbol) imitating the numeral of (i) is prepared is executed. Also, in the case of the disconnection accompanied by the reach state, the reach state may be set by a number other than “7”.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a temporal change of the effect mode after the start of the variable display effect in a case where a special symbol lottery results in a big hit and a case where the special symbol is released with a reach state. First, with reference to FIG. 105 (a), a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when a big hit occurs.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows a change over time in the effect mode in the case of developing into a super reach and becoming a big hit. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is started, first, the normal variable display is performed for 10 seconds, and then the reach state occurs at the time of 10 seconds. . Thereafter, after a normal reach effect for 20 seconds, a super reach effect is developed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Further, after the super-reach effect has continued for 28 seconds, an effect indicating left-handing (left-hand navigation, see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the effect indicating left-handed is displayed, the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display corresponding to the jackpot has actually elapsed, and the opening period of the jackpot has entered. ing. Therefore, in the first symbol display device 37, the variation display of the first symbol (special symbol) ends when 58 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation, and a stop symbol indicating a big hit is displayed.

  When one second of the opening period elapses and a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a after the left specific winning opening 656a is opened, a third symbol (the third symbol imitating the same numeral) on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. An effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) in which the main symbols are aligned is executed. Then, it is notified that the big hit has been made, and an effect indicating that the big hit is being executed is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), even in the case of an out-of-order lottery result with a reach state, from the start of the variable display until the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed. Is common to the case of the jackpot (see FIG. 105 (a)). Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), in the case of a deviation, one second after the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed, the combination of the third symbols indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed. Then, it is notified that it has come off.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 105, the fluctuation time when the special symbol is a big hit is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time when the special symbol is lost by 2 seconds. This is because, when the out-of-change display is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol is notified during the execution period of the change display, whereas when the change display of the hit is executed, the big hit is displayed. This is because the variable display is performed over the opening period and the period of the first round. If the same fluctuation time is used for the jackpot and the miss, the timing of generating left-handed navigation will be different between the case of the big hit and the case of the miss, and the lottery result will be calculated before the end of the fluctuation effect due to the difference in the fluctuation time. There is a risk of being perceived. On the other hand, in the present modified example, since the variation time is longer in the case of the hit than the jackpot, the timing of displaying the left-handed navigation can be matched between the hit and the hit. Therefore, it becomes difficult to detect the result of the special symbol lottery based on the fluctuation time, so that the result of the fluctuation display effect can be noticed.

  As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern, the big hit opening period, and the first round period are changed. In this configuration, the variable display effect 1 is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the type of the jackpot in one variable display effect in addition to whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not. Can be.

  Note that, in the present modified example, in a case where a big hit occurs in the variable display effect, the reach state is set with the number type corresponding to the big hit type, but the promotion effect is executed as in the third embodiment described above. A lottery configuration may be used. Then, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect is performed using the remaining period after the jackpot symbol is announced in the first round of the jackpot and the interval period after the first round ends. May be executed. With such a configuration, even if the third symbols with even numbers are once prepared, it is possible to expect that the promotion effect is executed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In this modification, an image suggesting left-handing is displayed in the display area HR1 at the upper left of the display screen in the opening period of the jackpot and the last two seconds of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the departure. It is not something that can be done. For example, an effect indicating left-handing to the player may be performed in a manner that is more conspicuous than the changing third symbol. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above-described modification, a character “Aim for V!” And a left variable winning device 656 are provided on the layer on the front side of the changing third symbol. It may be configured to display a schematic image. When the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a (when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit), the image in which the third symbol imitating the same number is stopped and displayed is displayed. As a background, an image imitating the character “V” may be displayed on the near side of the third symbol. The display of the image imitating the character "V" may be continued until, for example, one round ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to look at the result of the effect without hitting the ball until the fluctuation display ends. Therefore, when a big hit occurs, the ball can be more reliably made to enter the left specific winning opening 656a in the first round. Further, for example, the changing third symbol may be displayed in a translucent manner so that the effect indicating left-handedness may be more conspicuous, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, a small hit is made with a high probability. When the small hit occurs, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the big hit E, The opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of F is configured to be the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the end of the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . Thus, regardless of whether the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol reserved at the end of the jackpot or in the case where all of the jackpots are off, the period until the door break mode effect is completed. The configuration was such that a series of opening and closing operations of the opening and closing door 65f1 were the same.

  On the other hand, in the present fourth embodiment, a jackpot of a type in which the player can easily detect whether or not the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is out of range, and a type of the jackpot which is difficult to detect. A jackpot was provided. Thus, depending on the type of jackpot, the game performance is such that it is not known whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door break mode production is confirmed, and the door break mode production is performed whether or not it has come off. It is possible to switch between game characteristics that are easy to detect during the game.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ROM 202 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b and the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed. It is different in that it is. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, in the fourth embodiment, five jackpot types of jackpots A4 to E4 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Also, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of jackpots F4 to H4 are provided.

  The jackpots A4, B4, D4, and F4 to H4 are jackpot types that perform the same operations as the jackpots A to F in the first embodiment. That is, the jackpots A4 and F4 each have a jackpot of 16 rounds, the jackpot B4 is a jackpot of 5 rounds, and the jackpot D4 is a jackpot of two rounds. When these jackpots occur, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds in each round, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the jackpot, and the ball can be easily passed to the positive change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Can be. The jackpot G4 is a jackpot with seven rounds, and the jackpot H4 is a jackpot with six rounds. When these jackpots occur, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at the maximum in each round, so that almost no prize balls can be obtained, and there is almost no possibility that the balls pass through the positive change switch 65e3 during the jackpots. Absent.

  The jackpot C4 operates in the same manner as the jackpot B4 (5 rounds jackpot), but after the jackpot ends, during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol, whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is removed. It becomes easy to determine. More specifically, at the time of the jackpot C4, when the jackpot ends and the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the fluctuation time (3 seconds) having a length different from the interval period (1 second) of the jackpots G4 and H4. Seconds). Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened, it can be estimated whether or not the lottery of the special symbol has been missed. In other words, if the player feels that the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened after the big hit clearly exceeds 1 second, the opening of this time becomes a special symbol (small hit). It can be recognized that there is a high possibility that the opening is based on the fact.

  The jackpot E4 has the same operation as the jackpot D4 (two rounds jackpot), but, like the jackpot C4, is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is out of place after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the case of the jackpot C4 or the jackpot E4, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened, it is determined whether or not the winning has occurred. It is configured to be able to guess. Thereby, after the end of the big hit, the game can be performed not only by the content of the door break mode effect but also by paying attention to the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1). In particular, during the performance of an effect that has a high risk of becoming a disadvantageous second special symbol jackpot (an effect of opening the door 814 using the tattered key 813), the identification is performed. If it is felt that the opening interval of the winning opening 65a exceeds one second, the possibility that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation is increased, so that the player can be relieved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the big hit (big hit C4, E4) in which it is easy to estimate whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is missed is referred to as “special hit”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the jackpots A4, B4, D4, and F4, as in the first embodiment, whether the lottery result of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is out (small jackpot) or jackpot. Cannot be identified (difficult) from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, depending on the type of the door break mode effect, it is not known whether or not the hit of the second special symbol is included until the result is confirmed. Since it is possible to switch between easy-to-detect game characteristics during execution of the door-break mode effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot B4 and the jackpot C4 are configured so that the operation during the jackpot (opening the specific winning opening 65a, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81) is exactly the same. I have. Similarly, the jackpot D4 and the jackpot E4 are configured so that the operations during the jackpot are exactly the same. For this reason, when the jackpot ends in 2 rounds or 5 rounds, it is difficult to know whether the hit of the second special symbol is included or not until the result of the door break mode production is confirmed, It is difficult to discriminate which of the game characteristics, which is easy to detect during the execution of the door break mode effect, is set. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is continuously set as the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, whether the second special symbol hit was included until the result of the door break mode effect was confirmed. It is possible to make the player think that the playability that is unknown is set. Therefore, the game can be performed with the expectation that the game mode will shift to the probability change mode until the door break mode effect is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 106, for the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit A4” is defined in association with the range of the value “0 to 9” of the first hit type counter C2, and “10 to 19” Is defined in association with "big hit B4", the range of "20-89" is defined in association with "big hit C4", and the range of "90, 91" is defined with "big hit". “D4” is defined in association with “big hit E4” in the range of “92 to 99”. In other words, in the five rounds of "big hit B4" and "big hit C4", "big hit C4" (special hit) is selected at a higher ratio (seven times easier to select). . In addition, in the “big hit D4” and the “big hit E4” of the two rounds, the selection rate of the “big hit E4” (special hit) is higher (five times easier to select). . With such a configuration, it is possible to easily set a game property that makes it easy to detect whether or not the player has come off during the execution of the door-break mode effect. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, the game can be played with more attention to the operation of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Since the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each of the big hits F4 to H4 is the same as the big hits D to F in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

  Next, a variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107A, the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A). The difference is that a hit / after hit table 202d8 and a special hit / after hit table 202d9 are added.

  The special winning after-hit table 202d8 indicates that the special symbol has been changed after the special winning (big hit C4 or E4) is finished and the number of times the special symbol has changed is four or less, and the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit. Is a data table referred to in FIG. In addition, the special hit after-miss table 202d9 indicates a case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed after the end of the special hit is four or less, and the lottery of the second special symbol results in a loss (small hit). Is a data table referred to in FIG. Details of the special hit / after-hit table 202d8 and the special hit / after-miss table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c).

  FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit / after-hit table 202d8. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), in the special hit-after-hit table 202d8, a "hit middle change" with a change time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the value "0" of the change type counter CS1. , “1 to 198”, a “short-period fluctuation” with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in association with the range. For this reason, if the big win is achieved by the lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the special win, the fluctuation time of one second is set with a high probability (198/199), but with a low probability (1/199). A change time of 3 seconds may be set. For this reason, when the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds), it is not determined that the lottery result of the loss (small hit) is determined, but the big hit is won. It is possible that

  FIG. 107 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit-and-miss table 202d9. As shown in FIG. 107 (c), the special hit-and-miss table 202d9 corresponds to "out-of-middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds for the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 66". In addition, a “short-circuit variation of one second” with a variation time of one second is defined in association with the range of “67 to 198”. For this reason, if a lottery of the second special symbol is lost (small hit) after the special hit, a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds or more. As described above, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol after the special hit, the change time of 3 seconds is selected only with a very low probability, so the change time is 3 seconds ( When the player recognizes that it has exceeded 1 second), it can be assumed that the currently displayed variable display is highly likely to be a variable display corresponding to the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to realize the gaming ability that the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode can be predicted from the set change time during the execution of the door break mode effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 108, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that a change counter 203ca and a post-special flag 203cb are added. Are different in that

  The fluctuation number counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation display (special symbol lottery) executed after the big hit. The initial value of the variation counter 203ca is set to 0, and is incremented by one each time the special symbol variation start timing is reached (see S2001 in FIG. 110 and S2201 in FIG. 112). Also, when a special symbol lottery wins, the initial value is reset to 0 (see S253 in FIG. 109). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the variation number counter 203ca (FIG. 111). See S2103 and S2109).

  The special hit flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether or not the previous big hit was a special hit (big hit C3 or E3). If the post special hit flag 203cb is on, it means that the previous big hit is a special hit, and if it is off, it means that the previous big hit is not a special hit. The initial value of the special hit flag 203cb is set to off, and is updated at the start of the big hit according to the big hit type (see S254 in FIG. 109). When the second special symbol lottery is executed, one data table for determining a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d with reference to the special hit flag 203cb (see FIG. 111). See S2105 and S2111). In the fourth embodiment, the special hit flag 203cb is updated when the start of the big hit is set. However, the update may be performed at the end of the big hit.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 4 (S131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S201 to 212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28). ), The same processes as those of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S207 ends, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol is performed. The process is executed (S251), and the process ends. The details of the special figure 2 change start process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S212 is completed, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed (S252), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 1 change start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off. At the same time, the variation counter 203ca is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S253). Next, the special hit flag 203cb is updated according to the type of the big hit that has been won this time (S254), and the process proceeds to S220. In the process of S254, the special hit flag 203cb is set to ON when the special winning (one of the big hits C3 and E3) is won this time, and is set to OFF when the other special hit type is selected. By switching the state of the special hit flag 203cb according to the big hit type, it is possible to switch the data table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern according to the state of the special hit flag 203cb after the big hit. Therefore, if the special hit flag 203cb is on, when determining the change pattern of the second special symbol after the big hit, the change pattern is referred to by referring to the special hit after-hit table 202d8 and the special hit after-miss table 202d9. Is determined, so that it is possible to relatively easily infer whether or not the game has come off based on the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a. Also, if the special hit flag 203cb is off, it is determined whether the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit has been won or missed from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a, so that it is difficult to distinguish the gaming ability. .

  Next, the details of the above-described special figure 2 change start process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 change start process (S251) is a process for starting a change pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, as described above.

  In the special figure 2 change start process (see FIG. 110), first, the value of the change number counter 203ca is updated by adding 1 (S2001), and the data of the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is obtained. (S2002). Next, the probable change flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the probable change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the probable change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state (S2003: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 per unit acquired in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol change state (the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S2003: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 is determined. , And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13B) (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol big random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 39”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

  Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S2004 or S2005 is executed (S2006). Details of this special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing (S2006) ends, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing (S2006) is set ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set (S2009), and the process ends. These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36).

  Next, the details of the above-described special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S2006) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is a process for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol as described above.

  In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S2101), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S2101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 110), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in S2002 of the special figure 2 change start process (see FIG. 110) is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106). , The jackpot type is determined. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot F4 (16 rounds of the probability variable jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of "5-49", it is a jackpot G4 (7 rounds regular jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50-99", it is a jackpot H4 (6 rounds regular jackpot). It is determined (see FIG. 106).

  In the process of S2102, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit F4 to H4). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit F4 to H4) is set as the stop type.

  Upon completion of the process in S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103). If the value is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), it is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d that the per-figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d5 is read (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2103, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is ON (S2105), and the special hit flag is determined. If the switch 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), the special hit / after-hit table 202d8 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2106), and the process shifts to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the post-special hit flag 203cb is off (S2105: No), the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (four or less variation) is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d ( (S2107), the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the result of the current lottery of the special symbol is out of place (S2101: No), first, a display mode at the time of out of place is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The stop type to be displayed at 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109). If it is determined that the value is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), the special pattern 2 deviates from the variation pattern selection table 202d (5 or more variations). ) Table 202d7 is read (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2114. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is ON (S2111), and If the flag 203cb is ON (S2111: Yes), the special hit / missing table 202d9 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process shifts to S2114. If it is determined in the processing of S2111 that the post-special hit flag 203cb is off (S2111: No), the table 202d6 for special figure 2 deviation (four or less fluctuation) is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2113). ) And the process moves to S2114.

  In the process of S2114, the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is determined based on the data table read by any of the processes of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112, and S2113 and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The variation pattern to be indicated is determined (S2114), and this process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described special figure 1 change start processing (S252) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 1 change start process (S252) is a process for starting a change pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, as described above.

  Among the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 112), in each of the processing of S2201 to S2205 and S2214 to S2216, S2001 to S2005 and S2007 to S200 of the above-described special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 110), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S2009 is executed.

  In the special figure 1 change start process (see FIG. 112), when the process of S2204 or S2205 ends, it is then determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol acquired in the process of S2204 or S2205 is a big hit ( If it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S2206: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) to determine what the big hit type is. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot A4 (16 rounds probability change jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of "10 to 19", it is a big hit B4 (five rounds of the probability change big hit), and if it is in the range of "20 to 89", it is a big hit C4 (five rounds special hit). It is determined that if it is in the range of “90, 91”, it is a jackpot D4 (two rounds of probability change jackpot), and if it is in the range of “92 to 99”, it is a jackpot E4 (two round special hits). The determination is made (see FIG. 106).

  In the process of S2207, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A4 to E4). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hits A4 to E4) is set as the stop type. When the process of S2207 is completed, the special figure per hit table 202d1 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is out of place (S2206: No), the display mode at the time of out of place is set (S2209). In the processing of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The stop type to be displayed at 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the probable change flag 203g whether the special symbol is in the probable change state (S2210). If it is determined that the probable change state is in progress (S2210: Yes), the special pattern 1 deviates from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. The (probable change) table 202d3 is read (S2211), and the process shifts to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2210 that the special symbol is not in the certainty change state (S2210: No), the special figure 1 departure (normal) table 202d2 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2212), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S2213.

  In the process of S2213, a variation pattern is determined based on the data table read out by any of the processes of S2208, S2211, or S2212 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process proceeds to S2214. I do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a jackpot of a type that allows the player to easily detect whether or not the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is out of range, It is configured to provide a jackpot of a type that is difficult to detect. More specifically, if the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is missed, the big hit type (special hit) in which the fluctuation time of a period different from the jackpot interval period of the second special symbol is likely to be selected. And a jackpot type that is difficult to select. Thereby, after the end of the special hit, the player can estimate whether or not the lottery result is out of order by paying attention to the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1. That is, it is possible to cause the player to predict the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode before the result of the door-break mode effect is notified. On the other hand, after the jackpot other than the special jackpot ends, it is determined from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 whether the opening / closing operation is due to the continuous small hit or the opening / closing operation due to the hit jackpot G4 or H4. It becomes difficult. Thus, depending on the type of jackpot, the game performance is such that it is not known whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door break mode production is confirmed, and the door break mode production is performed whether or not it has come off. It is possible to switch between game characteristics that are easy to detect during the game. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol after the special hit is lost (small hit), the interval period of the big hit of the second special symbol (1 second) is longer (3 seconds). ) Is set so that the change time is easily set (ratio of about 1/3), but the change time (that is, the interval until the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in the case of the deviation) is limited to this. Not something. The range may be arbitrarily determined as long as the player can determine that a period different from the interval period has been set. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is easily set. With this configuration, since the opening and closing doors 65f1 are opened and closed at clearly short intervals, there is a high possibility that the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 65f1 for the player this time is due to a small hit. You can make me think. Therefore, a game can be played by paying attention to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1. In addition, a variable member capable of performing a variable operation is provided separately from the opening / closing door 65f1, and the variable operation of the variable member is performed after a special hit or a special hit. It may be configured to be different.

  In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 which is disadvantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is premised, but when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, It may be applied to an advantageous pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, as the number of times that the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened at one-second intervals continues after the end of the jackpot, the sense of expectation about the advantageous second special symbol jackpot increases, so that the game is played. The player can play the game by paying attention to the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1.

  In the fourth embodiment, a configuration is provided in which the type of the variable operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 after the end of the jackpot is different between the case where the variable operation is out of place and the case of the jackpot, and the type of the jackpot which is likely to be the same variable operation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect of the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 may be such that a large jackpot type that is likely to be different between a case of a miss and a large jackpot and a jackpot type that is easily matched are provided. Further, for example, depending on the type of the jackpot, if the odds are lost in the special symbol lottery, the odds are small (that is, the open / close door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)). It is good also as a structure to make it. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the opening / closing door 65f1 will not be opened (that is, it will come off).

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 139. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 is set during a big hit. When the ball passes, the game state after the big hit is set to a probable change mode (probable change state of a special symbol and time saving state of a normal symbol) which is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, instead of the variable prize device 65, a V prize device 670 having the same appearance and internal structure as the variable prize device 65 and having the functions of the components different from each other is provided. ing. The V winning device 670 opens the opening / closing door 670f1 when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, and enters a state where game balls can enter. Inside the V winning device 670, a V winning switch 670e3 is provided at a position corresponding to the positive change switch 65e3 in the first embodiment. A game ball that has entered the V-prize device 670 during the opening period of the opening / closing door 670f1 passes through the above-described V-prize switch 670e3, so that a large hit game is provided after the small hit is completed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol lottery is a small hit and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the V winning device 670. In this case, a big hit is started. In the fifth embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability (for example, at 9/10) only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 6400). (The lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol), and the ease of entering the second entrance 6400 in accordance with the game state. It is configured to be variable. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the probability of a big hit in a special symbol lottery is set to be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second entrance 6400 (the normal symbol hit and the The probability of winning a small hit varies depending on the game status, and the possibility of winning a large hit depends on the game status. (So-called specifications of a type 1 and type 2 mixer).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, three types of game states are provided. Specifically, a time-short game state A in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400, a normal game state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second entrance 6400, and There are three types of time-saving gaming state B. In the time-saving gaming state A, by playing a game aiming at the second entrance 6400, a game ball can be made to enter the second entrance 6400 with a high probability, and the second ball is hardly reduced. The special symbol lottery can be executed continuously. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the time saving game state A, the time saving game state A is again set at a high rate (a ratio of 80%). Therefore, once the time saving game state A is reached, the time saving game state A and the big hit are achieved. It is easy to repeat. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state A is a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and therefore, it is difficult for the V prize due to a small hit to occur. Therefore, the possibility of a big hit is reduced. In addition, even if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of transition to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit is reduced (for example, a rate of 50%), so that the normal game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. It becomes. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state B, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400 in the same manner as in the normal game state. Since the rate of transition to the gaming state A is the highest (for example, a rate of 100%), the state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

  In the fifth embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the time saving game state A, either the time saving game state A or the time saving game state B is set as the game state after the end of the big hit. With this configuration, even if the time-saving game state A is not set, the time-saving game state B is more advantageous than the normal game state (it is easy to shift to the time-saving game state A when a big hit occurs). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game when the time-saving gaming state A ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the following description of the fifth embodiment, the most unfavorable normal gaming state is referred to as “normal mode”, the most advantageous time-saving gaming state A is referred to as “rensou mode”, and the disadvantageous staying state is changed to the extendeds mode. Is referred to as a "pull-back mode".

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. This is a change, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 113 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113, in the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 64a provided along with the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. Note that, at the first entrance 64 in the fifth embodiment, a game ball fired (left-hit) toward a flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front is viewed. While it is possible to enter the ball, the game ball fired (hit right) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the ball. Thus, the arrangement of nails and the like is set. In addition, below the first entrance 64, there is provided a variable winning device 650 that is set in a state in which game balls can enter in each round of the jackpot. The specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 is configured as a winning opening in which ten winning balls are paid out every time a game ball wins.

  A V winning device 670 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view. As described above, the V winning device 670 has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 4 to 6), but is configured differently in the function of each unit. More specifically, in the V winning device 670, the opening / closing door 670f1 on the upper surface is normally closed, and the opening / closing door 670f1 provided on the upper surface is closed for a predetermined period only when a small win is achieved by a special symbol lottery. It is released (for example, for 1.5 seconds), and a state is formed in which a game ball can enter the inside through the V winning opening 670a which is an opening. Inside the V winning device 670, instead of the normal discharge channel 65e1 (see FIG. 6 (a)) and the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6 (b)) in the first embodiment, the same structure is used. Are provided with a normal discharge channel 670e1 and a special discharge channel 670e2. The game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 670e1 and the special discharge flow path 670e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The special discharge channel 670e2 is provided with a V winning switch 670e3 that starts a big hit after a small hit when a game ball passes. Although the details will be described later, during the small hit, the game balls are basically distributed to the normal discharge channel 670e1, and are distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2 only for a short period (for example, 0.075 seconds). To form For this reason, even if a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 670 during the opening period (1.5 seconds) of the opening / closing door 670f1 based on the small hit, it is distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2. If the period is not a certain period, the normal discharge flow path 670e1 flows down, and the big hit does not start. In the fifth embodiment, when a game ball is continuously fired aiming at the V winning device 670, the game ball enters the special discharge channel 670e2 at a rate of about once every 20 small hits. It is configured to be.

  As shown in FIG. 113, a through gate 67 is provided in a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front face of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and a game ball enters below the through gate 67. A second ball entrance 6400 is provided as a trigger for executing a second special symbol lottery. In addition, as shown in FIG. 113, a large number of nails are planted in a region from the upstream side of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view to the second entrance 6400. With these nails, at least almost all game balls fired at a firing strength (for example, a firing strength of 95% or more) that collides with the return rubber 69 flow down to the second entrance 6400 (induction). can do. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, an area for guiding a game ball to the second entrance 6400 is referred to as a second entrance guide area.

  Note that the second entrance 6400 is for a horizontally long rectangular shaped electric accessory 6400a that covers the second entrance 6400, and an electric accessory for opening and closing forwardly with the lower side of the electric accessory 6400a as an axis. And a solenoid (not shown). The electric accessory 6400a is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot be won. In the closed state of the electric accessory 6400a, the electric accessory 6400a and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the electric accessory 6400a. In addition, when the electric accessory 6400a is tilted to the lower front side, an open state in which the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400 is temporarily formed. For this reason, even if the game ball is fired at a firing intensity that collides with the return rubber 6400, the game ball will be in the second state unless the electric accessory 6400 a is in the open state at the timing of reaching the second entrance 6400. The ball passes through the entrance 6400 without being able to enter the ball, and flows downward (a region where the V winning device 670, the variable winning device 650, the out opening 66, etc. are provided).

  As shown in FIG. 113, the inside of the second entrance opening area and the upstream side of the second entrance 6400 are branched into a right passage R1 and a left passage R2. Further, a through gate 67 is provided in the left channel R2 as shown in FIG. Further, on the upstream side of the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2, a game ball that has entered the second entrance guide area is placed in one of the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2. A distribution member 6600 for distribution is provided. Although the details will be described later, depending on the interval at which the game balls reach, the distribution member 6600 makes it easier to be distributed to one of the flow paths, or the distribution member 6600 makes it easier to be distributed to both flow paths alternately. Is variable. More specifically, when the firing interval of the game balls (the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600) becomes long (for example, when the firing interval and the arrival interval become 1.5 seconds or more). In the case where the game balls are distributed only to the right channel R1 by the distribution member 6600, the firing interval of the game balls (the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600) is shortened (for example, In the case of the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds), the game balls are alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 by the distribution means. In addition, when the game ball is fired at the firing interval of 0.6 seconds to 1.5 seconds, depending on the arrangement of the distribution member 6600 at the time of reaching the distribution member 6600, the right flow path R1 Whether the distribution is made or the distribution is made to the left channel R2 is variable. Therefore, if the firing interval can be accurately adjusted between 0.6 seconds and 1.5 seconds, it is possible to keep the game balls distributed only to the left channel R2. The configuration of the distribution member 6600 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 114A to 114D are diagrams illustrating the operation contents of the distribution member 6600. FIG. FIG. 114A shows a state in which the game ball has flowed down (dropped) toward the distribution member 6600 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the distribution member 6600 includes a rotating shaft 6600a, a substantially rod-shaped right receiving portion 6600R extending rightward with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a, and an upper left corner with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a. The left receiving portion 6600L of a substantially rod shape extending in the direction, the substantially rod-shaped hanging portion 6600b extending (hanging down) to the lower left with respect to the rotation axis, and the right side of the hanging portion 6600b joined to the right side in front view. And a substantially rectangular parallelepiped deflected portion 6600c. The distributing member 6600 is configured to be rotatable in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rotation axis 6600a as a rotation axis about the rotation axis 6600a, and the hanging part 6600b is moved relative to the rotation axis 6600a. By being arranged vertically downward, the configuration is such that it has a substantially "Y-shaped" shape when viewed from the front. Note that the unbalanced portion 6600c is made of a material having a higher density than the other portions (the right receiving portion 6600R, the left receiving portion 6600L, the hanging portion 6600b) of the distribution member 6600, and the center of gravity of the entire distribution member 6600 is A difference is provided between the mass of the deflected portion 6600c and the other portion to such an extent that it substantially matches the center of gravity. Specifically, for example, while the weighted portion 6600c is made of iron and has a mass of 4 g, all other portions are made of PS material, and the total mass is 0.5 g. Have been. In a state where no force other than the gravity G is acting on the distribution member 6600, the position is finally stabilized at the position where the center of gravity is the lowest (the state where the potential energy is the smallest). Even if it moves to the disposition, if there is no action other than the gravity G (the action of the external force), it finally returns to the disposition shown in FIG.

  The distribution member 6600 is configured to be able to receive a game ball flowing down from above the second entrance guide area by the right receiving portion 6600R and the left receiving portion 6600L. At the initial position (stationary position) of the distribution member 6600, when a game ball flows down from above the second entrance guide area (see FIG. 114 (a)), the game ball is mainly received by the right receiving portion 6600R. Can be When the game ball collides with the right receiving portion 6600R, a downward force acts on the right receiving portion 6600R in front view. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front about the rotation shaft 6600a. Here, since the mass of the game ball is configured to be heavier (approximately 5.5 g) than the total mass (approximately 4.5 g) of the distribution member 6600, the game ball collides with the distribution member 6600. The right receiving portion 6600R is pushed down, and the distribution member 6600 is rotated clockwise in front view. This causes the distribution member 6600 to rotate so that the right receiving portion 6600R forms an inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 114B). Therefore, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 6600R flows down in the front right lower direction along the inclination formed by the right receiving portion 6600R, and falls into the right channel R1. That is, the game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1.

  In this manner, the game ball that first reaches the distribution member 6600 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position (completely stopped) is distributed to the right channel R1. I have. As described above, the through flow gate 67 is provided in the left side flow path R2, but the through flow gate 67 is not provided in the right side flow path R1. The flow path is disadvantageous for the player because there is no possibility of the flow being performed. By allocating the initial position of the distribution member 6600 to the disadvantageous channel, it is possible to prevent the initial state of the gaming machine from becoming an advantageous state.

  After the game ball is distributed to the right channel R1 (falls from the right receiving portion 6600R), a force (load due to the weight of the game ball) for rotating the distribution member 6600 clockwise in front view is applied. Since it disappears, only the gravity G acts on the distribution member 6600. Here, immediately after the game balls are distributed to the right channel, the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 is moved to the upper left from the initial arrangement. Therefore, of the gravitational force G acting on the distribution member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction is a force for rotating the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise in front view (right downward in front view). By the component Gc of the rotation direction of gravity, the distribution member 6600 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Even if the distribution member 6600 reaches the initial position due to this rotation, the distribution member 6600 does not stop immediately, but once passes through the initial position. This is because kinetic energy is generated during the rotation operation from the arrangement of FIG. 114 (b) to the initial arrangement. Therefore, the distributing member 6600 continues to rotate in the counterclockwise direction even after passing through the initial arrangement, and temporarily stops when the kinetic energy becomes 0 (the rotational speed becomes 0) ( FIG. 114 (c)). Note that if the player has continuously fired the game ball into the second entrance guide area (that is, fired at the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds, the initial period), The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 before and after this temporary rest position (see FIG. 114 (c)), which is arranged after passing through the arrangement. That is, the movable range in which the height of the end of the right receiving portion 6600R opposite to the rotating shaft 6600a is higher than the height of the end of the left receiving portion 6600L opposite to the rotating shaft 6600a ( The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 while moving in the rotation range).

  As shown in FIG. 114D, when the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 after the distribution member 6600 has passed, the game ball mainly collides with the left receiving portion 6600L. The left receiving portion 6600L hit by the game ball exerts a force in a direction of being pushed downward in a front view due to the weight of the hit game ball. That is, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As described above, since the mass of the game ball is heavier than the total mass of the distribution member 6600, the distribution member 6600 is rotated, and the left receiving portion 6600L is inclined downward from the upper right to the lower left in front view. Form. The game ball received by the left receiving portion 6600L rolls along this inclination, and falls into the left channel R2 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. That is, the game ball is distributed to the left channel R2.

  After the game ball is distributed to the left channel R2 (falls from the left receiving portion 6600L), a force (a load due to the weight of the game ball) for rotating the distribution member 6600 in a counterclockwise direction in front view. Is eliminated, so that only the gravity G acts on the distribution member 6600. Therefore, similarly to after the game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 (see FIGS. 114 (b) and (c)), of the gravity G acting on the distribution member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction is used. As a result, a force returning to the direction of the initial arrangement acts, so that the distribution member 6600 rotates clockwise in front view.

  Thereafter, while the game balls continue to be fired continuously at the shortest (0.6 second) firing interval, the distribution member 6600 causes the game balls to flow through one flow path (the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R1). The operation of distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths R2) and the operation of rotating the game ball to an arrangement capable of distributing the game ball to the other flow path by the reaction of distributing the game ball are repeated. Thus, by continuously firing the game balls at the shortest firing interval, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2. As described above, since the through gate 67 is provided in the left side channel R2, by continuously firing game balls at the shortest firing interval, the through gate 67 is provided at a rate of one for two game balls. 67 can be passed.

  On the other hand, when the game balls are continuously fired at a firing interval of 1.5 seconds or more, the arrangement is such that the game balls can be once distributed to the left flow path R2 by the recoil that has been distributed to the right flow path R1. Although it rotates to the initial arrangement again, the pendulum operation centering on the initial arrangement is performed thereafter. In this pendulum operation, the amplitude decreases over time due to air resistance, dynamic friction acting on the rotating shaft 6600a, and the like. When 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the range in which game balls can be distributed to the right flow path R1 (the rotating shaft) The pendulum operation is performed (or stopped) only in the range in which the hanging portion 6600b is disposed on the left side of the perpendicular drawn vertically downward from the frame 6600a. For this reason, when the game balls are fired at intervals of 1.5 seconds or more, the game balls are distributed only to the right channel R1, and the game balls are distributed to the through gate 67 provided in the left channel R2. It is impossible to pass the ball. In other words, since it becomes impossible to execute the normal symbol lottery, it is particularly easy for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 (when the normal game hits the game ball, In the extended play mode, where the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol easily entering the second entrance 6400 and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a are set), it is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the extended play mode, a player who wants to distribute game balls to the left channel R2 can fire game balls at the shortest firing interval. That is, in the extended play mode, the game balls can be continuously fired, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Furthermore, by adjusting the firing interval between the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) and 1.5 seconds in accordance with the operation of the sorting member 6600, the sorting member 6600 performing the pendulum operation. It is also possible to cause the game balls to reach the distribution member 6600 only at a timing that changes the arrangement to allow the game balls to be distributed to the left channel R2. In addition, in order to fire the game ball at the shortest firing interval, it is sufficient to perform a relatively simple operation content of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount, but adjust the firing interval to obtain the shortest. In order to fire a game ball at a firing interval other than the firing interval as intended, a delicate operation on the operation handle 51 is required. Therefore, except for some players who have a high game skill, it is more likely that the game ball will be continuously fired at the shortest firing interval by maintaining the operation handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount. By allocating the ball to the left channel R2, it becomes possible to execute lottery of the ordinary symbols more.

  As described above, the distribution member 6600 in the fifth embodiment can change the flow path along which the game ball flows down according to the operation of the player on the handle 51. That is, by performing the operation of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the rotation amount and continuously firing the game ball at the shortest firing interval, the game ball reliably flows down the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 alternately. Can be done. In other words, there is an unfavorable flow path (right flow path R1) in which a normal symbol lottery is not executed even when a game ball passes, and an advantageous symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes. It can be alternately distributed to the flow path (left flow path R2). In addition, while the distributing member 6600 performs a pendulum operation centering on the initial arrangement (see FIG. 114 (a)) by the reaction of distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths, the game is moved to the left flow path R2. By operating the operation handle 51 so as to reach the game ball for a period during which the movable range in which the ball can be distributed is moved, most of the fired game balls are transferred to the left side where the through gate 67 is provided. It is also possible to distribute to the flow path R2. In other words, it is also possible to realize an operation of distributing by disproportionately distributing to a flow path that is advantageous to the player. Although there is no merit for the player, by operating the operation handle 51 so that the firing interval becomes 1.5 seconds or more, it is also possible to modulate a flow path that is disadvantageous for the player and distribute the game ball. It becomes possible. Therefore, the operation content of the operation handle 51 can be made different depending on the skill of the player and the operation to be realized, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400 in the extended play mode (time saving gaming state A). Is done. That is, a very short fluctuation time of 0.1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. In addition, 0.2 seconds is set as an open period of the electric accessory 6400a when a normal symbol is hit. It takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to reach the second ball entry port 6400, so that the game ball just enters the second ball entry port during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. Reached 6400 and entered the ball. Therefore, during the extended play mode, all game balls distributed to the left channel R2 can be set to the second entrance port 6400 simply by continuously hitting the game balls at the maximum launch intensity and the shortest launch interval. You can enter the ball. That is, a game ball can be made to enter the second entrance 6400 at a ratio of about one in two.

  On the other hand, in the pullback mode (time saving game state B), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is also fired to the second entrance guide area next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67, and the right flow path A fluctuation period (0.5 second) of a normal symbol is set in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball distributed to R1 to enter the second entrance 6400. When the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set, and a normal symbol is hit, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400a is opened (after 0.2 seconds, which is the period of flow down the flow path from the gate 67 to the second entrance 6400). In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 second similarly to the extended play mode, the opening period of 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after one game ball passes through the through gate 67 is set. It is impossible to make the ball enter the second ball entry port 6400 unless another game ball is reached. However, even if the game ball continues to be fired to the second entrance guiding area at the shortest firing interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and the second ball is distributed to the second flow path R1. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the entrance 6400, the ball enters the second entrance 6400 after the elapse of the opening period. Therefore, even if the player hits the ball at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400, which is naughty. It becomes a very disadvantageous condition that only the number of possessed balls is reduced. Therefore, in the pullback mode, the player can perform a game method in which the player advances a game by causing a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-handing (to perform a lottery of a special symbol). In other words, a game method similar to that in the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given. It is possible to realize a novel game that can be done.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the pull-back mode has a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is more likely to shift to the extended mode after the big hit is completed than in the normal mode. Configuration. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times after the end of the extended-villa mode. More specifically, when the jackpot E5 is reached in the extended villa mode, the pull-back mode is set until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times after the jackpot is completed. The mode is set to the retraction mode until the end of the operation. On the other hand, when another jackpot type (jackpots A5 to D5) is set in the extended play mode, the extended play mode is set again after the end of the jackpot. For this reason, after the end of the extended-village mode, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot, the pull-back mode is maintained until the special symbol lottery ends 30 or 100 times. In other words, after the end of the extended-villa mode, at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, the pull-back mode is maintained. Therefore, after the end of the extended-villa mode, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue the game at least until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 30 times. That is, the game can be continued at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times even after the end of the extended-villa mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Here, in the case of a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, or in a gaming machine of a specification in which a jackpot is given when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer), the gaming state is In the normal game state in which the game ball does not easily enter the specific area, and in the time-saving game state in which the game ball easily enters the specific area, only two types of game states are provided. In general, there is a specification that shifts to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, at the time of transition to the disadvantageous normal game state, there is a possibility that the motivation of the player for the game may be greatly reduced, and the player immediately quits the game at the time of the end of the time reduction game state. There was a possibility.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the extended play mode, at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, a special easy-to-transfer to the extended play mode in the event of a jackpot is achieved. The state (retraction mode) is set. Thereby, even if the extended play mode ends and the game ball enters an unfavorable game state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from decreasing the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended-play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that, in the fifth embodiment, when the extended-village mode ends, the mode is always shifted to the retraction mode. In other words, if a jackpot has been won by lottery of the second special symbol in the normal symbol time saving state, only the jackpot type that shifts to the retreat mode after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot type that shifts to the pullback mode after the end of the jackpot Is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. At a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%), a jackpot type that shifts to the normal mode after the end of the jackpot may be provided.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the game balls are continuously fired at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), the distribution member 6600 allows the game ball to be distributed to the right flow path R1 and the operation range to the left. The configuration is such that the cycle of switching to the operation range that can be distributed to the flow path R2 and the firing interval of the game balls are substantially the same. That is, the distributing member 6600 of the present embodiment is configured such that during the period of 0.6 seconds from when the game ball is distributed to one flow path to when the next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600, the other flow path is used. (The half cycle of the pendulum operation of the distributing member 6600 is substantially the same as 0.6 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this. . If a game ball can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2 when the game ball is fired at the shortest firing interval, the next game ball arrives after distributing one game ball. The operation range that can be distributed to one flow path and the operation range that can be distributed to the other flow path may be reciprocated by a pendulum operation one or more times during 0.6 seconds before the operation. . In other words, odd half times of the pendulum operation of the distributing member 6600 may be configured to be substantially the same as the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Even with this configuration, each time a game ball fired at the shortest firing interval reaches the distribution member 6600, the game ball can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2.

  In the fifth embodiment, by displacing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 by providing the deflected portion 6600c, an arrangement in which the game balls can be distributed to the right flow path R1 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is stationary (FIG. 114). (See (a)), but the invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the weighted portion 6600c, after the distribution member 6600 performs a rotating operation by distributing the game balls using an elastic body such as a spring, the initial arrangement shown in FIG. It may be configured to return to.

  Next, the operation of the V winning device 670 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the V winning device 670 opens the opening / closing door 670f1 and enters a state where it can enter the ball when a small win is achieved by a special symbol lottery. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an opening period of the opening / closing door 670f1 based on a small hit and a flow path through which a game ball can flow down inside the V winning device 670.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 115, when the small hit is won, the open / close door 670f1 is opened. This open period continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the opening / closing door 670f1 is closed and the small hit ends. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 115, for 0.5 seconds after the small hit is started, the game ball flowing into the inside of the V winning device 670 is guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. , The flow path solenoid 670k is kept off. This makes it difficult for the game ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 670e2 for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit, so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 670e3. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 by setting the channel solenoid 670k to be ON for 0.075 seconds. (Normally, it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the discharge channel 670e1). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds is guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and easily passes through the V winning switch 670e3.

  After 0.075 seconds have elapsed since the passage solenoid 670k was turned on, the passage solenoid 670k is turned off until the small hitting ends. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 is set in a state where it is easily guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. With these operation contents, if the game ball can enter the V winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds during which it is easily guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and can reach the special discharge channel 670e2, the game ball Passes through the V winning switch 670e3, and a big hit is given after the small hit is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small hit, the big hit is not given.

  Since the special discharge channel 670e2 can only pass for 0.075 seconds while the small hit opening period is 1.5 seconds, the game that enters the V winning opening 670a at one small hit The probability that the ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 is 1/20 (0.075 / 1.5). As described above, in the extended play mode, it is difficult for the game balls to enter the second entrance 6400 unless the game balls are continuously fired at the shortest firing interval. The player basically keeps firing the game ball at the shortest firing interval. That is, since it becomes difficult to adjust the firing timing of the game ball for a period during which the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass, it is determined whether the game ball flows down the special discharge channel 670e2. It depends only on the fluctuating time of the symbol and the flowing direction of the game ball. In other words, there is little room for the skill of the player to intervene, and the big hit expectation at the time of the small hit winning is always constant (1/20). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the extended-play mode can be made substantially constant irrespective of the skill of the player, so that even a player who is not accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 can play the game with peace of mind. Can be.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit, the extended play mode is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times or the big hit is achieved. In the fifth embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 9/10, and the probability of a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is 1/200. The probability of ending the extended play mode without winning a symbol or a jackpot without winning a jackpot is about 0.6%. That is, once the mode is shifted to the extended game mode, a very advantageous state is formed in which the extended mode and the large hit are almost repeated until the winning type of the type to which the pull-back mode is given is won after the end of the large hit. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with one goal being to shift to the extended play mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116 and FIG. 117, an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment and that indicates the degree of expectation of the pullback mode will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times after the end of the extended-villa mode. That is, when a big hit is won, the state is set to be an advantageous state in which the mode always shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit. For this reason, while the pullback mode is set, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued. That is, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. However, if the number of special symbol lotteries set as the pull-back mode is too large, the rate of re-entering the extended mode (the rate of returning the extended mode) becomes too large, which is excessively advantageous for the player. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, after providing a variation in the number of lotteries in which the pull-back mode is set (that is, in a configuration in which either 30 times or 100 times is set), any of the lotteries is set. The configuration is such that the selection of the number of times is not specified (concealed). Then, according to the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of selected lotteries (the period of the pullback mode) is suggested. With this configuration, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether the pull-back mode has ended or is continuing, so that even if the number of lotteries exceeds 30 which is the minimum number of lotteries when shifting to the pull-back mode, the game can be played. It can make you want to continue. Therefore, the game can be played for a longer time after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since it is possible to realize the gaming ability of predicting whether or not the pull-back mode has ended based on the type of the back image, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game after the end of the extended-play mode.

  In the fifth embodiment, three types of back images are provided as back images that indicate the degree of expectation that the retraction mode is continuing. That is, a rear image with a high degree of expectation (see FIG. 116 (a)), a rear image with a medium degree of expectation (see FIG. 116 (b)), and a rear image with a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 117) are provided. If the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 after the pull-back mode is set, a process of re-selecting the rear image is executed every 10 special symbol lotteries are performed. In accordance with the update state of the back image, the player can be predicted whether or not the retraction mode is continuing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 116 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a back image with the highest expectation (back image for high expectation) in which the pullback mode is continued is displayed. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), when the back image with the highest expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 moves through the forest. Further, in the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a display area HR6 in which characters "CHANCE !!" are displayed is formed. These display contents can indicate to the player that the pull-back mode is likely to be continued.

  FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a back image with a medium expectation degree in which the retraction mode is continued is displayed. As shown in FIG. 116 (b), when a back image with a medium degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 goes down the river. Further, the character displayed inside the display area HR6 is “CHANCE !?”. Due to these display contents, the expectation degree of the pull-back mode is lower than the case where the rear image for high expectation (the rear image for medium expectation) is displayed (it is more likely that the mode has shifted to the normal mode). ) Can be suggested to the player.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a state in which a rear image with the lowest expected degree (back image for low expected degree) in which the pullback mode is continued is displayed. As shown in FIG. 117, when the back image with the lowest degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 advances in the wilderness. The characters displayed inside the display area HR6 are "CHANCE ...?". These display contents can indicate to the player that the degree of expectation in the retraction mode is extremely low (it is highly likely that the mode has been shifted to the normal mode).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured to indicate whether or not the pullback mode is continued by the display mode of the rear image. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game property for predicting whether or not the pull-back mode is continued based on the type of the rear image, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Note that the pull-back mode is continued until a special symbol lottery is executed up to 100 times after the jackpot that has been won in the extended-villa mode ends. Conversely, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the mode always shifts to the normal mode. For this reason, after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, a back image (not shown) for the normal mode is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 118A, the configuration of the ROM 202 received in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 118A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that a small hit type selection table 202da and a time saving The difference is that a number-of-times selection table 202db and an ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202dc are added. In addition, in the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment, the contents of the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed.

  First, the first random number table 202a according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the first random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of “0, 1” are defined as the determination values for determining the big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 118 (b)). As in the first embodiment, the jackpot determination value is common to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, “2 to 399” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118B), and it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be a small hit. The value is not specified (see 202a3 in FIG. 118 (b)). In addition, “2 to 40” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118B), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 118B).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit. This makes it possible to form a state in which the V winning switch 670e3 is more easily passed in the consecutive play mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed. As a result, the degree of advantage in the extended game mode can be further increased, so that a great joy can be given to the player when the mode is shifted to the extended game mode.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment, two types of big hits A5 and B5 are provided as the big hit types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C5 is provided as a special symbol jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), for the first special symbol, "big hit A5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". (See 202b1 in FIG. 119 (b)). The "big hit A5" has five rounds, and the big hit type (5 rounds) in which the game state after the big hit is set to the normal symbol time-saving state A (rensou mode) regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Time-saving jackpot). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit A5" is 50, so "big hit A5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 50% (50/100).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), for the first special symbol, the "big hit B5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". (See 202b2 in FIG. 119 (b)). The “big hit B5” is a big hit type (5 round special big hit) in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds and the game state after the big hit varies according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, when the "big hit B5" is reached in the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode), the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit. If the "big hit B5" is reached in the normal symbol time saving state (pull-back mode or extended play mode), a normal symbol time saving state A (extended mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit. The correspondence between the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the set gaming state is defined in a time-saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) described later. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B5" is 50, so "big hit B5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), for the second special symbol, "big hit C5" is defined in association with all possible values of the first hit type counter C2 (FIG. 119 ( a) 202b3). The “big hit C5” is a big hit type (10 round special big hit) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds, and the game state after the big hit varies according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, in the case of "big hit C5" in the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode), the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit. If the "big hit C5" is reached in the normal symbol time saving state (pull-back mode or extended play mode), the normal symbol time saving state A (extended mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  As described above, half of the first special symbol jackpot is set as a special jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot when the normal mode is won, and the consecutive play mode is set after the jackpot when the winning is performed in a mode other than the normal mode). Particularly, in a plurality of game states (normal mode, pullback mode) in which it is mainly necessary to execute the first special symbol lottery (the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute), a difference in the degree of advantage can be provided. That is, if the first special symbol hits in the normal mode, the consecutive play mode is set after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas if the first special symbol lottery wins in the pullback mode, the 100% rate is set. It can be configured so that the extended play mode is set after the big hit. Thereby, the advantage degree until the jackpot is won in the normal mode and the pull-back mode is made common (an unfavorable state in which it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400), and the jackpot is won when the jackpot is won. The degree of advantage can be configured to be higher in the retraction mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, at least during the retraction mode, the player can be made to think that it is better to continue the game, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the extended game mode ends (when a jackpot in which a mode other than the extended game mode is set after the jackpot is won), the system always shifts to the pullback mode. I have. Thereby, even after the end of the extended play mode, it is possible to make the player intend to continue the game at least until the retraction mode ends. In other words, in the extended game mode, the player who has obtained a large amount of prize balls by repeating the jackpot and the extended game mode is satisfied with the game at the time when the last big jackpot in the extended game mode ends and immediately quits the game. Can be suppressed. That is, it is difficult for game balls to enter the second entrance 6400, and the game can be continued in a disadvantageous state (pull-back mode) as compared with the extended play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Can be improved.

  Further, similarly to the pull-back mode, when a lottery of the first special symbol in the extended game mode results in a big hit, the consecutive game mode can be set after the big hit at a rate of 100%. Thereby, for example, it shifts to the extended game mode in a state where the reserved ball of the first special symbol remains, and when the special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol wins a jackpot, the extended game mode is always set. Can be continued. In other words, an absurd situation occurs in which, after shifting to the extended-village mode, the lottery of the first special symbol wins and immediately shifts to the normal mode or the pull-back mode (even once in a small win). (The end of the extended-game mode without performing the extended-game mode) can be suppressed, so that the player's motivation to play the game in the extended-game mode can be increased. In addition, even if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the extended holiday mode, a special jackpot is established, and the extended holiday mode is always set after the large jackpot. It is possible to more reliably eliminate the possibility that the mode will end without winning. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the motivation of the player in the extended play mode for the game.

  Furthermore, not all the jackpots of the second special symbol are set to the special time jackpot but to all the special jackpots, so that it is possible to prevent an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode. That is, in the normal mode, a right-handed shot is performed, and an irregular game method of playing a game by entering a game ball into the second entrance 6400 is always the most disadvantageous after the end of the jackpot even if the jackpot is reached. Since it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a normal mode is set, it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring irregular game methods.

  Next, the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. The small hit type selection table 202da is a data table in which a determination value for determining a small hit type is determined when a small symbol is determined by lottery, and the determination value of the small hit type counter C5 is determined. Is defined in association with each small hit type.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 49”, “small hit A” is defined in association with the small hit type. (See 202da1 in FIG. 119 (b)). This “small hit A” is a small hit type to which “big hit C5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As described above, the jackpot C5 has the number of rounds of 10 rounds, and if a win is made during the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the end of the jackpot, but in a mode other than the normal mode (pull-back mode or extended mode). This is a jackpot type in which the consecutive play mode is set after the jackpot has been won. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “Small hit A” is 50, so if the small hit is a small hit, “Small hit A” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), as for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “50 to 79”, “small hit B” is defined in association with the small hit type ( See 202da2 in FIG. 119 (b)). The “small hit B” is a small hit type to which “big hit D5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the “big hit D5” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds and the game shifts to the extended game mode after the end of the big hit regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of "small hit B" is 30 since the counter value of "small hit B" is 30. The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), for the range of the small hit type counter C5 of “80 to 94”, “small hit C” is defined in association with the small hit type (see FIG. 119B). FIG. 119 (b), 202da3). The “small hit C” is a small hit type to which “big hit E5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the "big hit E5" has 10 rounds, and the pullback mode is set from the end of the big hit to the end of the special symbol lottery 30 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “small hit C” is 15, so if a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, “small hit C” is The determined ratio is 15% (15/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), for the range of the small hit type counter C5 of “95 to 99”, “small hit D” is defined in association with the small hit type ( FIG. 119 (b), 202da4). This “small hit D” is a small hit type to which “big hit F5” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, in the “big hit F5”, the number of rounds is 10 rounds, and the pull-back mode is set from the end of the big hit until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, there are five counter values that are "small hit D". The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, four small hit types are provided, and the big hit types executed (started) when passing through the V winning switch 670e3 differ according to the small hit types. It is configured. In the extended play mode (and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set), the small ball is won in the small hit A or the small hit B, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game. As a result, the jackpot C or the jackpot D is started, and the game mode (mode) after the end of the jackpot is set again to the extended play mode. Therefore, it can be said that the small hits A and B are small hit types that are relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, since the small hit B is larger in the number of big hit rounds executed when passing through the V winning switch 670e3, the small hit B is smaller in the small hit type than the small hit A in the small hit type. There is. The percentage of winning the small hits A or the small hits B is 80% (50% + 30%) in total, and as described above, the consecutive cottage mode ends without being a jackpot at all in the consecutive cottage mode ( Since the possibility of elapse of 100 time-saving periods is about 0.6%, once in the extended mode, the extended mode is repeated at a rate of about 80% (looping the extended mode). .

  In the extended play mode (and the pullback mode in which the normal symbol time saving state is set), the small hit C or the small hit D is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hit game. As a result, the jackpot E or the jackpot F is started, and the retraction mode is set as the game state (mode) after the end of the jackpot. Since the pull-back mode is a gaming state (mode) having a lower degree of advantage than the extended play mode, it can be said that the small hit C and the small hit D are small hit types that are relatively disadvantageous for the player. The small hit C and the small hit D have the same performance as the big hit (the number of rounds) executed when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, but the period of the retraction mode set after the big hit. The (number of times) is configured to be shorter in the pullback mode based on the small hit C. Therefore, it can be said that the small hit D is a small hit type having a higher degree of advantage than the small hit C. Since the ratio of winning in either the small hit C or the small hit D is 20% (15% + 5%), when the jackpot is reached in the extended mode, the mode is shifted to the pullback mode at a rate of about 20%. . In the case of winning a special symbol lottery in the consecutive winning mode in the consecutive playing mode (when a large winning is won without passing through the V winning switch 670e3), the mode always shifts to the consecutive playing mode after the large winning.

  On the other hand, in the normal mode, when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 after winning a small hit (small hit A, C, D) other than the small hit B, the normal mode is set as a mode after the end of the big hit. Would. That is, when the player passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the normal mode, the normal mode is set after the big hit at a rate of 70%. Therefore, an irregular game method of performing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode is performed. Doing so would be extremely disadvantageous for the player. As described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode shifts to the extended play mode after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, 100% After the big hit, the mode is shifted to the normal mode again. In addition, in the normal mode, the lottery of the second special symbol causes a small hit, and even if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, the normal mode is re-entered after the big hit at a rate of 70%. Therefore, when a game method in which only the second special symbol is drawn by performing an irregular game method is performed, the transition rate to the extended mode, which is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, is achieved. Is low, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, an irregular game method is performed in which the player is forced to enter the second entrance 6400 where game balls are unlikely to enter in the normal mode and only performs the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the merit can be eliminated, in the normal mode, a left-hitting game can be performed so that the game ball enters the first entrance 64. Therefore, by implementing the irregular game method, it is possible to more reliably prevent the hole from causing an unexpected disadvantage or conversely causing the player to lose excessively. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119 (c), the details of the number-of-times-saving-time selection table 202db will be described. FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving number selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment. The time saving number selection table 202db is referred to at the end of the jackpot, and sets the number of time savings after the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol lotteries until shifting to the normal mode) according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. Is a data table in which the data for use is specified. The time saving number selection table 202db defines not only the number of time savings after the end of the big hit but also data indicating the type of the time saving state (whether it is the time saving state A or the time saving state B).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot types A5 and D5 are defined in association with the jackpots A5 and D5 irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning, as the number of times saved is 100 times. The time-saving state A is defined in association (see 202db1 in FIG. 119 (c)). For this reason, the jackpot A5 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202b1 in FIG. 119 (a)), or the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the open period of the small jackpot B and the jackpot D5 is won. In this case (see 202da2 in FIG. 119 (b)), regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, after the end of the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the time reduction state A of the ordinary symbol (the extended mode) ) Is set. As described above, since the extended play mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the jackpot A5 is used mainly in the normal mode in which the game needs to be advanced by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the pullback mode. Is one of the preferred (pleasant) jackpot types for the player. In addition, in the extended play mode in which it is necessary to mainly advance the game by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot D5 is one of the jackpot types preferable for the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot types B5 and C5 are defined in association with the jackpot types B5 and C5 as 0 times as the number of times saved in the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode). The time-saving state A is set 100 times in association with the time-saving state (pull-back mode, extended mode) (see 202db2 in FIG. 119 (c)). Therefore, in the normal mode in which the normal state is set to the normal state of the symbol, if the jackpot B5 is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot, so the jackpot B5 is an unfavorable jackpot for the player. It is one of the types. On the other hand, in the pull-back mode, even if the big hit B5 is reached, the mode shifts to the advantageous extended play mode after the big hit is completed, so that it becomes one of the big hit types preferable for the player. In addition, in the extended play mode in which it is necessary to progress the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot C5 which shifts to the advantageous extended play mode after the jackpot is one of the preferred jackpot types for the player. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot E5 is defined as the jackpot type in association with the jackpot E5 as the number of times saved in the normal state of the ordinary symbol. The time saving state B of 30 times is defined in association with the extended vacation mode (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)). It should be noted that in the normal mode or the pullback mode in which it is necessary to mainly advance the game by the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot E5 is not basically won, but temporarily or irregularly in the normal mode. Even if the player wins the jackpot E5 by performing the lottery of the second special symbol and wins the jackpot E5, the jackpot E5 shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot, so the jackpot E5 is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in the normal mode. One kind. In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the pullback mode and the big hit E5 is won, the game shifts to the pullback mode after the big hit. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, even though the game mode shifts to the 100% extended play mode, the pullback mode is uselessly looped. It is one of the unfavorable (unfavorable) jackpot types. In addition, when the small hit C and the large hit E5 in the extended game mode result in a transition to a withdrawal mode that is disadvantageous to the player as compared to the extended game mode, the large hit E5 in the extended game mode is It is one of the unfavorable (unfavorable) jackpot types.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the jackpot F5 is defined as the jackpot type in association with the jackpot F5 in the normal state of the normal symbol as 0 times as the number of time savings. The time saving state B is defined 100 times in association with the extended vacation mode (see 202db4 in FIG. 119 (c)). That is, when the big hit F5 is reached, the mode shift is the same as the big hit E5 (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)), but the length of the pullback mode to be shifted to when the winning is performed in the extended play mode (the number of special symbol lotteries). However, it becomes longer (the number of lotteries increases) as compared with the case where the jackpot E5 is won. Thus, the jackpot F5 is one of the unfavorable (disadvantaged) jackpot types in the normal mode or the pullback mode, like the jackpot E5. In addition, in the extended-villa mode, it is one of the unfavorable jackpot types. However, it can be said that the jackpot type is more advantageous than the jackpot E5 in that the retraction mode after the jackpot continues for a long time.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, by setting the number of time savings specified in the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)), the normal mode (the normal state of the normal symbol ), A retreat mode (normal symbol time-saving state A), and a pull-back mode (normal symbol time-saving state B). This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the mode (game state) after the big hit, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202d is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment. It is a data table to be performed.

  FIG. 120A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 120A, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A) in that FIG. A single special figure 1 departure table 202d11 is provided instead of the deviating (normal) table 202d2 and the special figure 1 deviating (probable change) table 202d3. A single special figure 2 per table 202d12 is provided instead of the special table 2d4 and the special figure 2 per (five fluctuations or more) table 202d5. 202d6 and the table 202d13 for the special figure 2 (normal / return) instead of the table 202d7 for the special figure 2 (five or more fluctuations), And use the table 202d14 is different in that provided. The contents of the special figure 1 departure table 202d11 are the same as those of the special figure 1 departure (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 15C) in the first embodiment. Is omitted.

  The special figure 2 winning table 202d12 is a data table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern (variation time) when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected for each mode (game state) at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed is stored in the special figure 2 winning table 202d12. Stipulated. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the normal mode and the pull-back mode, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation time exceeds 180 seconds as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The long fluctuation is determined. On the other hand, when a big win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the extended-play mode, a middle variation per 10 seconds is determined as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, in the normal mode or the pull-back mode in which the game needs to be advanced by the lottery of the first special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time is set in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Thus, it is possible to reduce the game efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed irregularly or illegally in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the random or illegal execution of the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The special figure 2 departure (normal / return) table 202d13 determines a fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the lottery of the second special symbol is departed (including a small hit) in the normal mode and the retraction mode. This is a data table that is referred to in order to execute. As shown in FIG. 120 (c), the special figure 2 departure (normal / pull-back) table 202d13 has only a departure super long fluctuation of 180 seconds as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is stipulated. As described above, in the normal mode or the pull-back mode in which the game needs to be advanced by the lottery of the first special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time is set when the lottery is lost (or a small hit) by the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the game efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is irregularly or illegally performed in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the random or illegal execution of the lottery of the second special symbol.

  In addition, the special figure 2 departure (rensou) table 202d14 is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the lottery of the second special symbol is departed (or a small hit) in the denomination mode. It is a data table to be performed. As shown in FIG. 120 (d), the fluctuation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result is defined in the special figure 2 departure (rensou) table 202d14. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), when the second special symbol deviates, the deviating middle fluctuation of 10 seconds occurs for all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the consecutive-villa mode, if a lottery is lost in the second special symbol lottery, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 174”, and the variation time is short for 5 seconds. Fluctuations are defined in association with each other, and the small hit middle fluctuations in which the fluctuation time is 10 seconds are defined in association with the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “175 to 198”. According to these prescribed contents, in the extended game mode, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, only a relatively short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set, so that the game efficiency in the extended game mode is reduced. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the superiority of the extended play mode can be further enhanced, and the joy of the player when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the extended game mode for the game.

  In addition, when a small hit with a high probability of winning in the consecutive play mode is set, the rate of setting a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is increased, and a relatively low rate when the small hit is reached (about 1/4). ), A relatively long (10 second) fluctuation time is set as in the case of a hit or miss. Thereby, every time a relatively long fluctuation time is selected, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol has directly made a big hit. Therefore, in the extended play mode, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the fluctuating time, so that the interest of the player in the extended play mode can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121 (a), the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc will be described. This normal pattern change pattern selection table 202dc is a data table referred to for setting the change time of the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and as shown in FIG. The game state (mode) at the time when the symbol lottery is executed and the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), for a normal state (normal mode) of a normal symbol, a long fluctuation of 30 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 121 (a)). 202dc1). On the other hand, with respect to the time-saving state A (long-shed mode) of a normal symbol, a short-time fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is defined in association (see 202dc2 in FIG. 121 (a)). For the normal symbol time saving state B (pull-back mode), a short variation B having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in association (see 202dc3 in FIG. 121A).

  For this reason, when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in the ordinary mode, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to be much longer than that in the time saving state (the extended mode or the pullback mode). The game efficiency when playing the game aiming at the gate 67 and the second entrance 6400 can be extremely deteriorated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal mode. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the extended-short mode (time saving state A) to 0.1 second, when the ordinary symbol is hit, the game ball passing through the through gate 67 is directly placed in the second entry. It can be configured to make it easy to enter the ball opening 6400. Therefore, during the extended-play mode, the game ball is continuously struck right at the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), and is distributed to the left channel R2 (see FIG. 113). It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 with a high probability (at a standard symbol probability of 1 / 1.2).

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the pullback mode (time saving state B) to 0.5 seconds, even if the ordinary symbol is won by lottery, the game ball (through Both the game ball that passed through the gate 67 and the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 and then fired to the second entrance guide area and distributed to the right channel R1 (see FIG. 113). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second entrance 6400. In other words, when a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set and a normal symbol is hit, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400 is opened (after 0.2 seconds, which is the flow-down period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 6400). In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is 0.2 seconds, another game ball does not reach another game ball within 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after one game ball passes through the through gate 67. Becomes impossible to enter the second entrance 6400. However, even if the game ball continues to be fired to the second entrance guiding area at the shortest firing interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and the second ball is distributed to the second flow path R1. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the entrance 6400, the ball enters the second entrance 6400 after the elapse of the opening period. Therefore, even if the player hits the ball at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400, which is naughty. It becomes a very disadvantageous state only to reduce the number of holding balls. Therefore, in the pullback mode, the player can perform a game method in which the player advances a game by causing a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-handing (to perform a lottery of a special symbol). In other words, a game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is used instead of the game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the normal symbol time saving state being given. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game method of playing a game aiming at the first entrance 64 can be performed.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 121 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that the counter 203da for saving time and the storage area 203db for the jackpot type. , A mode type storage area 203dc, a V passing flag 203dd, and a winning mode storage area 203de. Further, the difference is that the probability change flag 203g, the probability change setting flag 203h, the probability change passage counter 203i, the probability change enable flag 203n, and the probability change enable timer 203o are deleted.

  The time reduction counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the remaining special symbols until the normal symbol time reduction state ends. If the value of the time reduction counter 203da is 1 or more, it means that it is a normal symbol time reduction state (either the extended-run mode or the pullback mode), and if the value of the time reduction medium counter 203da is 0, it is normal. It means that the symbol is in the normal state. The initial value of the time saving counter 203da is set to 0, and the number of time savings specified in the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) is set at the end of the big hit (see S1323 in FIG. 133). ). In addition, the value of the counter for hourly savings 203da is updated by decrementing by one in the hourly savings number updating process (see FIG. 128) executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (see S2302 in FIG. 128). When executing the lottery of the ordinary symbol, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is in the time saving state based on the value of the time reduction counter 203da, and the random number table per ordinary symbol for the high probability time (see FIG. 14B) 202c3, 202c4) to determine whether to perform a normal symbol lottery or a low probability random symbol per symbol symbol table (202c1, 202c2 in FIG. 14B) to perform a normal symbol lottery. (See S608 in FIG. 130).

  The jackpot type storage area 203db is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the type of the hit jackpot when the jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203db, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery (see S331 in FIG. 127). Further, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, and when the small hit passes through the V winning switch 670e3, data indicating a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is stored (see S1629 in FIG. 134). The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db is retained until the end of the winning jackpot and is used to select the number of time savings from the time saving number selection table 202db at the end of the jackpot (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

  The mode type storage area 203dc is a storage area for storing data indicating the current mode (game state). If “00H” is stored as data in the mode type storage area 203dc, it indicates that the current mode is the normal mode (normal state of a normal symbol), and if “01H” is stored, It indicates the extended mode (normal symbol time reduction state A), and if "02H" is stored, it indicates the pullback mode (normal symbol time reduction state B). When selecting and setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol from the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc (see FIG. 121 (a)), the fluctuation time corresponding to the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is set. Is done.

  The V passing flag 203dd is a flag for indicating whether or not the player has passed the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hitting game (whether or not it is determined that the big hit will occur after the small hitting end). . If the V passing flag 203dd is on at the end of the small hit, the start of the big hit is set at the end of the small hit, while if the V passing flag 203dd is off, the big hit is not started and the small hit is not started. Will be terminated. The V passing flag 203dd is set to an initial value of OFF, and is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 during execution of the small hitting game (FIG. 135). See S2506). In addition, after the start of the jackpot based on passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is set, it is set to off (see S1630 in FIG. 134).

  The winning mode storage area 203de is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating a mode (game state) when a jackpot is won. In the winning mode storage area 203de, data in the same format as the mode type storage area 203dc is stored. At the start of the jackpot, the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is transferred to the winning mode storage area 203de, and the data is held until the jackpot ends. At the end of the jackpot, the mode at the time of the jackpot is determined using the data stored in the winning mode storage area 203de, and the corresponding number of time savings is read from the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)). It is issued and set (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a method of shifting a gaming state (mode) in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is roughly provided with three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 122 (the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the extended mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122 (the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol), and the pullback shown in the lower right part of FIG. Mode (ordinary symbol time-saving state B) is provided.

  The normal mode indicates the normal state of the normal symbol as described above, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and even if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the extended game mode is set. , It is the most unfavorable game state for the player. As described above, the extended play mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state A of a normal symbol is set, and the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400, so that a small hit with a high probability is achieved. Is generated and the chance of passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is increased, so that the gaming state is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal mode. In addition, since the extended play mode is easily set again after the end of the big hit, the gaming state is most advantageous for the player.

  Further, the pull-back mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state B of a normal symbol is set. As described above, since the game ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 6400, the return mode is the same as in the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play a game aiming at one entrance 64, when the jackpot is won, the game mode is shifted to the extended game mode at a rate of 100%, which is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal mode.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, when a lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot and the jackpot A5 is determined as the jackpot type, the extended play mode is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the big hit B5 is determined, the normal mode is set as the game state after the big hit end, so that the most disadvantageous game state is repeated. That is, in the normal mode, if the jackpot A5 determined at a rate of 50% of the jackpot cannot be won, the game does not shift to another game state. In other words, even if a jackpot is won, a very disadvantageous gaming state in which the same state is looped at a rate of 50% is achieved.

  As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the extended mode to another mode in addition to the case where the jackpot has been hit and the case where the number of times of normal symbols has been reduced. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 122, the lottery of the second special symbol causes a small hit and a V winning (event in which the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hits E5 and F5 Is determined, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the retraction mode. If the special symbol lottery has been completed 100 times without a big hit, the normal symbol will be shifted to the normal mode after the number of times of the normal symbol has been reduced. On the other hand, if the big hits C5 and D5 are determined when the V prize is won, or if the big win is achieved by the special symbol lottery, the extended play mode is set again after the big hit ends. In addition, as described above, the probability that the change of the special symbol of 100 times without losing the jackpot is about 0.6%, and thus is an event that hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to the other mode in the extended-villa mode is when the big hits E5 and F5 are almost won. The small hits (small hits C and D) corresponding to the big hits E5 and F5 are determined at a rate of 20% of all the small hits. It becomes a very advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the extended-villa mode as one goal, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the pull-back mode to another mode not only when the jackpot has been won but also when the number of times of normal symbols has been reduced. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot becomes A5, the jackpot becomes B5, and the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to the extended mode. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol for the number of working hours is completed without a big hit, the mode shifts (falls) to the normal mode. In the normal mode, even if the first special symbol hits, the mode shifts to the extended game mode only at a rate of 50%, whereas when the first special symbol hits in the preparation mode, the mode always shifts to the extended game mode. Therefore, while the preparation mode is continued, it is possible to play the game in a strong desire to win the jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the preparation mode can be improved.

  As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to switch back and forth between three types of modes having different degrees of advantage. This makes it possible to add sharpness to the game, thereby preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 123A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 123A, the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20A) in that an expectation degree selection table 222da is added. Are different. The expectation degree selection table 222da is used to randomly select a rear image during a predetermined period (until the change of the special symbol is completed 100 times) after the end of the extended-villa mode (transition to the retraction mode). It is a data table used. Here, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, either 30 times (big hit E5) or 100 times (big hit F5) is set as the number of special symbol lotteries in which the pullback mode is continued. That is, if the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 after shifting to the pullback mode, the mode may shift to the normal mode (fall). In the fifth embodiment, it is not clearly notified whether the mode has shifted to the normal mode or the retraction mode is continued, and whether or not the retraction mode is continued based on the type of the rear image (see FIGS. 116 and 117). By suggesting the degree of expectation, a playability that allows a player to predict whether or not the mode is the pullback mode is provided.

  More specifically, after shifting to the retraction mode (that is, after the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5 is completed), the number of special symbol lotteries is within 30 (that is, staying in the retraction mode). Is determined, the back image for the high degree of expectation is set as the back image, and when the number of lotteries exceeds 30 (that is, the number of lotteries in which the pull-back mode may be terminated) ), Every time the special symbol lottery is executed ten times, the back image is selected again using the expectation degree selection table 222da (the expectation degree is updated every ten lotteries). I have. Details of the expectation degree selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 123 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the expectation degree selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the expectation degree selection table 222da stores the rear image for each mode (game state) at the time of executing the lottery (re-lottery of the expectation degree) for reselecting the rear image. The type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223da are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), for the normal mode, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da falls within the range of “0 to 4” and the rear image for the high degree of expectation (FIG. 116 (a) ) Is defined in association with the range of “5-49”, and the back image for medium expectation (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “5-49”. A back image (see FIG. 117) for use is defined in association with each other.

  Since the effect lottery counter 223da can take 100 values of “0 to 99”, when the re-lottery of the degree of expectation is executed in the normal mode, the rate at which the rear image for the high degree of expectation is set is 5%. % (5/100). On the other hand, the ratio at which the back image for medium expectation is set is 45% (45/100), and the ratio at which the back image for low expectation is set is 50% (50/100). Therefore, when the mode has been shifted (falled) from the pullback mode to the normal mode (when the pullback mode in which the number of time savings is 30 has been set after the end of the previous big hit), the rearrangement for the low expectation is performed by the re-lotting of the expectation. While the possibility that an image is set is the highest, the possibility that a back image for high expectation is set is extremely low.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), in the pull-back mode, the back image for the high expectation degree (see FIG. 116 (a)) is set so that the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is in the range of “0 to 9”. The back image for medium expectation (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “10 to 79”, and the back image for low expectation in the range of “80 to 99”. An image (see FIG. 117) is defined in association with the image. Therefore, when the lottery of the degree of expectation is performed in the pull-back mode, the ratio of setting the rear image for the high degree of expectation is 10% (10/100), and the rear image for the medium degree of expectation is set. The ratio is 70% (70/100), and the ratio at which the back image for low expectation is set is 20% (20/100). Therefore, when the pull-back mode is continued (when the pull-back mode in which the number of time savings is set to 100 after the end of the previous big hit is set), the rear image for the high expectation is set by the re-lotting of the expectation. The possibility increases twice as compared to the case where the mode has already been shifted to the normal mode, and the possibility that the rear image for low expectation is set is reduced by half or less. Further, the ratio of setting the rear image for the medium expectation is increased by 25%.

  Therefore, when the back image for the high degree of expectation is set, the possibility that the pullback mode is continued (expectation) increases, while when the back image for the low degree of expectation is set, the pullback mode ends. (It has been shifted to the normal mode). Therefore, the mode can be guessed by the player according to the type of the rear image, so that the interest in the game during the period from the end of the extended play mode to the end of the 100 special symbol lotteries can be improved. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 124, the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 20B) in that an effect lottery counter 223da and a variation counter 223db are provided. They differ in that they are added. Another difference is that the breakthrough effect counter 223g is deleted with the breakthrough effect not being executed in the first embodiment.

  The effect lottery counter 223da is a counter used to select one back image (expectation) from the expectation selection table 222da described above. The value of the effect lottery counter 223da is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When selecting the back image, the random number value (counter value) defined in the expectation degree selection table 222da is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223da, and the corresponding one back image is selected. The effect lottery counter 223da is updated, for example, every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 45).

  The change number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the special symbol after the end of the big hit (the number of executions of the change display). The initial value of the change number counter 223db is set to 0. When the execution of the change display effect is set based on a new change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the value is incremented by one. It is updated (see S5601 in FIG. 139). Further, when the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0. From the time the pull-back mode is set after the jackpot is completed to the time the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the fluctuation counter 223db is referred to each time the fluctuation display effect is set, and the expectation degree selection table 222da is used. It is determined whether it is time to execute the re-lottery of the degree of expectation (see S5603, S5605 to S5608 in FIG. 139).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the timer interrupt processing 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) is executed instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. , For example, is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds.

  Of the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, in each of steps S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 are executed. Further, in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing of S102 ends, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, The two-hit random counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S141). That is, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated in addition to the various counter values updated in the process of S103 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. After the process of S141, the special symbol variation process 5 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104, see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment (S142), and the process proceeds to S105. Details of the special symbol change process 5 (S142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing in S105 is completed, next, the normal symbol change processing (S106, see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is replaced with a normal symbol change processing. The symbol variation process 5 is executed (S143), and the process proceeds to S107. Details of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-described special symbol variation process 5 (S142) will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 5 (S142). This special symbol variation process 5 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and includes the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28). ), The same processes as those of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed. In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S207 or the process of S212 ends, the special symbol variation start process (see S213 and FIG. 29) of the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the special symbol change start process 5 is executed (S261), and this process ends. Details of the special symbol change start process 5 (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the mode type storage area 203dc is stored. After the data is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S262), the counter value of the time reduction counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S263), and the process proceeds to S220. By transferring the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc to the winning mode storage area 203de before returning the jackpot state to the initial state (normal state of a normal symbol) in the processing of S263. Until the end of the jackpot, data indicating the mode (game state) at the time of winning the jackpot can be held. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state when the jackpot is won can be accurately determined, and the corresponding number of time reductions can be set.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S218, it is determined that the current lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (that is, a miss or a small hit). In this case (S218: No), in the case of the time saving state (that is, in the extended mode or the pullback mode), a time saving number updating process for updating the number of time savings is executed (S264). The details of the time saving update process (S264) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the time saving number update process (S264) ends, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S265). If it is determined that the small hit is a small hit (S265: Yes), the small hit is determined. Then, a small hit start process for setting the start of the opening operation is performed (S266), and the process proceeds to S221. Details of the small hit start processing (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S265, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S265: No), the process of S266 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, details of the above-described special symbol change start process 5 (S261) will be described. The special symbol change start process 5 (S261) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a special symbol change start process (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. In the same manner as in the first embodiment, a special symbol lottery (whether it is determined) is performed based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, and the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is performed. This is a process for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of.

  Of the special symbol change start processing 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S312, each of the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment (see FIG. 29) is performed. The same processing as the processing is performed. In the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. 127) according to the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the current special symbol lottery result is a big hit (S305: Yes), the current winning is performed. The data corresponding to the hit jackpot type is stored in the hit jackpot type storage area 203db (S331), and the process proceeds to S306. By storing the data corresponding to the jackpot type in the jackpot type storage area 203db in advance in the process of S331, the jackpot type is accurately determined based on the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db at the end of the jackpot. Can be determined. Therefore, the game state after the end of the big hit can be set accurately.

  In the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the current special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S305: No), It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S332). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S332: Yes), the small hit type determination table 202da and the small hit type The display mode of the first special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the small hit type specified from the value of the counter C5 is set (S333), and the change pattern corresponding to the small hit is set in the change pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 120). ) Is determined (S334), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S332 that the current lottery result of the special symbol is not a small hit (S332: No), it means that the current lottery result is out of order, and the process proceeds to S308. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the above-described time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) will be described. This time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) is one of the special symbol variation processes 5 (see FIG. 126), as described above, and is a process for updating the number of time savings of a normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 128, in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203da during time saving is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2301). If it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203da is 0 (S2301: No), the current state is the normal state of the ordinary symbol (normal mode), and the time saving state is not set (the number of time savings need not be updated). ), The processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the value of the time reduction counter 203da is greater than 0 (one or more) (S2301: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203da is updated by subtracting one. (S2302), a command to notify the sound ramp control device 113 of the value of the updated time saving medium time counter 203da is set (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203da has become 0 (S2304). If the value of the time reduction counter 203da has become 0 (S2304: Yes), the extended-villa mode or the pullback mode ends. Therefore, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the transition to the normal mode is set (S2305), and the normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc. The data "00H" is stored (S2306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da after updating by the process of S2302 is not 0 (S2304: No), the processes of S2305 and S2306 are skipped. This processing ends as it is. By executing the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 128), the number of time savings can be appropriately updated in the extended mode and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  Next, the small hitting start process (S266) described above will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the small hit start process (S266) is one of the special symbol variation processes 5 (see FIG. 126), and is a process for setting the start of the small hit opening operation.

  As shown in FIG. 129, in the small hit start process (see FIG. 129), first, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 corresponding to the small hit type is read (S2401). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the opening door 670f1 of the V winning device 670 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds elapse from the start of the opening period, It is set so that the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass through for a period of 0.075 seconds (see FIG. 115).

  When the process of S2401 ends, next, data indicating the big hit type corresponding to the current small hit type is stored in the big hit type storage area 203db (S2402). As described above, if the small hit is A, the corresponding big hit type is the big hit C5 (see 202da1 in FIG. 119 (b)), and if the small hit is B, the corresponding big hit type is the big hit D5 ( If the small hit C, the corresponding big hit type is big hit E5 (see 202da3 in FIG. 119 (b)). If the small hit D, the corresponding big hit type is the big hit. F5 (see 202da4 in FIG. 119 (b)).

  When the processing in S2402 ends, the start of the small hit is set (S2403), and this processing ends. By executing the small hitting start process (see FIG. 129), when the variation pattern corresponding to the small hitting stops, the corresponding small hitting operation pattern can be started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, details of the above-described ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S143) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) instead of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, similarly to the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, in each of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623, the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed. In the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, after setting the display mode according to the ordinary symbol lottery result in the process of S612 or S613, the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202dc (See FIG. 121) is read out (S641), and from the read out table, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the current mode indicated by the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is read out and set (S642). This processing ends.

  Further, in the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the ordinary symbol is not in the time saving state (the value of the counter 203da during the time saving is 0) ( (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 6400a are set to 0.1 seconds × 1 time (S643), and the process proceeds to S623.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (the value of the counter 203da during the time reduction is 1 or more) (S620: Yes), the opening time and opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are determined. The number of times is set to 0.2 times × 1 (S644), and the process proceeds to S623.

  By executing the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130), the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol are appropriately set according to the mode. be able to. Thereby, in the normal mode and the pullback mode, it is possible to form a state in which it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a, while the extended play mode is provided. In this configuration, it is possible to form a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. In this manner, in the pullback mode, although the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is advantageous for the player to make a left-handed shot aiming at the first entrance 64 so that the player has a novel playability. Can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the startup process 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The start-up process 5 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. This is a process to be started.

  Of the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment, in the processes S901 to S910 and S912 to S916, S901 to S910 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are respectively performed. The same processes as those in S912 to S916 are executed. In the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are read out (S931). Then, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the game state specified from the read data is set (S912), and the process proceeds to S913. By executing the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131), the mode at power-on can be accurately grasped by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (1031) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 5 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (S1004, see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a. .

  Among the jackpot control processes 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processes as those in S1107 to S1109 are executed. In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening 650a is opened. This is set (S1141), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1142), and this processing ends.

  In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), the specific winning opening 650a It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S1143). As described above, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round of the jackpot, or when ten or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established. In the process of S1143, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1143: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 650a is set (S1144), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1143 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1105: No), the process proceeds to S1107.

  In the big hit control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that the big hit end timing has come (the end timing of the ending effect has come) (S1109: Yes) ), Instead of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, a jackpot ending process 5 (S1145) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process 5 (S1145) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 5 (S1145). As described above, the jackpot end process 5 (S1145) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot end process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Similarly to the above, it is a process for setting the game state (mode) after the end of the big hit.

  In the jackpot ending processing 5 (see FIG. 133), first, the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) is read (S1321), and the number of time savings specified in the read table and the type of the time saving state are set. Of these, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db and the mode at the time of the jackpot win indicated by the data stored in the win mode storage area 203de, and the mode (hour reduction) The status type is specified (S1322). When the processing of S1322 is completed, the specified number of times saved is set in the medium time counter 203da (S1323), and data indicating the mode (type of time saving state, game state) specified in the processing of S1322 is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc. (S1324). Next, a state command indicating the set gaming state (mode) is set (S1325), the big hit flag 203r and the winning mode storage area 203de are reset (S1326), and the process ends.

  By executing the big hit end process 5 (see FIG. 133), the game state after the big hit end can be appropriately set according to the big hit type and the game state (mode) at the time of winning.

  Next, a small hit control process 5 (1032) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit control process 5 (S1032) is a process executed in place of the small hit control process (S1005, see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning device 670. is there.

  Of the small hit control processes 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in each of S1601 to S1604 and S1607 to S1610, in each of the small hit control processes (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, see S1601 to S1601. The same processes as those in S1604 and S1607 to S1610 are executed. In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1604 that the small hit game is being executed (that is, the small hit flag 203s is on). (S1604: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621). If it is determined that it is the opening timing (S1621: Yes), the V winning opening 670a is opened. (S1622), this processing ends.

  In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621: No), then, at the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a. It is determined (S1623) whether or not there is, and if it is determined that it is the timing to close the V winning opening 670a (S1623: Yes), the closing of the V winning opening 670a is set (S1624), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1623 that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1623: No), the process proceeds to S1607.

  In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1609 that the timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the game ball for the V winning switch 670e3 is determined. (S1625), and terminates the present process. Details of the V passage detection processing (S1625) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1610 ends, next, the V passing flag 203dd is turned on (the V winning switch 670e3 is set to the game ball during the small hit). Is determined (S1626), and if it is determined that the V-pass flag 203dd is ON (S1626: Yes), the processes of S1627 to S1630 for setting the execution of the jackpot are performed. Execute. Specifically, first, the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627), and the data in the time reduction counter 203da and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1628). Next, the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data of the jackpot type storage area 203db is set (S1629), the V passing flag 203dd is set to off (S1630), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1626, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S1626: No), the execution condition of the big hit is not satisfied during the execution of the small hit game (V winning switch 670e3). Does not pass through any game balls), the processing for starting the big hit (the processing of each of steps S1627 to S1630) is skipped, and this processing is ended as it is.

  By executing the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134), when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game, the start of the big hit corresponding to the small hit type is accurately performed. Can be set.

  Next, details of the above-described V passage detection processing (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. This V passage detection processing (S1625) is one of the small hit control processing 5 (see FIG. 134), and is a processing for monitoring the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch 670e3 as described above.

  In the V passage detection process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501). If it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501: Yes), In this small hit, it means that the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 has already been detected, and it means that the execution of the big hit has already been determined after the end of the small hit, so this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S2501: No), it is next determined whether a game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502), and the V winning switch 670e3. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through (S2502: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502: Yes), the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is detected during the normal period (V (S2503). Here, as the V validity period, the special discharge flow path 670e2 is set to be passable for 0.075 seconds, and the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 670e2 just before the end of the period reaches the V pass switch 670e3. Is set to 0.2 seconds, which is a period that can be required by the time.

  In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is not detected during the V validity period (S2503: No), an illegal act of illegally passing the V winning switch 670e3 and executing a jackpot is performed. Since it may have been performed, an error command is set (S2504), and the process ends. By setting the error command, the display of the error image is set in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the clerk of the hall or the like who has visually recognized the error image can recognize the occurrence of the wrongdoing at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2503, if it is determined that the V-prize switch 670e3 has passed during the V-valid period (S2503: Yes), the sound lamp controller 113 notifies that the game ball has passed the V-prize switch 670e3. Is set (S2505), the V-pass flag 203dd is set to ON (S2506), and the process ends. By setting the V passing flag 203dd to ON, it is possible to set the start of the big hit after the end of the small hit.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. First, with reference to 136, details of the command determination process 5 (S4141) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment. This is a process for executing control according to the type of command output from the main control device 110.

  Of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215, S4201 to S4209 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as the respective processing of S4213 to S4215 is executed. In the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110, (S4209: Yes), state command processing for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified by the state command is executed (S4221), and this processing ends. Details of this status command will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned status command processing (S4221). This state command processing (S4221) is processing for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified by the state command, as described above. In this state command processing (4221), first, the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S5501). That is, the data is updated to data indicating the game state notified from main controller 110.

  Upon completion of the process in S5501, it is next determined whether or not the status command received this time is a status command for notifying that the mode has shifted to the extended holiday mode (S5502). If it is determined that the command is a command to be displayed (S5502: Yes), the back image for the extended-villa mode is set (S5503), and the process ends. When the mode is shifted to the extended-villa mode, a back image (not shown) dedicated to the extended-villa mode is set, so that the player can easily understand that the extended-villa mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the shift despite the shift to the extended play mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the command is not a command for notifying that the mode has been shifted to the extended-villa mode (S5502: No), then it is determined whether the command is a command for notifying a gaming state at the time of power return. It is determined (S5504) whether or not it is a status command output when the power is restored (S5504: Yes), and a back image for the normal mode is set (S5506), followed by terminating the present process. A state command that is not a state command for notifying the extended mode and is a state command output when the power is restored is a command that indicates the retraction mode or the normal mode. The same back image is set in both the pull-back mode and the normal mode, particularly when the mode shifts to the pull-back mode and the power is cut off in a situation where the number of fluctuations exceeds 30 and within 100. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the game state from the back image when the power is restored (it is difficult to distinguish between the normal mode and the pullback mode). That is, the game ability before the power is cut off (the game property that predicts whether the mode has been shifted to the normal mode or the pull-back mode is continued) can be taken over even after the power is turned on again. Therefore, when the power is shut off due to a so-called instantaneous stop or the like, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from deteriorating.

  In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the current status command is not the command at the time of power restoration (S5504: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicates the normal mode (S5505). If it is determined that the command is a command to be displayed (S5505: Yes), the process proceeds to S5506 to set the back image for the normal mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5505 that the command is not the command indicating the normal mode (that is, the command is the command indicating the pullback mode) (S5505: No), the back image for high expectation (see FIG. 116A) ) Is set (S5507), and this process ends. By setting the back image for high expectation when the pullback mode is notified, the player can be recognized as being in a relatively advantageous state. Therefore, the game can be continued even after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a variable display setting process 5 (S4142) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The variable display setting process 5 (S4142) is executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. This is a process for causing the three symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect.

  Of the variable display setting processing 5 (see FIG. 138), in each processing of S4801 to S4809, the same processing as the processing of each of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. Further, in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 138) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4805 is completed, next, in order to re-lottery the rear image showing the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pull-back mode is continued. Is executed (S4831), and the process proceeds to S4806. Details of the expectation degree update processing (S4831) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the above-described expectation degree update processing (S4831). In the expectation degree update processing (S4831), first, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is updated by adding 1 to the value (S5601). Next, whether the current mode is the extended mode (continuously in the gaming state storage area 223h). It is determined whether data indicating the Zhuang mode is stored) (S5602). In the process of S5602, when it is determined that the mode is the extended-villa mode (S5602: Yes), the possibility of the pull-back mode is 0, and there is no need to indicate the degree of expectation from the rear image. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S5602, when it is determined that the current mode is not the extended-villa mode (S5602: No), it is next determined whether or not the normal mode back image is set (S5603). If it is determined that the rear image is set (S5604: Yes), there is no possibility of executing a re-lottery of the rear image (the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot, and the normal mode is continued). ), The processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5603 that the back image for the normal mode is not set (S5603: No), the pullback mode is set after the previous big hit, and the camera has already fallen to the normal mode. Or, it means that the pull-back mode is continued, so it is first determined whether or not the value of the change number counter 223db is 101 (S5604). If the value of the change number counter 223db is 101 (S5604: Yes), whether the previous jackpot is the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5 means that the change number of the pull-back mode has ended and the normal mode has been set, The back image for the normal mode is set (S5605), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5604 that the value of the change number counter 223db is not 101 (S5404: No), then it is determined whether the value of the change number counter 223db is greater than 30. (S5606), when it is determined that it is 30 or less (S5606: No), whether the previous jackpot is the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5, it is the number of fluctuations that determines that the retraction mode is continued, and the high expectation degree. Since there is no need to change from the back image for use, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5606, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is greater than 30 (S5606: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223db is 31. (S5607). In the process of S5607, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is 31 (S5607: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for performing the lottery of the expected degree is executed. More specifically, the expected degree selection table 222da is read (S5609), and from the read table, a back image (expectation) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is specified and set as the back image (S5610). Then, the present process ends. This allows the player to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not the retraction mode is continuing at the time when the retraction mode has reached the number of changes that may have ended. Can be predicted whether or not is continued. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, in the process of S5607, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 31 (S5607: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608). (S5608: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for re-lotting the degree of expectation is also performed. That is, after the number of fluctuations at which the pullback mode may have ended is reached, the degree of expectation can be updated every time the fluctuation display is performed ten times. Therefore, the more the game is continued, the more accurately it can be predicted whether or not the mode is the pullback mode, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the process of S5608, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is not a multiple of 10 (S5608: No), the process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the V winning switch inside the V winning device 670 that allows the player to enter the ball in the case of a small hit in addition to the case of the special symbol lottery. Even when a game ball passes through 670e3, a jackpot game is executed. In addition, small hits cannot be won in the first special symbol lottery, but are won with a high probability (9/10) in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a big hit can be expected if the lottery results in a small hit, even if the lottery result does not become a big hit. It can be said that the special symbol lottery is a lottery more advantageous to the player. In the fifth embodiment, the rate at which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (ease of execution) is made different according to the game state. That is, a game state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second entrance 6400, and a game state in which game balls are easy to enter are provided. More specifically, in the normal mode in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is reduced, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the ordinary symbol is hit. In such a case, the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is shortened. Therefore, even if the player continues to aim at the through gate 67 by right-handing, the rate of opening of the electric accessory 6400a becomes extremely low, and the game proceeds to the second entrance 6400. It is also difficult to get the ball into the ball. On the other hand, in the extended-villa mode in which the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is increased, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the ordinary symbol is hit. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in the above is also long, it is possible to make many game balls enter the second entrance 6400 simply by continuously firing the game balls aiming at the through gate 67 by right-handing. . Therefore, in the extended mode, it is possible to form an advantageous state that is likely to be a big hit as compared with the normal mode.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the normal mode and the extended-villa mode, a pull-back mode in which the time saving state B of a normal symbol is set is provided. In this pull-back mode, although the probability of hitting a normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of hitting a normal symbol are common to the extended mode, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is different from the extended mode. It is configured. In the extended play mode, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set such that the electric accessory 6400a is opened at a timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400. Is set, but in the pullback mode, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second entrance 6400, and when the next game ball reaches the second entrance 6400, Normally, the fluctuation time of the symbol is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is opened only in front. In this manner, in the pullback mode, although it is possible to frequently open the electric accessory 6400a by continuously firing the game ball aiming at the through gate 67, the game ball almost reaches the second entrance 6400. Since the ball does not enter, it is in a very disadvantageous state that only the number of balls is unnecessarily reduced. Therefore, in the pullback mode, the player can perform a game method in which the player advances a game by causing a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-handing (to perform a lottery of a special symbol). In other words, a game method similar to that in the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given. It is possible to realize a novel game that can be done.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the pullback mode becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, there is a higher possibility that the mode will be shifted to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit. . In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times after the end of the extended-villa mode. For this reason, after the end of the extended-villa mode, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue the game at least until the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. Here, in the case of a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, or in a gaming machine of a specification in which a jackpot is given when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer), the gaming state is In the normal game state in which the game ball does not easily enter the specific area, and in the time-saving game state in which the game ball easily enters the specific area, only two types of game states are provided. In general, there is a specification that shifts to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, at the time of transition to the disadvantageous normal game state, there is a possibility that the motivation of the player for the game may be greatly reduced, and the player immediately quits the game at the time of the end of the time reduction game state. There was a possibility. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the extended play mode, at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, a special easy-to-transfer to the extended play mode in the event of a jackpot is achieved. The state (retraction mode) is set. Thereby, even if the extended play mode ends and the game ball enters an unfavorable game state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from decreasing the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended-play mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that the mode transition ratio (ratio of each jackpot type) is not limited to the contents of the fifth embodiment, and is arbitrarily determined within a range in which the normal mode is the most disadvantageous and the extended mode is the most advantageous. be able to. For example, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, the game state after the end of the jackpot is configured to be either the extended mode or the normal mode. However, the pull-back mode may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%). Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the pull-back mode, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the system always shifts to the extended play mode. However, the normal mode and the return mode are also lower than the extended mode. It is good also as a structure which can be set by a ratio.

  In the fifth embodiment, the number of times of the pullback mode is set to only 30 or 100, but the number is not limited to this, and the number of times may be further diversified. This makes it more difficult to determine whether or not the retraction mode has been completed, so that the player can more seriously predict how long the retraction mode will be continued. In addition, a part of the jackpot won during the extended-villa mode is configured to shift to the normal mode, and a suggestion of the degree of expectation based on the type of the rear image is performed as in the case where the pull-back mode is set. It may be configured. With this configuration, even when the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot, the player can continue the game in an attempt to determine whether or not the pull-back mode has been set based on the type of the rear image. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, the state of the distribution member 6600 includes a state in which game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 and a state in which game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2 by passing (distribution) of game balls. Although the switching configuration has been adopted, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing interval of game balls is determined and the state of the distribution member 6600 is electrically switched. In this case, for example, in the time reduction state A, the operation may be performed so that the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 are alternately distributed, and in the time reduction state B, the operation may be performed such that the distribution is performed only to the right flow path R1. . With this configuration, even in the time-saving state B, even reaching the through gate 67 is impeded, so that the game can be played more reliably by left-handing.

  In the fifth embodiment, two types of states in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400 and one type in which a game ball cannot easily enter the second entrance 6400. (Normal mode, pullback mode). That is, in the extended play mode, a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400, while in other modes (normal mode, pullback mode), it passes through the through gate 67. Also, the game ball that has been shot next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has flowed down the right side flow path R1 will not be able to enter the second ball entry port 6400, so that the normal design will not be possible. Although the fluctuating time and the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a have been set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which two types of game states are provided as game states in which game balls easily enter the second entrance 6400. Specifically, for example, both the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B are configured as a game state in which it is easy to enter the second entrance 6400. In the time-saving state A, the game ball is fired at the shortest firing interval. If the game ball continues to pass, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 (the game ball that has been fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and passes through the right channel R1). On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the game ball that has been fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and have the right flow path R1 The opening period of the electric accessory 6400a may be set so that both of the gaming balls that have passed through are allowed to enter. That is, in the time-saving state A, an opening period is set for a length in which the electric accessory 6400a is closed before the game ball following the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400. In the time-saving state B, an opening period may be set such that the electric accessory 6400a is closed after the game ball following the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls in the time reduction state B when the game ball is continuously struck to the right continuously in the time reduction state A than in the time reduction state A. Therefore, the time saving state B can be set to a state having a higher degree of advantage, and the player who is set to the time saving state B can be more pleased than the case where the time saving state A is set.

  In the fifth embodiment, by changing the normal symbol fluctuation time between the time saving state A and the time saving state B, in the time saving state A, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time saving state B, neither the game ball passing through the through gate 67 nor the game ball fired next to the game ball passing through the through gate 67 cannot enter the second entrance 6400 in the time saving state B. It was configured as follows. That is, in the time saving state A, when the game ball is continuously struck right at the shortest firing interval, most of the game balls distributed to the left channel R2 by the distribution member 6600 enter the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, neither the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the right flow path R1 nor the game ball distributed to the left flow path R2 can enter the second entrance 6400. Although the configuration has become possible, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the normal symbol fluctuating time, by changing the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a according to the type of the time saving state, the game ball enters the second entrance 6400 in the time saving state B. It is good also as composition which becomes hard to ball. Specifically, for example, in the time saving state A, as in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 0.1 second, and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 second. Thus, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, after the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.1 second elapses, it is momentarily released (for example, 0.01 second), and then 0.4 seconds elapses. The electric accessory 6400a may be opened for a relatively long time (for example, 0.19 seconds). With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400 before and after the electric accessory 6400a is instantaneously opened. It becomes impossible to enter the ball entry port 6400. In addition, the game ball fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entrance 6400 only after a relatively long opening time (0.19 seconds) has elapsed. Even if the player hits right, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400. Therefore, the same operation as that of the fifth embodiment can be realized, and the game can be played by left-handing in the time saving state B.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the time saving state A, the fluctuation time of the symbol is always 0.1 seconds (the fluctuation time in which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 easily enters the second entrance 6400). In the time-saving state B, it is configured such that 0.5 seconds (variation time during which it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400) is always set as the variation time of the normal symbol. It may be provided. Specifically, for example, in the time-saving state A, a change time of 0.5 second is set with a low probability (for example, 10%), and in the time-saving state B, a change time of 0.1 second is set with a low probability. May be set. This makes it possible to diversify the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  In the fifth embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the time saving state A, when the ordinary symbol is hit, the game ball passing through the through gate 67 can enter the second entrance 6400 directly. Although the configuration is such that a certain time is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be set so that the game ball which is fired next to the game ball passing through the through gate 67 and distributed to the right channel R1 can enter the ball. With such a configuration, in the time-saving state A, it is not possible to make the ball enter the second entrance 6400 simply by passing the game ball through the through gate 67. You can continue firing the ball. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, by displacing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 to the lower right by the deviating portion 6600c of the distribution member 6600, the game ball does not reach the distribution member 6600 for 1.5 seconds or more. In such a case, the configuration is such that the state of the distribution member 6600 is returned to the state of being distributed to the right flow path R1, but the deviating portion 6600c is not necessarily provided. Regardless of the firing interval of the game balls, the game balls reaching the distribution means may be alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is changed to the most disadvantageous state (the state where the number of balls is easily reduced and the unfavorable second special symbol is easily drawn). The extended play mode in which the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol is set is the most advantageous state (a state in which the number of holding balls is hardly reduced and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed). Further, in the retraction mode in which there is a possibility of shifting to a jackpot in the extended play mode, it is necessary to advance a game by entering a game ball into the first entrance 64 by left-handing as in the normal mode. However, in the pull-back mode, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of shifting to the extended-play mode is higher than when the jackpot is won in the normal mode. That is, two types of modes, a normal mode and a pullback mode, are provided as disadvantageous modes (game state) in which the game needs to be advanced by lottery of the first special symbol, and a predetermined mode after the end of the extended game mode is set. A relatively advantageous retraction mode is set only during the period.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state B of the ordinary symbol is set to the most disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to shift to the extended game mode even if a big hit occurs. The transition rate to the extended play mode in the case of a big hit is higher than in the time saving state B. More specifically, when a large symbol wins in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time reduction state B of the normal symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends becomes the normal symbol time reduction state B at a high rate, and the game mode changes to the extended play mode at a low rate. On the other hand, when a lottery is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the 100% extended mode. As a result, the time saving state B of the ordinary symbol ends, and the transition to the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol becomes easier to shift to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, when the time saving state B is set, the time saving state is changed. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played with an expectation of the end.

  In the sixth embodiment, a lottery is won with a low probability (for example, 1/200) even in the lottery of the first special symbol. The small hit type of the first special symbol is a small hit type that shifts to the extended game mode after a big hit given when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, or a small hit that shifts to a normal state of a normal symbol. A hit type is provided. For this reason, if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 after winning a small win, there is a possibility that the state will shift to an advantageous state. It is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played with an expectation of a small hit rather than a large hit.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the case where the number of special symbol lotteries has been completed a prescribed number of times (for example, 100) in the one time reduction state, a small hit of a specific type (small hit A6) in the one time reduction state When the number of wins becomes a specified number of times (for example, once), the state is directly shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. In other words, when a specific type of small hit (small hit A6) is won in the normal symbol time saving state B, the small hit ends without the game ball passing through the V winning switch 670e3, and the remaining time saving is achieved. Regardless of the number of times, a direct transition is made to the relatively advantageous normal mode. Thereby, in the time-saving state B of the most unfavorable ordinary symbol, a game can be performed in the expectation that a specific type of small hit (small hit A6) will be won at an early stage (small number of special symbol lotteries). it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the most disadvantageous time-saving state B is set, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, in a small win of a specific type (small win A6), it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is more advantageous that no V winning occurs.

  In the following description of the sixth embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the time-saving state B of the most disadvantageous ordinary symbol is referred to as a “normal mode”, and when the time-saving state B is larger than the time-saving state B, The normal state of a normal symbol that is easy to shift to the extended mode is referred to as “preparation mode”. It should be noted that the time saving state A of the ordinary symbol is the most advantageous state as in the fifth embodiment, and is therefore referred to as the “rensou mode” as in the fifth embodiment.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The point is that the executed control processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 140, a description will be given of a selection effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit occurs in the normal mode (ordinary symbol time saving state B) in the sixth embodiment. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the player passes the V prize switch 670e3 during the small hit period and becomes a big hit, the small hit type (small hit B6, C6 ), And at least a small hit type (small hit A6) in which the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode by ending the small hit without passing through the V winning switch 670e3. In other words, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a small hit, a small ball hit type in which it is more advantageous for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 670e3 and execute the big hit, and pass through the V winning switch 670e3. A small hit type is provided in which it is more advantageous to end the small hit as it is without doing so. In this selection effect, an effect is executed in which the player selects between right-handed to pass the V-win switch 670e3 or left-handed so that the game ball does not pass through the V-win switch 670e3. Is done.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, when the small hit is won during the normal mode, “3”, “4”, and “1” indicating the small hit are displayed in the display area Ds2 in the upper right portion of the display screen. Is stopped and displayed in combination with the third symbol. In addition, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a display mode in which the display screen is divided into two parts on the left and right. Is formed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, in the left half of the display screen, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR8 in which the character “V is to avoid the preparation mode !?” is formed. Displays an arrow image YG1 imitating a left-pointing arrow on which the character “left” is displayed. In the right half of the display screen, there is formed a horizontally long rectangular display area HR9 in which the characters "V jackpot! , An arrow image YG2 imitating a right-pointing arrow on which the character “Right” is displayed.

  According to these display contents, the player may shift to the preparation mode by left-handing. On the other hand, when the player performs right-handing and the V prize occurs, the player shifts to the extended play mode in addition to the jackpot. Can be understood. This allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a right-handed shot for the V prize or to make a left-handed shot to avoid the V prize. Since the game can be played by the method, the interest of the player can be improved each time a small hit is achieved. In the sixth embodiment, when the V winning is avoided, the small hitting type (small hitting A6) which shifts to the preparation mode when the V winning is avoided is determined to be 50%. The rate at which the small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to the extended play mode after the big hit is determined is 40%, and the mode shifts to the preparation mode (time saving state B) after the small hit due to the occurrence of the V winning. The rate at which the small hit type (small hit C6) is determined is 10%. Further, when the V prize occurs at the small hit A6, the normal mode is reset 100 times after the big hit. Therefore, when a game is played aiming at the V prize and a V prize occurs as intended, a big hit is always given, but the normal mode is looped rather than the possibility of shifting to the extended play mode. The likelihood is higher. Further, when avoiding the V winning, the mode is shifted to the preparation mode at a rate of 50%, and the normal mode is maintained at a rate of 50%. Therefore, it is more serious to decide whether to avoid the V winning or aim for the V winning. Can be determined. Further, the determination of whether to avoid the V prize or to aim for the V prize can be made different depending on the number of remaining time savings (the remaining number of times in the normal mode). More specifically, for example, when the number of times reduced in the normal mode is few, the player who avoids the V winning is more likely to risk the player from winning the V and resetting the normal mode. Can be considered good. In addition, when the number of time savings is large, even if the number of time savings is reset, the shock is small, so that it is possible to make it think that the V prize should be actively aimed at. Therefore, since the game method when the selected effect is generated can be changed according to the remaining number of time savings in the normal mode, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 118 (a)) in that a small hit number selection table 202ea is added. It is different in that it is. In addition, the first random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the small hit type selection table 202da, and the content of the time saving number selection table 202db are partially different. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described fifth embodiment (see FIG. 118A), and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, with reference to FIG. 141B, details of the first random number table 202a according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), in the first random number table 202a according to the sixth embodiment, five random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 4” are defined as the determination values for determining the big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 141 (b)). As in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot determination value is common to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Of the 400 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers determined to be a big hit is 5, and therefore, in the sixth embodiment, a special symbol lottery is executed. The probability of a big hit in this case is 1/80 (5/400). That is, it is set to be twice or more higher than the jackpot probability (1/200) in the fifth embodiment. As a result, it becomes difficult to make the number of times reduced before the big win in the first special symbol draw in the normal mode. Therefore, when the mode is shifted from the normal mode (the normal symbol time saving state B) to the preparation mode (the normal symbol normal state), the player can be more satisfied. The normal mode basically continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. The probability that the special symbol lottery will be performed 100 times and the jackpot will never be a big hit is about 28.4% (79/80 to the 100th power), so the possibility of shifting from the normal mode to the preparation mode is 28. 4%.

  In addition, “5 to 397” is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141B), and the determination is made that it is determined to be the small hit of the first special symbol. "398, 399" is defined as the value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141 (b)). Therefore, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/200 (2/400). That is, in the normal mode, the probability of a small hit is set to be lower than the probability of a big hit in a special symbol lottery. In other words, it is configured such that the possibility of shifting to another mode after a large hit or the reduction of the number of working hours becomes higher than that of shifting to another mode triggered by a small hit.

  In addition, “5 to 40” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141B), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol is determined. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141B). As a result, similarly to the fifth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a high probability (9/10), so that the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 670e3. Is also set more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the time-saving state A (long-run mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed.

  Next, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (c). FIG. 141 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141 (c), in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot A6 and the jackpot B6 are provided as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot C6 is provided as the jackpot of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the big hit type of the first special symbol, “big hit A6” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 69”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 141 (c)). The “big hit A6” is a special big hit in which the number of rounds is 5 lands and the mode after the big hit is varied according to the gaming state (mode) at the time of the big hit winning. More specifically, if the "big hit A6" is reached in the time saving state (normal mode, extended holiday mode), the normal mode in which the number of time savings is 100 is set after the end of the big hit, while the normal state of the normal symbol (preparation mode). ), When the "big hit A6" is reached, the extended play mode in which the number of times saved is 100 is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A6” is 70, so the first special symbol Is "70%" when the jackpot is won in the lottery.

  In addition, since the extended play mode is a gaming state in which the game proceeds mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is necessary to proceed with the game by the lottery of the first special symbol in most cases where the "big hit A6" is won. This is a normal mode or a preparation mode. If the "big hit A6" is set in the normal mode, the most disadvantageous normal mode is set again after the big hit ends, and 100 times of the number of times saved are reset regardless of the number of times saved at the time of winning the big hit. Therefore, in the normal mode, “big hit A6” is the most disadvantageous big hit type. On the other hand, if the "big hit A6" is set in the preparation mode, the most advantageous extended play mode (saving time state A) is set after the end of the big hit, and if the "big hit A6" is set during the preparation mode, it is advantageous for the player. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "big hit B6" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". (See 202b2 in FIG. 141 (c)). This “big hit B6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to the extended game mode regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. That is, in the normal mode, the jackpot type is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B6” is 70, so the first special symbol Is "30%" when the jackpot is won in the lottery. In other words, in the normal mode, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A6" in which the normal mode is set again after the big hit at a rate of 70% is determined, and only at a rate of 30%, "Big hit B6" in which the extended-village mode is set is determined. In other words, even if a big hit occurs in the normal mode, the degree of expectation to shift to another mode is low (a rate of 30%). It is possible to provide a novel playability that makes the player want to exit the normal mode (end the time saving state) and shift to the preparation mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, “big hit C6” is defined in association with all the values of the first hit type counter C2 (FIG. 141). (See 202b3 of (c)). This “big hit C6” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds and the mode shifts to the extended play mode after the big hit is completed. Therefore, if a jackpot is achieved in the extended game mode in which the game is progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the mode always shifts to the extended game mode after the end of the large hit. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, similar to the fifth embodiment, in the extended game mode, the winning in the lottery of the second special symbol is larger than the winning in the second special symbol after the big hit, rather than the big hit. The possibility of going into the Zhuang mode increases. Therefore, the player can be pleased when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202da in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a). FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table 202da.

  As shown in FIG. 142A, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, "small hit A6" is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "0 to 49". (See 202da1 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit A6” is a small hit type to which “big hit D6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. The jackpot D6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, the "small hit A6" is a small hit type in which the gaming state after the big hit is most disadvantageous if a V prize is made during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “small hit A6” is 50, so if a special pattern lottery results in a small hit, “small hit A6” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100). The "small hit A6" is a small hit which is an opportunity to end the time saving state regardless of the number of remaining time savings. For this reason, in the normal mode, if it is "small hit A6" and no V prize occurs, the mode shifts to the relatively advantageous preparation mode after the small prize. Is a special small hit type in which the gaming state is advantageous.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, "small hit B6" is associated with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "50 to 89". It is specified (see 202da2 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit B6” is a small hit type to which “big hit B6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, the jackpot B6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the extended play mode is set after the end of the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, the "small hit B6" is a small hit type in which the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous state by making the V winning during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of “small hit B6” is 25, so if the special symbol lottery results in a small hit, “small hit B6” is The determined ratio is 25% (25/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, "small hit C6" is associated with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "90 to 99". It is defined (see 202da3 in FIG. 142 (a)). This “small hit C6” is a small hit type to which “big hit E6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. The "big hit E6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is five and the preparation mode is set after the big hit is completed regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, the "small hit C6" is a small hit type in which the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous state by making a V prize during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value of "small hit C6" is 10, so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit C6" The determined ratio is 10% (10/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit D6" is defined in correspondence with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 29". (See 202da4 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit D6” is a small hit type to which “big hit C6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, the “big hit C6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the extended play mode is set after the end of the big hit regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, the "small hit D6" is given as the "small hit D6" because the largest number of rounds and the game state after the big hit are most advantageous by giving the V prize during the small hit game. Is one of the most advantageous small hit types for the player. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes “small hit D6” is 30. Therefore, if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, “small hit D6” is changed. The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit E6" is defined in association with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "30 to 79". (See 202da5 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit E6” is a small hit type to which “big hit F6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. The “big hit F6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the game state after the end of the big hit is changed according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the "big hit F6" is reached in the time saving state (normal mode, extended holiday mode), the extended holiday mode in which the number of time savings is 100 is set after the end of the big hit, while the normal state of the ordinary symbol (preparation) When the "big hit F6" is reached in (mode), the number of times saved is set to 0 (the preparation mode is set). Therefore, in the extended play mode, when the "big hit F6" is reached, the extended play mode is continued even after the end of the big hit, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the "big hit F6" in the preparation mode, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. It is disadvantageous compared to the case of a jackpot. This is because if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the preparation mode, the mode shifts to the advantageous extended mode at a rate of 100%. Therefore, in the preparation mode in which it is necessary to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handing, when an irregular game for executing the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the degree of advantage for the player Can be reduced, so that an irregular game method can be suppressed. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes “small hit E6” is 50, so if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, “small hit E6” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" is defined in association with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "80 to 89". (See 202da6 in FIG. 142 (a)). The “small hit F6” is a small hit type to which “big hit G6” is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. The “big hit G6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the big hit is completed. In addition, the period of the normal mode (the number of special symbol lotteries until shifting to the preparation mode) set after the “big hit G6” is completed has a different configuration depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the "big hit G6" is reached during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal mode (hour saving state B) is set 50 times after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit" is set during the normal state of the normal symbol. G6 ", the normal mode is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, if the "big hit G6" is reached in the extended play mode, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the end of the big hit, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, since the number of times smaller than the number of times of the normal mode (100 times) set in the case of "big hit A6" in the normal mode is set, it is easy to leave the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the game is shifted to the preparation mode or the jackpot is won before the game is shifted to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes "small hit F6" is 10, so if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" becomes The determined ratio is 10% (10/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit G6" is defined in correspondence with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "90 to 94". (See 202da7 in FIG. 142 (a)). This “small hit G6” is a small hit type to which “big hit H6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. Like the “big hit G6”, the “big hit H6” has 10 rounds and is a big hit type in which the normal mode is set after the big hit is completed. Specifically, if the "big hit H6" is reached during the time saving state of the normal symbol, 25 normal modes (hour saving state B) are set after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit" is set during the normal state of the normal symbol. H6 ", the normal mode is set 100 times after the end of the big hit. Therefore, if the "big hit H6" is reached in the extended play mode, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the end of the big hit, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, the number of normal modes (100 times) set when “big hit A6” is set in the normal mode, and the number of normal modes set (25 times) when set to “big hit G6” in consecutive mode Since the number of times is set to be smaller than that in ()), it is easier to shift from the normal mode to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the game is shifted to the preparation mode or the jackpot is won before the game is shifted to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the end of the extended play mode, so that the operability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that becomes “small hit G6” is five, so if a small hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, “small hit G6” is The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit H6" is defined in correspondence with the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "95 to 99". (See 202da8 in FIG. 142 (a)). This “small hit H6” is a small hit type to which “big hit I6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. Like the “big hit G6” and the “big hit H6”, the “big hit I6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the big hit is completed. Specifically, if the "big hit I6" is reached during the time-saving state of the normal symbol, one normal mode (hour-saving state B) is set after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit" during the normal state of the normal symbol is set. In the case of "I6", the normal mode is set 100 times after the end of the big hit. Therefore, when the "big hit I6" is reached in the extended play mode, after the big hit is completed, if the lottery is removed by the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to shift to the preparation mode. Then, it is most advantageous for the player (it is easy to shift to the preparation mode). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are five counter values that are "small hits H6". Therefore, if a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hits H6" is The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  In the sixth embodiment, in the extended-villa mode, when the mode is shifted to the normal mode after the end of the big hit, the number of times that the normal mode (time-saving state B) is continued is not clearly indicated to the player. That is, similar to the sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation as to whether or not the mode has shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode is indicated according to the type of the rear image. With such a configuration, for a predetermined period (50 times after the end of the big hit in the sixth embodiment) after the end of the extended mode, the mode has shifted to the preparation mode, or the normal mode is maintained. It is possible to provide a game property that allows the user to predict whether the player is present. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142B, the details of the number-of-times-saving-times selection table 202db in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving number selection table 202db. The time-saving number selection table 202db, like the time-saving number selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment, indicates the number of time savings after the end of the big hit (the number of special symbol lotteries until shifting to the normal mode) at the time of the big hit and the big hit. 3 is a data table in which data to be set in accordance with the game state is specified.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot A6 is defined in association with the time saving state A of 100 times in the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal symbol, and the time reduction state of the normal symbol ( The time saving state B 100 times is defined in association with the normal mode and the extended mode (see 202db1 in FIG. 142B). Therefore, in the preparation mode set to the normal state of the ordinary symbol, if the jackpot A6 is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the extended play mode is set after the jackpot, which is one of the preferred jackpot types for the player. . On the other hand, in the normal mode or the extended-villa mode, if the jackpot A6 is reached, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, and thus it becomes one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player. In the extended play mode, since the game progresses mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the game is disadvantaged by the jackpot A6 (the disadvantageous normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot). ) Is almost the normal mode.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the jackpot types B6 and C6 are defined in association with the jackpots B6 and C6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times in the time saving state A (FIG. 142B). 142 (b), 202db2). Therefore, even if the jackpots B6 and C6 are won in any of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the extended play mode, the most advantageous extended play mode is provided after the end of the jackpot. The jackpots B6 and C6 are one of the most advantageous jackpot types.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, 100 time saving states B are defined in association with the jackpot D6 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (FIG. 142 ( b) 202db3). Therefore, the jackpot D6 is most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. In addition, as the jackpot type, the jackpot E6 is defined as being associated with 0 times as the number of time savings (see 202db4 in FIG. 142 (b)). Therefore, even if the big hit E6 is won in any of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the extended game mode, the preparation mode becomes relatively advantageous after the big hit ends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), the jackpot F6 is defined as the jackpot type in the normal state of the normal symbol (preparation mode) in the normal state (preparation mode). The time saving state A of 100 times is defined in association with (the normal mode and the extended mode) (see 202db5 in FIG. 142B). The big hit F6 is a small hit E6 in the lottery of the second special symbol, and is a big hit type that is won when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the small hit game, and is basically a big hit only in the consecutive play mode. . When the jackpot F6 is reached in the extended play mode, the extended play mode is set again after the end of the jackpot, so the jackpot F6 is one of the jackpot types in which the gaming state after the jackpot is most advantageous. The reason why the number of times saved is set to 0 when winning during the normal state of the ordinary symbol is to suppress an irregular playing method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode. . That is, in the preparation mode, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode shifts to the extended play mode at a rate of 100%. However, if the lottery of the second special symbol becomes the small hit E6 and the big hit F6 is won. , Loops through the preparation mode. Therefore, if the second special symbol lottery is executed irregularly, it is disadvantageous on the contrary, so that it is possible to suppress the irregular game method.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot G6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and 50 times in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol. (See 202db6 in FIG. 142 (b)). Therefore, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the extended play mode, a relatively large number of normal modes are set, which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot H6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and 25 times in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol. (See 202db7 in FIG. 142B). Therefore, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the extended play mode, the normal mode is set a smaller number of times than when the jackpot G6 is reached, so that it becomes easier to end the normal mode than the jackpot G6. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the jackpot G6 is reached and the extended play mode ends. Also, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times in the same manner as the jackpot G6. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method that attempts to execute the second special symbol lottery in the preparation mode. Can be planned.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot I6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and once in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol. (See 202db8 in FIG. 142 (b)). Therefore, when the jackpot becomes I6 in the extended play mode, the normal mode is set in a smaller number of times than when the jackpot becomes G6 or the jackpot H6. Can be. Therefore, it becomes more advantageous for the player than when the jackpot G6 or the jackpot H6 is reached and the extended play mode ends. In addition, when the jackpot is I6 in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times in the same manner as the jackpot G6 and the jackpot H6. Therefore, an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the details of the small hitting specified number selection table 202ea will be described. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit specified number selection table 202ea. The prescribed number of small hits selection table 202ea is a data table that is referred to for setting an end condition of the time saving state for each small hit type. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the number of wins until the end of the time saving state is defined for each type of small hit, separately from the number of time savings (number of lotteries for special symbols). When the specified number of times has been reached, the time reduction state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time reductions. This makes it possible to give a sense of expectation that the specified number of times has been reached each time a small hit occurs in the disadvantageous normal mode.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the specified number of small hits selection table 202ea is associated with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the number of winnings (the specified number) until the time reduction state for each small hit type is ended. Number) is specified. More specifically, for the big hit A6, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types in the normal state of the ordinary symbol. On the other hand, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, once as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, and 100 times as the specified number of times for the small hit types other than the small hit A6 (see FIG. 143). 202ea1). That is, when the extended mode is set, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, whereas when the normal mode (time saving state B) is set, the big hit A6 is set. On the other hand, once is set as the specified number of times, and 100 times is set as the specified number of times for other small hit types. Regarding the big hits B6 and C6, 100 times are defined as the specified number of times for all the small hit types regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (see 202ea2 in FIG. 143). That is, when the big hits B6 and C6 in which the extended play mode is set irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, the jackpot D6 and the jackpots G6 to I6 are defined as a predetermined number of times with respect to the small jackpot A6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, and For the small hit type of, the specified number of times is set in association with 100 times (see 202ea3 in FIG. 143). That is, when any one of the big hits D6 and G6 to I6 in which the normal mode is set regardless of the game state at the time of the winning, one time is set as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, 100 times is set as the specified number of times.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 143, for the big hit E6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 0 times are defined as the specified number of times for all the small hit types (see FIG. 143). 202ea4). That is, when the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit, 0 is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types. In addition, for the jackpot F6, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, 0 is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, while in the normal symbol time saving state, all the small hit types are set. Is defined as 100 times as the specified number of times (see 202ea5 in FIG. 143).

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the extended-village mode is set, 100 is set as the specified number of times for terminating the time-saving state for all the small hit types. That is, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the time saving state is surely continued. Thus, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from being forcibly ended before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times in the extended-villa mode, and to shift to the preparation mode, thereby preventing the player from being disappointed. In addition, when the normal mode is set, the small hitting A6 is set to one time as the specified number of small hits for terminating the time saving state. Accordingly, in the normal mode, if the small hit A6 is won, the number of time savings can be forcibly ended and the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode. A game can be played in expectation of winning A6. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game in the normal mode is merely an operation in which the game ball is continuously entered into the first entrance 64 until the number of times saved has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the normal mode for the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode only, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. Although the number of times was set to 100, the number is not limited to this. The correspondence between the prescribed number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the extended play mode, a small hit type with a small number of times (for example, five times) may be provided in the small hits of the second special symbol. With such a configuration, in the multi-villa mode, as the failure to win a V of about 1/20 continues, the possibility of the multi-villa mode being terminated is increased. You can have. Further, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the specified number of small hits may be determined by summing the number of wins of one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times of small hits B6 and small hits C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the V prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it is possible to positively grasp that the specified number of times before shifting to the preparation mode is reduced. Motivation for a player's game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 144, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 121 (b)) in that a storage area 203ea for the prescribed number of small hits is added. They differ in the point.

  The prescribed number of small hits storage area 203ea is used to store, for each small hit type, the remaining number of wins of small hits for terminating the time-saving state (normal mode, extended-village mode) and shifting to the preparation mode. This is a storage area. In the normal symbol time saving state, the remaining winning number (specified number) corresponding to the winning type of winning is subtracted and updated each time a small winning is achieved (see S2412 in FIG. 150). Then, when the specified number of times corresponding to any of the small hit types becomes 0 (reached the specified number), the process shifts to the preparation mode regardless of the remaining number of time savings (number of special symbol lotteries). (See S2414 in FIG. 150). In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, the prescribed number of small hit types other than the small hit A6 is set to 100, and therefore, 100 times (or 50 times, There is no possibility that the time saving state is ended before the number of times (25 times, once) ends. Also, in the extended play mode, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, so the specified number of small hits is reached before the end of 100 times, which is the number of time savings in the extended play mode, ends. There is no possibility to go to the preparation mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a method of shifting the gaming state according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is roughly provided with three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 145 (time saving state B of a normal symbol), the extended mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145 (time saving state A of a normal symbol), and the lower right part of FIG. A preparation mode (normal state of a normal symbol) is provided.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates the time saving state B of the normal symbol, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and even if the first special symbol has been hit by a lottery, it is a consecutive holiday. Since it is difficult to shift to the mode, the game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. As described above, the extended play mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state A of a normal symbol is set, and the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400, so that a small hit with a high probability is achieved. Is generated and the chance of passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is increased, so that the gaming state is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal mode. In addition, since the extended play mode is easily set again after the end of the big hit, the gaming state is most advantageous for the player.

  Further, the preparation mode indicates a game state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. As described above, since the game ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 6400, the first mode is set similarly to the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play a game aiming at the entrance 64, if a jackpot is won, the game mode shifts to the extended game mode at a rate of 100%, which is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal mode.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the normal mode to another mode when a big hit occurs, when a small hit is won, and when the number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145, if a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot B6 is determined as the jackpot type, the extended play mode is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. When the number of time savings has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol for the number of time savings has been completed), the mode shifts to the preparation mode (normal state of the ordinary symbols). When the small hit A6 is reached and the small hit game is completed without a V winning, the mode shifts to the preparation mode because the specified number of small hits A6 in the normal mode has been reached. Further, when the small hit B6 is reached, the player makes a right-handed aiming for the V prize, and when the V prize occurs, the game shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit (the big hit B6) based on the V prize. . Further, when the small hit C6 is reached, the player makes a right-handed aiming for the V prize, and when the V prize occurs, the game shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit (big hit D6) based on the V prize. . On the other hand, when the big win A6 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and when the small win A6 is won and a V prize is generated, the normal mode is set again after the end of the big hit. Further, when the small wins B6 and C6 do not occur and the V winning does not occur, the normal mode is maintained.

  Therefore, in the normal mode, when a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode is shifted to the extended-villa mode only at a rate of 30%, and the normal mode is looped at a rate of 70%. That is, even if the first special symbol lottery wins, it is more likely that the normal mode will be looped than the shift to the extended-villa mode. Therefore, the special symbol lottery is not so happy for the player. Becomes Therefore, in the normal mode, it is possible to make the player want to shift to the preparation mode after the number of times saved, rather than the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. , It is possible to provide the player with a novel playability that the player does not want to win. Further, in the normal mode, when a small win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit A6 is determined at a rate of 50%, the number of times of which the prescribed number of times until the time saving state is ended is one. Therefore, if the small hit A6 is reached and no V prize is generated, the mode shifts to the preparation mode. When the small hit is won with a probability of 1/200 in the special symbol lottery, the small hit A6 is determined. That the player expects. If a V prize occurs at the small hit A6, the normal mode is set again after the big hit is completed. For this reason, it can be said that the small hit A6 is a small hit type in which it is more advantageous not to generate a V winning than in a case where a V winning is generated, from the viewpoint of transition to a gaming state (mode). On the other hand, if the small hit type other than the small hit A6 is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming state (mode) is maintained unless a V winning is generated. That is, the small hit types other than the small hit A6 are the small hit types in which generating the V prize is more advantageous than not generating the V prize.

  As described above, the small hit type (small hit A6) which is advantageous if the V prize is not obtained and which is disadvantageous if the V prize is given, and the small hit type (the small hit B6) which is maintained in the disadvantageous state if the V prize is not set. By providing the configuration C6), it is possible to provide a playability that allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a V prize or to avoid the V prize when a small hit is won. it can. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the normal mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed regardless of the small hit type. This makes it difficult to infer the small hit type from the display mode, so that it is possible to more seriously determine whether or not to aim for the V winning. Therefore, every time a small hit is won, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the extended-villa mode to another mode in addition to the case where the jackpot has been won and the case where the number of times of normal symbols has been reduced. More specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, the lottery of the second special symbol causes a small hit and a V winning (event in which the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hits G6 to I6 Is determined, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode. Also, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times without a big hit, the normal symbol shifts to the preparation mode after the number of time reductions has elapsed. On the other hand, if the big wins C6 and F6 are determined when the V prize is won, or if a big win is achieved by a special symbol lottery, the extended-villa mode is set again after the big win ends. In addition, as described above, the probability that the change of the special symbol of 100 times without losing the jackpot is about 0.6%, and thus is an event that hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to the other mode in the extended-villa mode is when almost the big hits G6 to I6 are won. The small hits (small hits F6 to H6) corresponding to the large hits G6 to I6 are determined at a rate of 20% of all the small hits. It becomes a very advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the extended-villa mode as one goal, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in the lower right of FIG. 145, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the preparation mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 145, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot becomes A6, the jackpot becomes B6, and the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to the extended mode. In the preparation mode, basically, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed (a game ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400), but the second entry is performed by an irregular game method. When a game ball is thrown into the ball opening 6400 to be a big hit or a small hit and a V winning is generated, the game falls to the normal mode (when the big hit F6 to H6). , There is a possibility that the preparation mode is looped (when the jackpot hits D6 and E6). Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by the irregular game method, it is more difficult to shift to the extended play mode than when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

  Next, details of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 146 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 123 (a)) in that the expectation degree selection table 222da is deleted. The difference is that a rank-up lottery table 222ea is added.

  The rank-up lottery table 222ea indicates the number of remaining fluctuations up to the preparation mode by the rank-up mode of the rear image when the mode is changed to the normal mode as one of the jackpots G6 to I6 in the extended-villa mode. Is a data table that is referred to for setting a rank-up effect for the game. Details of the rank-up lottery table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b).

  FIG. 146 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the rank-up lottery table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), in the rank-up lottery table 222ea, for each value of the remaining number of time savings (J), the determination value for determining to update (rank-up) the back image with higher expectation. It is a data table in which (a counter value of an effect lottery counter 223da) is associated and defined. The update of the rear image is performed by lottery every time the number of times of change becomes a multiple of 10 in a range where the number of times of change is less than 50.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the value of the number of remaining working hours (J) is less than 20, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “0 to 29”, it is determined that there is no rank up. On the other hand, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “30 to 89”, it is determined that the rank is up by one, and when it is “90 to 99”, it is determined that the rank is up by two. Here, one rank-up is a middle-degree expectation rear image that is updated (rank-up) to a middle-degree expectation rear image when the current rear-view image is a low-expected degree rear-view image. In this case, this indicates that the back image for the high degree of expectation is updated (ranked up). That is, it means that the degree of expectation is increased by one step. If a back image for high expectation has already been set, the back image for high expectation is not changed. Also, "up two ranks" means that the back image is updated (ranked up) to a high expectation back image regardless of the type of the current back image.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the value of the remaining working hours (J) is 20 or more, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “0 to 59”, it is determined that there is no rank up, In the case of "60 to 97", it is determined to be one rank up, and in the case of "98, 99", it is determined to be two ranks up. As described above, when the number of time reductions is less than 20, the rate of raising one rank or two ranks becomes higher than in the case where the number of time reductions is 20 or more. Pay attention to the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 147, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 124) in that a rank-up lottery flag 223ea and an expected degree storage area 223eb are added. It is different in that it is.

  The rank-up lottery flag 223ea is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for performing a lottery for rank-up of the rear image using the rank-up lottery table 222ea. This rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot of the type that shifts from the extended-village mode to the normal mode ends (see S5706 in FIG. 154), and the fifty-first variation pattern effect after the jackpot ends. Is set to off at the start timing of (see S5624 in FIG. 156). In other words, in any of the jackpots G6 to I6, it is set to off based on the number of times of change that determines that the mode has been shifted to the preparation mode. Although omitted from the illustration, the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is also set to off when a jackpot is won. While the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, the rank-up lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea is executed every time the number of times the special symbol changes becomes a multiple of 10. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming ability for estimating whether or not the mode has shifted from the rank-up mode to the preparation mode (whether or not the number of remaining time savings before shifting to the preparation mode is less than 20).

  The expected degree storage area 223eb is a storage area for storing data indicating the expected degree indicated by the back type. When executing a lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea (see FIG. 146 (b)), the current degree of expectation is determined based on the data stored in the expected degree storage area 223eb, and the lottery is determined by the lottery. Identify the back type after reflecting the rank up.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. First, the special symbol variation process 6 (S151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 148. The special symbol variation process 6 (S151) is a variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 as in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processes of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265, the special symbol in the fifth embodiment is used. The same processes as S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265 of the variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) are executed. In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) according to the sixth embodiment, after the process of S262, all the data of the time-saving medium counter 203da, the prescribed number of small hits storage area 203ea, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset. , The process proceeds to S220, and the start of the jackpot is set.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is not a special symbol jackpot (S218: No), the fifth embodiment In place of the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 128) in the embodiment, the time saving number updating process 6 is executed (S272), and the process proceeds to S265. Details of the time saving update process 6 (S272) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S265: Yes), the small hit start process 6 is replaced with the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment. Is executed (S273), and this processing ends. Details of the small hit start processing 6 (S273) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, details of the above-described time saving number update process 6 (S272) will be described. This time saving number updating process 6 (S272) is a process executed in place of the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment, and includes the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment. Similarly, when the mode is the mode in which the time saving state is set (that is, in the extended mode or the normal mode), the processing is for updating the number of time savings.

  Of the time savings update processing 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, in the processing of S2301 to S2304 and S2306, S2301 to S2304 of the time savings number update processing (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as the processing of S2306 is executed. In the time saving number update process 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da has become 0 in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes), the small hitting specified number of times is stored. All data in the area 203ea is reset to 0 (S2311), and a state command indicating a normal state of a normal symbol is set (S2312). Next, “00H” indicating the preparation mode (the normal state of the ordinary symbol) is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2313), and this processing ends.

  Next, details of the small hit start processing 6 (S273) will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit start process 6 (S273) is a process executed in place of the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment, and includes a small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the start of the small hit opening operation.

In the small hit start processing 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, the respective processings in S2401 to S2403 correspond to the respective small hit start processings in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 129) in steps S2401 to S2403. The same processing is performed. Also, in the small hit start process 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S2403 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203da is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more). It is determined (S2411), and if the value of the time reduction counter 203da is 0 (S2411: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2411 that the value of the time reduction counter 203da is greater than 0 (S2411: Yes), the specified number of times for each small hit type stored in the small hit specified number storage area 203ea. Among them, the specified number of times corresponding to the type of the small hit won this time is updated by subtracting 1 (S2412), and it is determined whether or not the specified number of times after the subtraction has become 0 (S2413).

  In the processing of S2413, if it is determined that the specified number of times after the subtraction has become 0 (S2413: Yes), all the data in the hourly saving counter 203da and the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea are set to 0 in order to end the time saving state. (S2414), a state command indicating the intention of the ordinary symbol to the normal state is set (S2415), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, if it is determined that the specified number of times after the subtraction in the process of S2412 is not 0 (S2413: No), the process ends as it is.

  By executing the small hitting start processing 6 (see FIG. 150), when the small hitting A6 (the specified number of small hits is one) in the normal mode, the time saving state is changed regardless of the remaining number of time savings. It can be ended and shifted to the preparation mode.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode only, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. Although the number of times was set to 100, the number is not limited to this. The correspondence between the prescribed number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specified number of times is set to one in the extended-villa mode. With such a configuration, in the extended play mode, a small hit type with a small specified number of times (for example, five times) may be provided in the small hits of the second special symbol. With such a configuration, in the multi-villa mode, as the failure to win a V of about 1/20 continues, the possibility of the multi-villa mode being terminated is increased. You can have. Further, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the specified number of small hits may be determined by summing the number of wins of one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times of small hits B6 and small hits C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the V prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it is possible to positively grasp that the specified number of times before shifting to the preparation mode is reduced. Motivation for a player's game can be improved.

  Next, the jackpot end process 6 (S1151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot end process 6 (S1151) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in place of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment Similar to the big hit end process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the embodiment, this is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end.

  Of the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, in each of S1321, S1322, and S1324-S1326, S1321, S1322 of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. , And S1324-S1326. In the big hit end process 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1322 ends, the small hit specified number selection table 202ea is read (S1331), and the big hit type storage area 203db is read from the read table. The specified number of small hits corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the data and the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning indicated by the data in the winning mode storage area 203de is specified (S1332). Next, the specified number of small hits of each specified small hit type is stored in the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea, and the number of time savings specified in the process of S1322 is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203da (S1333). Is shifted to S1324.

  By executing the jackpot end process 6 (see FIG. 151), the number of times saved and the prescribed number of small hits can be appropriately set in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. First, the command determination process 6 (S4151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination processing 6 (S4151) is executed in place of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, and is the same as the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment. This is a process for performing control according to the type of the command received from the device 110.

  Of the command determination processing 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, in the processing of S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215, S4201 to S4209 of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 136) of the fifth embodiment, respectively. , And the same processes as those in S4213 to S4215 are performed. In the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the status command process in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 137) ), The status command processing 6 is executed (S4231), and this processing ends. The details of the status command processing 6 (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4209 (S4209: No), It is determined whether or not a command related to a win (such as an opening command for a small hit or an ending command for a small hit) has been received (S4232). If it is determined that a command related to a small hit has been received (S4232). : Yes), a small hit-related process for performing control according to the type of the command related to the small hit is executed (S4233), and this process ends. Details of the small hit-related processing (S4233) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4232 that the command related to the small hit has not been received (S4232: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the status command processing 6 (S4231) will be described. This status command processing 6 (S4231) is executed in place of the status command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, and is similar to the status command processing in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 137). This is a process for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified from the control device 110.

  Of the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment, S5501 to S5504 and S5506 are the respective processings of S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment. The same processing as the above processing is executed. In the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the current state command is not the command output when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored (S5504). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the status command is output at the end of the jackpot (S5511).

  In the process of S5511, if it is determined that the current status command is the status command output at the end of the big hit (S5511: Yes), after the end for setting the back image according to the gaming state after the big hit end The back side setting process is executed (S5512), and this process ends. Details of the post-end back setting process (S5512) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5511, when it is determined that the command is not the status command output at the end of the big hit (when shifting from the normal mode to the preparation mode due to the elapse of the number of time savings or reaching the specified number of small hits) (S5511: No), this process ends as it is. When the mode is shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode without going through the big hit, the small hit-related processing (see FIG. 155) or the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) to be notified or the rear image is used. The suggestion is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, details of the above-described post-completion backside setting process (S5512) will be described. The post-end back setting process (S5512) is a process for setting the back image after the end of the big hit according to the game state after the end of the big hit as described above. In the back side setting process after this end (S5512), first, it is determined whether or not the data in the gaming state storage area 223h updated based on the state command is data corresponding to the number of times of saving of time 100 (S5701). . Here, the back-side setting process after the end (S5512) is a process that is not executed in the case of the extended holiday mode. Therefore, when the number of remaining time savings is 100, only when the normal mode is set after the big hit. is there. Further, in the normal mode set after the end of the extended-villa mode, the number of time savings of 50 or less is set. Therefore, the fact that the normal mode in which the number of time savings is 100 is set means that the normal mode is looped. Means that. Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the number of remaining time savings is 100 (S5701: Yes), the back image for the normal mode is set (S5702), and this processing ends. This allows the player to easily understand that the normal mode has been set after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the remaining number of time savings is not 100 (S5701: No), then the remaining number of time savings is 0 (that is, after the jackpot is the preparation mode). ) Is determined (S5703), and when it is determined that the remaining number of time savings is 0 (S5703: Yes), a back image for the preparation mode is set (S5704), and the present process is terminated as it is. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the preparation mode is set after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5703 that the number of remaining time savings is not 0 (S5703: No), the normal mode is set after the extended-villa mode ends (one of 50 times, 25 times, and once). That is, the normal mode of the number of times reduced) is set, so that the rear image for the low expectation degree is set (S5705), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON (S5706), and this processing is ended. I do. By turning on the rank-up lottery flag 223ea, the rank-up lottery of the degree of expectation (the type of the back image) can be executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed ten times. Thereby, it is possible to realize the gaming ability of predicting the number of remaining time savings from the rank-up mode, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the above-described small hit-related processing (S4233) will be described. The small hit-related process (S4233) is one of the command determination processes 6 (see FIG. 152). As described above, when a command related to the small hit is received, the control according to the command type is performed. This is a process for executing.

  In the small hit-related processing (see FIG. 155), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S5801), and it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received. (S5801: Yes), then, it is determined from the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h whether or not the current mode is the normal mode (S5802). In the processing of S5802, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal mode (the time saving state B) (the preparation mode or the extended play mode) (S5802: No), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is turned on. Is determined (S5803), and if the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is off (S5803: No), it is in the extended-villa mode, or in the preparation mode, and the rear image for the preparation mode is already displayed. Since this means that the state is switched, execution of a right-handed navigation effect that prompts the player to perform a right-handed aiming at the V winning device 670 is set (S5804), and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5802, when it is determined that the mode is the normal mode (S5802: Yes), and when it is determined that the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on in the processing of S5803 (S5803: Yes), the selection effect ( (See FIG. 140) is set (S5805), and this process ends. Even if the mode is shifted to the preparation mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed when the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, so that the small hit is won during the execution period of the rank-up effect. Also, the display mode can be shared between the normal mode and the preparation mode. Therefore, during the execution period of the rank-up effect (between the end of the last jackpot in the consecutive mode and the end of the special symbol lottery 50 times), the mode is shifted to the preparation mode or the normal mode is maintained. Can be made more difficult to distinguish. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying attention to the rank-up effect of the rank-up effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the small hit opening command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S5801: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit ending command has been received. It is determined (S5806). In the process of S5806, if it is determined that the small ending command has been received (S5806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning has already been detected in the current small hit game (S5807). ), When it is determined that the V winning has not been detected (S5807: No), next, the specified number of small hits has been reached (the small hitting rule of any of the small hitting types in the gaming state storage area 223h). It is determined whether the data indicating the number of times is data corresponding to 0) (S5808).

  In the process of S5808, if it is determined that the specified number of small hits has been reached (S5808: Yes), the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5809), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to off. (S5810), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5808, when it is determined that the specified number of small hits has not been reached (the data indicating the specified number of times in the gaming state storage area 223h is not 0) (S5808: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5807, when it is determined that the V winning has been detected during the execution of the small hit game this time (S5807: Yes), the notification of the start of the big hit is set (S5811). The process ends.

  By executing the small hit-related processing (see FIG. 155), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode as the effect at the time of the small hit according to the gaming state. In addition, the notification content after the end of the small hit can be appropriately set.

  Next, the expectation degree update processing 6 (S4841) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The expectation update process 6 (S4841) is a process executed in place of the expectation update process (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment, and is a rear image indicating the expectation of whether or not the mode has shifted to the preparation mode. This is a process for setting a rank-up lottery.

  Of the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processing of S5601, S5603, and S5608, S5601 and S5603 of the key processing (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. , And S5608. In the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S5601 ends, it is next determined whether or not the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621). If it is determined that the up lottery flag 223ea is ON (S5621: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the change number counter 223db is 51 (S5622).

  In the process of S5622, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is 51 (S5622: Yes), the mode has been reliably shifted to the preparation mode even if the previous jackpot type was any of the jackpots G6 to I6. Therefore, the lottery period of the rank-up effect is ended, and the processing for setting the back image for the preparation mode (the respective processing of S5623 and S5624) is executed. Also, if it is determined in step S5603 that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 101 (S5603: No), it means that the mode has shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode, and the process shifts to S5623. In the processing of S5623, the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5623), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to off (S5624), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S5622, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is not 51 (S5622: No), it is determined whether or not the current back image is the back image for high expectation (S5625). If it is determined that the back image for the high degree of expectation has been set (S5625: Yes), the rank of the degree of expectation cannot be raised any more, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5625 that the type of the currently set rear image is not the rear image for high expectation (S5625: No), the process proceeds to S5608.

  In the expectation degree update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S5608 that the value of the fluctuation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608: Yes), the rank is increased. The lottery table 222ea is read out (S5626), the rank-up mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223da, and the remaining number of time savings is specified, the specified rank-up mode is set (S5627), and the process ends. I do.

  By executing the expectation degree update process 6 (see FIG. 147), the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times during a predetermined period (until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times) after the end of the extended-villa mode. Every time it is executed, it is possible to draw a rank up of the rear image. Thereby, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to estimate the number of remaining time savings according to the ease of rank-up.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the normal symbol time saving state B is set to the most disadvantageous game state (normal mode) in which it is difficult to shift to the extended game mode even if a big hit occurs, and the normal symbol is set. In the normal state (preparation mode), the transition rate to the extended play mode in the event of a big hit is higher than in the time saving state B of the ordinary symbol. By this, it is easier to shift to the extended mode, since it becomes easier to shift to the preparation mode after the number of time savings in the normal mode has elapsed and then to the jackpot, rather than the jackpot in the normal mode. In this way, a novel game can be realized in which a game is played with the expectation that the time-saving state will end. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that expects consecutive departures in a special symbol lottery in the normal mode.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit by generating the V prize as the type of the small hit to be won with a low probability (1/200). The small hit type (small hit A6) that is reset, the small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to the extended play mode after the end of the big hit due to the occurrence of the V winning, and the big hit ends when the V winning occurs A small hitting type (small hitting C6) which shifts to the preparation mode later is provided. Thereby, in the case of a small hit in the normal mode, it is advantageous in a case where the game state becomes disadvantageous due to the occurrence of a V winning (the number of time savings that have been completed is reset to 100). (To shift to the preparation mode or the extended-villa mode), it is better to make a V prize or avoid the V prize when a small hit occurs in the normal mode. It is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to judge whether or not the game is completed. In addition, when the small hit A6 occurs in the normal mode, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time savings. As a result, in the small hit A6, it is more advantageous as a gaming state to avoid the V winning and shift to the preparation mode than to set the normal mode again with the V winning. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the player can more seriously determine whether to make a right-handed shot for a V-win or a left-handed shot to avoid a V-win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the small hit occurs.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode only, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. Although the number of times was set to 100, the number is not limited to this. The correspondence between the prescribed number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the extended play mode, a small hit type with a small number of times (for example, five times) may be provided in the small hits of the second special symbol. With such a configuration, in the multi-villa mode, as the failure to win a V of about 1/20 continues, the possibility of the multi-villa mode being terminated is increased. You can have. Further, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the specified number of small hits may be determined by summing the number of wins of one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times of small hits B6 and small hits C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the V prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it is possible to positively grasp that the specified number of times before shifting to the preparation mode is reduced. Motivation for a player's game can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, as a small hit type of the first special symbol, a normal mode is set after a big win when a V win is made, a small win A is shifted to a preparation mode when a V win is avoided, and a preparation mode is set after a big win when a V win is made. Is set, but the small hit type in which the current mode is maintained when the V winning is avoided, and the extended play mode is set after the big win when the V winning is avoided, but the small mode in which the current mode is maintained when the V winning is avoided. Although the hit type is provided with three types, the small hit type is not limited to these three types, and the type may be arbitrarily increased or decreased. For example, by setting only the small hit type of the first special symbol to the small hit A6, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the V winning is avoided, the preparation mode is determined. The player can have great satisfaction at the time of winning the small hit. Conversely, in addition to the big hits A6 to C6, for example, a relatively advantageous small hit type that shifts to the preparation mode when a V prize is given or when the V prize is avoided may be provided. It is also possible to provide a relatively disadvantageous small hit type in which the mode is shifted to the normal mode when a winning is achieved, and the mode is maintained when the V winning is avoided. With such a configuration, it is possible to more seriously determine whether to win the V-prize or to avoid the V-prize when a small hit is won, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, a small hit type that is more advantageous when avoiding a V winning than when a V winning is generated, and when a V winning is generated is avoided when the V winning is avoided. Although the small hit type which is advantageous is provided, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a small hit type that is advantageous even when avoiding a V winning or generating a V winning is provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a predetermined number of times is one, and a small hit type in which the preparation mode is set after the end of the big hit when a V winning occurs. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which a small hit type is set to be in the normal mode even when the V winning is avoided or the V winning is generated.

  In the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, either the mode is shifted to the extended holiday mode or the time saving state B of 100 times is set. However, it is not limited to this. A case in which the mode is shifted to the preparation mode may be provided, or a variation may be provided in the number of times reduced in the normal mode after the end of the jackpot. Similarly, in other modes, the variation in the shift ratio to each mode and the number of times of reduction in the time of a big hit can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the sixth embodiment, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 in the case of a small hit is common regardless of the small hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an opening pattern in which the opening period of the opening / closing door 670f1 is short (a game ball is difficult to enter) and an opening pattern in which the opening period is long (a game ball is easy to enter) may be provided.

  In the sixth embodiment, the display mode shown in FIG. 140 is executed as a selection effect performed when a small hit occurs in the normal mode. However, it is determined whether a V prize is generated or not. It can be arbitrarily determined as long as it can be selected by the user. Further, the selection effect may be executed in a mode in which the type of the small hit can be reported or suggested at a predetermined ratio when the small hit occurs. Specifically, for example, in the case where the small win A6 in which it is more advantageous to avoid the V prize is won, an arrow with the character “left-handed” attached at a first rate (for example, a rate of 5%) If the image YG1 is displayed in red while another small hit type is selected, the arrow image YG1 is displayed in red at a second ratio (for example, 1%) lower than the first ratio. You may comprise so that it may be. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the small hit type is predicted based on the display mode of the selected effect and the firing direction is determined.

  In the sixth embodiment, the current mode is not specified until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times after the end of the extended-villa mode, and the mode shifts to the preparation mode according to the rank-up aspect of the rear image. It was configured to only suggest the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols up to. That is, until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times (no matter what the jackpot type is, the number of lotteries has definitely shifted to the preparation mode), the current mode is not clearly indicated to the player by the display mode or the like. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. The current mode may be notified at the time of an arbitrary number of lottery times from the end of the extended-villa mode to the number of lottery times (50 times) that has definitely shifted to the preparation mode. . More specifically, for example, after the end of the extended play mode (that is, after the end of the jackpots G6 to I6), when the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, the normal mode is maintained or the preparation mode has been shifted. Is determined, and a rear image according to the mode (a rear image for the normal mode or a rear image for the preparation mode) may be changed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the player wants to continue the game at least up to the number of lotteries in which the current mode is specified, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Also, even if the normal mode is notified when the 30 special symbol lotteries have been completed, the remaining number of lotteries until the preparation mode is 20 times, and the remaining lottery frequency until the preparation mode is half or more. Since the player is digested, it is possible to give the player the impression that "the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode soon". Therefore, even if the normal mode is notified, the game can be continued with the aim of shifting to the preparation mode.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. You can do it.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the state shifts to the disadvantageous state (normal mode) until all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which are executed after the jackpot, are completed. Although it was configured to notify whether or not there was a door break mode effect, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the ball is the reserved ball of the second special symbol or not, after the jackpot is over, it is determined whether the state has shifted to an unfavorable state (or advantageous) within a predetermined number of lotteries of the special symbol. It is good also as composition which notifies by breakthrough mode production. Specifically, for example, in the special symbol probable state, each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol lottery is shifted (falled) to the low probability state without going through the jackpot, separately from the special symbol lottery. By applying the door-break mode effect to the pachinko machine 10 of a specification (a specification in which it is more advantageous that a lottery result corresponding to a fall is not obtained) to perform a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, a fall probability of 1/100). Is also good. That is, in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the probability change state, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the door-through mode effect is executed until the 100 times of special symbol lottery ends after the jackpot ends. If the special symbol has fallen to the low probability state within 100 times, an effect that fails to break through the door is executed, and if not, an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed. . Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which the number of lotteries in which the probability change state is set is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, 130 after the big hit), the number of lotteries in which the probability change state is set becomes a big hit. Alternatively, it may be configured to indicate (notify) by the door break-through mode effect whether the probable change state has ended. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot during the probable change state, it is suggested that the player has an advantage (execution of an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed), and a predetermined number of times (130 If the lottery has been completed, it may be configured to suggest that it is disadvantageous for the player (execute an effect that fails to break through the door). Further, in this case, the door break mode effect may be executed over the entire period in which the probability change state is set, or may be performed for a part of the period (for example, the number of lotteries after the big hit is 125 or more). Only, it is good also as composition which performs door break mode production.

  Also, for example, as the gaming state after the big hit, the special symbol positive change state until the next big hit, and the big hit type (big hit a) which becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the lottery of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100)) In the pachinko machine 10 of the specification in which at least the special jackpot type (small jackpot b) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol time reduction state until the end is completed, the winning jackpot is determined. The jackpot a or the jackpot b is configured to be indistinguishable (difficult) from the effect or the like, and after the jackpot until a predetermined number (100 times) of lottery is executed. The game state set after the previous big hit may be notified by the door break mode effect. In other words, if the game state is a special symbol probable state and a normal symbol time reduction state, an effect indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (an effect that breaks through the door) is executed, and the game state is set. If is a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, an effect indicating that it is disadvantageous for the player (an effect of failing to break through the door) may be executed. In addition, for example, in a special symbol lottery, a small hit becomes a small hit with a lower probability than a loss, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a in the case where a partly-variable big hit (big hit c) is determined is equivalent to the small hit ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the door-through mode effect is applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the same specification or an operation in which the player has a difference that is indistinguishable by the player). In other words, it is difficult to determine which lottery result has been obtained depending on the effect, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, and the like in the case of the small hit and the case of the big hit c. Then, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the state is notified by the door-break mode effect after a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed after the small hit or the big hit c. It may be. In other words, if the low probability state of the special symbol is maintained as a small hit, an effect indicating a disadvantageous state for the player (an effect of failing to break through the door) is executed, and the big hit c is obtained. If the special symbol is shifted to the certain state, the effect indicating that the player is in a state advantageous to the player (the effect of successfully breaking through the door) may be executed.

  In each of the above embodiments, whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous state (mode) is notified by the door-break mode effect, but the content to be notified (suggested) by the door-break mode effect is not necessarily limited to the mode. . For example, a configuration may be used in which whether or not the effect mode is changed is notified by a door-through mode effect. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be used in which it is notified by a door-through mode effect whether or not to develop into a highly reliable reach effect, or whether or not to develop to the next step in a so-called continuous effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased to the upper limit number (four) at the end of the jackpot, but this is not limited to after the end of the jackpot. In a state different from the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the present invention is applicable if the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to the upper limit number. A configuration may be adopted in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes the upper limit value at the time or at the end of the time reduction state. In addition, for example, a configuration is provided in which a small win is likely to occur (a lottery probability is high or a lottery condition is easily satisfied), and a small win is unlikely (a lottery probability is low or a lottery condition is hardly satisfied). It is good also as a structure applied to the state which is easy to be a small hit.

  In each of the above embodiments, the second entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13, but the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) is used during the big hit. The arrangement may be changed to an arbitrary arrangement as long as the ball hitting toward can enter the second entrance 640. Further, the ball hit toward the variable prize device 65 (variable prize device 650) during the jackpot is difficult to enter the first ball entry port 64, but the first ball entry port 64 during the jackpot. You may comprise so that a sphere may enter a ball.

  In each of the above embodiments, the correspondence between the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot can be arbitrarily determined without departing from the spirit of each embodiment. .

  In the fifth and sixth embodiments, in the normal symbol time-saving state A, when a normal symbol is won by lottery, the game ball passing through the through gate 67 directly enters the second entrance 6400. The fluctuation time of the symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are set so as to make the ball swing, but the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are such that the game ball hit right in the ordinary symbol time saving state A easily enters the second entrance 6400, and the ordinary symbol time saving state It can be arbitrarily determined as long as the game ball hit right in B does not easily enter the second entrance 6400. Specifically, for example, in the normal symbol time saving state A, a game ball that has reached the distribution member 6600 next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has been distributed to the right flow path R1 has a second entrance. The configuration may be such that the normal symbol fluctuation time and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are determined so that the ball easily enters the ball 6400.

  In the fifth and sixth embodiments, a game ball fired at a firing intensity of 95% or more guides the game ball to the distribution member 6600 by a plurality of nails planted above the distribution member 6600. Instead of or in addition to this, the game balls fired at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) surely reach the distribution member 6600 at 0.6 second intervals. A configuration for adjusting the arrival interval of the game balls may be provided. More specifically, for example, immediately above the distribution member 6600, an open state in which the game balls can flow down to the distribution member 6600, and the game balls cannot flow down to the distribution member 6600 and stay at the upper side An opening and closing device that periodically switches between the closed state and the closed state may be provided. That is, the opening / closing device that repeats the open state period and the closed state period in which only one game ball can be dropped and the closed state period at a cycle of 0.6 seconds always causes the game ball fired at a firing intensity of 95% or more to be released. It is good also as a structure provided in the position which passes. With this configuration, when the game balls are continuously fired at the shortest firing interval, the intervals at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600 are more reliably set to 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, the game balls can be more reliably alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (gaming properties where it is more advantageous that no pending repetitions occur)
The first discriminating information is provided based on the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter the ball and the game ball entered the first ball entry means. A first discrimination information acquisition unit for acquiring, a first discrimination unit for performing a first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit, different from the first direction; Second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter, and second discrimination information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second discriminating information acquiring unit that acquires, a second discriminating unit that performs a second discrimination based on the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring unit, and a second discriminating information acquiring unit After the second discrimination information is obtained by the above, based on the obtained second discrimination information, Until the second discrimination is performed, discrimination information storage means capable of storing the second discrimination information with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and a position where a game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter. And a variable ball-in means which can be changed between a first state in which a game ball easily enters and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a game ball in the variable ball-in means. Based on the fact that a specific benefit has been obtained by the privilege providing means for providing a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the ball has entered, and the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the means is changed to a first state a predetermined number of times; and a first game state as a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed. 2nd game that is more advantageous to the player than 1 game state And a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least the game state. The ratio of setting the first game state as a game state after the execution of the variable game is higher when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination unit is higher. Gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means. First discrimination information is acquired by first discrimination information acquisition means. The first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls fired in the second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Then, the second determination information is obtained by the second determination information obtaining means. A second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit. After the second discrimination information is obtained by the second discrimination information obtaining means, the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means until the second discrimination based on the obtained second discrimination information is performed. It is stored with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which game balls easily enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. It is arranged in a position that is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the variable ballistics means. A variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment by the first judgment means or the second judgment means. . As the game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means, a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Is set by the game state setting means. The game state after the execution of the variable game by the game state setting means is determined to be the first game state when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. Is set higher.

  Thus, when a game ball is fired in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege during the execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, the ratio of being set to the first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than that of the second gaming state is high. In the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel playability can be realized.

  In the gaming machine A1, a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the variable ball-in means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern of the variable ball-in means. Variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, wherein the variable pattern setting means, when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means, more than the second variable pattern When the ratio of setting the first variable pattern increases and the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than that of the first variable pattern. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

  With this, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the second variable pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry unit is likely to be set. In the second determination based on the second determination information stored in the second determination information, it is possible to more strongly expect that a specific determination result will not be obtained.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, as a variable pattern of the variable ball-in means, a first variable pattern and a game ball in the variable ball-in means rather than the first variable pattern. Is provided with variable pattern setting means for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is difficult to enter the ball, and during a period from the start of the first variable pattern to the end thereof, In the case where the second discrimination information is obtained by the second discrimination information acquiring means, the second discrimination information acquisition means is configured to have a period at least longer than a period until the predetermined number of pieces of the second discrimination information are acquired. A gaming machine A3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 or A2. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, if the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction, a predetermined number of pieces of second determination information are obtained by the second determination information obtaining means. The period is at least longer than the period up to the end.

  Thus, during execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player keeps firing game balls in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege, at least a predetermined number or more of the second information is obtained. Is obtained. Therefore, every time after the variable game ends, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in expectation that all the second determinations of the upper limit number do not result in a specific determination result.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination unit is performed with higher priority than the first determination by the first determination unit. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination unit is performed with higher priority than the first determination by the first determination unit. Even if a game ball enters the first ball entry means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, the execution of the first discrimination can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be paid by the second determination.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a game ball fired in the second direction is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach, and the reached game ball is converted into a first flow path provided with the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a distribution unit that distributes the variable ball-in means to a second flow path provided with the variable ball-in means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means Since the distributing means for distributing the game balls to the game ball is arranged at a position where the game balls fired in the second direction can be reached, the downflow direction of the game balls fired in the second direction is biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine A5, the allocating means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, since the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, during the execution of the variable game, The ball can be alternately entered into the second entry means and the variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game ball fired in the second direction from eccentrically entering the second ball entry means or the variable ball entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a first position at which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means as compared to the first position. A variable means capable of changing to a second position at which the ball is difficult to ball, and variable control means for controlling a variable operation of the variable means, wherein the first game state is determined by the variable control means It is difficult to be changed to one position, and in the second game state, the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and the first position as compared with the first position. The variable means is changed to a second position at which the game ball hardly enters the ball entering means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second game state, the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. .

  Thereby, in the first game state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, and thus the game ball is easily entered into the first ball entry means. Therefore, in the first game state, the game can be played more efficiently, and there is an effect that the game can be played with more expectation of the first game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the first gaming state is such that the probability that the specific determination result is obtained by the first determination means and the second determination means is the first probability. In the second game state, the probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to a second probability that is lower than the first probability. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7. That is, in the first game state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to the first probability. On the other hand, in the second game state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

  As a result, in the first game state, the probability of a specific determination result being higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game is completed, the variable game is easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first game state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits can be obtained in a relatively short period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature B>
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed. Game state setting means for setting one game state from among states, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means, and a predetermined state during execution of the privilege game. A period until the privilege game ends based on the specific condition being satisfied, and a period until one or a plurality of the identification information dynamically displayed after the privilege game ends. And a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a period, wherein the specific effect can indicate to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by an effect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. Performed by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed. One game state from among the states is set by the game state setting means. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determining means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means. Dynamic display of a period until the bonus game ends and one or a plurality of pieces of identification information to be executed after the bonus game ends, based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the bonus game. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in a period until the end of the process. The specific effect is an effect that can indicate to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state.

  Accordingly, the specific effect can be executed over a period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information ends, and thus, the period until the privilege game ends. Alternatively, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect executing means is configured to execute the specific effect based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. A gaming machine B2 characterized by executing the following.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect is established based on the establishment of the specific condition. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, so that the specific effect is not changed to the first game state during execution of the specific effect, and the second game state is suggested in the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed while expecting that a specific determination result will not be obtained during execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means, Until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied, a discrimination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and stored in the discrimination information storage means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. Determining means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result includes the determination information, and determining an effect mode of the specific effect based on a determination result by the determination means. And a special effect execution means for executing the special effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Game machine B3 to.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means is obtained by the discriminating information obtaining means, and the discrimination information obtained by the discriminating information obtaining means is discriminated from the obtained discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the information is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the determination unit determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage unit includes the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. Based on the result of the determination by the determining means, the effect form of the specific effect is determined by the effect state determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  Thus, the result of the determination by the determining means can be determined in advance, so that there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode in accordance with the result of the determination actually performed by the determining means.

  In the gaming machine B3, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, a first privilege game, A type determining means for determining one of a plurality of privilege game types including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the second game state; Is for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game. An effect state that indicates that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state based on the determination that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means; And characterized in that to determine the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first bonus game after the execution is completed. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least the second privilege game in which the gaming state is set to the second gaming state. The determination unit determines whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage unit includes the determination information corresponding to the first bonus game. Based on the determination unit determining that the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, an effect mode indicating that the game state after the specific effect is completed is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.

  Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is performed in expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, wherein the specific effect is such that a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period regardless of the effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period of the specific effect irrespective of the effect mode. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the result of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be focused on the result of the specific effect to the end.

  In the gaming machine B5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means, and the display executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means, wherein the specific period is set after the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined by the dynamic display period determination means when all of the determinations by the determination means of a predetermined number of times are different from the specific determination results. A gaming machine B6, which is a sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result by the determining means. A dynamic display period is determined when the period from when the specific condition is satisfied to the end of the privilege game and when all of the predetermined number of determinations by the determination means are different from the specific determination result. The sum of the specified number of dynamic display periods determined by the means is set as the specified period.

  Accordingly, the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times ends, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended properly.

  In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display period determining means determines whether at least the specific period ends, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means within the specific number of times after the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine B7, wherein a period longer than the remaining period is determined as the dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means within a specific number of times after the end of the privilege game, at least the remaining time until the specific period ends. Since the period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, if a specific determination result is obtained within a specific number of times, the bonus game is performed before the specific period ends. Can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, by starting the privilege game before the end of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress the result of the specific effect from being known in advance, and thus there is an effect that attention can be paid to the specific effect.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, during execution of the privilege game, an expectation degree suggestion effect executing means for executing an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the second game state is indicated by the specific effect is provided. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B7, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the second game state is indicated by the specific effect during the execution of the bonus game is indicated by the expectation degree indicating effect executing means Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the effect mode and the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

<Feature C group> (It is difficult to determine whether or not a pending run occurs based on the operation of the attacker)
Privilege entry means to which a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of a game ball, a first position at which a game ball can enter the privilege entry means, and a game at a position higher than the first position. A variable means for changing to a second position at which the ball is difficult to enter, a determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a determination means for determining that the first determination result is obtained. A first variable control unit that controls the variable unit to change in a first variable mode, and a second determination result different from the first determination result determined by the determination unit. A game state setting unit capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination is performed; and a specific number of times based on the determination result by the determination unit being the second determination result. The discrimination by the discriminating means is all the The variable means is controlled so as to be variable in a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is hard to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times executed when the determination result of the above is obtained. And a second variable control means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege entering means based on the game ball entering, and the first position at which the game ball can enter the privilege entering means, The variable means is changed to a second position where the game balls are more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable control means performs the determination by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and changes the variable means in the first variable mode based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Is controlled by Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in the second discrimination, the discrimination is made from the first variable mode of the specified number of times executed when all the discriminations by the discrimination means of the specified number have become the first discrimination result In a second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is hard to see, the second variable control module controls the variable module to be variable.

  As a result, it is difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result has been obtained from the variable mode of the variable means, and it is determined whether a different game state has been set. This has the effect of making it difficult for the user to determine.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming state setting means can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the result of the determination by the determination means is the second determination result, the rate of setting the second game state is set higher than the rate of setting the first game state. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

  Thus, in the case of the second determination result, an adverse second game state is easily set, so that there is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation of the first determination result.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein the ratio of the first determination result in the determination by the determination means in the gaming machine C1 or C2 is set higher than the ratio of the other determination results.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the ratio of the first determination result in the determination by the determination unit is set to be higher than the ratio of the other determination results. The possibility that the first determination result is obtained continuously over the number of times increases. Therefore, even when the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode as the second determination result, it can be assumed that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not different game states have been set.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the determining means performs the determination when one of a first determining condition and a second determining condition different from the first determining condition is satisfied. The game state setting means sets a high ratio of setting the first game state when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment, the rate of setting the second gaming state disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, when either one of the first determination condition and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, the determination is performed by the determination unit. When the result of the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition is the second determination result, the ratio at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second gaming state disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher.

  Accordingly, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first game state having a higher degree of advantage than the second game state is easily set, and thus the first determination condition is set. A game can be played in the hope of being established. Therefore, when the determination by the determination unit is performed, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the determination condition that triggered the determination.

  In the gaming machine C4, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the second discrimination, and when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the bonus ball-in means is more than the second variable mode. A gaming machine C5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to change in a third variable mode in which a game ball is easy to enter.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means, and when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second variation mode is achieved. Since the third variable control means controls the variable means to be variable in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus ball input means, the second determination is made based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The degree of advantage in the case of a result can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be caused to play the game in expectation that the first determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a first ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, and a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, wherein the first determination condition is established based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and the privilege entry ball means is provided with a game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine C6 provided at a position where it is easy to hit a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, while the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, the second ball is set at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter the ball. Ball entry means and privilege entry means are provided. While the first determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, the second determination condition is determined based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Holds.

  Thus, when the bonus ball entry means is changed to the first position, when a game is fired in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easily performed after the privilege inputting means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine C6, the discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring discriminating information used for discriminating by the discriminating means based on that the game ball has entered the second ball-in means, and the discriminating information acquiring means acquires the discriminating information. A gaming machine C7 comprising: a discrimination information storage unit that can store the discrimination information at least up to a predetermined number of information until the discrimination unit performs the discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. That is, based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means is: With the predetermined number of information as an upper limit, the information is stored at least by the determination information storage unit until the determination by the determination unit is performed.

  With this configuration, in the case where the ball entry to the second ball entry unit is detected in a situation where the discrimination by the discrimination unit cannot be started, the discrimination information used for discrimination can be stored by the discrimination information storage unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the use of the ball for the second ball entry means from being wasted.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is performed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. A gaming machine C8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is greater than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Is also executed with priority, so that when the determination based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is performed, the result of the determination can be noticed.

<Feature D>
First determining means for performing a determination based on establishment of a first determination condition; second determining means for performing determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; Means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific result of the discrimination by the second discriminating means, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. Is determined as a type of one privilege game from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. Means, and a first state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied is set based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means. End condition is State setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state, based on the fact that the second state is established. The ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit than when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Is done. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game executing means based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment by the first judging means or the second judging means. The type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is a type from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determining means. A first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied is set by the state setting unit based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination unit or the second determination unit. On the other hand, a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state is set by the state setting means based on the end condition of the bonus game being satisfied. The type determining means determines that the rate of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific result is determined by the first determining means than when the specific result is determined by the second determining means, than when the type is determined by the first determining means. It is configured.

  Thereby, it can be suppressed that the second determination condition is satisfied in a state other than during the execution of the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the first privilege game with a low degree of advantage can be limited.

  In the gaming machine D1, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means And a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until the information is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination information to be used for the determination by the second determination unit is obtained by the determination information obtaining unit. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information storage means stores the predetermined number of information as an upper limit.

  Accordingly, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination unit is performed, the plurality of pieces of determination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the plurality of the second determination conditions. Is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine D2, the second discriminating means is acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during execution of the privilege game, and based on the discriminating information stored in the discriminating information storage means, after the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine D3 for performing a determination.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the privilege is obtained by the second discriminating means based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during execution of the privilege game and stored in the discriminating information storage means. Since the determination is performed after the end of the game, the opportunity for performing the determination by the second determination unit can be concentrated after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to cause the player to play the game, expecting that a specific determination result will not be obtained by the determination by the second determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on a game ball having entered, and a first position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball can easily enter than the first position, and the variable means is moved from the first position to the second position based on a specific determination condition being satisfied. A specific determining unit that determines whether the variable position is changed to the two positions; and the variable unit changes the position to the second position based on the determination that the specific determining unit changes the position from the first position to the second position. Variable control means for controlling the specific determination means in the second state than in the second state, when it is determined that the variable means is variable in the second state. Variable by means of Gaming machine D4 which is better when it is determined that the cause, wherein said varying means is used to control such a period for varying longer in the second position.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 to D3. In other words, the first position where the game ball is unlikely to enter the ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is more likely to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the satisfaction of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether to change the variable unit from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to change to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. When the variable means is determined to be variable by the specific determination means in the second state, the variable means is in the second position, compared to when the variable means is determined to be variable by the specific determination means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes longer.

  Thereby, the first state can make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied in the first state than in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on a game ball having entered, and a first position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball can easily enter than the first position, and the variable means is moved from the first position to the second position based on a specific determination condition being satisfied. A specific determining unit that determines whether the variable position is changed to the two positions; and the variable unit changes the position to the second position based on the determination that the specific determining unit changes the position from the first position to the second position. Variable control means for performing the control as described above, and the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means to the end thereof is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. A gaming machine D5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first position where the game ball is unlikely to enter the ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is more likely to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the satisfaction of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether to change the variable unit from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to change to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The first state is configured such that the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination unit to the end thereof is more likely to be shorter than in the second state.

  Thus, the period required for the specific determination unit to perform the same number of determinations in the first state is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, the chance that the variable means is changed to the second position can be obtained more times, so that it is possible to easily enter the game ball in the first state.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means provided in a specific flow path, wherein the second determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered, and a game ball flowing down the specific flow path is difficult. Opening / closing means that can be changed between a closed state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down and an open state in which the game ball can flow down, and the opening / closing means being set to the open state based on the first state. A gaming machine D6 comprising: opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball is provided in the specific channel. The opening / closing means is changed between a closed state in which the specific flow path is closed so that the game balls cannot flow down and an open state in which the game balls can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to an open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, and the opening / closing means is set to a closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. .

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

  In the gaming machine D6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, it is configured to be able to stop a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening / closing means. Machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, it is possible to stop a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when the game ball is set in the open state, the stopped game ball can be made to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied in the first state where the open state is set.

<Feature E group> (Include information corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the specific effect in the fluctuation pattern command from main to sub)
A gaming machine comprising: a display unit capable of displaying an effect mode; a main control unit for performing main control relating to the game; and a sub control unit for performing control relating to the game based on a command output from the main control unit. The main control means executes a discrimination means based on satisfaction of a discrimination condition, and executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. Privilege game execution means, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means, and dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time, information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and information corresponding to the dynamic display time. Command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least specific information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means outputs the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. Command receiving means for receiving a command, dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and predetermined specific conditions Is established, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect executable over one or a plurality of the dynamic display times on the display means, and the specific effect included in the dynamic display time command Based on the information, the specific effect end determining means for determining whether to end the specific effect, and the specific effect by the specific effect end determining means As an opportunity to be determined to be terminated, until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination is completed, A gaming machine E1 comprising: a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, it is advantageous to the player. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is output by the command output means. Output to slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and the dynamic display time is dynamically adjusted based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a specific effect executable over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed on the display unit by the specific effect execution unit. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, whether or not to end the specific effect is determined by the specific effect end determining unit. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination ends when the specific performance end determination means determines that the specific performance is to be ended. By this time, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect main hot water amount means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably ended.

  In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determining means that the specific effect is to be ended, the identification is performed based on information according to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. A gaming machine E2 comprising: an effect mode determining unit that determines an effect mode until the effect is terminated by the effect ending unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be ended by the specific effect end determining device, the determination is made according to the determination result by the determining device included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means is determined by the effect mode determining means, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the slave control means includes: a power-on determining means for determining power-on of the gaming machine; and if the power-on is determined by the power-on determining means, the slave control means includes the dynamic display time command. Based on the specific information thus obtained, a cutoff time determining means for determining whether or not the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned off is being executed, and execution of the specific effect by the cutoff time determining means. A gaming machine E3, comprising: after-insertion effect execution means for executing the specific effect based on the determination that the game device is in the middle.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the power-on of the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determining means in the slave control means, and the power-on is determined by the power-on determining means. Then, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the power-off of the gaming machine is determined by the power-off time determining means to determine whether or not a specific effect is being executed. The specific effect is executed by the after-insertion effect execution means based on the fact that it is determined that the specific effect is being executed by the cutoff time determination means.

  Thereby, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be restarted, so that the effect is different before and after the power is turned off, thereby preventing the player from being confused. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E3, the specific effect ending means terminates the specific effect executed by the post-insertion effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, the specific effect executed by the after-insertion effect executing means is terminated by the specific effect ending means. There is an effect that the specific effect can be appropriately ended even when the cutoff is performed.

  The gaming machine E5, wherein in the gaming machine E4, the specific effect execution means sets a predetermined specific period as an effect period of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, a specific period predetermined by the specific effect executing means is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so that a simple process is performed when the specific effect is set. There is an effect that it can be set with.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the main control unit obtains determination information used for determination by the determination unit based on satisfaction of the determination condition, and obtains the determination information by the determination information acquisition unit. A determination information storage unit capable of storing the determined determination information at least up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for determination by the determination unit, wherein the command output unit stores the determination information in the determination information storage unit. And outputting to the slave control means an information count command including information corresponding to the information count of the discrimination information, wherein the specific effect execution means outputs the discrimination information of the discrimination information included in the information count command. The gaming machine E6, wherein the specific effect is executed over dynamic display of the identification information less than or equal to the number of pieces of information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means at least until a predetermined number of information is used as the discrimination by the discrimination means. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information less than or equal to the information number of the discrimination information included in the information number command.

  Thereby, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that the production can be prevented from continuing.

  In the gaming machine E6, the information according to the number of pieces of the discrimination information is, during a period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when all discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit are completed, A gaming machine E7 comprising information corresponding to the number of remaining pieces of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, information according to the number of pieces of discrimination information is used for all discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied. Until the end of the process, the specific effect is more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means because the information is composed of information corresponding to the number of pieces of remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of discrimination information or less.

<Characteristic F group> (variable ease of execution of disadvantageous special drawing lottery according to winning symbols)
First ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, and first discrimination information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means. A first discriminating information acquiring unit that acquires, a first discriminating unit that performs a first discriminating process using the first discriminating information acquired by the first discriminating information acquiring unit, Second ball entry means arranged at a position where game balls fired in different second directions are easy to enter, and second discrimination information based on game balls entering the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, to perform a second discrimination that is likely to be more disadvantageous than the first discrimination result. A second determination unit to be executed, and the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit. Is determined by the first information discriminating means or the second information discriminating means. As a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, and as a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, it is more advantageous to fire game balls in the first direction than the second direction in at least a predetermined period. The privilege game of one of a plurality of types including a first privilege game that is easy to perform and a second privilege game that makes it easier to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction in the predetermined period. And a type determining means for determining the type of the game machine F1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that shifts to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous in that, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the gaming state given after winning is different, or the number of prize balls obtainable in each round is different. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter the ball. First discrimination information is obtained by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and using the first discrimination information obtained by the first information acquisition means. The first determination is performed by the first determination unit. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball. Second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination means executes a second discrimination that is more likely to result in a disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information obtained by the second discrimination information obtaining means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the result of the specific determination by the first determination means or the second determination means, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, it is easier to fire the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction in at least the predetermined period, and the first privilege game which is more advantageous in the first direction in the predetermined period. Also, the type of one privilege game is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including a second privilege game in which it is more advantageous to fire a game ball in the second direction.

  This makes it difficult for the first privilege game that is advantageous by firing the game ball in the first direction to perform the second determination that is likely to result in a disadvantageous determination result, so that the first privilege game and the second privilege The difference in the degree of advantage with the game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, so that when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to perform the game by paying attention to the type of the bonus game. There is.

  In the gaming machine F1, a first position in which a game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter the ball can be changed to a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball-in means, and a variable ball-discharging means which is disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter, and which can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter 2 variable ball entry means, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, In the first privilege game, the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which it can enter than the second variable ball pitch means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege. A gaming machine characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which it can enter a ball than a game. 2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, the first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter. Have been. At a position where the game ball fired in the second direction easily enters the ball, a second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged. I have. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means. In the first privilege game, the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which it can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means. The second privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the second variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the first privilege game.

  Thereby, during execution of the bonus game, it is possible to perform the game by paying attention to whether or not the launched game ball enters the first variable ball entry unit or the second variable ball entry unit. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is set as a game state after the privilege game is completed. A game state setting means for setting the game state of the first game state, the first game state after the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination means has been completed A gaming machine F3, wherein a ratio set as a later gaming state is higher than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1 or F2. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is over, one of the plurality of game states including at least the first game state and the second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is the game state. It is set by the setting means. In the first game state, the ratio set as the game state after the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination unit is higher than the second game state. It is configured to be.

  Thereby, when the determination by the second determination unit is performed, a novel game property can be realized in which a game is performed in the hope that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F3, the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the first privilege gaming or the second privilege gaming sets the first gaming state. The gaming machine F4, wherein the ratio is higher than the game machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F3, the rate at which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus gaming or the second bonus gaming ends is determined by the first gaming state. Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination performed based on firing of the game ball in the second direction in the predetermined period, and the first game state Can be made to feel that the player wants to avoid being set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the specific result of the second determination will not be a specific determination result after the end of the second privilege game.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating the determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. As an effect, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, one of a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect is determined. A gaming machine F5, comprising: a suggestion effect determination unit that determines the first suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. That is, the suggestion effect indicating the determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. As the suggestion effect performed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is indicated. It is determined by the effect determination means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination unit.

  With this, when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the game is the first privilege game, and the game can be performed in expectation that the second suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect. This has the effect. In addition, since the first suggestion effect may be executed even in the first bonus game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in expectation of the first bonus game. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine F5, when the suggestion effect execution unit executes the first suggestion effect based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination unit, the suggestion effect execution unit executes the first suggestion effect after the end of the first suggestion effect. A gaming machine F6 for executing a second suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestion effect is completed. Since the second suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first suggestion effect is executed, a game is performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed after the end of the first suggestion effect. There is an effect that can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, when the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the predetermined period, the second discrimination information acquisition unit may set the second discrimination information acquisition unit to output at least the predetermined information number or more of the second information. Gaming machine F7, characterized in that it is a period of time for which the discrimination information is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the second bonus game is achieved, and when the game balls are continuously fired in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since the predetermined number of pieces of the second determination information, which is the upper limit, is stored, it is possible to execute the second determination the number of times corresponding to the upper limit after the end of the second privilege game.

  In the gaming machine F7, the game ball fired in the second direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and is variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. Possible second variable ball-in means, variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball-in means to the first state in the predetermined period, and a game ball entering the second variable ball-in means. Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball hit, and a game ball fired in the second direction are arranged at a position where the game ball can be reached, and the reached ball is provided by the second ball entry means. A gaming machine F8 comprising: a first flow path provided therein; and a distributing means for distributing the first flow path to a second flow path provided with the second variable ball input means.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F7. A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are difficult to enter, at a position where game balls emitted in the second direction are easy to enter. Is arranged. The state of the second variable ball entry means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means. A first flow path provided with a second ball input means and a second flow path provided with a second variable ball input means at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction can reach. Distributing means for distributing the data to either of the above.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the downflow direction of the game ball fired in the second direction can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F8, the distribution means alternately distributes gaming balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F8, the game balls fired in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second privilege game are sent to the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. The ball can be entered alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress a game ball fired in the second direction from eccentrically entering the second ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

<Characteristic G group> (Notify the jackpot type based on winning V)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; , A variable position that can be changed to a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first position. Means, variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game, and the privilege game has been completed. As a later gaming state, a first gaming state advantageous to the player is set when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, and the ball is entered during execution of the privilege game. If the game ball does not enter the means, the first game state is set. Also, a game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player, a first privilege game as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and a first privilege game. A type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least an advantageous second privilege game, and at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game determined by the type determining means And a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating the determined type of the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. Machine G1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, whereby a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2003-325886). Also, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some gaming machines that do not notify the gaming state after the hit at the time of winning, and perform an effect indicating the gaming state after the hit during the winning state. Are known. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that after the effect indicating the game state after the end of the hit is executed, the remaining hit games are monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means. A bonus game advantageous to the game is executed. The variable means is changed to a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the bonus game. As a game state after the end of the privilege game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. It is determined by the type determining means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, a game suggesting the type of the determined bonus game is entered by the suggestion effect executing means into the ball-entering means. It is performed based on

  Thereby, even after the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is determined, attention is paid to the type of privilege game suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. Can play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous after entering the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine G1, the discriminating means performs a first discrimination based on establishment of a first discriminating condition as the discriminating condition, and a second discriminating different from the first discriminating condition. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the satisfaction of a condition, wherein the type determination unit determines that the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination by the first determination unit. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the first privilege game and the second privilege game, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the second privilege game. The type of the bonus game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the determination of the first bonus game, the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game than the second bonus game The third privilege that it is difficult for game balls to enter Determining one of a plurality of types including at least a technique, wherein the first privilege game is more than the second privilege game in the predetermined period after the privilege game is completed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is easy to make a determination.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit in the determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game by the type determination unit are provided as types of the bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination unit. One type is determined from the types. On the other hand, as the type of the bonus game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination by the second determination unit, the first bonus game and the second bonus game are more executed during the execution of the bonus game than the second bonus game. One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the third privilege game in which it is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the first privilege game, the second determination is more easily performed in the predetermined period after the privilege game is completed than in the second privilege game.

  Thus, when the first privilege game ends, the disadvantageous second determination is easily performed in a predetermined period, and therefore, when a specific determination result is obtained, it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game is determined. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game by paying attention to the type of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a specific effect execution for executing a specific effect at least during a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started to when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A gaming machine G3 comprising: means for executing a suggestion effect execution means, as a result of the specific effect, an effect indicating the type of the privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1 or G2. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means during a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started to when the game ball enters at least the ball entry means. As a result of the specific effect, an effect indicating the type of the bonus game is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit.

  Thereby, since it is possible to show a series of effects of the specific effect and the effect indicating the type of privilege game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A display unit capable of displaying identification information in the gaming machine G2 or G3; a dynamic display unit displaying dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit; Information that can determine one piece of identification information from among a plurality of pieces of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information as the identification information dynamically displayed by Determining means, wherein the identification information determining means determines the specific determination result by the determination means, and determines the first identification information when the type determining means determines the first privilege game. The gaming machine G4, wherein the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second privilege game is determined.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one of a plurality of pieces of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information is the identification information. Determined by the determining means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the first identification information is determined by the identification information determination unit. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

  Thereby, it is possible to confirm the dynamic display of the identification information in expectation of the display of the second identification information determined only in the advantageous second privilege game by the dynamic display. Further, by configuring the first identification information to be displayed also in the case of the second privilege game, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the second privilege game when the first identification information is displayed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine G4, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, In the type of the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is the second identification information. A gaming machine G5, wherein at least a second suggestion effect that is changed to identification information is provided.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G4. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display unit, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. In the type of the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

  Thereby, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the execution of the second suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine G5, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the gaming machine G5 includes a suggestion effect execution determination unit configured to determine whether to execute the suggestion effect, The identification information determination means determines the first identification information based on the determination that the suggestion effect execution determination means performs the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect execution means includes the type determination means. The first privilege game is determined by the above, and when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed, and the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine G6 for executing the second suggestion effect when the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G5. That is, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination unit, the suggestion effect execution determination unit determines whether to execute the suggestion effect. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the determination that the suggested effect is performed by the suggested effect execution determining means. The first identification information is determined by the type determination unit, and when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the suggestion effect execution determination unit, the first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means and the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect.

  Thus, the second suggestion effect is executed only when the second bonus game is determined, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the second suggestion effect being executed.

  In the gaming machine G6, the suggestion effect execution determining means performs the suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the ratio of determination is increased.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G6, the suggestion effect executing means determines that the second privilege game is determined by the type effect determining means, rather than by the type determining means. Since the ratio determined to execute the suggested effect increases, there is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggested effect is started.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and dynamic display thereof A dynamic display period of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution unit, and a period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable unit is changed to the first position. Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, wherein the suggested effect executing means executes a suggested effect indicating the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect. Gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is biased to the first position two positions. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the period. As a result of the specific effect, a suggestion effect indicating the type of the privilege game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  Thereby, since it is possible to show a series of effects of the specific effect and the effect indicating the type of privilege game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic H group> (varies the predictability of the occurrence of pending repetitions depending on the jackpot type)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; Type determination for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. Means, a variable means that can be changed in a predetermined variable mode, and a first variable mode based on a determination result that is different from the specific determination result by the determination means, and a first variable mode based on the first variable mode. First variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the mode, and the specific determination result obtained by the determination means. The second variable control means that changes the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the first variable mode; From the end to the time when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is easily changed in the first variable mode, and the second privilege Variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more easily changed in the second variable mode than in the first variable state during a period from the end of the game until the specific condition is satisfied; , A gaming machine H1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the hit is notified at the time of the hit, and the hit type is also notified. Therefore, after the notification is made, the hit is simply notified. In some cases, it became like a task of just digesting the hit, and the game became monotonous. Also, in some conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish whether a hit state or a small hit, which is a type of disconnection, based on a production mode, an opening / closing operation of a specific winning opening, and the like. A configured gaming machine is also known, and a gaming machine capable of expecting a winning even after the winning game is over is also known. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to determine whether the player has won or won, and there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game may be spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the bonus game execution unit executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. As the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. Based on the result of the discrimination determined by the determining means being different from the specific determination result, a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode are determined. In any one of the variable modes, the variable means is varied by the first variable control means. The third variable mode includes at least a specific variable mode that is hard to be distinguished from the first variable mode based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining module. Variable. From the end of the first privilege game to the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable state is changed by the first variable control means so that the variable means is easily changed in the first variable mode by the variable state setting means. Is set. On the other hand, a second variable state in which the variable means is more easily changed in the second variable state than the first variable state is set by the variable state setting means during a period from the end of the second privilege game to the satisfaction of the specific condition. Is done.

  This makes it difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between a case where the first bonus game has ended and a specific determination result after the end of the first privilege game, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied. In the meantime, it is difficult to determine whether or not the bonus game is executed based on the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the result of the discrimination is determined after the end of the second privilege game, the second variable mode is set, so that the player relatively discriminates whether or not the result of the discrimination is determined from the variable mode of the variable means. It will be easier. Therefore, the ease of identification of the deviation determination result until the specific condition is satisfied can be changed according to the type of the bonus game, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1, there is provided a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, and the variable means comprises a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball-entering means, and a game ball higher than the first position. Is variable to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the first variable aspect is that the variable means changes the second position from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of a first period. The second variable aspect is a variable aspect in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine H2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of the period.

  Thereby, by confirming the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position, it is possible for the player to easily discriminate between the first variable mode and the second variable mode. There is.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the discriminating means performs a first discrimination based on establishment of a first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the establishment, and wherein the first variable control unit determines the second determination based on a result of the disconnection determination determined by the first determination unit. The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable aspects including at least one variable aspect and the second variable aspect, and the second variable control means is provided with the first discriminating means. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that the variable means is varied in the third variable mode based on the result of the specific determination as a result of the determination.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H1 and H2. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode based on the result of the determination by the first determining unit. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is changed in the third variable mode by the second variable control means based on a specific result of the determination by the first determination means.

  Thereby, the variable mode of the variable means in the case where the result of the discrimination is a result of the discrimination by the first discriminating means is changed according to the type of the bonus game, so that the first discriminating means until the specific condition is satisfied. Each time the determination is made, the game can be performed while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the type determining means determines the type of the privilege game to be executed based on a result of the specific determination in the second determination by the second determining means. A gaming machine H4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the type of the privilege game executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination by the second determining means is determined by the type determining means. Since the determination is made, when the second determination is performed by the second determination means, the game may be performed by paying attention to whether the first bonus game is determined or the second bonus game is determined. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more easily satisfied than the second determination condition from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of a specific condition. Gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more satisfied than the second determination condition from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of the specific condition. This makes it easier to play the game by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball, and the game ball is fired in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter, and a second entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, and a predetermined value based on the entry of the game ball. The award ball entry means to which the award is granted and the state of the award ball entry means are changed from the first state in which the amusement ball is difficult to enter, based on the start of the award game, to the entry of the game ball. Variable control means for changing to a possible second state a predetermined number of times, wherein the first determination condition is established based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Gaming machine H6-and wherein the the at it.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H3 to H5. That is, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter, and a first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter the ball. Two ball entry means are provided. At a position where a game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, a privilege ball entry means is provided for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball having entered. The state of the bonus ball entry means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to the second state in which game balls can enter based on the start of the bonus game. The first determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is determined based on a game ball having been entered into the second ball entry means. Holds.

  Thus, the game ball can be launched into the first ball entry means by firing the game ball at the privilege entry means during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily satisfied when the bonus game is executed.

  In the gaming machine H6, first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, A determination information storage unit capable of storing the first determination information obtained by the first determination information obtaining unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, wherein the specific condition is determined at the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine H7, which is established based on execution of determination based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H6. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The specific condition is established based on the execution of the determination based on all the first determination information stored in the determination information storage unit at the end of the bonus game.

  Thereby, the first determination information acquired during the execution of the bonus game is stored in the determination information storage means, so that the first determination can be efficiently performed.

  In the gaming machine H7, the gaming state after the end of the privilege game is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. 1 game state determining means for determining a game state, wherein the type determining means determines the game state as a type of a privilege game executed based on a result of the specific determination in the first determination. A first type determining unit in which the ratio of determining the third privilege game in which the first gaming state is determined by the determining unit is higher than a ratio of determining the type of another privilege game; A second type that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game as the types of privilege games executed based on the determination result of Determining means; The game state determining means determines the second game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game, when the first bonus game or the second bonus game has been achieved. A gaming machine H8.

  According to the gaming machine H8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H7. That is, as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed, one gaming state is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Is determined by the game state determining means. As a type of privilege game executed based on a specific determination result in the first determination, a third privilege game whose first game state is determined by the game state determination means is determined by the first type determination means. Is higher than the rate at which the types of other privilege games are determined. As a type of the bonus game executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination, one of a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game is the first type. It is determined by two types of determination means. When the first bonus game or the second bonus game has been achieved, the second gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means as the gaming state after the completion of the bonus game.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the rate of determination of the first game state after the end of the bonus game is high, and thus the first determination stored in the determination information storage unit during execution of the bonus game. Based on the information, the game can be performed in the hope that all the first determinations performed after the end of the privilege game will be deviated and the determination result will be obtained. Therefore, a novel game characteristic that makes it possible to avoid a specific determination result can be realized, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic I group> (The probability of occurrence of pending runs varies depending on the type of jackpot)
A first determination unit that performs a determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, a second determination unit that performs a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit; and a bonus game execution unit. As the type of the privilege game to be executed, the first privilege game and the first privilege game are different from the first privilege game in the discrimination by the second discriminating means from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of a specific condition. A type determining means for determining one type of the privilege game out of a plurality including at least a second bonus game which is likely to be a specific determination result; and a first gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game is completed. And its Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the one game state, wherein the first privilege game and the second privilege game are The gaming machine I1 wherein the set ratio of the first gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state as a gaming state after the end of the privilege game.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that shifts to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous in that, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the gaming state given after winning is different, or the number of prize balls obtainable in each round is different. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The determination is performed by the two determination means. Based on the result of the specific determination by the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit. As the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first discrimination game and the discrimination by the second discrimination means from the end of the privilege game to the satisfaction of the specific condition, rather than the first bonus game. , The type of one privilege game is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least a second privilege game which is likely to be a specific determination result. As the game state after the bonus game has ended, one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state is set by the game state setting means. . In both the first bonus game and the second bonus game, the setting ratio of the second gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game has been completed.

  Thus, depending on whether the game is to be the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the possibility that the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit until the specific condition is satisfied, There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means.

  In the game I1, the type determining means may include a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to a player than the other privilege games. The third privilege game is determined by the second discriminating unit rather than by the first discriminating unit when the specific discrimination result is determined by the second discriminating unit rather than by the first discriminating unit. A gaming machine I2, wherein the ratio determined by the type determining means is high.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the type of one privilege game is a type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege games. Is determined by When the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the rate at which the third privilege game is determined by the type determination unit is higher than the determination by the first determination unit.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the rate of determining the disadvantageous third privilege game increases, and it is hoped that the specific determination result is not obtained by the determination by the second determination unit. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the first privilege game, rather than the second privilege game, which is likely to be a specific result of the determination by the second determination means.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first gaming state is determined by the first determining means or the probability that the specific determination result is obtained when the determination by the second determining means is executed is the second gaming state. The second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition from the end of the second bonus game to the satisfaction of the specific condition. A gaming machine I3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2. That is, the first game state is configured such that the probability of a specific determination result when the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit is performed is higher than that in the second game state. . From the end of the second bonus game to the satisfaction of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first determination condition.

  Accordingly, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result becomes higher than in the second gaming state, and thus it becomes easy to continuously enter the bonus game at relatively short intervals. Therefore, when the first game state is entered, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquisition means obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information is stored on the basis of the discrimination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. Erasing means for erasing the discrimination information of 1 from the discrimination information storage means, wherein the specific condition is that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means has become zero. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being established based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discriminating unit is obtained by the discrimination information obtaining unit based on the satisfaction of the predetermined obtaining condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the fact that the one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the one discrimination information is deleted from the discrimination information storage means by the deletion means. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means has become zero.

  As a result, until the information number of the discrimination information becomes 0, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is likely to be a specific discrimination result. Therefore, a game is performed by paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, a game ball fired in the first direction is fired in a first ball entry means arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means. Wherein the second determination condition is established based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and the second privilege game is a process in which the privilege game is started. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is easier for a player to shoot game balls in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period thereafter.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, the first ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter the ball. The first determination condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, while the second determination condition is determined that a game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is established based on. In the second privilege game, it is easier for the player to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

  Thus, when the second bonus game is established, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entry means by firing the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that a state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied after the end of the privilege game can be formed.

  In the gaming machine I5, a game ball fired in the first direction is disposed at a position where the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter can be changed. A variable ball entry means, a game ball emitted in the second direction is arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter; A second variable ball entry means, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, The gaming machine I6, wherein the two variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter at least during the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I5. That is, the first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which game balls can enter and a state in which game balls are difficult to enter is arranged at a position where game balls fired in the first direction can enter. Have been. At a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, a second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged. I have. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means. During the execution of the second scoring game, the second variable ball entry means is changed into a state in which the game ball can enter the ball for at least a predetermined period.

  Thereby, during a predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game, a player who wants to obtain a predetermined privilege can be caused to fire a game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be made to enter the second ball entry means during the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine I6, the first variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter at least during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game. Gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I6, the first variable ball entry means changes the state in which the game ball can enter the ball at least during a predetermined period during the execution of the first score game. Therefore, during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game, a player who wants to obtain a predetermined privilege can be caused to fire a game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the second ball entry means during a predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, Discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information obtaining means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and continuously firing game balls in the second direction during the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine I8 is a period of a length in which at least the predetermined number of pieces of the second discrimination information is obtained by the discrimination information obtaining means.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines I5 to I7. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discriminating means is acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The predetermined period is configured to have such a length that at least a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the discrimination information storage means when the game ball is continuously fired and displayed in the second direction.

  Thus, when the second bonus game is established, there is an effect that the discrimination information can be reliably stored in the discrimination information storage unit up to the upper limit number of information.

  In the gaming machine I8, a game ball fired in the second direction is sent to a first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means. A gaming machine I9 characterized by comprising a distribution means that can be distributed to either of the above.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I8, the game ball fired in the second direction is provided by the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Since it is distributed to one of the provided second flow paths by the distribution means, the game ball fired in the second direction enters the second ball introduction means with a bias, or conversely, the second ball enters. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from being biased into the variable ball entry means.

<Feature J group> (As the state of playing the game in the special 1, there are provided a state where time saving is easily given and a state where time saving is hard to be given)
A ball entry means into which game balls can enter, a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which game balls are more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, and a second variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. A variable control means for varying in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern; a determination means for performing a determination based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means; Based on at least the result of the specific determination in the determination, based on at least a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed. , The first game state and its Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state and a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state; The first game state and the second game state are those in which the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third game state. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that:

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Features JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the moment of the end of the winning state, the motivation of the player for the game is reduced, and the player is likely to quit the game. There was a problem.

  In particular, in a type of gaming machine that does not have a so-called probability variation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set via the time-saving gaming state. In such a case, since the player was able to play the game in the time saving game state, the player was satisfied with the game, and there was a possibility that it would be difficult to think that the player would continue the game in the normal game state thereafter.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, and the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is configured to be variable to the second position. The variable means, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, uses the variable control means to change the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for game balls to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. It is varied in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least. Based on at least a specific determination result obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit that is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, the bonus game execution unit executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. Is done. As the game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means, the first game state, the second game state different from the first game state, and both the first game state and the second game state One of a plurality of game states including at least different third game states is set by the game state setting means. The first gaming state and the second gaming state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third gaming state.

  Thus, it is difficult to distinguish from the first gaming state or the second gaming state based on the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are such that the probability of the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the probability that the first gaming state and the second gaming state will be a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the first game state and the second game state can be more difficult to be distinguished by the player.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, a second ball entry means different from the ball entry means, a second discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, A second privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on a result of the determination by the second determining means, wherein the first gaming state is determined by the second determining means. When the specific determination result is obtained in the determination, the third game state is set at a first ratio by the game state setting means, and the second game state is determined by the second determination means. A game machine J3 wherein the third game state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio by the game state setting means when the specific determination result is obtained. .

  According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, the discrimination is executed by the second discriminating unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entering unit different from the entering unit. The bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means based on the specific result of the determination by the second determination means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit in the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a first rate by the gaming state setting unit, while the second gaming state is set in the second gaming state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the third game state is set by the game state setting unit at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

  This makes it easier to set the third game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game in the second game state than in the first game state. There is an effect that a game can be played with a stronger expectation of becoming a game.

  In the gaming machine J3, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine J4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, when the bonus game is executed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is higher by the gaming state setting means than the first percentage by the third gaming state. In the third game state, the privilege game and the third game state are easily repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have great satisfaction in the third game state.

  In the gaming machine J4, in the second gaming state, a gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state based on at least a predetermined specific condition different from the specific determination result being satisfied. State transition means, wherein the third game state is one of the second game state and the third game state set by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine J5.

  According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J4. That is, in the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state shifting means based on at least a predetermined specific condition different from the specific determination result being satisfied. When the bonus game is executed in the third game state, one of the second game state and the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

  Thus, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state, the first game state is not set, and therefore, at least after the third game state ends, the first game state is set by the game state transition unit. Until the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state, it is possible to cause the player to continue the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J5, the gaming state transition unit determines that the specific condition is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result continuously for a predetermined number of times in the determination by the determination unit, A gaming machine J6 for shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J5, the specific condition is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means has resulted in a different discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result continuously for a predetermined number of times. Since the game state shifting means shifts the game state from the second game state to the first game state, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the determination result of the miss. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the game state transition is performed based on the result of the disconnection determination over the first number of times determined by the determining means. The first state is shifted to the first game state by the means, and the second state is determined by the game state shifting means based on the result of the determination being made over a second number of times greater than the first number. A gaming machine J7 comprising type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type shifted to one gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J6, the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means has been determined to be out of the first number of times determined by the determining means. The first type that is shifted to the first game state by the game state transition means based on the first state, and the game state transition means based on the determination result that has deviated over the second number of times greater than the first number. Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type shifted to the first gaming state, it is determined that the second gaming state is continued over more determinations. Can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J7, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode and a first effect mode can be displayed on the display means when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The first effect mode is displayed from the time when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means to the time when the result of the disconnection determination is obtained for the second number of times. A gaming machine J8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J7. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means. The display of the first effect mode is restricted by the restricting means from when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means to when the result of the disconnection determination is obtained for the second number of times.

  With this, even if the result of the departure determination has been performed for the first number of times since the second game state was set, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times. It is difficult to identify whether the game is in one type of second game state or in the second type of second game state. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second gaming state, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued at least until the determination of the second number of times is executed, so that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine J8, the first effect mode is displayed based on the result of the disengagement determination being made for the second number of times after the second game state is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine J9 comprising display control means.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, the third display is performed based on the fact that the second game state has been set by the game state setting means and a disconnection determination result has been obtained for a second number of times. Since the first appearance appearance mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessively long period during which it is unclear whether the state is the first game state or the second game state.

  The gaming machine J10, wherein in any of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that a specific determination result in the second gaming state is obtained. There is an effect that it can be expected to be stronger.

<Characteristic K group> (Structure that makes it difficult for Special 2 to rotate during working hours)
A first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game balls including at least one of the following, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball into the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a position and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the variable operation of the variable means is transmitted to the ball entry means in the first game state. In the second control state, the game ball is controlled by the second control in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means. In the third game state, Game balls are easier to enter the ball entry means than the first control and the second control. 3 control controlled by variable control means gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises a and K1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Features JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the moment of the end of the winning state, the motivation of the player for the game is reduced, and the player is likely to quit the game. There was a problem.

  In particular, in a type of gaming machine that does not have a so-called probability variation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set via the time-saving gaming state. In such a case, since the player was able to play the game in the time saving game state, the player was satisfied with the game, and there was a possibility that it would be difficult to think that the player would continue the game in the normal game state thereafter.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first gaming state, the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. And a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the third gaming state. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means capable of entering the ball and a second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter the ball than the first position. I have. In the first game state, the variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball is transferred to the ball entry means in the second game state. Is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and is controlled by the variable control means in the third control in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means in the third game state.

  Accordingly, the degree of advantage is different between the first game state in which the control for making it difficult to enter the ball entry means is executed and the second game state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine K2 according to the gaming machine K1, wherein in the second control, the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second control is configured so that the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than the first control. Although the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control, there is an effect that a novel operation in which it is difficult to enter the ball entry means as in the first control can be realized.

  In the gaming machine K2, a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and a discriminating means for performing a discrimination based on the passing of the game ball by the passing means, the variable control means is provided by the discriminating means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result in the first game state. The first game state is determined by the determination by the determination means. The specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 1. The second gaming state and the third gaming state are determined by the determining unit at a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine K3 characterized by a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K2. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means. In the first gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at the first probability in the determination by the determining unit, while in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the second gaming state is higher than the first probability in the determination by the determining unit. A specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

  Thus, a novel operation can be realized in which the second game state and the third game state have different probabilities of entering the ball entry means even though the probability of a specific determination result is common. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine K3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball at a launch interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval is provided, and the second gaming state becomes the specific determination result by the determination by the determination means, and then the variable means A period until the variable position is changed to the first position is set as a first period, and a period from when the variable unit is changed to the first position until the variable position is changed to the second position is set as a second period. The period from when a game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period, and 1 The period from the passing of the game ball of the passing means to the game ball fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval next to the passed game ball reaches the variable means, Longer than the sum of one period and the second period Gaming machine K4, characterized in that those prone Ri.

  According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K3. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means at a firing interval longer than a predetermined interval. In the second game state, a period from when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set to the first period, and the variable unit is changed to the first position. The period from when the position is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passage means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passage means to when the game ball fired by the firing means at predetermined intervals next to the passed game ball reaches the variable means is a first period and a first period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

  Thereby, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the passage means in the second game state, the game ball reaches the ball entry means while the variable means is changed to the first position. Can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a special state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine K4, the third gaming state is such that a period from when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is longer than the first period. The third period is also set to be long, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set to the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A gaming machine K5 characterized by being shorter than the sum of

  According to the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K4. That is, in the third game state, a period from when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, A period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set as a second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passage means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and is the sum of the third period and the second period. It is easier to be shorter than this.

  With this, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination performed based on the passage through the passage unit, the game ball that has passed through the passage unit is directly entered into the ball entry unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be efficiently advanced.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, based on the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means and capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the ball entry means A first determination unit that performs a first determination, a second determination unit that performs a second determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit, and a first determination unit. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined first determination result obtained by the determination or the determination by the second determination means, The setting means sets the first ratio at a first rate as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination in the first game state. 3 Set a game state, and in the second game state, The third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination being determined. A gaming machine K6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5. That is, a first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the game ball having entered the ball entry unit. A second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit different from the ball entry unit. Based on the result of the first determination determined by the first determination unit or the first determination result determined by the second determination unit, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit. In the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a first rate by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second gaming state. Is set. In the second game state, the game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination. The third game state is set by the means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a game can be performed while strongly expecting a specific determination result during the second game state.

  In the gaming machine K6, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third gaming state. The gaming machine K7, wherein the third gaming state is determined at a third rate higher than the first rate.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K6, the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third gaming state. Since the third game state is determined by the game state setting means at a third rate higher than the first rate, in the third game state, the third game state is likely to be returned to after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a great satisfaction can be given to the player when the third game state is entered.

  In the gaming machine K7, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, since the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. There is an effect that a game can be performed with a stronger expectation.

<Characteristic L group> (a mechanism that can be played by a game method that is easily distributed to two routes by the distribution means and a game method that is easily distributed to one route)
Operating means operable by a player, firing means capable of firing game balls in accordance with the operation of the operating means, first flow paths through which game balls fired by the firing means can pass, While the first condition that can be satisfied by the operation of the first operation content being performed on the second flow path different from the one flow path and the operation means is satisfied, the game ball that has arrived is It becomes a state where it is easy to alternately distribute to the first flow path and the second flow path, and a second condition that can be satisfied by performing an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content is satisfied. Game machine L1 comprising: a distributing unit that makes it easier to distribute the reached game ball to the first flow path than while the first condition is satisfied.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member for distributing gaming balls to one of two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In such a conventional gaming machine, the configuration is such that game balls reaching the distribution member are distributed to two types of flow paths, one ball at a time, so that game balls can flow down to the two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-231902 A).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the game balls reaching the distribution member are alternately distributed to two types of flow paths regardless of the player's playing method, there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a game ball is fired by the firing means in accordance with the operation content on the operating means operable by the player. A first flow path through which a game ball fired by the firing means can pass, and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition, which can be satisfied by the operation of the first operation content being performed on the operation means, is satisfied, the state of the allocating means is such that the game ball that has reached the first flow path and the second flow path, It is in a state where it is easy to be alternately distributed to the flow path. While the second condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the second operation content different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the distribution unit is more than that while the first condition is satisfied. Also, the game ball that has arrived is easily distributed to the first flow path.

  Thereby, the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the allocating means can be changed according to the operation content of the player, so that the operation of the operating means can be devised.

  In the gaming machine L1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, a game ball is fired at a first firing interval by the firing means, and the operation of the second operation content is executed. A gaming machine L2 wherein the launching means launches a game ball at a second firing interval longer than the first firing interval.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired at the first firing interval by the firing means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at the second firing interval longer than the first firing interval. This makes it possible to easily change the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the allocating means simply by changing the firing intervals, thereby improving the convenience of the player.

  In the gaming machine L2, the allocating means includes at least a first movable range in which the reached gaming ball is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the reached game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path. The distributing means distributes a game ball to the first flow path in a state where the game ball is disposed in the first movable range, thereby distributing the second movable range. It is configured to be easy to move to the movable range and to be easily moved to the first movable range by distributing the game balls to the second flow path in a state where the game balls are arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L2. That is, the distributing means moves the specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the reached game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path. I do. By distributing the game balls to the first flow path in a state where the game balls are arranged in the first movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path in a state where the game balls are arranged in the second movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the first movable range.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the operation of alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path can be realized by continuously reaching the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine L3, the distributing means, when distributing a game ball to the first flow path and moving to the second movable range, is shorter than the length of the second firing interval, and The gaming machine L4, which moves to the first movable range for a period longer than the length of the firing interval of the game machine L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the distribution means is moved to the second movable range, the length is shorter than the length of the second firing interval. In addition, since the distribution means moves to the first movable range for a period longer than the length of the first firing interval, if the game ball is continuously fired at the firing interval longer than the second firing interval, There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be reliably set as the first movable range.

  In the gaming machine L4, the allocating means can be easily moved from the first movable range to the second movable range by the mass of the game ball distributed to the first flow path, and distributed to the second flow path. A gaming machine L5 characterized in that it is easy to move from the second movable range to the first movable range due to the mass of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, the mass of the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easy for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range, The mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths makes it easier for the distributing means to move from the second movable range to the first movable range, so that a power source for moving the distributing means can be eliminated. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine L4 or L5, the distribution means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range is an initial arrangement, and returns to the predetermined position when the game ball has not arrived for a predetermined period. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L4 or L5, the distributing means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range becomes an initial arrangement, and the game ball is used as the distributing means. On the other hand, since the distributing means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the predetermined period has not been reached, the distributing means is maintained in the first movable range unless the game balls are distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball that first reaches the distribution means can be surely distributed to the first flow path.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a passing means provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass, a game ball flowing down the first flow path, A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down a flow path can enter the ball, a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter the entry ball means, a determination means for performing a determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means, and the determination means A gaming machine L7 comprising: variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific result of the determination made by the game machine L7.

  According to the gaming machine L7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6. That is, the passage means is provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass. Ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path and game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter. The variable means can be configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. Have been. The determination by the determination unit is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing unit. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determination means, and thus has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine L7, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a player that is more advantageous than the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. And a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a third game state, wherein the variable control means sets a game state to the ball entry means in the first game state. In the first variable mode in which the ball is difficult to enter, the variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the second game state, the game ball is difficult to enter the ball-in means in the second variable mode. The variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third variable state, in the third variable state, a game ball is easier to enter the ball-in means than the first variable mode and the second variable mode. The variable means is controlled to be variable. Game machine L8 which is characterized the door.

  According to the gaming machine L8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L7. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. One of the plurality of game states including at least the game state is set by the game state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is changed in a first variable mode in which the game balls are hard to enter the ball entry means. In the second game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is changed in a second variable mode in which the game balls are hard to enter the ball entry means. In the third game state, the variable control means is controlled such that the variable means is changed in a third variable mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball-in means than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

  Thus, since a plurality of game states having different eases of entering the ball entry means are provided, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine L8, the first gaming state is a result of the specific determination at the first probability by the determining means, and the second gaming state is higher than the first probability by the determining means. A gaming machine, wherein the specific determination result is obtained at a high second probability, and the three game states are the specific determination result at the second probability by the determination means. L9.

  According to the gaming machine L9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L8. That is, in the first gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at the first probability by the determination unit. In the second gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at a second probability higher than the first probability by the determining means. In the third gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained at the second probability by the determination means.

  This realizes a novel operation that makes it easy to enter the ball entry means differently in the second game state and the third game state even though the probability of a specific determination result is common. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic M group> (It is more advantageous to skip time savings)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based at least on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; One of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the execution of the bonus gaming by the bonus gaming executing means. A game state setting means for setting the game state of the first game state, and in a state where the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a specific transition condition at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game is satisfied. A game state transition unit that transitions from the first game state to the second game state based on the first game state.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Features JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal gaming state is set upon the end of the winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, in addition to the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, a configuration is provided in which a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the ordinary gaming state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state is provided. , After the end of the winning state, by configuring either the advantageous gaming state or the third gaming state to be set, so that the game is continued at least until the third gaming state is completed. There are things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when the lottery of a predetermined number of times is completed in the third gaming state, it is normal for the gaming machine to transition from the third gaming state to the normal gaming state. After that, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, based on at least the specific determination result obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit performed based on the establishment of the determination condition, the bonus game execution unit performs The game is executed. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, as a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means. The game state is set by the game state setting means. In the state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first gaming state is switched to the second gaming state based on a specific transition condition at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game being satisfied. It is shifted by the game state shifting means.

  This allows the player to play a game in the expectation that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the first game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine M1, the specific transition condition is a predetermined number of times, which is different from the specific determination result, determined by the determination unit executed after the setting in the first gaming state. A gaming machine M2, which is established when the following condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the discrimination by the discriminating means executed after the first gaming state has been set determines a predetermined number of times and a different discrimination result different from the specific determination result. When the result is satisfied, the specific transition condition is satisfied, so that in the first game state, it is possible to realize a novel playability that expects the result to be a departure determination every time the determination is performed by the determination unit. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, a ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball-in means, and the ball-in means from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball becomes difficult to enter, and a first variable control that makes the variable means easy to change to the first position in the first game state; A variable control execution means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position than in the first game state in the two game states, and Gaming machine M3, which is established based on that the game ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. In the first game state, the first variable control in which the variable means is easily changed to the first position is executed by the variable control execution means, and in the second game state, the variable means is changed to the first position more than in the first game state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control executing means. The determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the variable means being changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine M3, the gaming state setting means may include a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state. The variable control execution means sets the game state of the game ball more easily than the first variable control and the second variable control in the third game state. A gaming machine M4 for executing the following third variable control.

  According to the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M3. That is, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous than the second game state is set by the game state setting means. . In the third game state, the third control is executed by the variable control executing means, in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

  Thereby, in the third game state, the determination by the determination means is easily performed, and the game can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation of the third game state.

  In the gaming machine M4, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means determines the third gaming state at a first rate as a gaming state after the end of the privilege game. Is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate. Gaming machine M5.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, if a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the privilege game by the gaming state setting means. When the third game state is set in the second game state and a specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate. The third game state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the privilege game when a specific determination result is obtained in the game state. Therefore, in the first game state, there is an effect that a novel game property in which a game is played in expectation of a specific transition condition being satisfied, rather than a specific determination result, can be realized.

  In the gaming machine M5, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine M6 to be set.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M5, the gaming state setting means at the third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. Since the third game state is set, in the third game state, the third game state is likely to be set again after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have great satisfaction by entering the third game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, a ball entry area in which a game ball can enter, and a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the entry of the game ball into the entry area. And a gaming machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry area. The game can be played by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic N group> (Small hits are likely to be disadvantageous after the end of small hits if winning during the time reduction)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on a first discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. Means, and as the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. A type determining means for determining the type of the game, and a second determination result, which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game, based on a second determination result different from the first determination result determined by the determination means. (2) A second advantageous game executing means for executing an advantageous game, and a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means is defined as a first gaming state and the first gaming state. Is a different second game state, A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least one of the plurality of game states, and a determination result other than the second determination result obtained by the determination performed by the determination means executed in the first game state. A game state ending means for ending the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, wherein the specific condition is the first determination result by the determination by the determination means, In addition, when the first type is determined by the type determining unit, the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining unit, and when the second type is determined by the type determining unit. The gaming machine N1 is configured to be easily established.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hitting game or the like) executed based on a specific area (a winning switch or the like) provided in the V winning device. There has been proposed a pachinko machine capable of giving a privilege game (big hit game or the like) which is advantageous to a player by passing through the pachinko machine (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a small hit game is executed, a bonus game is not executed unless a game ball can be inserted into the V winning device. If the ball could not be entered, there was a risk that the player's interest in the game would be spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the first determination result is obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit that is performed based on the establishment of the determination condition is the first advantageous game. It is executed by the advantageous game execution means. As a type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type is determined by the type determining means. The type is determined. The second advantageous game execution means executes the second advantageous game which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on the fact that the second determination result different from the first determination result is obtained by the determination means. You. As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means, a game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. One game state is set by the state setting means. In the case where the discrimination performed by the discriminating means performed in the first gaming state indicates a result other than the second determination result, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is changed to the gaming state ending means. Is terminated by The first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the second type is determined by the type determination unit, as compared with the case where the first type is determined by the type determination unit. Is determined, the specific condition is more easily satisfied.

  Thereby, when the first determination result is obtained, there is an effect that a game can be played with expectation that the first type is determined.

  In the gaming machine N1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means may execute the first gaming state if the specific condition is satisfied. , The game machine N2 is configured to shift to the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1. That is, the second game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first game state. If the specific condition is satisfied, the game state ending means shifts from the first game state to the second game state.

  This allows the player to play the game in the first game state with expectation that the specific condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine N1 or N2 has a ball entry area in which game balls can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means sets a game in the entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the ball having entered, and the gaming state ending means performs the first number of times of the first type of the first advantageous game in one of the first gaming states. The first game state is terminated based on the execution, and the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number in the first game state. A gaming machine N3 for terminating the first gaming state based on the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N1 or N2. In other words, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game execution means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry area where the ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . In the first first gaming state, the first gaming state is terminated by the gaming state ending means based on the first type of the first advantageous game being executed the first number of times, while the first gaming state is terminated in the first first gaming state. The first gaming state is terminated by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the two types of first advantageous games have been executed a second number of times less than the first number of times.

  Thereby, during execution of the first advantageous game, it is possible to execute the second advantageous game by causing the game ball to enter the ball entry area or to establish the specific condition without entering the ball to the entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to select what to expect.

  In the gaming machine N3, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on that a gaming ball has entered the entering ball area during execution of the second type of the first advantageous game. A game machine N4 for determining the first game state as a game state after the end of the second advantageous game.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entry area during the execution of the second type of first advantageous game. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Predict more seriously and select whether to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or to expect the specific condition to be satisfied without entering the ball entry area. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N4, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on that a gaming ball has entered the entering ball area during execution of the first type of first advantageous game. A gaming machine N5 for setting the second gaming state as a gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entry area during the execution of the first type of first advantageous game. In this case, the game state setting means sets the second game state as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game. Therefore, if the first advantageous game is the first type, the ball is not made to enter the ball entry area. Therefore, the specific condition may be satisfied and the game may shift to the second game state. On the other hand, in the case of the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the ball entry area, and the second advantageous game is executed. It shifts to 2 game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be more seriously predicted.

  In the gaming machine N5, based on the result of the first determination by the determination means, a common specific effect is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine N6 comprising a specific effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5, based on the fact that the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means, regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means. Since the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, it is difficult to distinguish from the effect whether it is the first type or the second type. Therefore, it is possible to more seriously predict whether the type is the first type or the second type.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the gaming state setting means may include a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. And three game states, wherein at least one game state is set from among a plurality of game states, and the game state setting means performs a game after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. The third game state is set at a first rate as a state, and the second state higher than the first rate is set as a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the second game state ends. The gaming machine N7, wherein the third gaming state is set at a ratio of:

  According to the gaming machine N7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines N1 to N6. In other words, one of the plurality of game modes including at least a first game mode, a second game mode, and a third game mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first game mode and the second game mode is determined by the game mode setting means. A game state is set. While the third gaming state is set at a first rate by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state is completed, the gaming state is executed in the second gaming state. As the game state after the second advantageous game has ended, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a second rate higher than the first rate.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

  In the gaming machine N7, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a gaming state. A gaming machine N8 for setting three gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N7, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state to be higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Since the third game state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third game state is entered, the second advantageous game and the third game state are easily repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more satisfied when the third game state is entered.

  In the gaming machine N8, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N8, the second ratio tooth is configured to have a higher ratio than the third ratio. Is expected to be executed more strongly and the game can be performed.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko game machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the end of the winning state is triggered (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Features JP 2006-000392 A).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the moment of the end of the winning state, the motivation of the player for the game is reduced, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. There was a problem that it was difficult to let them.
The technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 has a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state; A variable means that can be changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which a game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position; In the first game state, the operation is controlled by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and in the second game state, the game ball enters the ball entry means. In the third game state, the first control and the second control Comprising a variable control means for the game balls to prior Fill sphere means controls the third control easily ball entrance, a.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the second control makes it easier to arrange the variable unit at the first position than the first control.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is a game machine according to the second technical concept, wherein a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and a determining means for performing a determination based on the passing of the game ball by the passing means; Wherein the variable control means is configured to change the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, The first game state is a result of the specific determination at a first probability in the determination by the determination means, and the second game state and the third game state are determined by the determination means. The specific determination result is obtained at a second probability higher than the first probability.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine of the technical idea 3 and further includes a launching means capable of firing a game ball at a predetermined or more firing interval, and the second gaming state is determined by the determining means. A period from when the specific determination result is obtained to when the variable means is changed to the first position is set as a first period, and after the variable means is changed to the first position, the second time is set. A period until the position is changed to the position is set as a second period, and a period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means, It is easy to be shorter than the first period, and after one game ball passes through the passing means, the game ball fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval next to the passed game ball is The period until the variable means is reached, Wherein the first period is intended liable longer than the sum of the second time period.
The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, wherein the third gaming state is determined by the determination unit to be the specific determination result, and then the variable unit is switched to the first position. Is set to a third period longer than the first period, and a period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position. Is set in the second period, and the period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period. Is also longer, and is likely to be shorter than the sum of the third period and the second period.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state, the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the state; ball entry means capable of entering game balls; A variable means that can be changed to a first position at which the game ball can enter the first position and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the variable operation of the variable means, In the first game state, control is performed by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and in the second game state, the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means. Control in the third game state, the first control and the second control Comprising a variable control means to the sphere means game ball controlled by the third control easily ball entrance, a.
As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the second control, the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control. Therefore, in the second control, although the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control, a novel operation in which it is difficult to enter the ball entry means as in the first control is performed. There is an effect that it can be realized.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, discrimination is made based on passing means through which the game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passing means. And a variable control unit that moves the variable unit from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The first game state is a result of the specific determination with a first probability determined by the determination means. The second game state and the third game state are different from each other. The specific determination result is obtained with a second probability higher than the first probability in the determination by the determination means.
Thus, a novel operation can be realized in which the second game state and the third game state have different probabilities of entering the ball entry means even though the probability of a specific determination result is common. This has the effect.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the game machine further includes a launching unit capable of launching a game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. A period from when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set as a first period, and the variable unit is set to the first position. The period from the change to the change to the second position is set as the second period, and after the game ball passes through the passing means, the passed game ball is transferred to the ball entry means. The period until the arrival is easy to be shorter than the first period, and after one game ball has passed through the passing means, after the passing of the game ball, the launch means at the predetermined interval. Until the launched game ball reaches the variable means Period between are those likely be longer than the sum of said first period and the second period.
Thereby, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the passage means in the second game state, the game ball reaches the ball entry means while the variable means is changed to the first position. Can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a special state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the third game state is changed after the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit. A period until the means is changed to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, and the variable means is changed to the first position and then changed to the second position. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is set as the second period. , Longer than the third period, and shorter than the sum of the third period and the second period.
With this, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination performed based on the passage through the passage unit, the game ball that has passed through the passage unit is directly entered into the ball entry unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be efficiently advanced.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 1st entrance (2nd entrance means)
67 Through gate (passing means )
6400 Second entrance ( part of variable entrance means)
6400a electric auditors product (part of the variable ball entrance means)
S220 Part of privilege game execution means, second privilege game execution means
S305, S332 discriminating means, second discriminating means S611 first discriminating means S623 variable control means S1323, S1324 game state setting means
Part of S1629 privilege game execution means
S2302, S2306 game state transition means

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a specific direction can be reached, and a first state in which the game ball can enter and a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball. Also, based on the variable ball-in means configured to be variable to the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing of the game ball by the passing means. A first determination unit that performs a first determination, and based on a determination result of the first determination unit being a predetermined first determination result, the first determination unit starts executing the first determination. A first variable pattern in which the variable mode of the variable ball-in means is a first variable mode until the first determination can be newly performed, and the specific ball is fired in the specific direction more than the first variable mode. second variable which has been game balls hardly ball entrance to the variable ball entrance means of the first state A variable control means for changing in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is variable by the variable ball-in means, and a game ball being entered in the variable ball-in means. A second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and a game at least based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination means being a predetermined second discrimination result. Game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous than the first game state, and the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state different from any of the state and the second game state; an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect relating to the game; Execution of the production As the type of the given effect to be executed by the stage, and a type determination means for determining a type of the one of the plurality including at least a specific effect tends to be executed in the second game condition than the first game condition, The first game state and the second game state are such that the variable control means makes the variable ball entry means less variable in the first variable pattern than in the third game state. The game ball that has reached the variable ball-in means in the state is configured to easily flow to the downstream side of the game board through the variable ball-in means.

A game machine according to a second aspect is the game machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a launching means capable of launching a game ball.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to the gaming machine of this invention , it is provided in the position which the game ball shot in the specific direction can reach, the 1st state in which a game ball can enter, and the game ball is more difficult to enter than the 1st state. The first state is performed based on the variable ball entry means variably configured, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball passing through the passing means. The first discrimination means and the first discrimination is newly performed after the first discrimination is started based on the fact that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. A first variable pattern in which the variable mode of the variable ball-in means before the execution becomes executable is a first variable mode, and a game ball fired in the specific direction more than the first variable mode is the first variable pattern. said variable ball entrance means in the second variable aspects hardly ball entrance to the variable ball entrance means 1 state A variable control means for varying in one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern to be varied, and the first determination based on a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means. A second determining means for performing a different second determination, and executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based at least on the determination result of the second determining means being a predetermined second determination result. A first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state, the first gaming state, and the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined gaming condition. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state different from any of the above, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect relating to the game, and an effect executed by the effect execution means. Said As the type of the constant effect, and a type determination means for determining a type of the one of the plurality including at least a specific effect tends to be executed in the second game condition than the first game condition, and the first game condition The second game state is such that the variable control means makes the variable ball entry means less variable in the first variable pattern than in the third game state, and the variable ball entry in the second state. The game ball that has reached the means is configured to easily flow down the downstream side of the game board through the variable ball-in means.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
51 launch control device (launch means)
64 1st entrance (2nd entrance means)
67 Through gate (passing means)
6400 Second entrance (part of variable entrance means)
6400a Electric accessory (part of variable ball entry means)
S220 Part of privilege game execution means, second privilege game execution means S305, S332 discriminating means, second discrimination means S611 first discrimination means S623 variable control means S1323, S1324 game state setting means S1629 part of privilege game execution means S2302 , S2306 Game state transition means
S5610 effect execution means, type determination means

Claims (5)

A first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. And a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least:
Ball entry means that game balls can enter,
A variable means that can be changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position;
In the first game state, the variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and in the second game state, the game is transmitted to the ball entry means. In the third game state, the ball is controlled by the second control that makes it difficult for the ball to enter, and in the third game state, the game ball becomes easy to enter the ball entry means than the first control and the second control. And a variable control means for controlling the game machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the second control, the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than in the first control. Passing means through which game balls can pass;
Discriminating means for performing a discrimination based on that the game ball has passed through the passing means,
The variable control unit is configured to change the variable unit from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination unit,
The first game state is a state in which the specific determination result is obtained at a first probability in the determination by the determination unit.
The said 2nd game state and the said 3rd game state become the said specific determination result with a 2nd probability higher than the said 1st probability in the determination by the said determination means. Item 3. The gaming machine according to Item 2. Equipped with a firing means capable of firing a game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval,
In the second game state, a period from when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set as a first period, and Is set as a second period from the time when the position is changed to the first position to the time when the position is changed to the second position.
The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period,
The period from when one game ball passes through the passing means to when the game ball fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval next to the passed game ball reaches the variable means, 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is apt to be longer than the sum of the first period and the second period. The third gaming state is a third period in which a period from when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is longer than the first period. And a period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set to the second period,
The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the third period The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is apt to be shorter than the sum of two periods.

Images